Layout 1

Steel Structures
Sections used are angle, channel, I-section, Box, Z-section, pipes
------etc

We usually use angles if the member is subjected to pure normal

force, (tension or compression) as in case of truss members.
We usually use channels for sections subjected to small moment.
We usually use I section for sections subjected to large moments
or sections subjected to M & N

Layout Drawing
General instructions:
The givens are only B & L
B

Assume B (short direction) & L (long

direction)

The main System (Trusses) must be in short direction with spacing

58 m

B
S
S = 5-8 m
Layout for concrete structures

S
S = 5-8 m
Layout for steel structures

1/15

Layout 1

The direction of column must be, so that the long direction (the
strongest inertia) is in the direction of Truss (direction of moment)
[Larger inertia resists the moment]

X
200

Note that: We can assume using I-section 500. Using scale 1:100, we
draw 5mm, and flange 2mm.

Drawing of section A A
Given: Clear height
The clear height is the distance between zero levels (ground level) to the
lowest level of Truss (To its lower chord)
H=

span" B"
12 16

h (at column)

1:5 to 1:20

1.25

H
clear
height

2/15

500

Layout 1

If h < 1.25, so take bigger H & less slope (1: 20)

If "h" is still < 1.25, so take h = 1.25 & use min slope

1:20

If h < 1.25

1.25

1:20

H
new

Secondary beams:
The ceiling (

) is corrugated sheets

with

maximum panel length "a" 1.50 2 m, so we put secondary beams a

parted with a = 1.50 2 m. The secondary beams are called purlins.
Since weight of corrugated sheets is (6-8) kg / m2, so the moment is small
& the section is channel. The height of purlin is

S
140
40

1.5 mm (with scale

The number of panel lengths "a" must be even so that the truss is
symmetric.

6-8 kg/m

R.C. slab
2

250 kg/m
t=10cm

1m

1m

Corrugated
sheets

1m
1m

a=1.5-2.0

Purlin

Plan

Elevation

3/15

Layout 1

Vertical & diagonals of Truss:

To make a truss, we must make joints under purlins so we add vertical
member under each purlin.
To make diagonals:
If the diagonal is tangent with moment , so the member will be
tension
It is preferable to make the steel members subjected to tension
Det B

Det A

T C
=35-55

a=1.5-2

B
Det A
Comp

Det B

tension

At mid span there is 2 purlins

(See detail B)

)
.

The position of purlin:

(See detail A)

Position 1 is preferable
In order to be sure that the angle
h

lies between 350 and 550, we can

check tan-1 a and tan-1 a .

Note that: Important:
The shape of truss is similar to shape of concrete reinforced beam
without concrete. The upper and lower chords of truss are similar to

4/15

Layout 1

upper and lower steel "As and As' ", while the verticals are similar to
stirrups.
So the upper and lower chords carry moment and their maximum
forces are at mid span, while for verticals and diagonals, the maximum
forces are near support.

4
1 2

3
Rienforcement of R.C. beam

Member 1 is maximum tension for diagonals

Member 2 is maximum compression for verticals
Member 3 is maximum tension for lower chords
Member 4 is maximum compression for upper chords
Note that: Since all the forces in the truss are tension and compression,
all the members are angles.

5/15

Layout 1

Stability of system in directions perpendicular to main Truss:

1- Horizontal bracing:
Any truss carry only in 2

Vertical

directions (in its plan but

cannot carry load in direction
to its plan.
to plan of truss

to plan of truss

( truss )
We name this horizontal truss (horizontal bracing) .This bracing is
constructed between the upper chords of the 1st

2 trusses & the last 2

trusses.

The wind loads are transmitted

from 1 st truss to horizontal
bracing

(level

of

horizontal

bracing is the level of the upper

chord)

wind
horizontal bracing

Plan

30-60

OR

OR

6/15

Layout 1

The horizontal bracing may be each 2a, 3a, 4a, . as shown before.
We must keep the angle between 30 0 and 60 0. Also it must be symmetric

2- Vertical bracing:
The wind loads are transmitted from 1 st truss to horizontal bracing (level
of horizontal bracing is the level of the upper chord), so we must make
another truss carry the load (the truss must be in the load direction) &
transmit the load to the ground level. This truss is called vertical bracing.
horizontal
bracing
purlin

Pt 2

Pt 1

column

vertical bracing

VERTICAL BRACING

OR

clear
height h

Column

clear
height h

Mem 1

VERTICAL BRACING

7/15

Layout 1

Note that: Member 1 shown above is added at the level of the lower
chord joining point "1 and 2" in all successive trusses.

frame
14

60
10

vertical bracing
horizontal bracing
.

My

3- Longitudinal bracing:
The joints of the truss must be restrained (

)out side plan.

If the chord is compression, so longitudinal bracing must be added

every 2 a 3 a ("a" is the panel length).
If the chord is tension, so longitudinal bracing must be added every
(6 8) m.
For upper chord (compression) all the joints are restrained outside
plan with purlins at distance "a".
For lower chord (tension) only 2 joints are restrained with spacing
"B" (due to the presence of column and the horizontal member "mem 1"
we added at the level of the lower chord), so we must restrain joints at
distances not more than 8m. For this we use longitudinal bracing.

8/15

Layout 1

longitudinal bracing (vertically)

Important note:
The distance between bracings in the longitudinal direction (direction of
"L") must be not more than 30m.
Note: 6-8m in direction of "B" and 30m in direction of "L"

End gable system:

1.5

32

- The purlins used to carry the corrugated sheets at the side of

factory are called side girt; while those used to carry corrugated
sheets of the first & last truss are called end girts.
- We must use end gable columns at spacing (5 8 ) m at the first &
last truss to carry end girts (The span of end girts cannot be "B" )

9/15

Layout 1

horizontal
bracing
purlin
side
girt

end gable column

column

end girt

vertical bracing

ROOF SLOPE

5 7m
END GABLE

End gable
part of plan

Note that: The direction of the end gable column is in the direction of
wind.

10/15

Layout 1

Example:
A factory building is to be constructed over a rectangular area (21 m * 42
m), the main system is made up of steel trusses. Steel columns are
provided along perimeters (

) only. Clear height = 7 m. The covering

material used is galvanized steel sheets.

It is required to:
1- Draw a complete general layout.
2- Explain how wind loads in both directions are transmitted to
foundations. (Important)
Solution:
1-Choice of system: (

):

H = 21/(12-16) = 1.3 1.75m take H = 1.75m

Use slope 1:10 down to get h 0.7m < 1.25m

Take h = 1.25m and use slope 1:20 up to get H H = 1.775m

Number of panels = 21m / (1.5-2) = 10.5-14 we can take n

=12 or14 panels [take n=14] a = 21 / 14 = 1.5m --- O.K.)
1.25
1.775
= 39.80, tan-1
= 49.8 0 (35-55) ok
1.5
1.5

Check angle: tan-1

16 < B < 24 use 2 longitudinal bracings

Number of spacing in long direction = 42m / (4 8) = 5.25

10.5 take number of spacing = 7 S = 42 / 7 = 6m (optimum)

How wind load is transferred:

1-In longitudinal Direction:
a) Wind loads are transferred from end gable corrugated sheets to end
girts.
b) End girts transfer their reactions to end gable columns.
c) The load is transferred to horizontal bracing.
f) Force in horizontal bracing is transferred to vertical bracing.

11/15

Layout 1

g) Force in vertical bracing is transferred to ground.

vl bracing
R

vl bracing

2- In transverse Direction (direction of Trusses):

a) Wind loads are transferred from side corrugated sheets to side girts
b) Side girts transfer their reactions to truss columns.
c) The truss resists this load in its plane and transfers it to the ground.

12/15

EN
D

GA
BL
E

N
LO

GI

NA

AC

NG
CI
A
R
LB
A
IC
RT
E
V

ISOMETRIC DRAWING OF THE LAYOUT

I
UD

R
LB

NG

MA

IN

SY
ST
EM

Layout 1

13/15

clear
height

H VAR.

S
S
S=5.0 7.0m

PLAN

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXES (A) & (E)

10

LONGITUDINAL BRACING @ AXES (B), (C) & (D)

11

12

13

Layout 1

14/15

Layout 1

clear
height

ROOF SLOPE

5 7m

END GABLE
@ AXES (1) & (13)

a=1.5 2.0m
B
MAIN SYSTEM
{TYPICAL TRUSS}
@ AXES FROM (2) TO (12)

15/15

Layout 2

Types of trusses:
a- For spans 14 22 m, it is preferable to use parallel chord system as
shown:

<<1.25

H
>>H

1.25

Parallel Chord

For short spans, "H" will be small, so after slope "h" will be <<< 1.25. If
we take "h" = 1.25 and slope upward, the height at the mid span of the
truss is high. So we can take height "H" at the column level & take
parallel chords.
For layout:
Exactly the same as before except that all longitudinal bracings will have
the same height.

b- For spans 22 32 m, it is preferable to use N-truss or warren W-truss

as shown:

N-truss

W-truss

For N-truss: All diagonals are tension members, while all verticals are
compression members.
For W-truss: Diagonals are one tension and the other is compression.
For verticals, one will carry the concentrated load of the purlin and the
other will be zero member.

1/9

Layout 2

c- For spans more than 30m, it is preferable to use sub-divided truss

either N or W as shown:
H
2a

2a
H

W-truss

2a
H
2a

2a
N-truss

For large spans, "H" at mid span will be large value. Maximum
panel length "a" is 2m.
The angle of the diagonal is not between 35 0 and 55 0.
So we make the diagonal each "2a".
We must put purlin each "a" because of the sheets
So we make subdivided
For layout:
1- In plan: Purlins are every 1.5-2m

2a

as before (not every 3-4m). This is

because we draw purlins not lower

2a

2a

chord.

2- Number of panels must be divisible by 4. If the number of panels is not

divisible by 4, the truss will be as shown.

2/9

Layout 2

3- End gable columns and longitudinal bracing should be every

multipliers of (

) "2a" not "a"

2a

Note that: If we have concentrated load affecting at any

point in the chord, we make subdivided system to avoid
P

moment

Another truss shapes:

These systems are not used except if mentioned in the question
H = B/3
a=1.5-2
a=1.5-2

B
Fink truss

K- truss for spans > 30m

Important note:
If the clear height is

6m, it is preferable to use horizontal member at

mid span of vertical bracing.

purlin

column

Added Hz
Member

vertical bracing

3/9

clear
height

H VAR.

S
S
S=5.0 7.0m

PLAN

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXES (A) & (E)

10

11

Vl Br

LONGITUDINAL BRACING @ AXES (B), (C) & (D)

13

Long Br

12

Layout 2

Different systems:

1) System with double cantilever

The columns are allowed only on solidlines

4/9

Layout 2
ROOF SLOPE

a=1.5 2.0m
B

5 7m
@ AXES (1) & (13)

@ AXES FROM (2) TO (12)

Note that:
1- We make horizontal bracing over the cantilever part also.
2- We must add longitudinal bracing at the end of the cantilever to
restrain (fix) the last point of the compression chord.
3- The diagonals are tangent to moment diagram.

2) Car shed:
This system is cantilever truss either from
one side or double cantilever truss.

1- The compression chord is the lower chord, so it must be restrained

every 2a-3a (maximum 6m).
2- There is only one vertical bracing.
3- There is no side covering and there is no end gable system.
4- The maximum length of cantilever is 10-12m
5- Take H =

Span
68

5/9

clear
height

H VAR.

H = (B/7)
4

S
S
S=5.0 7.0m

PLAN

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXES (A) & (E)

10

LONGITUDINAL BRACING @ AXES (B), (C) & (D)

11

12

13

Layout 2

H = (B/7)

Or

6/9

Layout 2

3) Trusses on concrete columns:

This system supported on steel columns from one

Vl Br
PLAN

8
7
6

S
S
S=5.0 7.0m

5
4

clear
height

H VAR.

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXIS (E)

10

LONGITUDINAL BRACING @ AXES (B), (C) & (D)

11

12

Long Br

13

side and on concrete columns from the other side..

7/9

Layout 2

Long. br
Long Br over
the conc. col.
@ AXES FROM (2) TO (12)

Long. Bracing
R.C.
Beam
R.C.
Beam

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXIS (A)

4-Car shed with different heights:

This system is cantilever truss from two sides but with 2 different
clear heights.
We must make horizontal member in the vertical bracing at the
level of each member connected to the column in the elevation (main
system).

clear height 8m

clear height 4m

Look at the section of vertical bracing

8/9

8.00

4.00

1.25

H VAR.

1.25

S
S
S=5.0 7.0m

PLAN

VERTICAL BRACING @ AXES (A) & (E)

10

LONGITUDINAL BRACING @ AXES (B), (C) & (D)

11

12

13

Layout 2

8.00

4.00

9/9

Column

Base

Plate

7/7

Buckling and compactness

Buckling
Buckling lengths:
The buckling is the complete half sin wave.
The member may buckle either inside plane of truss (appear in the elevation), or
buckle outside plane of truss (appear in the plan)

Buckling inside: Buckling inside is always equal to the distance between 2

successive joints (length of the member under consideration).

Buckling outside: Buckling outside depends on the shape of the structure and
the location of the member as following:

a- For parallel chord system truss and N-truss or W-truss:

a

Lonitudinal bracing

Lin= a Lin= a
Lout= 2a Lout= 3a

Upper chord: Lin = l =

a
"a" for small slopes (1:5 to 1:20)
cos

While Lout = distance between purlins because purlins fix the upper chord outside.

Lower chord: Lin = l =

a
"a" for small slopes (1:5 to 1:20)
cos

While Lout = distance between 2 longitudinal bracing or between longitudinal bracing

and vertical bracing.

1/15

Buckling and compactness

Very important notes:

For sky light with longitudinal
bracing as shown, Lout of upper
chord = distance between purlins
= "2a".
For sky light with longitudinal
bracing as shown, Lout of upper
chord is not the distance between
purlins because of the presence of
bracing so Lu act = "a".
For the lower chord we may use horizontal bracing instead of longitudinal
bracing (Only if it is required in the exam). The buckling outside is the
distance between bracings (plan of lower bracing must be given in the exam.
a

Lower horizonal
bracing
Member joining
poins of lower
Chord of trusses

Diagonals and verticals: Buckling inside and outside = L (length of the

vertical and diagonal.

2/15

Buckling and compactness

b- For sub-divided trusses:

a
L

2a

Upper chord: Lin = a, Lout = distance between purlins = a

Lower chord: Lin = 2a (member length), Lout = distance between
bracing. (4a or 6a or .. according to distance between bracing)
Diagonal: Lin = distance between joints = L/2, while the point of
subdivided is not fixed outside because the 2 subdivided members act as
cantilevers over the diagonal, so Lout = L (note that the length of the
member is L/2 between joints)
Verticals and diagonals of subdivided: Lin = L, Lout = 1.2L. For any
member with 1 or 2 members coming out from it (supported on it), Lout
of the members coming out is 1.2 their length.

c- For X- trusses:
For upper and lower chord

and also for verticals:

As before

For diagonals:
Lin = L/2 (distance between joints)
For buckling outside, the point of intersection is partially fixed
i.e. if the stiffness of the other member is so high, the point a will fixed and Lout =
0.5L while if the stiffness of the supporting member is zero Lout = L
3/15

Buckling and compactness

So we use average value

Lout = 0.75 L

d- For K- trusses:
For upper and lower chord:
As before
For verticals:

L
a

Lin = 0.5L, Lout = L

For diagonals: Lin = L, Lout = 1.2L

e- For bracing systems:

For M1: Lin = Lout = L
For M2 : Lin = L, Lout = 1.2L

M1
M2
M3

For M3: Lin = S/2, Lout = S

M2 and M3 are members in subdivided system.
For M4: Lin = L/2, Lout = 0.75L

M4
L

M4 is member in X-system

f- For link members:

For pined members: Lin = Lout = L

4/15

Buckling and compactness

g- For cantilevers:
Figure 1:
Lonitudinal bracing

M1

M2

L=4a

For all the marked members M1: Lin = a, Lout = 2L = 2*(4a) = 8a because there is
no bracing at the end of the cantilever, so the lower chord works as cantilever with
lenth "L" outside plan and the buckling length of cantilever is 2L
For all the marked members M2: Lin = a, Lout = 2L = 2*(2a) = 4a

Figure 2:
Lonitudinal bracing

M1

M2

L=4a

For all the marked members M1: Lin = a, Lout = 2a

For all the marked members M2: Lin = a, Lout = 2a
For this, it is highly recommended to add longitudinal bracing at the end of
cantilever.

Figure 3:
Lonitudinal bracing

M4 M3

M1 M1 M2

M2

L=4a

For all the marked members M1: Lin = a, Lout = 2a

5/15

Buckling and compactness

For all the marked members M2: Lin = a, Lout = 2*(2a) = 4a (this part works as
cantilever)
For all the marked members M3: Lin = a, Lout = a
For all the marked members M4: Lin = a, Lout = 2a

Examples of buckling:
Calculate the buckling lengths inside and outside of the shown figures:
Figure 1:
2

Lonitudinal bracing
M4
10:1
M6

1.30
M1

M2

M5

M7

M3

M1: Lin = 2.0 m

Lout = 2.0*2=4.0m

M2: Lin = 2.0 m

Lout = 2.0*3=6.0m

M3: Lin = 2.0 m

Lout = 2.0*3=6.0m

M4: Lin = 2.0 m

Lout = 2.0m

M5: L=

(1.3 +

2*4 2
) + 22 =2.9,
10

Lin = Lout = 2.9m

M6: L= 1.3+

2*3
=1.9,
10

Lin = Lout = 1.9m

M7: L= 1.3+

2*5
=2.3,
10

Lin = Lout = 2.3m

6/15

Buckling and compactness

Figure 2:

1.6
M7

15:1

M2

M4 M5
M3

1.75

M6

M1

M1: Lin = 3.2 m

Lout = 3.2*2=6.4m

M2: Lin = 1.6 m

Lout = 1.6m

M3: L=

(1.75 +

1.6 * 4 2
) + 3.2 2 =3.87, Lin = 0.5*3.87 = 1.94m, Lout = 3.87m
15

For length of subdivided members, draw the required truss members to scale or
using trigonometry (
M4: L = 0.5*(1.75+
M5: L=

(1.75 +

M6: L= 1.75+
M7: L= 2.13,

):

1.6 * 5
) =1.14m, Lin = 1.14 m, Lout = 1.2*1.14 = 1.37m
15

3 * 3.2 2
) + 3.2 2 =4.0, Lin = 0.5*4=2.0m, Lout = 4.0m
15

4 * 3.2
=2.6,
15
Lin = 2.13m,

Lin = Lout = 2.6m

Lout = 2.13*1.2= 2.56m

7/15

Buckling and compactness

Figure 3:
The shown truss is of clear height 6.5 m

M1
M2

1.25
M3

M4

6.0m
M1: Lin = 6.0 m
M2: L=

Lout = 6.0m

32 + 1.252 3.25, Lin = 3.25 m

Lout = 1.2*3.25= 3.9 m

M3: Lin = 0.5*6 = 3.0m, Lout = 6.0m

M4: L =

62 + 6.52 =8.85m, Lin = 0.5*8.85=4.42m, Lout =0.75*8.85=6.64m

Figure 4:
M1
M2
M3
M4
a=1.8m

M1and M2: Lin = 1.8 m

Lout = 1.8m

M3: Lin = 1.8 m

Lout = 1.8*2 = 3.6m

M4: Lin = 1.8 m

Lout = 1.8*4=7.2m

8/15

Buckling and compactness

Figure 5:
M4

For the shown car shed, a lower horizontal bracing is used as

shown in the given plan

M1

M2 M3

Panel length=1.7m

M1: Lin = 1.7m, Lout = 1.7*3 = 5.1m

M2: Lin = 1.7m, Lout = 1.7*3 = 5.1m
M3: Lin = 1.7m, Lout = 1.7*2 = 3.4m (cantilever)
M4: Lin = 1.7m, Lout = 1.7m

Plan of Lower wind bracing

9/15

Buckling and compactness

Compactness
To determine whether the beam is compact, non-compact or slender

a-Compactness of the section: This is the ability of the section to perform local
buckling.
We have 3 types of sections:

1- Compact sections:
Achieve the plastic moment capacity without local buckling.
2- Non-compact sections:
Achieve the yield moment without local buckling.
3- Slender sections:
Undergo local buckling before achieving the yield moment.

Fy

Fy
Compact
sections

Fy

Fy

Fy
Fy
Non-compact Slender
sections
sections

10/15

Buckling and compactness

Sections are classified according to their width-thickness ratios. Each

sections component (flanges and webs) is treated separately as follows:
Look ECP page 9, 10, 11, 12
Rolled I-section

Rolled UPN

welded I-section

tf

r=
Axis of bending

dw

tw

dw

h
tw

1
(b t w 2 r )
2
d w = h 2(t f + r )

c=

16.9

Fy

c 23

tf
Fy

> 23

Fy

127

Fy

d w 190

tw
Fy

> 190

Fy

Non compact

Slender

Compact

Non compact

Slender

Compact

Rolled I-section

dw

Welded I-section

1
c = ( b 2s t w )
2
d w = h 2( t f + s)
15.3

Compact

Fy

c 21

Non compact

tf
Fy

21

Slender
>

F
y

127

Fy

d w 190

tw
Fy

> 190

Fy

Non compact

Slender

Compact

11/15

Buckling and compactness

From tables pages 9 to 12, we can see that we treat every portion of the
section as a separate part.

Note that in all tables we use the flat portions.

Table (2.1a) in page 9, is the limit ratios for stiffened compression
members where stiffened members are webs. This is because the upper and
lower flange stiffens the web. (The web is stiffened from both directions by the
upper and the lower flange). This table is used for rolled sections, built-up
sections (sections composed of welded plates), box section or channels.

Table (2.1c) in page 11, is the ratios for un-stiffened compression

members where un-stiffened members are flanges. This is because the flanges
are stiffened from one side only with the web and the other end is free. This
table is used for the flanges of the same section as table (2.1a).

Table (2.1d) in page 12, is used for the ratios of equal and unequal angles
as well as T-sections (T-stub) and circular sections. In case of unequal angles,
we have to make 2 checks (look page12). Angles cannot be compact.
Important note: For rolled section and if "r" is not given, we can take "r" tf
So c =

1
1
(b-tw-2r) = (b-tw-2tf)
2
2

And d w = h-2(tf + r) = h-2(tf + tf) = h-4tf

Important note: If for example, the flange is non-compact and the web is
compact, so we consider the whole section as non-compact (more safe).

12/15

Buckling and compactness

Buckling lengths of columns

In case the connection between the column and girder is fixed, hinged or
free we use the table ECP 53
Prevented from sway

Permitted to sway

Hinged-

Hinged-

Fixed-

Fixed

+ Fixed

+ Free

Hinged

Fixed

Fixed

free sway

free sway

1.00

0.80

0.65

2.00

1.2

Buckling
shape

k-value

2.10

Applications of buckling lengths Lb

Buckling length of columns in trusses:
i) For hinged base:

h1
h2
hinged
lbin = 2( h2+

h1
)
2

lbout = h1 or h2 bigger

13/15

Buckling and compactness

ii ) For fixed base:

h1
h2
Fixed
(Inside)
lbin = 1.2 ( h2+

h1
)
2

hinged
(outside)
lbout = h1 or h2

bigger

iii ) For fink truss:

lbin = 2.10 h

Fixed
base

lbout = h

iv ) For cantilever truss:

lbin = 2.10 ( h2+

h1
)
2

lbout = ( h1 or h2 )

14/15

Buckling and compactness

v ) For cantilever frame:

h1

lbin = 2.10 ( h1)

lbout = h1

15/15

Remember of some buckling lengths

a- Diagonal and vertical joined with lower compression chord:
Lout = 1.2 L

if one of the 2 ends of the vertical and the diagonal is not

braced.

What braces a point?

(1) Purlin

(2) Long. Bracing

(3) Tension in both members meeting at that point

Examples:
Calculate buckling lengths outside plan for lower chord, diagonals and
verticals for the given shapes.
1)

-ve +ve +ve +ve +ve

L1 = L2 = L3 = 3a

L4 = L5 = 2a

D1 = D 2 = 1.2L

D3 = D 4 = D5 = L (lower point

braced)
V1 = 1.2L

V 2 = V3 = V 4 = V 5 = L

2)

-ve -ve +ve +ve +ve

L1 = L2 =L3 = 3a

L4 = L5 = 2a

D1 = D 2 = 1.2L

D3 = D4 = D5 = L (lower point

braced)

V1 = V 2 = 1.2L

V3 = V4 = V5 = L

3)

LC1 LC2 -ve -ve +ve +ve

LC1 = LC2 = 2a
L1 = L2 =L3 = L4 = 4a
DC1 = DC2 = 1.2L

D1 = D2 = 1.2L

D3 = D4 =

VC2 = 1.2L

V1 = V2 =

L
VC1 = L
1.2L

4)

V 3 = V4 = L

L1 = L2 = 2a

L3 = L4 = L5 = 3a

D1 = D 3 = D4 = 1.2L
D2 = D 5 = L
V2 = V 5 = L

V1 = V3 = V4 = 1.2L

Loads
Loads
Loads acting on truss:
1) Dead load:
Weight of corrugated and weight of steel structure
W c = (5 8) kg / m2
= (12 18) kg / m2

for single layer (default)

for double layer (if given)

W s = (20 35) kg / m2/hz proj.

We take W s= B
take W s= 28 kg / m2

i.e. If the span of truss = 28 m

PD = Wc

a
S + Ws aS
cos

P
P
P
PDL/2 PDL PDL PDL DL DL DL PDL PDL PDL PDL/2

2) Live load:
W LL = 60 66.66 tan
= 200 300 tan

inaccessible roof (default)

accessible roof

In kg / m2 /hz proj.
i.e. If the slope 1 : 10
W LL = 60 66.66 *

1
= 60 6.7 = 53.3 kg / m2 /hz proj.
10

PLL = W LL a S

1/4

Loads
P
P
P
PLL/2 PLL PLL PLL LL LL LL PLL PLL PLL PLL/2

3) Wind load:
W w = C e k q kg / m2
a - K height factor

k = 1.0
k = 1.1

10 m

10 < h

20

b q = wind intensity in kg / m2
= 70 kg / m2

80 kg / m 2 Alexandria

Cairo

c For C e: divide truss into 2 parts

Wind
direction

Pressure side

Suction side

For wind left (WL)

For suction side:

C e = - 0.5

Suction side

Wind
direction

Pressure side

For wind right (WR)

( - ve means suction outside truss)

For pressure side: C e is calculated using the following curve

2/4

Loads
Ce

0.2

0.05

0.8

0.4

0.8

tan

- 0.8
ie: For all trusses of slope 1:5 (0.2) to 1:20 (0.05), C e will be = -0.8 (suction)
although it lies in the pressure side.
Only fink truss can have slope more than 0.4
h
P1 = 0.8 * 70 * 1 * * S
2

P2 /2

P2

a
*S
cos

P2

a
*S
cos

h
P4 = 0.5 * 70 * 1 * * S
2

P2

P2

P2 /2
P3 /2

P3 = 0.5 * 70 * 1 *

P2 = 0.8 * 70 * 1 *

P3

P3

P3

P3

P3 /2

P1
P1

Note loads at the joint at mid span

3/4

Loads
There are 2 main types of loads
Primary loads: Case I (A): dead and live load
Secondary loads: Case II (B): wind load, braking force & lateral shock
For case II (B) increase the allowable stresses by 20 %

IMP: To determine the design case:

If

D + L +W
1.2
D+L

Case I

If

D + L +W
> 1.2
D+L

Case II

Example:
Determine the design value & case for the following members:
DL
5
5
5
5
5
5
-5
-5
-5

LL
7
7
7
7
7
7
-7
-7
-7

WL
1
3
3
-3
1
3
3
3
7

WR
-2
-2
5
-1
-7
-7
-3
-1
3

Solution:
Case A
D+L
12
12
12
12
12
12
-12
-12
-12

D+L+WL
13
15
15
9
13
15
-9
-9
-5

Case B
Comparison
D+L+WR D+WL D+WR
10
6
3
13/12=1.08<1.2
10
8
3
15/12=1.25>1.2
17
8
10
17/12=1.4>1.2
11
2
4
5
6
-2
13/12=1.08<1.2
5
8
-2
15/12=1.25>1.2
-15
-2
-8
15/12=1.25>1.2
-13
-2
-6
13/12=1.08<1.2
-9
2
-2

Design case
and value
12 T (A)
15 T (B)
17 T (B)
12 T (A)
12T (A), 2C (B)
15T (B), 2C (B)
15 C (B)
12 C (A)
12 C (A), 2 T (B)

4/4

Design of Tension member

Design of tension members
What is meant by design?
Design means to choose a section of certain member in which the stresses
resulted from actual staining actions calculated from loads is less than the
allowable stresses.
Egyptian code of practice (ECP), usually gives the allowable as stresses.
For steel sections, the allowable is factor of Fy (yield stress)
For connections, the allowable is factor of Fu (ultimate stress).
For tension and compression f =
For moment f =
For Shear q =

TorC
Area

My
I

QS
Ib

So what we have to do is to choose a section in which the actual stresses are less
than the allowable stress given in the specifications.

Design of tension member:

Examples of tension members are: truss members, hangers, and cables for floors
or roofs, bracing members and tie rods.
Types of sections used for tension members:

Single angle

Pipes

Double angle

Plates

Star shape

Channels

T-sec.
1/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Types of sections used for truss members (very important):

For upper and lower chord, choose 2 angles back to back
For diagonals and verticals, we take it single member till

Lower
Chord

Upper
Chord

angle 80*80*8, if the diagonal or vertical is bigger so we can use 2

angles back to back. (This is because using single angle smaller than
80*8 is more economic than using 2 angles, but if one angle is greater
than 80*8, so using 2 angles will be cheaper).
For verticals at position of longitudinal bracing, we have to use star
shape (except if he asked for something else) and we will know why to
use star shape later.
For members in which its length L 5m for the deflection

Allowable tensile stresses:

The allowable tensile stress is specified in the Egyptian code as a function of the
yield strength as follows:
Ft=0.58 Fy =1.4 t/cm2

st.37

When to use bolted and welded connections:

The connection between the angles and the gusset plate is either bolted or
welded.
The welded connections are executed (

) in the shop (

) while the

bolted connections are in the field (except otherwise mentioned)

2/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

All the connections of truss are welded because the weld is cheaper and
easier. The only connections which are bolted are at the position of field
connections. The field connections are with the column and inside the truss
spaced maximum 12m (Not important to be at the position of longitudinal
bracing). This is for the reason of transmission of the welded parts from the shop
(

) to the field as one unit.

Properties of angles:
"A" is the area; "a" is the length of the leg
"e" is the eccentricity, "t" thickness of leg
Always use first thickness in tables
i.e. 70*7 or 70*8 or 70*9, always use 70*7 or choose 80*8, but don't choose
70*8.
Design Concept:
The choice of a section for tension members should satisfy the following checks:
1. Minimum angle
2.Stress:

fact.=Force/Anet

3 Depth:

L/d=< 60

4 Stiffness: in = L bin/rin

< Ft

=< 300

out= L bout/rout =< 300

3/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

What is meant by each term?
1. Minimum angle:
Minimum angle is 45*45*5 for any structural member.
For members with welded connections, the minimum angle is 45*45*5
For bolted members: minimum angle is (3d+t), where "d" is the bolt diameter.
amin = 3d + tangle , since tangle = 0.1 a
so amin = 3d + 0.1 a

0.9 amin = 3d

So amin = 3d * 1.1
For bolt M16, d=16mm, amin = 3*1.6*1.1 = 5.3 cm = 53 mm
So use angle 55*55*5

2. Stress:

fact. = Force/Anet

< Ft

"Force" is the force acting on the member from external loads. The force
is either due to dead and live (case I) or including wind (case II).
"Ft" is the allowable stress of tension in code which is 1.4t/cm2 for case I,
or 1.4*1.2=1.68t/cm2 for case II.
"Anet" is the area after subtracting the holes in case of bolted angles

What is meant by symmetrical and unsymmetrical sections?

The force is transmitted from the angles of the truss to the gusset plate.
If the C.G. of the angles coincides on the gusset, the section will be
symmetric as in case of 2 angles back to back and star shape

If the C.G. of the angles does not coincide on the gusset, the section will
be un-symmetric as in case of single angle. Moment will be produced. So
we have either take effect of moment into consideration during design or
neglect moment and reduce area.

4/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Double angles
Lower chord

Single angle
Dl or Vl

Star shape
Vertical member

Area net in case of symmetric sections: (2 angles and star shape)

We have to subtract holes from bolted angles, and take gross area in case of
welded angles.
Anet = 2 (Aangle (d+0.2) t)
In which "d" is bolt diameter, 0.2cm hole clearance

Area net in case of unsymmetrical sections: (single angle)

We have to subtract holes from bolted angles, and take gross area in case of
welded angles. We have also to reduce the area due to un-symmetry.

How to take effect of bolts together with effect of moment by reducing net
area of angle?

Welded

Bolted

In case of bolted angles:

A1= [a- (d+0.2 cm)] x t
A2= (a-t) x t

Area of connected part

Area of unconnected part

R.F. (reduction factor for A2 only) =

3 A1
3 A1 + A2

0.7

5/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Anet=A1+

3 A1
x A2
3 A1 + A2

Note that: We take effect of bolt in (a-d') and effect of un-symmetry in the
reduction factor of A2.

In case of welded angles:

A1= a x t

Area of connected part

A2= (a-t) x t
R.F. (reduction factor for A2 only) =
Anet=A1+

3 A1
3 A1 + A2

0.77

3 A1
x A2
3 A1 + A2

Note that: we take only the effect of un-symmetry in the reduction factor of A2
because there is no reduction due to bolt.

We use star shape at position of longitudinal bracing so that the angles are
symmetric about the 2 gusset plates used, the gusset plate of the main truss and
the gusset plate of the longitudinal bracing with the truss.

Question: Compare between symmetric & un-symmetric section or what is the

main difference between symmetric & un-symmetric section? (

The c.g. of force does not coincide on the Gusset Plate, so the force will be
transmitted to Gusset Pl with moment.

This part subjected

to compression

6/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

The compression part which is no working can be calculated using Reduction
factor for A2 which is
For single angle: RF =

3 A1
3 A1 + A2

For double un-symmetric angles: RF =

5 A1
5 A1 + A2

We do not use this shape

Then complete comparison: where everyone of them used, different shapes,

Method & design,

3 Depth: L/d=< 60
"L" is the length of the member which is always the distance between 2
successive joints.
"d" id the depth of the member in the vertical direction.
For single angle and 2 angles back to back, d = a.
For star shaped d = 2a+1 (For this in long members 5m, we use star shape)
Since this check is for deflection, so we don't make this check for vertical
members.
4 Stiffness: in = L bin/rin

=< 300

out= L bout/rout =< 300

To calculate this term, we have to know the buckling lengths outside and inside
the plane of different members and to know "r"
2. "r" is the radius of gyration =

yY

v
x

x
v

I
in cm
A

y
Single angle

yY
Double angles

yY
v

x
v
V

y
Y
Star shape

7/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

For single angle, the minimum "r" is rv, while the maximum "r" is ru
The section will always buckle about the smallest "r"
In case of single angle the member will buckle outside only about axis v-v
means out= L bout/rv =< 300
rv is taken from tables and is

0.2a ("a" is the length of the angle's leg)

In case of using 2 angles the member will buckle about x-axis inside plan
while it buckles about y-axis out-side plan means
in = L bin/rx

=< 300

out= L bout/ry =< 300

Where rx 2L = rx 1L. This is because x-axis does not move from its place so IX-X
=2Ix-x and A2L = 2A1L
So rx 2L =

2I
= rx 1L
2A

rx is given in tables and is

0.3a ("a" is the length of the angle's leg)

To calculate ry: Since y-axis is transferred for distance = e+tG.Pl./2

So IY-Y = 2(Iy-y + A1L (e+tG.Pl./2)2),

rY =

I
=
A

2 I + 2 A(e +
2A

t G.Pl . 2
)
2
=

t
t
I
+ (e + G .Pl . ) 2 = r y2 + (e + G.Pl . ) 2
A
2
2

But since rx = ry for equal angles so rY = rx2 + (e +

t G.Pl . 2
)
2

In case of using 2 angles star shape the member will buckle outside only
about U-axis which means: out= L bout/ru =< 300
The minimum radius of gyration in star shape is about U-axis, because it is the
only constant axis.

8/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Since the u-axis does not move, so ru (2 star shape) = ru 1L, so ru is in the tables
and is

0.38a

Estimation of section:
In order to make the previous checks, we have to choose a section.
This section should be as near as possible to the safe and economic section.
The best choice is that depend on the later check.
Since we need the stress in the net area < Ft, so we choose Anet=

Force
Ft

So we have to estimate an approximate relation between Agross which is the total

area of the angle (found in the tables) and Anet which is the reduced area due to
either bolts or un-symmetry or both.
The un-symmetry decreases the area by about 15%. The bolts also decrease the
area by nearly the same ratio.

Applications
Design of symmetrical sections:
Symmetrical sections: 2 angles back to back and star shape.
Choice of section:
Ag 2L=Force/0.85Ftcm2
=Force/Ft

cm2

bolted connection
welded connection

A1L= 0.5A2L and Ft = 1.4 t/cm 2 case I and 1.4*1.2 case II

Choose angle a x a x t
Where min. angle = 3d +t
= 45 x 5

bolted connection
welded connection

Checks:
Anet=2[Ag- (d +0.2 cm) x t]
Anet=2Ag

bolted connection
welded connection

9/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

fact

=Force/Anet of 2 angles< Ft

L/d

<60

L in/rx =

<300

Lout/ry =

<300

Or Lout/ru =

For back to back sections

<300

For star shape sections

Design of unsymmetrical sections:

For bolted section:
Choice of section:
Ag 1L=

Force
=cm2
0.85 * 0.85Ft

Choose L a x a x t

Due to the eccentricity between the member and gusset plate, the net area of the
member should be calculated from the following equation:
Anet=A1+

3 A1
x A2
3 A1 + A2

A1= [a- (d+0.2 cm)] x t

Area of connected part to gusset

A2= (a-t) x t

Area of unconnected part to gusset

Min. angle 3 + t
Checks:
fact = force/Anet

<Ft

L/d

<60

v = lb out/rv

<300

10/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

For welded section:
Choice of section:
Ag=

Force
=cm2
0.85Ft

Choose L a a t where minimum angle is 45 5

A1 =a t

Area of connected part

A2 = (a-t) t

Area of unconnected part

Checks:
Fact = force/Anet

< Ft

L/d

<60

L/iv

<300

Summary of tension member:

1. Choose the section of the angle whether it is single, double or star shape
according to its position as shown before
2. Estimate a suitable section to be checked according to the equation
Ag 1L =

Force
/n
f1 * f 2 * Ft

Where f1 = 1 in case of welded and 0.85 in case of bolted.

f2 = 1 in case of symmetric (2 angles or star shape) and 0.85 in case of
un-symmetric (single angle).
Ft = 1.4t/cm2 in case I and 1.4*1.2=1.68t/cm2 in case II
n = 1 in case of single angle and 2 in case of 2 angles or star shape.
3. Checks:
a. Minimum angle: 45*45*5 in case of welded
3d*1.1
b. Check stress: f =

in case of bolted

Force
Ft
Anet

Ft = 1.4t/cm2 in case I and 1.4*1.2=1.68t/cm2 in case II

11/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

A net = 2[A gross- (d+0.2) t L] in case of 2 angles back to back or star shape
Or A net = A1 + R.F.* A2 in case of single angle
Where:
A1= [a- (d+0.2)] x t
A1= (a x t)

and A2= (a-t) x t

and A2= (a-t) x t

And, R.F. =

for bolted angles

for welded angles

3 A1
for both welded and bolted angles
3 A1 + A2

c. Check deflection: l/d 60

Where d = 2a+1 in case of star shape.
d = a in case of 2 angels back to back or single angle.
d. Check buckling: 300
Where:
in =

l in
l
, out = out , in case of 2 angles back to back
rx
rY

Only out =

l out
, in case of star shape
ru

Only out =

l out
, in case of single angle
rv

Where lin is length of the member (distance between joints)

lout from the position of the member as shown before
rx, rv and ru are from tables, while rY =

rx2 + (e +

t G.Pl . 2
)
2

12/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Example1:
Design the two marked members two times

b) Using welded connection.

F2 =+8t

1:10

1.50

a) using bolted connection d = 16 mm

F1 =+11t
12*2m=24m

Solution:
Member1:

lower chord

F = +11 ton, L = 2.00 m.

a) Bolted connection.

b) Welded connection.

Choice of sec n

Choice of sec n

Ag =

11
= 9.24cm 2
0.85 * 1.4

Ag =

9.24
= 4.62cm 2
2

2L 50*50*5

Ag =
Ag =

11
= 7.86cm 2
1.4

7.86
= 3.93cm 2
2

choose 2L

45*45*5(min)

amin = 3d*1.1
= 3*1.6*1.1=52.8mm
Choose 2L

55*55*5

Checks

checks

Anet 2L= 2[ 5.32- (1.6+0.2)*0.5]

= 8.84 cm2
1) ft =

11
= 1.24t / cm 2
8.84

1) f t = 11 = 1.28t / cm 2
2 * 4 .3

< 1.4 t/cm2

2)
3)

L 200
=
= 36.4 < 60
d
5.5
in

l bin
rx

2)

L 200
=
= 44.4 < 60
d
4 .5

3)

in

l bin
rx

13/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

=
out =

200
= 120.5 < 300
1.66

l bout
ry

bout

1
2

ry = (1.66) 2 + (1.52 + ) 2 = 2.61cm

out

200
= 148 < 300
1.35

1
2

ry = (1.35) 2 + (1.28 + ) 2 = 2.23cm

3 * 200
= 229.5 < 300
2.61

out

3 * 200
= 268.6 < 300
2.23

safe

Member2:

1L

l bout
ry

safe

(diagonal)
l = (2) 2 = (1.5 + 0.4) 2 = 2.76m

F = + 8.00 ton
a) Bolted connection

b) welded connection

Choice of sec n

choice of sec n

Ag 1L =
Choose

8
= 8.8cm 2
0.85 * 0.85 *1.4

Ag 1L =

65*65*7

8
= 6.72cm 2
0.85 *1.4

Choose

60*60*6

Checks:

Checks
A1 = [6.5-(1.6+0.2)] * 0.7 = 3.29

A1 = 6.0*0.6 = 3.6 cm2

A2= (6.5-0.7)*0.7=4.06 cm2

A2= (6.0-0.6)*0.6=3.24 cm2

Anet = 3.29+4.06 (

3 * 3.29
)
3 * 3.29 + 4.06

Anet = 3.6+3.24 (

= 6.17 cm2
1) Ft =
2)
3)

8
= 1.297t / cm 2
6.17

L 276
= 42.5 < 60
=
d
6.5
v

l bout 276
=
= 219 < 300
rv
1.26

3 * 3.6
)
3 * 3.6 + 3.24

= 6.09 cm2
1) Ft =
2)
3)

8
= 1.31t / cm 2
6.09

L 276
= 46 < 60
=
d
6
v

l bout 276
=
= 236 < 300
rv
1.17
14/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Example 2:
7m
F=15t

1.75

F=15t

4m

t
15
=
F

4m
7m
Spacing between trusses

Design the tie members shown in figure using bolted connection, d = 16 m

Solution:
F= +15.00 ton
Use

l = 7.00 m> 5m

section ( due to its big length )

Choice of sec n
1) Ag =

15
= 12.6cm 2
0.85 *1.4

Ag =
2)

u=

12.6
= 6.3cm 2
2

l bout
> 300, So
ru

From

tables

choose

60*60*6

700
= 300
ru

choose

ru

65*65*7

= 2.33cm = ru
( ru = 2.47cm )

Checks
Anet = 2 [ 8.7-(1.6+0.2)*0.7 ]= 14.88 cm 2
1) ft =

15
= 1.01t / cm 2 < 1.4t / cm 2
14.88

2) d = 2a+tgpl. = 2*6.5+1.0 = 14.0 cm

L 700
=
= 50 < 60
d
14

3)

= 700/2.47 = 283 < 30

15/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Example 3:

1.83

Design the 3 marked members given that:

10:1

F1 = 10 t (D +L), F2 = 2 t (D +L+W),

1.5

F3 = 8 t (D +L+W)

Position of field splice is at the position of long

2
1

longitudinal Bracing, Use M16

Solution
Member1: (Bolted) (lower chord, so2 angles back to back)
L = 2 * 1.83 = 3.66 m
A1L =

10
2
/ 2 = 4.2 cm
0.85 *1.4

Use 2L

45*5

Checks
1 amin = 3 * 1.6 * 1.1 = 5.3 cm
Use 2L 55*5
2-

l 366
=
= 66.5 > 60
d 5.5

Use 2L

65 * 7

l 366
=
= 60 a = 6.1
d
a

So

l 366
=
= 56.3 < 60
d 6.5

3 Anet = 2 [8.7 (1.6 + 0.2) *0.7] = 14.88 cm2

f=

10
= 0.67 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
14.88

4 - in =

366
= 186.7 < 300
1.96

out =

366 * 2
1.96 + (0.5 + 1.85) 2
2

= 239 < 300

Member 2: (welded) (subdivided, so try 1L) (case B)

From drawing L = 198 cm
A1L =

2
= 1.4 cm2
0.85 *1.4 *1.2
16/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Use 45*5 (min angle)
Check:
1 amin

45*5 (welded)

l 198
=
= 44 < 60
d 4.5

2-

3 Anet : A1 = 4.5 * 0.5 = 2.25 cm2

A2 = (4.5 0.5)* 0.5 = 2 cm2
R.F. =

3 * 2.25
= 0.77
3 * 2.25 + 2

Anet= 2.25 + 0.77 * 2 = 3.79 cm

f=

2
= 0.53 t / cm2 < (1.4 * 1.2) t / cm 2
3.79

4 - out =

1.2 *198
= 273 < 300
0.87

Member 3 : (welded) ( case B) (diagonal , so try one angle)

l = 1.52 + 3.662 = 3.96 m
A1L =

8
= 5.6 cm2
0.85 *1.4 *1.2

Choose 60*6
Checks:
1 amin = 45 * 5
2 - out =

396
= 338 > 300
1.17

So out =
3-

396
= 300 ,
rv

So rv = 1.32cm

use angle 70*7

l 0.5 * 396
=
= 28.3 < 60
7
d

4 Anet: A1 = 7 * 0.7 = 4.9 cm2

A2 = (7 0.7) *0.7 = 4.41 cm 2
Anet = 4.9 + 4.41 *

3 * 4.9
= 8.29 cm2
3 * 4.9 + 4.41

17/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

f=

8
= 0.96 t / cm2 < (1.4 * 1.2) t / cm2
8.29

Note that if we designed this member as 2 angles back to back:

A1L =

8
8
2
=
/ 2 = 2.38 cm
2
1.4 *1.2
1.4 *1.2

Use min. angle 45 * 5

Check:
0.5 * 396
= 147 < 300
1.35

1 - in =
out =

2-

396
1.35 + (0.5 + 1.28)2
2

= 177 < 300

l 0.5 * 396
=
= 44 < 60
4.5
d

3f=

10
= 1.16 t / cm2 < (1.4 * 1.2) t / cm2
2 * 4.3

**** Weight of 2 angles 45 = 2 * 3.38 = 6.76 kg / m/, while weight of single angle
70 * 7 = 7.38 kg / m/
For this we prefer to use 2 angles back to back in the diagonal subdivided truss.

18/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

Design of tension members using other sections
Different members may be used as tension members such as:Pipes, square hollow sections, rectangular hollow sections, channels, .
Do not use these sections except required (Always design the tension member
as one angle or 2 angles except if it is required something else).
Use same procedures as for design of tension members of trusses.
Very important note:
For truss members: Always buckling inside is about horizontal axis while
buckling outside is about vertical axis. Always write the name of axis as written
in the tables.
Axes are the same as their names in tables
Y
y

y
x

x
Y

Y x

Figure 1

y
Y
Figure 2

x
y

Figure 3

y
x
Figure 4

For channels in tables, the axis parallel to the web is "y" and the axis
parallel to the flange is "x". Buckling inside is about horizontal axis and
buckling outside is about vertical axis.
Figure 1: Lin =

l
lin
and Lout = out
ry
rx

Figure2: Lin =

l
l in
and Lout = out
ry
rx

Where rx 2 channels= rx 1 channel,

ry 2 channels =

ry2 + (e + 0.5) 2 because y-axis

is translated from its position.

19/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

For Box sections in tables, the axis parallel to the long side is "y" and the
axis parallel to the short side is "x". Buckling inside is about horizontal
axis and buckling outside is about vertical axis.
Figure3: Lin =

l in
l
and Lout = out
rx
ry

Figure 4: Lin =

l
lin
and Lout = out
ry
rx

Where rx and ry are from table because the axes are not translated

Example:
Design the Shown truss members as:
1) Pipes
2) Square hollow Sections
3) Rectangular hollow Sections
4) 2 Channels back to back
2.0

Lonitudinal bracing

F=+75t I

Solution:
1 As pipe:

75
= 53.6 cm 2
1.4

A=

Choose pipe 273 * 7 mm (first thickness in tables)

Checks
1-

F
75
=
= 1.28 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
A
58.5

20/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

2

in

out

3-

200
= 21 < 300
9.4

600
= 63.8 < 300
9 .4

l 200
=
= 7.3 < 60
d 27.3

O.K.

2 As square hollow section

Force
75
=A=
= 53.6 cm 2
Fc
1.4
Square 250 *250 *6.3 mm
A = 61.20 cm2
Checks

1)

75
= 1.2 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
61.2

2)

200
= 20.12 < 300
9.94
600
= 60 < 300
9.94
200
= 8 < 60
25

3)

3 As rectangular hollow Sections:

y

if we put the section in vertical position as shown:

i.e. rx = rx tables

& ry = ry tables

Force
75
=A=
= 53.6 cm 2
Fc
1 .4

x
y

Choose 300 * 200 * 6.3

Checks

1)

75
= 1.2 < 1.4
61.2

2)

200
< 17.7 (buckling inside about horizontal axis X)
11.3
600
< 72.3 (buckling outside about vertical axis Y)
8.3
21/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

3)

200
= 6.7 < 60
30

(30cm is the vertical height)

Note that: If we changed the direction of the box

x
y

To be as shown
rx = ry tables

ry = rx tables

The Same

300*200*6.3

y
x

Except:

in =

200
= 24 < 300 (buckling inside about horizontal axis Y)
8 .3

out =

600
= 53 < 300 (buckling outside about vertical axis X)
11.3

200
= 10 < 60 (20 cm is the vertical height)
20

4 As 2 channels back to back:

Y
y

As 2 channels back to back in the shown position

A = 7.5/1.4 = 53.6 cm 2
x

A1 channel = 53.6/2 = 26.8 cm2

x
y
Y

Choose channel 180

Checks:
1. f =

75
= 1.34t / cm 2
2 * 28

2. in =

200
= 28.8 < 300
6.95

out =

3.

600
( 2.02) 2 + (0.5 + 1.92) 2

= 190 < 300

l 200
=
= 11.11 < 60
d 18

22/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

If the 2 channels are in the other direction:
1. Check stresses as before
2. in =

out =
3.

200
(2.02) 2 + (0.5 + 1.92) 2

x
Y

= 63 < 300

600
= 86.33 < 300
6.95

l
200
=
= 13.3 < 60
d 2 * 7 +1

Questions of maximum capacity (Maximum strength):

Use equation of check used in design, but use maximum allowable. For tension,
the equation is (Force / Net Area) < 1.4 t/cm2. So the equation will turn to be:
Maximum force = Net area * 1.4

Example: Calculate the maximum force that can be carried (resisted) by single
and double angle 80*8, welded and bolted.
Solution: 1- 2 Angles bolted:
Anet = 2(12.3-1.8*0.8) = 21.72 cm2
Fmax = 21.72 * 1.4 = 30.41 t

2- 2 Angles welded:
Fmax = 12.3*2*1.4 = 34.44 t

3- Single angle bolted:

A1 = (8 1.8) * 0.8 = 4.96 cm2
A2 = (8 0.8) * 0.8 = 5.76 cm2
R.F. =

3 * 4.96
= 0.72
3 * 4.96 + 5.76

A net = 4.96 + 0.72 * 5.76 = 9.1 cm 2

23/24-D.T.M.

Design of Tension member

F max = 9.1 * 1.4 = 12.75 t

4 Single angle welded:

A1 = 8 * 0.8 = 6.4 cm2
A2 = (8 0.8) * 0.8 = 5.76 cm2
RF =

3 * 6.4
= 0.77
3 * 6.4 + 5.76

A net = 4.96 + 0.77 * 5.76 = 10.8 cm2

F max = 10.8 * 1.4 = 15.16 t

24/24-D.T.M.

Design of compression members

Design of compression members
Examples of compression members are: truss members, posts, axially loaded
columns, bracing members.
Examples of symmetrical sections:

Examples of unsymmetrical sections:

Buckling modes:
1- For doubly symmetrical sections about 2 axes:
[The shear center coincides on C.G.]
Only flexural buckling occurs

1/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

2- For singly symmetrical sections about 1 axis:
[The shear center lies on the same line of C.G.]
Flexural buckling
Flexural torsional buckling about axis of symmetry

3- For unsymmetrical sections:

There is moment due to unsymmetry, flexural buckling and flexural torsional
buckling.

Flexural buckling Modes:

We have two modes of flexural buckling to study:
Global buckling:
This is the previously studied mode for any section subjected to compression
symmetric or unsymmetrical section
In-plane:

in

Out-plane:

l in
rin

out

where rin = rx

l out
rout

where rout = ry2L or ru+ or rvL

Local buckling:
Any member composed of 2 or more separated sections must have local
L

buckling

Lo

100mm

F/2

F/2

Local buckling of one angle

2/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Local buckling: z = z where r min = r v for angles and r y for channel

rmin
l z is the distance where each single angle behaves alone about its weak axis

lz =

l
2

if using one tie plate at mid span of member

lz =

l
3

if using two tie plates at middle thirds of member

Where "l" is the length of the member (from joint to joint)

l
2
z = z max & 60
rv 3

max is the max. of

lin
l
& out
rx
ry

Summation of Flexural buckling modes (Global + Local):

As we have two types of global buckling:
l
In-plane: in = in
rx

'
l
Out-plane: out = out

rout

3/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

And as the local buckling is about the Y axis for the C and the V axis for L outplane
So we can add the local buckling to the global out-plane buckling as follow
out =

'
(out
)2 + (z )2 =

( global ) 2 + (local ) 2 =

l out 2 l z 2
) + ( ) < 180
rout
rv

Note:At least one tie plate should be used for any member composed of two angles
whether it is tension or compression member. The tie plates are used to ensure
that the 2 angles are working together. If the tie plate is not added to any
member composed of 2 angles. Each angle will behave alone about its minor
axis rv in the outside direction.

Allowable stress in axially loaded members

For symmetrical section:
From Flexural Buckling "F c"
For <100
Fc= 0.58Fy

(0.58Fy 0.75)

For >100

10

F c =1.4-6.5 x 10-5 2
Fc=7500/2

st.37

for all kinds of steel

From Flexural torsional buckling "Fcft"

Xo & Yo are the distance from C.G. to shear center

For 2 angles back to back, X o = 0

& Yo = e
4/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

ro2 = rx2 + r y2 + x o2 + y o2
J=

H = 1

1
4
b t 3 a t 3 For angles

3
3

x o2 + y o2
ro2

G = 810 t/cm2

GJ

For angles Fcz = 0.58

A r2
g o

Ag is the total area of the section = 2Aangle for 2 angles back to back

Fcy + Fcz
* 1
Fcft =
2H

4F * F * H
cy

cz

( Fcy + F ) 2
cz

y-axis of symmetry

For unsymmetrical section:

F c = [1.4-6.5 x 10 -5 2]*0.6

F c= [7500/2]*0.6

For <100
For >100

"The reduction factor 0.6 account for the moment effect and the flexural
torsional buckling"

Approximate values to radius of gyration: "r"

rx = 0.3 a

ry = 0.45 a

rv = 0.2 a

ru = 0.38 a

Where "a" is the length of the leg

These values can be used in choice of section not in checks.

Very important note: In designing compression members we use Agross even if

the member is bolted. This is because in compression the bolt is working.

5/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

1-Design of symmetrical section:

Using two angles back to back:

tG.PL

Choice of section:
We can choose by any method, but it is preferable
to choose using both the buckling and the stress as

d=a

they are related to each other.

a-From stresses:

Assume Fc=0.75 t/cm2

Ag2L=force/0.75=cm2
Ag1L=Ag2L/2
Choose a1 x a1 x t
If smaller than minimum (DONOT choose min.)
i.e. if A=1.8cm2, so choose 2 angles 35*3
b-From buckling:
Assume =100
in=100=Lbin/rx=Lbin/0.3 a2
'out=100=Lbout/ry=Lbout/0.45a3

Get a2=..cm
Get a3=..cm

Note: If during choice a1or a2 or a3 is less than minimum angle, we don't take it
min., but we use it as it is until the final choice which must be larger than min.
aav=

a1 + max .(a 2 ora 3 )

=cm
2

Choose aavxaavxt
Min. angle 45x45x5 if welded or 3d+t if bolted

Checks:
Since this section is 2 L singly symmetric so we have flexural buckling Fcx and
Fcy and flexural torsional buckling Fcft modes, and as it is composed of 2
separate parts, so there is local buckling.
6/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

1) in=Lin/rx

=<180

rx1L=rx2L

Then calculate Fcx =1.4-6.5 x 10 -5 2

< 100

Or = 7500/2

2) ry2L =

( rx ) 2 + (e +

Assume 2 tie plate

100

t G.PL. 2
)
2

Lz =

/ = L /r
out
out y

l
( "l" is length of member)
3

l
2
z = z max & 60
rv 3

max is the max. of

l
/ = l out
in= in & out
r
r
x

l
2
l
If z = z > max or 60 , use 3 tie plates Lz =
rv

out =

( global ) 2 + (local ) 2 =

l
l
( out ) 2 + ( z ) 2
rv
ry

Then calculate Fcy =1.4-6.5 x 10-5 2

< 180

< 100

Or = 7500/2

100

3) Calculate Fcft as before

ro2 , H, J , G, Fcz , Fcft

4) Then take the least of Fcx, Fcy, Fcft (guide)

Check fc=force/2A1L =< least of Fcx, Fcy, Fcft

7/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Using star shape section:
Choice of section:
a-From stresses:
Assume Fc= 0.75 t/cm2
Ag2L= Force/0.75 =cm2

Ag1L= Ag2L/2 =cm2

Choose a1 x a1 x t
b-From buckling:
max = 100 = u
100 = Lbout/ru = Lbout/0.38 a2

Get a2

Note: If during choice a1or a2 is less than minimum angle, we don't take it min.,
but we use it as it is until the final choice which must be larger than min.
aav.=

a1 + a 2
2

Choose L aavxaavxt

Min. angle 3d+t = 3d*1.1

bolted

45x45x5

welded

Checks:
Since this section is 2 L doubly symmetric so we have flexural buckling Fcx
and Fcy mode only no Fcft, and as it is composed of 2 separate parts, so there is
local buckling.
1) ru2L = ruL (from table)
Assume 2 tie plate
l
2
z = z max & 60
rv 3

Lz =

/ = L /r
out
out u
l
("l" is length of member)
3

/ = L /r
max = out
out u

l
l
2
If z = z > max or 60 , use 3 tie plates Lz =
rv

out =

( global ) 2 + (local ) 2 =

l
l
( out ) 2 + ( z ) 2
rv
ru

Then calculate Fc =1.4-6.5 x 10-5 2

< 180

< 100

8/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Or = 7500/2
2) fc = force/Ag2L

100

<Fc

Where Fc is as in case of 2 angels back to back

2-Design of unsymmetrical section:

Choice of section:

1-From stresses:
Assume Fc=0.6x0.75=0.45 t/cm2
Ag1L=force/0.45=cm2
Choose a1xa1xt
2-From buckling:
max=v=100
100=Lbout/ rv =Lbout/0.2a2
aav=(a1+a2)/2
Choose aav x aav x t where min. angle depth is 3d+ t (bolted), 45x45x5 (welded)

Checks:
Since it is unsymmetrical section, reduce Fc by 40%
1) v=Lbout/rv=<180
Then calculate Fc =[1.4-6.5 x 10 -5 2]*0.6
Or = 7500/2 *0.6

< 100
100

fc=force/Ag of 1 angle=< Fc
No tie plates used, single section.

9/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

3-Design of zero members:
Zero members should satisfies the slenderness condition for compression
members and the depth condition for tension members
Choice of section:
a) Minimum angle

3d + t
45 x 45 x 5

bolted
welded

b) max=L/rmin.=<180
For 2 angles back to back x=Lbx/rx =180

rx2L=

get a=

For 2 angles star shape

u=Lbu/ru =180

ru2L =

get a=

For 1 angle section

v=Lbv/rv =180

rv1L=

get a=

c) dmin= L/60=.

get a=

From a & b & c take the bigger angle.

If the design is according to case (II):

Case (II) means that the force the in member includes the secondary load
effect such as wind load; in this case the allowable stress should be increased by
20%.
For compression members, the allowable compressive stresses =Fc x 1.2

Choice of unequal angles in compression members:

It is recommended to use unequal angles when:
Lbout >>> Lbin ie Lbout 3 Lbin
rx2L = 0.28a1

ry2L = 0.48a2

Choice of section :
1-From stresses:
Assume Fc=0.75t/cm2
10/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Ag2L =force/0.75=.cm2
Ag1L= Ag2L /2=cm2
Choose two unequal angles a1 x a2 x t where a2>a1

2-From buckling:
max=100

in

x=

Lbin
=100
0.28a11

a1 av.=(a1+a11)/2

get a11

out

y=

Lb.out
=100
0.28a 22

get a22

a2 av.=(a2+a22)/2

Choose a1 av x a2 av x t
Checks:
1. amin = a1 av which is the smaller leg connected to gusset plate
2.

in

= Lb in/rx 2L = ...

3.

out =

< 180

Calculate Fcx

as in case of 2 equal angles back to back <180

Calculate Fcy

4. Calculate Fcft
5. fc=force/Ag2L < least of (Fcx, Fcy, Fcft)

11/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Example 1:
For the shown truss, design the three marked members.
Data:

-17 t
1

- Bolts used are ordinary bolts

t
.8
-1

- tG.pl = 10 mm

1.6m

- Steel used is st.37

d = 16 mm

1.8m

3
1.8m

Member 1 :
F = - 17.00 ton

Lbout = 1.8 m

Lbin = 1.80 m

max =

100

Choice of section:
Assume
x

= 100

Lbx 180
= 100
=
0.3a
rx

Lby

a=6

y=

ry

180
= 100
0.45a

a=4

F c = 0.75 t / cm2
= 17 = 22.67 cm
0.75

Ag
Ag =

22.67
= 11.3 cm2
2

Choose
Aav =

80*80*8

8+6
= 7 cm
2

amin = 3*1.6*1.1 = 5.28cm

Choose

70*70*7

Angle 55*55*5

Checks: 2 angles " flexural buckling and flexural torsional buckling"

1) rx

= 2.12 cm

x=

180
= 84.9 < 180
2.12

Fcx = 1.4 - 6.5*10-5*(84.9)2 = 0.93 t/cm2

12/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

tg
= ( rx ) 2 + ( e + ) 2 =
2

2) ry

180
= 55.2 < 180
3.26

/
=
out

Assume 2 tie plate

z

1
( 2.12) 2 + (1.97 + ) 2 = 3.26 cm
2

Lz = 180/3 = 60cm
2
3

= 60 / 1.37 = 43.8 < 60 & ( * 84.9 = 56.6 )

out

ok

= (55.2) 2 + (43.8) 2 = 70.5 < 180

Fcy = 1.4-6.5*10-5 (70.5) 2 = 1.08 t/cm2

3) Xo = 0

& Y o = 1.97 cm

ro2 = x o2 + y o2 + rx2 + ry2 = 1.97 2 + 2.122 + 3.26 2

H =1 (

= 19 cm2

x o2 + y o2
1.97 2
)
=
1

(
) =0.795
ro2
19

J = 1 b t 3 = 1 4(7 0.73 ) = 3.04 cm4

3
3
Fcz =
Fcft = (

0.58(

G J
810 3.04
) = 0.58(
)=
2
Ag ro
18.8 19

Fcy + Fcz
2 H

) (1 (1

4 Fcy Fcz H
( Fcy + Fcz ) 2

3.99 t/cm2
))

1.0 + 3.99
4 1.0 3.99 0.795
) (1 (1
)) =
=(
2 .795
(1.0 + 3.99) 2

0.947 t/cm2

Fleast = 0.931 t/cm2

fc =

17
= 0.9 t/cm2 < Fleast =0.93 t/cm2
2 * 9.4

Safe

13/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Member 2:
F = -1.80

L=

(1.8) 2 + (1.6) 2 = 2.41 m

Lbin = Lbout = 2.41 m

Try one angle
Assume Fc= 0.6*0.75 = 0.45 t/cm2
1.80
= 4 cm2
0.45

Agl =

Choose

45*45*5

Choose
=

Lbout
241
=
rv
0.2a

a = 12.05

80*80*8

241
= 155.48
1.55

Fc = 0.6 *
Fc =

4.5 + 12.05
= 8.2cm
2

aav =

= 100

7500
= 0.19 t/cm2
155.48

1.80
= 0.15 t/cm2
12.3

< Fc = 0.19 t/cm2

Safe & economic

Member 3:
Zero member

, L = 1.60 m

= 16 mm

amin = 3d*1.1 = 3*16*1.1 = 52.8 mm.

Vertical member at position of long. Bracing, we will use star shaped

55*55*5 min angle
Check: 2 angles star shape "flexural buckling"
Assume 2 tie plates
'out =

Lz = 160/3 = 53.33cm

Lbout
160
=
= 67.56 < 180
2.09
ru
2
3

= 53.3 / 1.07 = 49.8 < 60 & ( *67.56 = 45.04 )

use 3 tie plates

not ok

Lz = 160/4 = 40cm

14/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

z

2
3

= 40 / 1.07 = 37.4 < 60 & ( *67.56 = 45.04 ) ok

out

'
= (out
)2 + (z )2 = (67.56) 2 + (37.4)2 = 77.2 < 180

No check for

L
for vertical members
d

Example 2:

2.0

Design member 1:

1.5

Don't add long bracing

Economic design
It is required to design an economic
section for the marked member.

D.L.= -4t
L.L.= -6t
W.L.= -1t

Solution:
For Lin = 2 m, Lout = 8 m & we cannot add long bracing so the economic design
is to use an unequal angles
Case A = 4+6 = 10t

Case" A" 11
=
= 1.1 < 1.2
Case" B" 10

Case B = 10+1 = 11t

So the design force is 10t Case "A"

Choice of section:
Assume Fc = 0.75 t/cm2

= 100

10
2
= 13.3 cm
0.75

in

13.3
2
= 6.7 cm
2

out =

Choose
a1av =

200
= 100
0.28a1
800
=100
0.48a 2

a11 = 7.14 cm
a22 = 16.7 cm

80*40*6 a1=40, a2=80

4+7
= 5.5 cm
2

a2av =

8 + 16.7
= 12 cm
2

Use angle 120x80x8

15/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Note that:

Axis Y in tables is parallel to

long leg. In truss, we put long

leg horizontal to resist buckling

y
In tables

outside. So we draw "Y" axis as

Y
ex

x X
In truss

the horizontal axis.

Always buckling inside is about horizontal axis, while buckling outside is about
vertical axis. i.e. in this case

Lin
L
and out
ry
rx

Checks: 2 angles " flexural buckling and flexural torsional buckling"

1) ry (2 angles) = ry (1 angle) = 2.29 cm

in =

200
= 87.3 < 180
2.29

Fcx = 1.4 - 6.5*10-5*(87.33)2 = 0.9 t/cm2

2) rx (2 angles) =
/
out
=

3.82 2 + (0.5 + 3.83) 2 = 5.77cm

800
= 138.6 < 180
5.77

Assume 2 tie plate

z

2
rxL
+ (e x + 0.5) 2 =

Lz = 200/3 = 66.6cm
2
3

= 66.6 / 1.72 = 38.72 < 60 & ( *138.6 = 92.4 )

out

ok

= (138.6)2 + (38.72)2 = 143.9 < 180

Fcy =

7500
= 0.36t / cm 2
2
143.9

3) Xo = 0

& Y o = 1.87 cm

ro2 = x o2 + y o2 + rx2 + ry2 = 1.87 2 + 2.292 + 5.77 2

H =1 (

= 42 cm2

x o2 + y o2
1.87 2
)
=
1

(
) =0.916
ro2
42

J = 1 b t 3 = 1 2(12 0.83 + 8 0.83 ) = 8.53 cm4

3
3
Fcz =

0.58(

810 8.53
G J
) = 0.58(
)=
2
31 42
Ag ro

3.07 t/cm2
16/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Fcft = (
=(

Fcy + Fcz
2 H

) (1 (1

4 Fcy Fcz H
(Fcy + Fcz )2

))

0.36 + 3.07
4 0.36 3.07 0.916
) (1 (1
)) =
2 .916
(0.36 + 3.07) 2

0.3584 t/cm2

Fleast = 0.3584 t/cm2

fc =

10
= 0.32t / cm 2 < Fleast = 0.3584 t/cm2
2 * 15.5

safe

17/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Example 3:

2.00

1:10
+ 4t

- 4t

+8t

L6

L1

12x2.25 = 27.0m

The above figure shows an elevation of a factory building. The main system is
chosen as a steel truss. The truss members are welded to gusset plates except at
the position of field connections. Gusset plate thickness is 10 mm, and bolts
used at field connections are M16 non-pretensioned (d=16 mm). It is required
to:
1) Suggest suitable longitudinal bracing systems and propose the position of
field connections.
2) Design a suitable section for the lower chord member L6 (F = +20.0 t).
3) Design a suitable section for the lower chord member L1 (F = -3.0 t, case
).

1) Long. Br. Every 3a, field

2.00

Solution:

splice every 9m (4a)

L1

9.0m

Bolted] field connection

9.0m
F.C.

9.0m
F.C.

at column ]
2) Design of L1

Lower chord

lin = 225 cm

lout = distance between bracing = 3*225 = 675 cm

18/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Fc = 0.75*1.2 t/cm2

= 100
100 =

225
0.3a

a = 3.5 cm

100 =

675
0.45a

a = 15 cm

aav =

A=

3
/ 2 = 1.7cm 2
0.9

30*3

3.0 + 15
= 9cm
2

Use 90x90x90
Checks: 2 angles "flexural buckling and flexural torsional buckling"
1) rx

= 2.74 cm

x=

225
= 82.11 < 180
2.74

Fcx = 1.4 - 6.5*10-5*(82.11)2 = 0.96 t/cm2

= ( rx ) 2 + ( e +

2) ry
/
out
=

675
= 165.03 < 180
4.09

Assume 2 tie plate

z

2.74 2 + (0.5 + 2.54) 2 = 4.09 cm

tg 2
) =
2

Lz = 225/3 = 75cm
2
3

= 75 / 1.76 = 42.6 < 60 & ( *165.09 = 110.06 )

out

ok

= (165.03)2 + (42.6)2 = 170.43 < 180

Fcy =

7500
*1.2 = 0.3t / cm 2
170.432

3) Xo = 0

& Y o = 2.54 cm

ro2 = x o2 + y o2 + rx2 + ry2 = 2.542 + 2.74 2 + 4.09 2

H =1 (

= 30.68 cm2

x o2 + y o2
2.542
)
=
1

(
) =0.79
ro2
30.68

J = 1 b t 3 = 1 4(9 0.93 ) = 8.748 cm4

3
3
Fcz =

0.58(

810 8.748
G J
) = 0.58(
)=
2
31 30.68
A g ro

4.32 t/cm2

19/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Fcft = (
=(

Fcy + Fcz
2 H

) (1 (1

4 Fcy Fcz H
(Fcy + Fcz )2

))

0.3 + 4.32
4 0.3 4.32 0.79
) (1 (1
)) =
2 .79
(0.3 + 4.32) 2

0.29 t/cm2

Fleast = 0.295 t/cm2

3
= 0.0967 <
2*15.5

fc =

Fleast = 0.295 t/cm2

Design of L6:

65*7

A = 2*8.7 = 17.4 cm2

Welded

20
= 1.15t / cm 2 < 1.4t / cm 2
17.4

f=

L/d =

in

lower chord, welded

20
/ 2 = 7.14cm 2
1.4

A=

safe

out

225
= 34.6 < 60
6.5

225
= 115 < 300
1.96
675
1.96 + (0.5 + 1.85) 2
2

= 220

20/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

Example 4:
The figure shows an elevation of a car shed.
The main system is chosen as a cantilever
truss connected with a tie. The truss
members are welded to gusset plates,

+1
-3t 0t (C
(C as
ase e A
B) )

while the gusset plates are bolted at joints

1.6
D1

4.0m

5*1.8=9.0m

(b) and (d) to the column.

Gusset plate thickness is 10 mm, and bolts used are M 16 non-pretensioned
(d=16mm).
It is required to:
1) Suggest a suitable longitudinal bracing system
2) Design a suitable section for the tie member b-c.
3) Design a suitable section for the diagonal member

D1 = +8 t.

Solution:
1) Long. Bracing is as shown

Truss members are welded to gusset Pl

l=

4 2 + 6 2 = 7.21m > 5m
c

Long member use

Not

1.6

, if we use double angles

721
= 60
d

d = 12

Use

l
= 60 (max)
d

120*12

a
4.0m

5*1.8=9.0m

Too big

Design as Compression & Check as tension or vice versa (

Design as Comp. member:

Assume
a = 18.9

= 100 =

721
0.38a

Fc = 1.2*0.75 t/cm2 case

A=

3
/ 2 = 1.67cm 2 a =30mm
0.75 * 1.2

21/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

aav =

18.9 + 3
= 11cm
2

Use 110*10

Check: 2 angles star shape "flexural buckling"

Assume 11 tie plates
'out =

Lz = 721/12 = 60cm

Lbout
721
=
= 170.44 < 180
4.23
ru
2
3

= 60 / 2.16 = 27.77 < 60 & ( *170.44 = 113.62 )

out

'
= (out
)2 + (z )2 = (170.44)2 + (27.7) 2 = 172.67 < 180

Fc =1.2*
fc =

7500
= 0.26t / cm 2
2
172.67

3
= 0.07t / cm 2 safe
2 * 21.2

Check as tension member: (welded)

fact =

10
= 0.23t / cm 2 < 1.4t / cm 2
2 * 21.2

l
721
=
= 31 < 60
d 2 * 11 + 1
< 300

ok

safe [it's less than 180]

Design of diagonal: welded member

For D1

upper Point is fixed outside

Lower Point is not fixed (Comp. Chord)

lout= 1.2 L

L = 1.8 2 + 1.6 2 = 2.41m

lout= 2.892 m
Diagonal

try single angle

22/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Design of compression members

A=

8
= 6.7cm 2
1.4 * 0.85

60*6

Checks:
A1 = 6*0.6 = 3.6 cm2, A2 = (6-0.6) 0.6 = 3.24cm2
Anet = 3.6+
f t=
=

3*3.6
*3.24 = 6.09 cm2
3*3.6 + 3.24

8
= 1.31t / cm 2 < 1.4t / cm 2
6.09
289
= 247 < 300
1.17

l 241
=
= 40 < 60
d
6
Ok safe & economic

23/23 D.C.M.
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
The connection between the angles and the gusset plate is either bolted or
welded.
The welded connections are executed (

) in the shop (

) while the

bolted connections are in the field (except otherwise mentioned)

All the connections of truss are welded because the weld is cheaper and
easier. The only connections which are bolted are at the position of field
connections. The field connections are with the column and inside the truss
spaced maximum 12m (Not important to be at the position of longitudinal
bracing). This is for the reason of transmission of the welded parts from the shop
(

) to the field as one unit.

Bolted connections:
Types of bolts
Two types of bolts: non-pretensioned and pretensioned bolts.

Grades of bolts :
The values of the ultimate tensile strength Fub and the yield stress Fyb for various
bolt grades are given in the following table.

Bolt grade

4.6

4.8

5.6

5.8

6.8

8.8

10.9

Fub (t/cm2)

4.0

4.0

5.0

5.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

Fyb (t/cm2)

2.4

3.2

3.0

4.0

4.8

6.4

9.0

NOTE: The first number is the ultimate while the yield is the shown
percentage. i.e. for grade 5.6, the ultimate is 5 t/cm2 , while the yield is 0.6*5 =
3 t/cm2
Ordinary bolts of grade (4.6, 4.8, 5.6, 5.8 and 6.8) and High-strength bolts of
grade 8.8 and 10.9 can be used as non-pretensioned bolts, while only Highstrength bolts of grade 8.8 and 10.9 can be used as pretensioned bolts.
1/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Bolts arrangement:
1- Non-pretensioned bolts:
Gauge line: at

at
from the upper edge
2

End distance (e)

1.5 d e 12 t min

Pitch distance (p)

3.0 d p The minimum thickness of 14 tmin or 200mm

Where tmin = thinner part of the connected elements.

Difference between end distance and
edge distance
"e1" which is the distance between Center of
bolt & Edge Of angle in the direction of force
is called End distance
"e2" which is distance between Center of bolt & Edge Of angle in the direction
perpendicular to the direction of force is called Edge distance
"e1" and "e2" have same limits for maximum and minimum

Example: If 2 angles back to back 90*9 with a gusset plate

So tmin is 14*0.9 (minimum of 10 mm and 9mm) = 12.6 cm < 20 cm (200mm)
So Pmax = 126 mm
Minimum angle: From previous the minimum angle to be used in case of bolted
connections is:
amin = 1.5d *2 + tangle , since tangle = 0.1 a
so amin = 3d + 0.1 a

0.9 amin = 3d
2/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
So amin = 3d * 1.1

as shown in design of tension and compression

For bolt M16, d=16mm, amin = 3*1.6*1.1 = 5.3 cm = 53 mm

So use angle 55*55*5
Arranging angles in more than one gauge line:
We may either arrange the bolts in two gauge line or staggered as shown

Minimum angle: From previous the minimum angle to be used in case of bolted
connections is:
amin = 1.5d + 3d + 1.5d + tangle , since tangle = 0.1 a
so amin = 6d + 0.1 a

0.9 amin = 6d

So amin = 6d * 1.1
For bolt M16, d=16mm, amin = 6*1.6*1.1 = 10.6cm = 106 mm
So use angle 110*110*10

NOTE: The staggered is preferred than 2 gauge lines (although they have the
same minimum angle) because in designing the tension member, there will be
one bolt in each critical section for case of staggered, while there will be 2 bolts
in case of 2 gauge lines.

Example: Check the stress of 2 angles back to back 110*10 with tension force =
50t and has 2 gauge lines or 2 gauge lines staggered, Bolt used is M16.
Solution:
2 gauge lines:
Anet = 2*(21.2 - 2*1.8*1) = 35.2 cm2
Check stress f= 50/35.2 = 1.42 t/cm 2 unsafe
3/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
2 gauge lines staggered:
Anet = 2*(21.2 -*1.8*1) = 38.8 cm2
Check stress f= 50/38.8 = 1.28 t/cm2 safe

A-Design of non-pretensioned bolts

1-Non-pretension bolts subjected to shear:
For this type of bolts the forces acting transverse (perpendicular) to the shank of
bolt are transmitted either by shear on the shank or bearing on the connected
parts. (Note that: the forces perpendicular to the axis of bolt is shear).

NOTE: If the bolts appear as cross (+) in the page so its axis is perpendicular to
the page, and the acting forces is in the plan of the page, so the acting force is
shear.
Design of bolted connection subjected to shear:
Note that:
In bolts we usually use forces not stresses.
(Allowable stress given in the code * area of bolt)
Different modes of failures due to shear and bearing:.
1)

Failure by single shear or bearing in plates 1 or 2

2)

Failure by double shear or bearing in plates 1& 3 or 2

4/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
3)

Failure by Single shear or bearing in plates 2& 3 or 1

4)

Failure by 3 shear or bearing in plates 1& 3 or 1 & 4

a-Failure by shear : Rsh = A qb

For single shear

where:
Rsh
A
qb

Fub

Resistance of one bolt for shear stress on the bolt

d2
4

bolt diameter

= 0.25 Fub

for bolts grade (4.6, 5.6, & 8.8)

= 0.2 Fub

for bolts grade (4.8, 5.8, 6.8, & 10.9)

ultimate normal stress for bolts taken from the previous table

i.e. Rsh = (0.2 or 0.25) * Fub *

Rdouble shear = 2* Rsh

d2
4

R4 shear = 4* Rsh

b-Failure by bearing in angle or gusset plate: Rb = Abearing Fb

where:
Rb

resistance of one bolt for bearing stress on the connected plates

Abearing

d tmin

diameter of bolt
5/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
tmin

The smallest sum of plate thickness in the same direction

Fb

allowable bearing stress for plates = Fu

factor depends on end distance taken from the following table
End distance in direction of force
e 1.5d

e 2.0d

e 2.5d

e 3.0d

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

Where Fu = 3.6 t/cm2 for steel 24/37 that we are using.

Assume end distance = 2d, so " " will be equal to 0.8.
i.e. Rb = d

min

* 0.8 * 3.6

c-Calculation of number of bolts required:

No of bolts for shear =N =

Force
R least

Where:
Rleast is the minimum of Rsh or Rb
For design: Always the single angle is single shear, 2 angles back to back is
double shear, while star shaped is single shear for half the force in one angle.
Minimum number of Bolts:
2 in one gauge line.

Maximum number of Bolts: (long joint)

Maximum number of bolts in one gauge is 6 bolts with allowable Rleast. If
the number increased, the allowable of one bolt will be reduced from Rl to be
Rl where = 1-

Li 15d i
200d

0.75

Where Li is the distance between the center of the first and last bolt.
When we have large number of bolts, we arrange them on minimum pitch
which is 3d so
Li = (n -1) 3d, where n is number of bolts
6/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example: Calculate the actual force that a bolt can carry if:
Rl = 4.02 t

, n = 8 bolts

Solution: Q n > 6 bolts

Li =7*3*d =21 d
21d 15d
= 0.97
200d

B =1 -

The allowable of one bolts is 0.97 Rl

nnew =

F
Rl

Important note: The reduction factor does not reduce the number of bolts, but
it reduces the allowable of one bolt.

First: Design of connections with discontinuous chord (simple connection):

The connection is NOT continuous:
If the 2 numbers are not of same section
If the 2 numbers are not of same straight line

F2

60*6

80*8

F1

F2

F4

60*6

F4

F3

55*5

60
*6

F3

55*5

F4

F3

80*8

F1

F2

60
*6

55*5

If there is field connection at this position

80*8

80*8

F1

position of
field connection

For member (1)

n1 =

F1
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb

and

tangles

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or 2*

F4

F3
F2

60
*6

60*6

55*5

Design:

80*8

F1

7/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
For member (2)

n2 =

F2
(same as member 1)
Rl

For member (3)

n3 =

F3
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RSS or Rb and

For member (4)

n4 =

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or tangle

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or tangle

F4 / 2
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RSS or Rb and

Second: Design of connections with continuous chord:

The vertical and diagonal are designed as before. The only difference is
for chord in which the designed force is the Max difference between the 2
members which is the greatest of
(a) F1 F2
(b) F3 cos (can be neglected)
Design: For members (1) and (2) continuous
nchord =

F1 F2
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb and

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or 2*

tangles
Calculation of n3 and n4 is as before in case of simple joint because they
are not continuous.

8/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
In case when the two forces of chord

happens near the column) in which one is

60

tension and the other is compression

F2

Fdes = F1 + F2

F5

F3
F2

60*6

60*6

F2

F1

Fdes = F2 F1

*6

80*8

80*8

F5

F3

F4
2

F4

F3

members are of opposite signs (this usually

55*5

Notes:

F4
2

60*6

60*6

F1

Fdes = F1 + F2

Or = F3cos 1 +F4cos 2

or = F3cos 1 - F4cos 2

We take the bigger values

How to draw the connection:

joints

members

( Center Line)

( chord members)
(vertical members )

eav
(diagonals)

9/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

F1

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
eav

20mm

eav

a1- e av

a2- e av

a1- e av

a2- e av

eav

eav
20mm
Upper chord

Lower chord

G. P.

(V l & D l )
(

) (C .L)

a/2
a/2

clear distance ( a-t)

G.P

members

gauge line

members

G.P.

member
G.P L.

Pmin & emin

member
G.PL

members

Pmin & emin

Pmin & emin

.members

members

members
G.PL

Pmin & emin

member
10/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
180 0

G.PL

G.PL
150
members

( )

members
(

G.PL

gauge line

RL)

(Long joint

n = 6 bolts)

bolts M16 mm (grade 4.6)

9t

- Draw the connection to scale 1: 10

Data: Steel used is st. 37
G.PL = 10 mm

15t

Solution:
Rs.s= (

9t
4
80 3
*8

2
60*6

60*6

Example 1: Design the connection shown in the figure, using non-pretension

1
80*8

(1.6) 2
d 2
(0.25*4.0) = 2.01 ton
) (0.25 Fub) =
4
4

RD.S = 2 RS.S = 4.02 ton

If edge distance 2 d = 0.80
Rb (tG.pl.=10mm) = (d t) ( Fu ) = (1.6*1.0)(0.8*3.6) = 4.61 ton
Member (1):

80*80*8 (back to back) tmin = tGPL = 10 mm

Rl is minimum of 4.02 and 4.61

n1 =

21
= 5.22 n1 = 6 bolts
4.02

Member (2)

60*60*6 (back to back) tmin = tG = 10 mm

11/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

21t

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Rl is minimum of 4.02 and 4.61
n2 =

15
= 3.7 n2 = 4 bolts
4.02

Member (3)

80*80*8 (single angle)

tmin = 8 mm

Rb = (1.6*0.8)(0.8*3.6) = 3.69t
Rl is minimum of 2.01 and 3.69
9
= 4.5
2.01

n3 =

Member (4)

n3 = 5 bolts

60*60*6 (star shaped)

tmin = 6 mm

Rb = (1.6*0.6)(0.8*3.6) = 2.76t
Rl is minimum of 2.01 and 2.76
n4=
or n4=

9/2
= 2.24
2.01

9
= 4.47
2.01

3 each side

6 blots

3 blots / each angle

emin = 2*16 = 32 mm 35 mm

50
35

x8
80

70 35

star 60x6

Pmin = 3*16 = 48 mm 50 mm

50

35 70

50
5
50 3

2L 60x6

37

75

75

75

37 35

50 50 50 50 50

2L 80x8
35

12/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example 2: Design the connection shown

M16 mm (grade 4.6). G.PL = 10 mm

Solution: Rs.s = 2.01t

&

-20t

90*9 1

70
*7
4
3
-10t

55*5

in the figure, using non-pretension bolts

RD.S = 4.02t

& Rb (tG =10 mm) = 4.61t ( e 2 d )

7t

Chord members (continuous connection)

Fdes = 25 20 = 5 t
Or 7 cos 45 = 4.95
nch =

5
= 1.24 nch = 2 bolts (Note if F1=F2 so nch = 0 taken 2 min
4.02

Member (3)
55*55*5
n3 =

tmin = 10 mm

10
= 2.5
4.02

n3 = 3 bolts

Member (4)
70*70*7
& n4 =

7
= 3.5
2.01

tmin = 7 mm

Rb = 3.23 t

n4 = 4 bolts

steel
Corrugated
m thick
m
.5
0
s
t
e
e
sh

40

105

40

105
25

25
50

60

50

60

50

35

35

2L
x7
70

2L 60x6

2L 70x7

2L 70x7

13/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

-25t

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
in the figure, using non-pretension bolts

9t

M16 mm (grade 4.6)

Data: Steel used is st. 37

25t

G.PL = 10 mm

80 3
*
2 8

60*6

Solution:
Rs.s= (

9t
4

60*6

Example 3: Design the connection shown

28t

80*8

(1.6) 2
d 2
(0.25*4.0) = 2.01 ton
) (0.25 Fub) =
4
4

RD.S = 2 RS.S = 4.02 ton

If edge distance 2 d = 0.80
Rb (tG.pl.=10mm) = (d t) ( Fu ) = (1.6*1.0)(0.8*3.6) = 4.61 ton
Member (1):
n1 =

80*80*8 (back to back) tmin = tGPL = 10 mm

28
= 6.96 n1 = 7 bolts > 6 so the bolt resistance is Rl
4.02

Li = 6*3d = 18d
n1 =

18d 15d
=0.985
200d

= 1-

21d 15d
=0.97
200d

60*60*6 (back to back) tmin = tG = 10 mm

25
= 6.22 n2 = 7 bolts >6
4.02

Li = 6*3d = 18d
n1 =

= 1-

28
= 7.18 n1 = 8 bolts
0.97 * 4.02

Member (2)
n2 =

28
= 7.07 n1 = 8 bolts
0.985 * 4.02

Li = 7*3d = 21d
n1 =

= 1-

18d 15d
=0.985
200d

25
= 6.31 n1 = 7 bolts
0.985 * 4.02

Member (3)

80*80*8 (single angle)

tmin = 8 mm

Rb = (1.6*0.8)(0.8*3.6) = 3.69t

14/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
9
= 4.5
2.01

n3 =

Member (4)

n3 = 5 bolts

60*60*6 (star shaped)

tmin = 6 mm

Rb = (1.6*0.6)(0.8*3.6) = 2.76t

or n4=

9/2
= 2.24
2.01

9
= 4.47
2.01

3 each side

6 blots 3 blots / each angle

Example 4: Design the connection shown in the

figure, using non-pretension bolts M18 mm

-6t
3

8t
55 2
*5

(grade 5.8). G.PL = 10 mm

Solution:
The forces shown are of only one side, but

20t

60*6

n4=

1
80*8

we have to deduce that the other side is

symmetric because this inclination must be in the middle of truss.

*1.82 * 0.2*5 = 2.54 t

4

Rss =

Rds = 2.54 *2 = 5.09 t

Assume end distance = 2d = 2*1.8 = 3.6 cm
Rb (in case of 2 angles) where

tmin =1 cm

Rb = 1.8*1*(0.8*3.6) = 5.18 t
Member (1) n1= 20 = 3.9 taken 4 bolts
5.09

Member (2)

tmin =0.5 cm

Rb =1.8 *0.5 (0.8*3.6) =2.59 t

n2 =

8
= 3.14
2.54

Member (3)
n3 =

taken 4 bolts

star shape

6/2
= 1.18 taken 2 bolts each angle
2.54

15/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example 5:

55 2
*
1 5

position of field connection

60*6

8t
20t

-6t
3

80*8

Design connection "A" shown in the figure, using non-pretension bolts M18 mm
(grade 5.8). G.PL = 10 mm. Connection "A" is at position of field splice.
Solution:
Although the 2 member are on same straight line & of same section, but it's a
position of field connection, so they must be simple (separate). So n1, n2 and n3
are the same as been calculated in the previous example.

Example 6:

-3t

80 3
*8

5 -5t

60
*

6t

55*5

-1t
4

5t
60*6

For the shown connection it's required to design it using M16 grade 4.8

Solution:
Q The chord has same section, so it will be continuous

Rss = (0.2*4)

* 1.6 2
= 1.61 t
4

Rds = 2*1.61 = 3.22 t

Assume end distance = 2*d = 2*1.6 = 3.2
Rb for 2 angles = (0.8*3.6)*1.6*1 = 4.61 t
16/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Lower chord
Fdes = 5+3 = 8 t
8
= 2.48
3.22

nch =

taken 3 bolts

Member (3)
Rb = (0.8*3.6) *0.8*1.6 = 3.69 t
n3 =

6
= 3.7
1.61

taken 4 bolts

Member (4)
Rb = (0.8*3.6) *0.5 *1.6 = 2.3 t
n4 =

1
= 0.62
1.61

taken 2 bolts

Member (5)
n5 =

5
= 1.55
3.22

taken 2 bolts

2-Non-pretension bolts subjected to tension:

The tension force is the force affecting in the direction of the bolt axis
(parallel to the axis of the bolt). Always the allowable force of the bolt is the
allowable stress given in the code x its effective area. In tension the effective
area is "0.7A" because of the thread.
Rt = Atension Ftb
where:
Rt

resistance of one bolt for tension stress on the bolt

Atension

bolt cross section area subjected to tension = 0.7

bolt diameter

Ftb

allowable tensile stress for bolt = 0.33 Fub

Rt = 0.33Fub*0.7

No of bolts required =n=

d2
4

d2
4

Force
Rt
17/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example 7:
Design the connection between the lower chord and the column shown in figure

95

50

using M18 grade 5.8. Force in lower chord is 10t tension.

50

[ 160

2L 70x7
10t

L 80x8

Solution: The bolts connecting the truss angles with the gusset plate, and that
connecting the gusset plate to the framing angles subjected to double shear.
RDS = 2*

1 .8 2
*0.2*5= 5.08t
4

Rb = (0.8*3.6)*1.8*1=5.18t
n=

10
= 1.97 taken 2 bolts
5.08

For bolts connecting the framing angles to the column flange, the force is
parallel to the axis of the bolt, so the force is tension
Rt = 0.33*5*0.7*
n=

1 .8 2
= 2.94t
4

10
= 3.4 taken 4 bolts, 2 each side
2.94

Note that: In this example some bolts are subjected to shear, while others are
subjected to tension. There are no bolts subjected to shear and tension at the
same time.

18/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
3-Non-pretension bolts subjected to tension and shear:
If we have set of forces we have to analyze them all in 2 directions, one
parallel to the bolt and produce tension, while the other perpendicular to the
bolt and produce shear.
NOTE: If the bolts appear as cross (+) in the page so its axis is perpendicular to
the page, and the acting forces is in the plan of the page, so the acting force is
shear. To design them we have to get the resultant either graphically or
analytically.
The choice of the bolts subjected to combined tension and shear is
determined by the following equation
n= ( Ntension ) 2 + ( N shear )2
Nshear = No of bolts for shear =
Rsh

Q
ShearForce
=
R sh
Rsh

= Ashear qbolt

Ntension = No of bolts for tension =

Tension Force Text

=
Rt
Rt

Rtension = Atension Ftb

Check

(Force in one bolt due to shear/ Allowable of one bolt in shear)2

+ (Force in one bolt due to tension/Allowable of one bolt in tension)2

(

Q / N 2 Text / N 2
) +(
) 1.0
Rt
R
sh

Where:
Text

external applied tension force

external applied shear force

Rsh

(0.2 or 0.25)*Fub*

Rt

0.33*Fub*

d2
which is allowable of shear of 1 bolt
4

d2
*0.7 which is allowable of tension of 1 bolt
4

19/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example 8:
Design the connection between the upper chord and the column shown in figure
using M16 grade 4.6. Forces of diagonal and chord are shown.
[ 160
47

2L 80*8 -2t

95

n2

[ 160

n4

n3

1:10

1.5

n1

47

95

L 80x8

1.3

-2t
10
t

80
x8

10

2L 60x6

Solution: The bolts connecting the upper chord with the gusset plate, and that
connecting the gusset plate to the framing angles subjected to double shear.
n1(connecting diagonal to G.Pl.):
Rs.s.= (

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 2.01 ton
4

(e 2 =0.8)

Rl = 2.01

Rb = (0.8*1.6) (0.8*3.6) = 3.456 ton

n1=

10
= 4.98
2.01

take n1 = 5 bolts

n2(connecting chord to G.Pl.):

RD.S. = 2*2.01 = 4.02 t
Rb = (1.0*1.6) (0.8 *3.6) = 4.32 t
n2 =

2
= 0.5
4.02

take n2 = 2 bolts

n3 (connecting G.PL. to framing angles), they are subjected to

double shear or bearing of the 2 angles and gusset plate

20/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Inclination of upper chord with horizontal

Or graphically

=tan-1(1/10) =5.71o

2t

Angle of chord with vertical = tan-1(1.5/1.3) = 49 o

T = 10 sin49o - 2 cos5.71 o = 5.56t
o

49
10t

Q = 10 cos49 + 2 sin5.71 = 6.76t

R= 5.56 2 + 6.76 2 = 8.75t
n3 =

8.75
= 2.18
4.02

take n2 = 3 bolts

n4 (connecting framing angles to the flange of the column), they are

subjected to single shear and tension at the same time.
We can either assume n4 = 2* n3 = 2*3=6 bolts & check
Where Rt = 0.33*4*0.7*

(1.6) 2
= 1.86t
4

Or use the equation n= ( N tension ) 2 + ( N shear ) 2 = (

6.76 2
5.56 2
) =4.5 bolt
) +(
2.01
1.86

Taken 6 bolts (even number) 3 each side

n4 = 6 bolts

Interaction equation = (

6.76 / 6 2
5.56 / 6 2
) = 0.56 < 1.00
) +(
2.01
1.86

o.k.

Note that: In the interaction equation we use Rshear even if the bearing is less
than shear, because we are studying the bolt which is subjected to shear and
tension not the plates.
We have to draw the upper shown connection in the example with the
calculated number of bolts and full dimensions.

Important note: When the bolts are subjected to compression, the compression
force is to be neglected (it's carried by bearing) and use minimum number of
bolts. Also if the bolts are subjected to shear and compression, the compression
forces are neglected and design the bolts for shear only.
21/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Example 9:
Design the connection between the lower chord and the column shown in figure

2L 70x7

95

50

using M16 grade 4.6. Force in lower chord is 5t compression.

50

[ 160

5t

L 80x8

Solution: RDS = 4.02 t

Rb = (0.8 * 3.6) (1 * 1.6) = 4.61 t
n1 (between chord and gusset plate) are subjected to shear
n1 =

5
= 1.24
4.02

taken 2 bolts

For n2 between column and T section are subjected to compression

n2 = minimum 4 bolts (2 each side)

22/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
If there is concentrated load on a joint of truss as in case of monorail
hanged from a truss joint:

The forces are transmitted from the I-beam of

the monorail to the angles of the lower chord to the
gusset plate.

Case - 1 If the connection is separate:

50
35

x8
80

d 2
* 0.7
4

50
50

Where RT = 0.33 Fub

35 70

T
RT
4

star 60x6

We have to check that:

n
2

5
50 3

F
2

70 35

n1 (Bolts connecting beam to lower leg of angles) must be 4 bolts only

n
1

2L 60x6

n 2L 80x8
3
F
1

2 Calculate n2 and n3 on the

Resultant force (subjected to shear
in different direction where
R2 =

F + (T / 2 )

R3 =

F12 + (T / 2 ) 2

n2 =

2
2

R2
,
Rl

n3 =

R3
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb with

min

= tgusset plate or 2 tangles

23/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1

n2 is designed on the Resultant

star 60x6

n1 are the same as before

x8
80

force

50
35
50

35 70

50

R = ( F1 F2 ) 2 + T 2
R
Rl

n
2

5
50 3

n2 =

where Rl is the

minimum of RDS or Rb with

min

F
2

70 35

Case-2 If the connection is continuous:

n
1

2L 80x8

2L 80x8

F
1

= tgusset plate or 2 tangles

Example 10:
For the shown truss it's required to: [In both cases]

1:20

8t

Q1

M3
M2
22t
70*7

+25.5
M1

1.25

-5t

connection

-5t

8t

M2
22t
80*8

10*2m

Q2

M3

+25.5
M1

a) Design member (1) as Tension member

b) Design member (2) as Compression member
c) Design member (3) as Tension member
d) Design the connection using M 16 grade 4.8

24/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Solution: For Q1:
- Assume longitudinal bracing is as shown (If it's not given)

Design of member (1)

Q (d) says use M 16
It's bolted member with non-pretension bolts

A =

25.5
= 21.42 cm 2
0.85 * 1.4

A = 10.7 cm2

80 *8 > 3 * 1.6 *1.1 = 5.3 cm

O.K.

Check
1 Anet = 2 [12.3 1.8 * 0.8 ] = 21.72 cm 2
F
25.5
=
= 1.17 t / cm 2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
A
21.72

23

O.K.

l 200
=
= 25 < 60
d
8
in

out

200
= 82.6 < 300
2.42

400
2.42 2 + (0.5 + 2.26) 2

= 109 < 300

O.K.

Use one tie plate at mid span

Design of member (2)

l = 1.25 +

6
= 1.55 m
20

lin = lout = 1.55 m

design as star shape [ at position of long bracing ]
f = 0.75 t / cm2
A=

5
= 6.7 cm 2
075

A = 3.33 cm2

= 100
100 =

155
0.38a

a = 4.0 cm

a = 4.5
25/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
4 .5 + 4
= 4.5
2

aav =

amin = 3 * 1.6 * 1.1 = 5.3 cm

use Star shape 55*5

Checks 2 angles star shape "flexural buckling"

Assume 2 tie plates
'out =

Lz = 155/3 = 51.666cm

Lbout
155
=
= 74 < 180
2.09
ru
2
3

= 51.6 / 1.07 = 48.2 < 60 & ( *74 = 49.33 )

out

'
= (out
)2 + (z )2 = (74) 2 + (48.2) 2 = 88.31 < 180

Fc = 1.4 6.5 *10-5 (88.31)2 = 0.89 t / cm2

fact =

5
= 0.47 t / cm 2 < 0.89 t / cm2 safe and waste
2 * 5.32

But we cannot use smaller angle because we are already using min. angle
Design of member 3
Use single angle
A=

8
= 8.8 cm2
0.65 * 1.4

Use 65 *7 < 80*8

Check

O.K.

min angle 55x55x5

A1 = (6.5 1.8) 0.7 = 3.29 cm 2

A2 = (6.5 0.7) 0.7 = 4.06 cm2
Anet = 3.29 +

3 * 3.29
* 4.06= 6.17 cm2
3 * 3.29 + 4.06

(1)

F
8
=
= 1.3 t / cm 2
A 6.17

(2)

l 247
=
= 38 < 60
d 6.5

< 1.4

O.K.

Where l = 2 2 + 1.45 2 = 2.47

(3)

out

247
= 100 < 300
2.47

26/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Design of connection
Q Right side

80 & left side

70

Discontinuous connection

Rss =

* 1.6 2
*0.2 * 4 = 1.61 t
4

Rds = 1.61*2 = 3.22 t

For bearing
= 0.6 &

Take

65*7 Rb = 0.6 *3.6*1.6*0.7 = 2.4 t > 1.61 t

For
n1 =

e = 1.5 d

25.5
= 7.92
3.22

n2 =

22
= 6.8
3.22

n3 =

5
= 1.55
3.22

n4 =

8
= 5 bolts
1.61

O.K.

take 8 bolts > 6

take 7 bolts > 6
take 4 bolts min., 2 each angle

For n1 & n2 of lower chord

Try staggered

6*1.6*1.1 = 10.56 110*10

Use reduction factor

Li = 7*3d = 21d

=1-

n1 =
correct

21d 15d
= 0.97
200d

25.5
= 8.17
0.97 * 3.22

=1 -

n1 corret =

taken 9 bolts Li = 8*3d = 24d

24d 15d
= 0.955
200d

25.5
= 8.3 bolts
0.955 * 3.22

taken 9 bolts

O.K.

For n2 7 bolts Li =6*3d = 18d

=1-

18d 15d
= 0.985
200d

27/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
22
= 6.94
0.985 * 3.22

taken 7 bolts

e = 2 d = 2*1.6 =3.2 cm

& Pmin =3d = 3*1.6 = 4.8cm

n2 =

O.K.

& Pmax 65*7= 14*0.7 = 9.8 cm & Pmax 55*5= 14*0.5 = 7 cm

Solution: For Q2:

The design of members 1, 2 & 3 is the same but for connection:
Q The angles at left & right connection are

80

So Assume the connection is not at position of field splice

continuous
For lower chord; Fdes = 25.5 22 = 3.5 t
8 cos
= tan-1
n=

= 6.47 t

1.45
= 36
2

6.47
= 2 bolts
3.22

For n3 & n4 are the same

Important example: For the previous example Q1 &Q2, Add a monorail at the
joint "A" of weight 10 t
Question (1), discontinuous
F for member 25.5 t 5 2 + 25.5 2 = 26 t
n1 =

26
= 8.07
3.22

get

-------

taken 9 bolts

F for member 25.5 t 5 2 + 22 2 = 22.56 t

n2 =

22.56
= 7 bolts
3.22

get

-------

For bolts subjected to tension;

d = 16
28/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Non-pretensioned bolts - 1
Ft =0.7 *

* 1.6 2
* 0.33 *4 = 1.86 t
4

nrequired =

10
= 6 bolts >4
1.86

Note that: we cannot use 2 bolts in the same side, because the angle and half the
flange of the I-beam is smaller than 6d*1.1
SO get new d
i.e. each bolt has 10 / 4 = 2.5 t
*d2
*0.33*4 = 2.5
4

0.7 *

d = 1.86 cm

use M 20

Question (2): Continuous

t

Fdesign = 6.47 if there is no monorail

R =
n =

6.47 2 + 10 2 = 11.9 t

11.9
= 3.7
3.22

taken 4 bolts

When to use Area of bolt & when to use 0.7 Area?

The bolt consists of 2 parts, shank part & thread part.
For bolt (1): AT = 0.7 A
(1)

Ashear=A

(2)
thread

For bolt (2): AT = 0.7 A

Ashear=0.7A

thread

Shank

plan of shear (A)

(+)
T

Plan "A" is plan of

Tension force (stress)

shear in shark part

distribution on bolt
29/29 D.O.C.1
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
SPLICES
We usually use splices if it's required to decrease number of bolts in one
row, or it's required that the maximum number of bolts in one row is ---- bolt
(mostly it will be 6 bolts). This will be instead of using

in long joints.

Types of splices:
1. Horizontal splice
2. Vertical splice

1) Horizontal splice:
Important note: Horizontal splices used in lower chord only
In this type we assume that half the smaller force transmitted to the splice
plate through bolts with single shear, while the other half will be transmitted to
the gusset plate through bolts with double shear.
In all the explanations, we assume that F2 is smaller than F1
The forces are transmitted in the system as shown:

F2

F2/2
F2/2

Gusset plate

F1-F2 /2
F1

Splice plate

F2/2

1/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2

n
n

1
Elevation

Plan

Design steps: Assume tsplice = 10mm = 1cm (minimum 8mm)

Fsplice =

Fsmaller F2
=
2
2

nsp =

Fsplice
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RSS or Rb and

tmin is the least of tsplice plate or tangle

The number of bolts in splice plate must be equal in both sides

n1 =

F2 Fsplice
Rl

F2 / 2
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb and

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or

2tangles
n2 =

F1 Fsplice
Rl

F1 F2 / 2
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb and

2tangles
n1 and n2 are equal if F1 and F2 are equal

Check stresses on splice plate: The splice carry half the smaller force F2/2
Where plate width b = 2a+1 (under 2 legs and gusset), d' = d+0.2
f=

Fsp

(bsp 2d ) * t sp
/

1.4 t / cm (st. 37)

2/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2

As shown, when the lower chord is inclined at the middle of the truss, we
have to put the 2 separate splice plates on the angle. This is because if we put
the plate under the lower chord, the tension in the 2 angles will make tension on
the bolts & we didn't design the bolts to carry tension.
To design this splice: The design procedures are the same to get nsp, n1,
and n2, because the 2 splice plates together carry half the force. The only
difference is the dimensions of the splice plate where b = 0.8a (because we put
it over angle). Since splice carry F2/2 so every plate carry F2/4
f=

Fsp = F2 / 4
(bsp d ) * t sp
/

1.4 t / cm , where b = 0.8a

zero
55*5

Example 1: For the shown connection it is

required to design and draw to scale 1:10 a
discontinuous bolted connection at the
position of field connection using non-

30t

pretension bolts M16

80*8

90*9

35t

(1.6) 2
Solution: RD.S =2(
) (0.25*4) = 4.02 ton
4

Rb = (1.6*1.0) (0.8*3.6) = 4.61 ton

nch =

30
= 7.46 > 6 bolts
4.02

If two rows with staggered arrangement amin = 6*1.6*1.1= 10.56>8

We have to use horizontal. Splice

3/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
Fsp =

Fmin 30
= 15 ton
=
2
2

Q Rs.s.= (
nsp =

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 2.01 ton
4

15
= 7.46 take 8 bolts
2.01

n1 =

30 15
= 3.7 nch = 4 bolts
4.02

n2 =

35 15
= 4.97 nch = 5 bolts
4.02

( 4 bolts / each angle )

Check on splice
b sp =2*9 +1 = 19 cm
tsp =1 cm
f=

15
=0.97 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2, we may try t = 8mm
(19 2 * 1.8)(1)

zero
55*5

Example 2: For the shown connection it is

required to design and draw to scale 1:10 a
discontinuous bolted connection at the
position of field connection using non-

30t

pretension bolts M16

Solution: RD.S =2(

80*8

80*8

30t

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 4.02 ton
4

Rb = (1.6*1.0) (0.8*3.6) = 4.61 ton

4/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
nch =

30
= 7.46 > 6 bolts
4.02

If two rows with staggered arrangement amin = 6*1.6*1.1= 10.56>8

We have to use horizontal. Splice

Fsp =

Fmin 30
=
= 15 ton
2
2

Q Rs.s.= (
nsp =

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 2.01 ton
4

15
= 7.46 take 8 bolts
2.01

n1 = n2 =

( 4 bolts / each angle )

30 15
= 3.7 nch = 4 bolts
4.02

Check on splice
b sp =0.8*8 = 6.4 cm
tsp =1 cm
f=

30 / 4
=1.63 t / cm2 > 1.4, Try 12 mm thickness
(6.4 1.8)(1)

gusset
(

) staggered

splice
tension member

i.e. for case the 2 bolts are in same section

Anet = 2(Atable 2 d ' t)

5/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
While if we make them staggered

OR

Anet = 2(Atable d ' t) (as designed in tension member)

2) Vertical splice:
Important note: Vertical splices can be used in upper and lower chord, except if
the lower chord is inclined.
In this type we assume that the smaller force transmitted to the 2 splice
plates and the gusset plate through bolts with 4 shear, while the difference
between bigger and smaller force will be transmitted to the gusset plate through
bolts with double shear.
In all the explanations, we assume that F2 is smaller than F1
The forces are transmitted in the system as shown:
R2S

Gusset plate
F2

F2

R4S

R4S
Splice plate

F2

F1-F2

F1

n
n

diff

Design steps: Assume tsplice = 10mm = 1cm (minimum 8mm)

Fsplice = Fsmaller = F2

6/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
Fsplice

nsp =

Rl

(the number of bolts in both sides of the splice must be

equal)
Where Rl is the minimum of R4S or Rb and

tmin is the least of 2tsplice plate+

tmin is the least of tgusset plate or

tgusset plate or 2tangle

ndiff =

F1 F2
Rl

Where Rl is the minimum of RDS or Rb and

2tangles

ndiff equals to zero if the 2 forces are equal. The minimum of ndiff is not 2. This
means if ndiff = 0.6, we take it 1 bolt.
Check stresses on splice plate: Although we design with the total smaller force
F2 because the bolt is working in 4 planes (R4S), but the splice carry half the
smaller force F2/2 (as in case of horizontal splice) because the bolt is working
with 4 planes of shear (2 in contact with gusset plate and 2 in contact with
splice plate). Since splice carry F2/2 so every plate carry F2/4
f=

Fsp = F2 / 4
(bsp d / ) * t sp

1.4 t / cm , where b = 0.8a, d' = d+0.2 `

Note: The splice plate or plates always carry (Fsmaller/2) in both vertical and
horizontal splices. If we have only one splice plate as in case of horizontal splice
under the leg, so it carry the total force (Fsmaller/2). If we have 2 splice plates as
in case of horizontal splice over the leg or in case of vertical splice, every splice
will be carrying (Fsmaller/4).

7/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
Example 3: Design the shown connection

90*9
2
one row is 6M16 grade 4.6 of non- -28t
pretensioned bolts. Draw to scale 1:10 the
designed connection.
Solution:

RD.S =2(

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) =
4

90*9
1
7t 70*
7
3
4
-10t

-32t

55*5

given that the maximum number of bolts in

4.02 ton
Rb = (1.6*1.0) (0.8*3.6) = 4.61 ton
32
= 7.96 > 6 bolts in one row
4.02

nch =

So we have to use splice. Since this is an upper chord, so we have to use vertical
splice.
Fsp = Fmin = 28 t
Assume tGPL =10 mm & tsp = 10 mm
tmin = 2*0.7 = 1.4cm or 1+2*1 = 3cm
R4s = 4 (

taken 1.4 cm

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 8.04 t
4

Rb = (1.6*1.4) (0.8 *3.6) = 6.45 t

nsp =

28
= 4.3 nsp = 5 bolts
6.45

to get ndiff
RD.S = 2 (

(1.6) 2
) (0.25*4) = 4.02t
4

Rb = (1.6*1.0) (0.8 *3.6) = 4.61t

ndiff =

32 28
= 0.99 ndiff = 1 bolt
4.02

Design of splice plate: Fsp = 28/4 = 7t (compression force, so use Agross)

b sp = 0.8*7 = 5.6cm
f=

7
2
2
= 1.25 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm
5.6 * 1

8/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
steel
Corrugated
thick
m
m
.5
0
s
t
e
she
[ 160
8
x
L 80
53 53

65
27 33 65 65 65

Note that: If the upper chord is inclined, the lower edge of the splice must
be straight so that the internal angle does not exceed 180 o, so the connection will
be as shown below:

[ 160
L 80x8
2L 80x8

L 80x8
25
50

2L 80x8

9/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
If the lower chord is inclined, we can not use horizontal bracing because
the internal angle will be larger than 1800, so we have to use horizontal splice.

>180

In general, always use vertical splice with upper chord & horizontal splice
with lower chord. Except if it's required something else

Note that: We don't make splices between 2 members if:

1. The 2 members are continuous
2. The 2 members have the different signs. i.e. (one tension & the other
compression and this usually happens near the column).

10/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
given that the maximum number of bolts

-60t

90*9

in one row is 6 pretensioned M16 grade

10.9.

55*5

Example 4: Design the shown connection

-10t
Solution:
nch =

60
= 9.5bolt > 6 bolts in one row
2 * 3.16

So we have to use splice. Since this is an upper chord, so we have to use vertical
splice.
Fsp = Fmin = 60 t
Assume tGPL =10 mm & tsp = 10 mm
nsp =

60
= 4.74 nsp = 5 bolts
4 * 3.16

Design of splice plate: Fsp = 60/4 = 15t

b sp = 0.8*9 = 7.2cm, Because the force is compression, so we use Agross
f=

15
2
2
= 2.67 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
5.6 * 1

f=

15
2
= 1.4 t/cm tsp = 1.91cm taken 2.0cm = 20mm
5.6 * t

[ 160
L 80x8
2L 80x8

L 80x8
25
50

2L 80x8

11/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 2
Summary:
Steps of Design:
1 - Determine whether the connection is separate or Continuous .It's
preferable to be Continuous to decrease number of bolts.
Note: We cannot make continuous connection in the following cases:a) If the 2 angles are not of same size
b) If the 2 angles are not on the same straight line like upper chord & lower
chord of parallel chord system
c) At position of field splice even if the 2 angles have the same size
2 -Calculate Rss & RDS & Rb as before, then calculate no. of bolts
3 -If the no. of bolts are more than 6 i.e. Li more than 15d which is the
maximum distance between the 1 st & last bolt
a) Try to use staggered

amin = 6d *1.1

b) If the angle used is less than amin

- Use BL as Reduction factor or use splice
c) If he said that the maximum number of bolts in one row is 6 bolts, so u have
to use splice.

12/12 D.O.C.2
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
Design of pretensioned bolts
1-Pretension bolts subjected to shear:
These are produced from high-grade steel (8.8 and 10.9) pretension with
controlled tightening. The forces acting transverse to the shank are transmitted
by friction between the connected parts.
All allowable of pretensioned bolts are given as forces not stresses so we
don't have to multiply it with area of bolt
"T"

In this case, failure of connection will be due to friction between the plates
No of bolts required = N =

Force
m Ps

Where:
Ps

resistance of one bolt per one friction surface taken from tables
page 106 in the ECP (Egyptian code of practice). Ordinary work,
steel 37, case I or II according to the given loads.

number of friction surfaces

m=1 for single angle, 2 for double angle, 1 with half the force with
star shape.

Note that: For pretensioned bolts grade 8.8, the values of the table (except area

Example 1: Design the connection shown in

the figure, using pretension bolts M16 mm

9t

(grade 10.9)
- Draw the connection to scale 1: 10
Data: Steel used is st. 37

15t

80 3
*
2 8

60*6

9t
4

60*6

As) are to be reduced by 30% (multiplied by 0.7)

21t

80*8

G.PL = 10 mm

1/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
Solution: Ps = 3.16t
Member (1):
n1 =

21
= 3.32 n1 = 4 bolts
2 * 3.16

Member (2)
n2 =

80*80*8 (back to back)

60*60*6 (back to back)

15
= 2.37 n2 = 3 bolts
2 * 3.16

Member (3)

80*80*8 (single angle)

9
= 2.85
3.16

n3 =

Member (4)
n4=
or n4=

n3 = 3 bolts

60*60*6 (star shaped)

9/2
= 1.42
3.16

9
=2.85
3.16

2 each side

4 blots

2 blots / each angle

emin = 2*16 = 32 mm 35 mm
Pmin = 3*16 = 48 mm 50 mm

Important note: There is NO MAXIMUM PITCH for pretensioned bolts.

The drawing principles are the same as in non- pretensioned except that if
we need 2 bolts, so we don't increase the number or bolts because there is no
max. Pitch between bolts.

Example 2: Design the connection shown

(grade 8.8). G.PL = 10 mm

Solution: Ps = 0.7*4.93= 3.45t
Chord members (continuous connection)

-20t

90*9 1

55*5

in the figure; pretension bolts M20 mm

7t

3
-10t

-25t

70
*7

Fdes = 25 20 = 5 t
Or 7 cos 45 = 4.95

2/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
nch =

5
= 0.72 nch = 2 bolts
2 * 3.45

Member (3)
55*55*5 (back to back)
n3 =

10
= 1.45
2 * 3.45

n3 = 2 bolts

Member (4)
70*70*7
& n4 =

(single angle)

7
= 2.03
3.45

n4 = 3 bolts

Important note: When using pretensioned bolts, the area net in tension will be
total area without any reduction due to presence of hole (as if we are designing
welded angles); this is because the pretensioned bolt packed all the plates
together and prevents any movement.

Example 3:

25t

It's required to design the marked members

knowing that the truss members are bolted to the
gusset plate using pretensioned bolts M16 grade

7t

1.5

2.0

8.8

Solution:
Although it is bolted, but we used Pretesioned bolt. Use " Ag "
Member 1:
Lin

= Lout = 2 m

25
= 17.86cm 2
1.4

17.86
= 8.93cm2
2

Use

70*7
3/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
amin = 55*5
Anet = 2*9.4 = 18.8 cm 2
F =
in

out

25
2
2
= 1.33 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm
18.8
200
= 94 < 300
2.12

200
(2.12) + (0.5 + 1.97) 2
2

= 61 < 300

l 200
=
= 28.6 < 60
7
d

Use one tie plate at mid span

Member 2:
L = 1.52 + 22 = 2.5m
Lin = 2.5 m
A =

Lout = 1.2*2.5 = 3m

7
= 5.9cm 2
0.85 *1.4

Choose

(0.85 for unsymmetrical)

60*6 > 55*5

A1 = 6*0.6 = 3.6 cm 2
A2 = (6-0.6) 0.6 = 3.24 cm 2
R.F. =

3 * 3.6
= 0.77
3 * 3.6 + 3.24

Anet = 3.6+0.77*3.24 = 6.1 cm2

out

300
= 2.56 < 300
1.17

l 250
=
= 41.7 < 60
6
d

4/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
zero
55*5

Example 4: For the shown connection

it is required to design and draw to
scale 1:10 a discontinuous bolted
connection at the position of field

30t

connection pretension bolts M16 grade

80*8

90*9

35t

8.8. The maximum number of bolts in

one row is 5 bolts.
Solution: PS = 0.7*3.16= 2.21
nch =

35
= 7.9 > 6 bolts
2 * 2.21

If two rows with staggered arrangement amin = 6*1.6*1.1= 10.56>8

We can use either horizontal or vertical Splice

Using horizontal splice:

Fsp =

Fmin 30
= 15 ton
=
2
2

nsp =

n1 =
n2 =

15
= 6.8 take 8 bolts
2.21

( 4 bolts / each angle )

30 15
= 3.39 nch = 4 bolts
2 * 2.21

35 15
2 * 2.21

= 4.52 nch = 5 bolts

Check on splice: We will use Agross, because we used pretensioned bolts

b sp =2*9 +1 = 19 cm
tsp =1 cm
f=

15
=0.79 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2, we may try tmin = 8mm
19 * 1

5/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3

2-Pretension bolts subjected to tension:

The allowable for tension is 0.6T, where "T" is the predestining force on the
bolt.
No of bolts required =N=

Force
0 .6 T

Where:
0.6 T

Resistance of one pre-tension bolt subjected to pure tension

The pre-tension force in the bolt and is found in table page 106

Example 5: Design the connection between the lower chord and the column

[ 160

2L 70x7
10t

50

95

50

shown in figure using M16 grade 8.8. Force in lower chord is 10t tension.

L 80x8
Solution: The bolts connecting the angle with the gusset plate, and that
connecting the gusset plate to the framing angles subjected to double shear.
Ps= 2*(0.7*3.16) = 4.42t
6/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
Rt = 0.6*(0.7*9.89) =4.15t
n=

10
= 2.26 taken 3 bolts
4.42

For bolts connecting the framing angles to the column flange, the force is
parallel to the axis of the bolt, so the force is tension
n=

10
= 2.4 taken 4 bolts, 2 each side
4.15

3-Pretension bolts subjected to tension and shear:

As in case of non-pretensioned, the pretensioned bolts are subjected to shear
when the force is perpendicular to the axis of the bolt, to tension when the force
is parallel to the axis of the bolt.
We can either assume n & check
Or use the equation: n =

Q Text
+
Ps
T

We have to make 2 checks:

1. Text,b =

Text
= 0.6T
n

2. Qext,b =

Qext
= .. Ps'
n

Where Ps' = Ps *(1-

Text,b
T

), the allowable of shear is reduced because the

external tension force will decrease the pretensioning force on the bolt,
which in turn decrease the friction between the surfaces, leading to decrease
of the allowable of shear.

7/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
Example 6:
Design the connection between the upper chord and the column shown in figure
using pretensioned M16 grade 10.9. Forces of diagonal and chord are shown.

95

47

[ 160

[ 160

n4

n2

-2t

-2t
10
t

1.3

n3

1:10

1.5

n1

47

95

L 80x8

2L 80*8

80
x8

2L 60x6

10
t

Solution: The bolts connecting the angle with

the gusset plate, and that connecting the gusset

Or graphically

plate to the framing angles subjected to double

shear.

2t
49

n1(connecting diagonal to G.Pl.):

10t

Ps = 3.16t

n1=

10
= 3.16
3.16

take n1 = 4 bolts

n2(connecting chord to G.Pl.):

n2 =

2
= 0.3
3.16 * 2

take n2 = 2 bolts

n3 (connecting G.PL. to framing angles), they are subjected to

double shear or bearing of the 2 angles and gusset plate
Inclination of upper chord with horizontal =tan-1(1/10) =5.71 o
Angle of chord with vertical = tan-1(1.5/1.3) = 49 o
T = 10 sin49o - 2 cos5.71 o = 5.56t
Q = 10 cos49 o + 2 sin5.71o = 6.76t
8/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
R= 5.56 2 + 6.76 2 = 8.75t
n3 =

8.75
= 1.38
2 * 3.16

take n2 = 2 bolts

n4 (connecting framing angles to the flange of the column), they are

subjected to single shear and tension at the same time.
We can either assume n4 = 2* n3 = 2*2=4 bolts & check
Or use the equation n=

6.76 5.56
Q Text
=
= 2.7 bolt
+
+
Ps
T
3.16 9.89

Taken 4 bolts (even number) 2 each side

Where Rt = 0.6*9.89 = 5.93t
n4 = 4 bolts

1. Text,b =

Text
5.56
=
= 1.39t (0.6*9.89)=5.93t
n
4

Ps' = 3.16*(12. Qext,b =

1.39
) = 2.71 t
9.89

Qext
6.76
=
= 1.69t 2.71 t
n
4

Example 7:
Design and draw the connection shown

2 channels
F=20t

using pretensioned M16 grade 8.8. Forces

1.0m

of diagonal and chord are shown

IPE300
2.5m

Solution:
-1

= tan

1
= 21.8
2 .5
o

Q = F cos = 20 cos21.8 = 18.57 ton

& Text = F sin = 20 sin21.8 o = 7.427 ton

Ps = 0.7*3.16= 2.21t,
n=

T=0.7*9.89 = 6.92t

18.57 7.427
Q Text
= 9.47
=
+
+
Ps
T
2.21
6.92

take n = 10 bolts (must be even)

9/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 3
Checks:
Text,b =
PS (1-

7.427
= 0.74t < 0.6*6.92 = 4.15t
10

Text / n
7.427 / 10
) = 2.21 (1) = 1.97t
t
6.92

Q 18.57
= 1.86 ton < 1.97t ok safe
=
n
10

160

IPE 300

10/10 D.O.C.3
2007-2008

Design of connections 4
Design of welded connection
Allowable stresses of welded connections:
a-Butt weld:

The allowable stresses in butt weld depend on:

Kind of stresses (compression - tension - shear)
Quality of weld (good - excellent)

Kind of stresses

Allowable Stresses
Good weld

Excellent weld

Compression

1.0 Fc

1.1 Fc

Tension

0.7 Ft

1.0 Ft

Shear

1.0 q

1.1 q

Where:
Fc

allowable compression stress of the member.

Ft

allowable tension stress = 0.58Fy

Fy

yield stresses

Allowable shear stresses =

0.58Fy
3

b-Fillet Weld
Allowable stresses in fillet weld :
For all kinds of stresses (compression - tension - shear) = 0.2 Fu
For combined shear stress and normal stress = 1.1*0.2Fu
s

size of weld

smin

min. size of weld = 4mm (buildings)

= 6mm (bridges & dynamic loads)

1/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Smax

max. size of weld = thickness of thinner connected plates

i.e. If we are connecting 2 angles 70*7 back to back with a gusset plate of
thickness 10 mm, Smax = 7mm (minimum thickness)
L

size of weld

Lmin

min. length of weld = bigger from 4 s or 5cm

Lmax

max. length of weld = 70 s

Leff

the effective required length of weld

Lact

leff +2s
s

leff
lact

Welded Connection subjected to Shear force:

Simple joint:
This occurs as in bolted connections, when the 2 members are of different
sections, inclined or at field splice.

F2
F
F1

Shear occurs when the force is parallel to the fillet weld (

Assume size of weld s = tmin or take s = 5mm = 0.5 cm

F1 = F (

ae
)
a

e
a

F2 = F ( ) = F F1
Where F is the total force in the member
Force = Area of weld * allowable stress
2/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Allowable stress for shear is 0.2Fu, where Fu is the ultimate stress of the metal
used. We always use steel 37 with Fu = 3.6 t/cm2
Force is either F1 on the weld near the leg or F2 on the other weld. The area is
either s*l if one angle or 2*s*l if 2 angles. From this equation we can get L
Length of weld in first leg of angle = l(1)act. =

F1
+2 s
(m s )(0.2 Fu )

Length of weld in second leg of angle = l(2)act. =

F2
+2 s
(m s )(0.2 Fu )

Where m is the number of shear planes.

m = 1 one angle. (Single angle or star shape with half force)
m = 2 two angles. (Double angles back to back)

Continuous joint:
This occurs when the two chord members have the same cross-section and there
is no field splice at this position.
Fdes. = the bigger from (Fm1 Fm2) or (Fm3 * cos )
F1 = Fdes. (

ae
)
a

l(1)act. =

F1
+2 s
(m s )(0.2 Fu )

l(2)act. =

F2
+2 s
(m s )(0.2 Fu )

e
a

F2 = Fdes. ( )

Special cases:
For case of upper chord joint:
The welding is usually carried out as submerged welding. Therefore the size of
weld for the part between the two angles is taken half the thickness of the gusset
plate.
i.e.

s=

t g . pl..
2

, So for upper chord always take s=5mm (half gusset plate)

3/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Drawing rules of welded connections:
The welded connection is the same as bolted connections in steps of drawing
except that:
Distance between edges of angles is 40mm instead of 20mm

40mm
The edge of the gusset plate is either under the edge of the angle as in
the lower chord or embedded between the angles in the submerged
weld of the upper chord.
The edge of the gusset plate may not be perpendicular to the angle.

4/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4

The main shapes of gusset plates is as following (Same shapes are

for upper or lower chord):

15
if separte

if contionous

15
if separte

if contionous

if separte

if contionous

5/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Example 1:

90*9

Design the two connections A and B shown

in the figure using fillet weld:
TG.Pl = 10mm
Steel used is steel 37

19t

Solution:

60*6
-8.5t

-23t
10
t

90*9

5
3 5*5
2
60*6 A

-28t
6
7t 0*6
5

1
23t
80*8

Joint (A): Simple joint

Assume size of weld = 5mm
Member1:
F = 23 t
F1 = 23 (

80*80*8

e = 2.26 cm

8 2.26
) = 16.5 t
8

F2 = 23-16.5 = 6.5 t
L1act =

16.5
+ 2*0.5 = 23.9 cm, Take L1 = 24 cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.2 * 3.6)

L2act =

6.5
+ 2*0.5 = 10.03 cm, Take L2 = 11 cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.2 * 3.6)

Member 2 :
F = 19 t
F1 = 19 (

60*60*6

e = 1.69 cm

6 1.69
) = 13.65 t
6

F2 = 1913.65 = 5.35 t
L1act =

13.65
+ 2*0.5 = 19.96
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

5.35
+ 2*0.5 = 8.4
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

20 cm
9 cm

Member 3:
F = 10 t
F1 = 10 (
F2

55*55*5

e = 1.52 cm

5.5 1.52
) = 7.24 t
5.5

= 10 7.24 = 2.76 t
6/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
L1act =

7.24
+ 2*0.5 = 11.06 cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

2.76
+ 2 * 0.5 = 4.8
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

12 cm
5cm + 2*0.5 = 6 cm

Member 4 :
F = 8.5 t

60*60*6

F1 = 8.5 (

6 1.69
) = 6.1 t
6

F2 = 8.5 6.1

= 2.4 t

L1act =

6.1
+ 2*0.5 = 9.47
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

2.4
+ 2*0.5 = 4.3
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

10 cm
L2 = 6 cm (min. length)

Or take F/2 = 8.5/2 = 4.25t and design as single angle, m=1

Joint (B): Continuous Joint
Chord Member:
Fdes = 28-23 = 5 t
F1 = 5 (

9 2.54
) = 3.6 t
9

F2 = 5-3.6
Assume

= 1.4 t
S=

t G.Pl
10
= 5 mm (submerged weld)
=
2
2

L1act =

3.6
+ 2*0.5 = 6 cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

1.4
+ 2*0.5 = 2.9
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2 = 6 cm

Member 5:
F=7t

60*60*6

F1 = 7 (

6 1.69
) = 5.0 t
6

F2 = 7-5

= 2.0 t

7/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
L1act =

5
+ 2*0.5 = 14.8 cm
(0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

2
+ 2*0.5 = 6.5
(0.5)(0.72)

15.0 cm
7.0 cm

Example 2:
Design the two connections shown in the
figure using fillet weld:
, s is constant for connection

Steel used is steel 37

Solution:

32t

Joint (A): Simple joint

60*6
-8.5t

TG.Pl = 10

10
t

mm

5
3 5*5
2
60*6 A

1
45t
80*8

Since s is constant in the connection, so maximum size is the minimum

thickness which is 5 mm for angle 55*5
Member1:
F = 45 t
F1 = 45 (

80*80*8

e = 2.26 cm

8 2.26
) = 32.3 t
8

F2 = 45-32.3 = 12.7 t
L1act =

32.3
= 44.9+2*0.5 = 45.9 cm, Take L1 = 46cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.2 * 3.6)

L2act =

12.7
+ 2*0.5 = 17.4 cm, Take L2 = 18 cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.2 * 3.6)

Member 2 :
F = 32 t
F1 = 32 (

60*60*6

e = 1.69 cm

6 1.69
) = 23 t
6

F2 = 3223 = 9 t
L1act =

23
+ 2*0.5 = 32.94
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

33 cm

8/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
L2act =

9
+ 2*0.5 = 13.5
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

14 cm

For member 3 and member 4 (The same as before)

Example 3:
Redesign the previous example knowing that the maximum length of weld is
35cm.
Solution: Since the weld of member 1 is 46cm > 35cm, so we have to use
welded splice. Since this is lower chord and not inclined, so we can use either
vertical or horizontal welded splice.
The design of the splice is the same as in bolts, because the weld will be
subjected to shear. The splice plates carry half the smaller force.
Using horizontal or vertical splice:
We use plates over legs so that we can make fillet weld
under the angles of the lower chord.
Half force to the 2 splice plates & other half to the
gusset plate. Each plate carries 1/4 of the smaller force.
b sp= 0.8a-2cm (2 cm for the weld)
Fsp = 32/2 = 16t
1.4 =

32 / 4
(0.8 * 6 2)t

t =2.04 cm

taken 22 mm

Design of weld :
Weld of splice (one splice plate carries 32/4 = 8 t) while the whole splice carry
16 t
Lsp =

8
+1 = 12.1 taken 13 cm for each splice
2 * 0.5 * 0.72

Force transmitted from angles 60*6 to gusset

Force transmitted from angles 80*8 to gusset

= 32 16 = 16 t
= 45 16 = 29 t

We design them as before

9/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Member1:
F = 29 t
F1 = 29 (

80*80*8

e = 2.26 cm

8 2.26
) = 20.8 t
8

F2 = 29-20.8 = 8.19 t
L1act =

20.8
+1 = 29.9 cm, Take L1 = 30cm
(2 * 0.5)(0.2 * 3.6)

L2act =

8.19
+ 2*0.5 = 12.4
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

13 cm

Member 2:
F = 16 t
F1 = 16 (

60*60*6

e = 1.69 cm

6 1.69
) = 11.5 t
6

F2 =1611.5 = 4.5 t
L1act =

11.5
+ 2*0.5 = 16.97
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

4.5
+ 2*0.5 = 7.25
(2 * 0.5)(0.72)

17 cm
8 cm

Note that: vertical and horizontal splices are the same, in which splice plates
carry half the smaller force while the rest of the forces will be carried by the
gusset plate.
We may use submerged weld in the lower chord and put the plate under the
legs where b=2a+1-2.
We may make the splice plate wider than angle's leg.

10/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Example 4:
It is required to design and draw the shown connection,
given that the truss members are welded to the gusset
plate and the gusset plate is bolted to the column using
framing angles 80*8. Bolts used are non-pretensioned
bolts M16 grade 4.6. Upper chord is 2 angles 60*6.
Diagonal is single angle 80*8.
Note: In the field connection (field splice), either the 2 sides are bolted, or one
side is bolted and the other side is welded. But the 2 sides cannot be welded

Solution: assume s=5mm

The truss members are welded to the gusset plate, the forces are parallel to the
weld. So fillet weld is subjected to shear.
Member 1:
F=2t

80*80*8
6 1.69
) = 1.44 t
6

F1 = 2 (

F2 = 2-1.44 = 0.56 t
L1act =

1.44
+ 2*0.5 = 3.0 cm
(0.5)(0.72)

taken 6 cm (min)

L2act = 6cm because L2act< L1act

Member 2:
F = 10 t
F1 = 10 (

80*80*8
8 2.26
) = 7.17 t
8

F2 = 10-7.17

= 2.83 t

L1act =

7.17
+ 2*0.5 = 20.9 cm
(0.5)(0.72)

L2act =

2.83
+ 2*0.5 = 7.86
(0.5)(0.72)

21.0 cm
8.0 cm

11/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Bolts connecting gusset plate to the framing angles:
They are subjected to shear equal to the resultant of the 2 forces
R=8.75t, Rds = 4.02t, Rb= 0.8*3.6*1.6*1 = 4.61t
n=

8.75
= 2.17 taken 3 bolts. (if when draw, p>pmax, so increase n)
4.02

Bolts connecting framing angles to the column:

These bolts are subjected to shear and tension (as before in the example of
bolted connections subjected to shear and tension).

12/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Fillet Weld subjected to Tension or compression:
If the weld is subjected to tension or compression, the allowable stress is 0.2Fu
(exactly as in case of fillet weld subjected to shear). The fillet weld is subjected
to tension or compression when a force perpendicular to the weld is acting.
Example 5:
It is required to design the shown connection, given that the truss members
are bolted to the gusset plate and the gusset plate is welded to the column
using fillet. Bolts used are pretensioned bolts M16 grade 10.9. (Ps=3.16t)

Solution: For the connection between the truss member and the gusset plate:
n=

10
= 1.58 taken 2 bolts.
2 * 3.16

For the connection between the gusset plate and the column:

The weld between gusset plate and column is as the shown shape in
which we weld on both sides of the gusset plate with area s*l each L
side.
The applied force is perpendicular to the weld, so the weld is

subjected to tension.
Assume s=5mm
(Tension force/Area resists force) Allowable stress (Fu)

10
= (0.2*3.6) l = 13.9cm 14cm
2*0.5* l

13/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Note: We will design the weld even if it is subjected to compression (
)
Example 6:
It is required to design the shown connection, given that the truss members
are bolted to the gusset plate and the gusset plate is welded to the column
using fillet. Bolts used are pretensioned bolts M16 grade 10.9. (Ps=3.16t)

Solution: For the connection between the truss member and the gusset plate:
n=

10
= 1.58 taken 2 bolts.
2 * 3.16

For the connection between the gusset plate and the column:
The applied force is perpendicular to the weld, so the weld is subjected to
compression.
Assume s=5mm
(Compression force/Area resists force) Allowable stress (Fu)

5
= (0.2 * 3.6) l = 7cm
2 0.5 * l

14/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Fillet Weld subjected to Combined Shear and Tension or
Compression:
If the weld is subjected to combined shear and tension or compression, the
allowable stress is 1.1*0.2Fu . We get L weld by solving the equation
f 2 + 3q 2 1.1 (0.2Fu)

Where f =

Tension or Compression
and q =
Aweld total

Shear
Aweld

in same direction of shear force

Example 7:
It is required to design and draw the shown connection, given
that the truss members are bolted to the gusset plate and the
gusset plate is welded to the column using fillet. Bolts used are
non-pretensioned bolts M16 grade 4.6.
Solution:
n1 =

2
= 2 bolts
4.02

n2 =

10
= 5 bolts
2.01

The weld between the gusset plate and the column using fillet:
The weld is subjected to Tension T (perpendicular to weld) & shear Q (parallel
to weld). From given forces of the upper chord and the diagonal, T=5.56t,
Q=6.76t.
We get L of weld from this equation
(
(

f 2 + 3q 2 1.1 (0.2Fu)

6.76 2
5.56 2
) = 1.1 *0.72
) + 3(
2 * 0 .5 * l
2 * 0.5 * l

5.56 2
6.76 2
) + 3* (
) = 0.79
l
l

30.91 137.1
+ 2 = 0.79
l2
l

l = 15 cm

15/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4

Do not forget to put dimensions on weld (l and s) and bolts (P and e).

Example 8:
For the shown figure, it is required to estimate a section for the tie and design
and draw its connection to the column, given that the tie is bolted to the
gusset plate using non-pretensioned bolts M16 grade 4.6, while the gusset
plate is welded to the column using fillet.

Solution:
Estimation means choose from limits without check:
1l=

42 + 7.52 = 8.5 m > 5 m

use shear shaped .Given bolted to the gusset

plate .
Aangle =

15
= 6.5 cm2
1.4 * 0.85 * 2
16/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Choose 60*6 > min

55*5

l
850
= 60
=60
d
a

d = 14.2 cm = 2a + 1
a = 6.58 cm

use 70*7

We may also choose from

out

850
=
0.45a

use

a = 6.3

O.K.

70*7

Design of connection between tie and gusset plate:

n=

15 / 2
= 3.73 bolts
2.01

taken 4 bolts each side

Design of connection between gusset plate and column:

Weld is subjected to shear + tension (exactly as the case of bolts connected to
column)
with vertical tan-1

4
= 28 0
7.5

Q = 15 cos28 =13.2 t
T = 15 sin28 = 7.04 t
We can assume l from drawing or
(

f 2 + 3q 2 1.1 (0.2Fu)

13.2 2
7.04 2
) = 1.1 *0.72
) + 3(
2 * 0.5 * l
2 * 0.5 * l

7.04 2 13.2 2
) +(
) = 0.79
l
l

49.56 522.72
+
= 0.79
l2
l2

l = 27 cm

17/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4

We can draw any shape to the connection of the truss to the column because it's
not mentioned. (The truss may be welded or bolted to the gusset plate, while the
gusset plate also may be welded or bolted to the column. But the tie must be
drawn as given in the question.

18/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Example 9:
For the shown connection, get maximum capacity or Max force. Bolts used are
non-pretensioned bolts M20 Grade 4.6

Solution
1 Failure by tension for member:
Anet = 2 [12.3 2.2 * 0.8] = 21.08 cm2
Tmax = Anet * Ft = 1.4 * 21.08 = 29.5 t
2 For n1
e = 35

1.5d = 1.5*2 =3 cm

e > 1.5 d

but it's smaller than 2d

= 0.6

& tmin = 1 or 2*0.8 = 1.6

& 2d = 2*2 = 4 cm

Rb = (0.6 * 3.6) (2 * 1) = 4.32 t

Rds = 2 *

* 22
*0.25 * 4 = 6.28 t
4

Rl = 4.32 t

n=

F
T = 3 * 4.32 = 12.96 t
Rl

3 For n2
R=

(T sin 20) 2 + (T cos 20) 2 = T

Same as before
19/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
4 For n3
Tension = T cos20 = 0.94 T
Shear = Tsin20 = 0.34 T
Use interaction equation:
(

0.34T / 6
0.94T / 6
)2 = 1
)2 + (
2
2
*2
*2
* 0.25 * 4
* 0.33 * 4
0 .7 *
4
4

(0.054 T)2 + (0.018 T)2 =1

Get T

T2 =308

T = 17.56 t

The maximum force = 12.96 t

Example 10:
For the previous example, get maximum capacity or Max. Force if the member
used is SINGLE angle 80*8
Solution
1 Failure by tension for member:
A1 = (8-2.2)*0.8 = 4.64 cm2
A2 = (8-0.8)*0.8 = 5.76 cm2
R.F. =

3 * 4.64
= 0.71
3 * 4.64 + 5.76

Anet = 4.64 + 5.76*0.71 = 8.73 cm2

Tmax = Anet * Ft = 1.4 * 8.73 = 12.22 t
2 For n1: Single shear
e = 35
e > 1.5 d

= 0.6

1.5d = 1.5*2 =3 cm

& 2d = 2*2 = 4 cm

but it's smaller than 2d

& tmin = 1 or 0.8

Rb = (0.6 * 3.6) (2 * 0.8) = 3.46 t

Rss =

* 22
*0.25 * 4 = 3.14 t
4
20/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Rl = 3.14 t

n=

F
T = 3 * 3.14 = 9.42 t
Rl

3 For n2: Double shear

R=

(T sin 20) 2 + (T cos 20) 2 = T

= 0.6

& tmin = 1 or 2*0.9 = 1.6

Rb = (0.6 * 3.6) (2 * 1) = 4.32 t

Rds = 2 *

* 22
*0.25 * 4 = 6.28 t
4

Rl = 4.32 t

n=

F
T = 3 * 4.32 = 12.96 t
Rl

4 For n3: Same as previous example T = 17.56 t

The maximum force = 9.42 t

Example 11:
For the previous example, get maximum capacity or Max. Force, if we used 2
angles 80*8 back to back and bolts used are pretensioned bolts grade 8.8.
Solution
1 Failure by tension for member: Agross because we used pretensioned bolts
Anet = 2 [12.3] = 24.6 cm2
Tmax = Anet * Ft = 1.4 * 24.6 = 34.44 t
2 For n1: Double shear
Ps = 2*0.7*4.93 = 6.9 t
n=

F
T = 3 * 6.9 = 20.7 t
Rl

3 For n2: Double shear, same as before T = 3 * 6.9 = 20.7t

4 For n3 Tension = T cos20 = 0.94 T
Shear = Tsin20 = 0.34 T

21/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
1-

0.94T
= 0.6*(0.7*15.43) = 41.36t.
6

2-

0.34T
0.94T / 6
= (0.7*4.93)*(1) T= 32.32t
6
0.7 * 15.43

The maximum force = 20.7 t

Example 12:
For the previous example, get maximum capacity or Max. Force, if we used
single angle 80*8 and bolts used are pretensioned bolts grade 8.8.
Solution
1 Failure by tension for member:
A1 = 8*0.8 = 6.4 cm2
A2 = (8-0.8)*0.8 = 5.76 cm2
R.F. =

3 * 6 .4
= 0.77
3 * 6.4 + 5.76

Anet = 6.4 + 5.76*0.77 = 10.83 cm2

Tmax = Anet * Ft = 1.4 * 10.83 = 15.17 t
2 For n1: Single shear
Ps = 0.7*4.93 = 3.45 t
n=

F
T = 3 * 3.45 = 10.35 t
Rl

3 For n2: Double shear

Ps = 2*0.7*4.93 = 6.9 t
n=

F
T = 3 * 6.9 = 20.7 t
Rl

4 For n3
Same as previous example T = 32.32 t
The maximum force = 10.35 t

22/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
Example 13:
For the previous example, get maximum capacity or Max. Force, if we use
double angle 80*8 where angles are welded to gusset plate and gusset plate is
welded to column. (This cannot happen because it is field connection so
there must be a bolted side, but we take this solved example for training).
Length of weld between angle and gusset is 200mm. Length of weld of gusset
with column is 300mm. Size is to be maximum. TG.PL = 10mm

Solution
1 Failure by tension for member: Exactly as in pretensioned-example 3
(take gross area). Tmax = 34.44 t
2 For weld between the member and the gusset plate: double shear
Smax=8mm (minimum of 8 mm or 10mm)
F1=T*(

8 2.26
) = 0.72T
8

F2 = T-0.72T = 0.28T
L1act =

0.72T
+ 2*0.8 = 20
(2 * 0.8)(0.72)

So T=29.44t

L2act =

0.28T
+ 2*0.8 = 20
(2 * 0.8)(0.72)

So T=75.7t

3 For weld between gusset plate and the column: This weld is subjected
to tension = T cos 20 o and shear = T sin 20o
Smax=10mm (minimum of 10 mm or tflange of column = 13.5mm)

23/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Design of connections 4
f=

T cos 20o
,
2 *1* 30

q=

T sin 20 o
2 * 1 * 30

f 2 + 3q 2 1.1 (0.2Fu)

T cos 20 o 2
T sin 20 o 2
) = 0.79
) + 3(
60
60

T=42.7t

The maximum force = 29.44 t

Example 14:
For the previous example, get maximum capacity or Max. Force, if we use
single angle 80*8 where angle is welded to gusset plate and gusset plate is
welded to column. Length of weld between angle and gusset is 200mm. Length
of weld of gusset with column is 300mm. Size is to be maximum. TG.PL = 10mm
Solution
1 Failure by tension for member: Exactly as in pretensioned-example 4
(take gross area of unsymmetric section). Tmax = 15.17 t
2 For weld between the member and the gusset plate: single shear
Smax=8mm (minimum of 8 mm or 10mm)
F1=T*(

8 2.26
) = 0.72T
8

F2 = T-0.72T = 0.28T
L1act =

0.72T
+ 2*0.8 = 20
(1 * 0.8)(0.72)

So T=14.72t

L2act =

0.28T
+ 2*0.8 = 20
(1 * 0.8)(0.72)

So T=37.85t

3 For weld between gusset plate and the column: This weld is subjected
to tension = T cos 20 o and shear = T sin 20o (Same as in example 5)
T=42.7t
The maximum force = 14.72 t

24/24 D.C.4
2007-2008.

Eccentric Connections 1
Eccentric Connections can be subjected to any of these two types of stresses:
1- Normal stresses caused by bending moment and axial force "tension or
compression"
2- Shear stresses caused by torsion moment and shear force.
1- Connections subjected to shear, tension and bending moment:
Note that: The bracket is welded to head plate, which is in turn bolted to column as
shown in the figure.
I-

Non-pretensioned bolts:

1/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Design Steps:
1- Dim of Head plate.
Assume H = h + 2 cm + 2cm
B = bf of bracket + 2 cm + 2 cm
B

bf of column

2- Arrange bolts.
Assume p = (3

4) and arrange bolts between

the 2 flanges of the bracket I-beam.

3- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

From the actual behavior of this type, we find that the head plate
will be separated from the column flange at tension side "just as
crack at tension side in concrete beams".
Therefore, to calculate the position of N-A, we follow these steps:i-

Assume x =

ii-

Aeff = 0.7

H
" approx N-A"
6
2
4

B x2
2 Aeff [( y1 x ) + ( y 2 x ) + ( y 3 x ) + ...) = zero
iii- Snv =
2
Get actual position of N-A = X
Then calculate

B x3
+ 2 Aeff [( y1 x ) 2 + ( y 2 x ) 2 + ( y 3 x ) 2 + ...)
INV =
3

2/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1

4- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.
T = Px, Qy = P y
M = (Qy x ex + T x ey)

5- Check the critical bolt.

The critical bolt is the most far bolt from the N-A.
Therefore, from the figure bolt 1 is the critical bolt.
Calculate:- Fb1 =

M
( y1 x) * Aeff
I nv

- Ft1 =

T
, Aeff = 0.7
n

2
4

- Ftot = Fb1 + Ft1

- Q=

QY
n

Then we apply the interaction equation:

(

Ftot
Q
)2 + (
)2 1.00
Aeff f all
A qall

fall = 0.33 Fub

A =

While qall = 0.20 Fub or 0.25 Fub according to bolt grade

2
4

6- Calculate the Head plate thickness "tp"

As will be shown later
3/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
In case of unsafe:
Increase Number of bolts by increasing the plate length and put stiff. Plate and
it will appear exactly as in case of welded connections.

4/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
III- Pretensioned bolts: Subjected to shear, tension and bending moment.

5/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Design Steps:
1- Calculate the number of bolts required:
n tension side =

M /(0.8h) + Text
0.6T

2- Dim of Head plate.

Assume H = h + 2 cm + 2 e
B = bf of bracket

3- Arrange bolts.
Since the arrangement of the HSB does not require a maximum distance between
the bolts, bolts (calculated from above) are distributed in the tension zone only and
ONE row of bolts is added in the compression zone.

Important note: We have to solve the problem as it is shown in the question. We

can not add a stiffener except when it is asked in the exam.

4- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

From the actual behavior of this type, we find that the head plate will remain in
contact with the column flange as the bolts are wrenched tightly. And so the C.G.
will be the same C.G. of the head plate.

6/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
5- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.

Text = Px, Q y = Py

M = (Qy x ex + Text x ey)

N.B.: In case Px is of reversible direction, we must choose the direction which give max M.
6- Effect of moment "M" on bolts.
The moment will create a tensile force on each bolt in the tension side "Text, b, M"
fc = ft =
f1 =

M H
( ) ,
IX 2

M
(X 2 )
IX

Where IX =

B H 3
12

Text, b1, M =

1 ft +f1
(
) B X 1
2
2

0.8 T

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 +f 2
(
)B X 2
2
2

0.8 T

7- Effect of tension "Text" on bolts.

The tensile force Text will by distributed
on all bolts in the connection.
Text, b1 = Text, b2 = Text, b =

T ext PX
=
n
n

0.6 T

8- Effect of prying force on bolts:

As a result from the tension created on the flange of the bracket, the head plate will
bent as in figure causing the creation of a force called "Prying force".

7/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Prying force is only calculated if there is a row of bolts over flange and
there is no stiffener as shown in following figure.

The prying force is calculated from the following equation:

W t p4
1

2 30a b 2 AS
P=[
] (Text, b1 +Text, b1,M )
W t p4
3a a
( )( + 1) +
4b 4b
30a b 2 AS

Where As = from table of pretensioned bolts

We can get tpl = 0.613

M (2b + 2S + t b )
,
d b *W * Fb

W=

B
2

Fb = 1.4t/cm2

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE:

We neglect prying force
1- If there is a row above the flange and there is a stiffener
2- If there is no row of bolts above the flange

8/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
8- Check bolts:
For tensile force
If prying force is neglected: ( as shown before):
If subjected to tension only: Text =

Text
0.6T
n

If subjected to moment only: Text,b,M 0.8T

If subjected to tension and moment

Text Text ,b,M

+
0.6T
0.8T

If the prying force is not neglected:

If subjected to tension only: Text +P 0.8T
If subjected to moment only: Text,b,M +P 0.8T
If subjected to tension and moment Text + Text,b,M + P 0.8T
For shear:
Qbolt =

Text ,b
Q
'
P s = Ps*(1)
n
T

9- Calculate the Head plate thickness "tp"

As will be shown later

N.B.:
1- If the connection is subjected to M, Q only so Text = zero, in this case follow the
same steps but Text,b = 0.
2- If the connection is subjected to compression N not tension Text , we neglect the
effect of N on the two checks of the bolt.
But the head plate is subjected to compressive stress.
fc =

M H
N
( )+
IX 2
B H

0.72Fy

9/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
In case of:
1- The first row of bolt 1 is unsafe we have 2 alternatives:a- Increase the number of bolts in that row to be
4 not just 2.
B 3Pmin+2emin = 3*(3d) + 2*(1.5d) = 12d
Text, b1, M =

1 ft +f1
) B X 1
(
4
2

0.8 T

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 +f 2
(
)B X 2
2
2

0.8 T

b- If B < 12d
Increase the bolt diameter so to increase it's allowable.

2- The second row is unsafe so add a row of bolts under it.

Text, b1, M =

1 ft +f1
) B X 1
(
2
2

0.8 T

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 +f 2
(
)B X 2
2
2

0.8 T

Text, b3, M =

1 f2 +f3
(
) B X 3
2
2

0.8 T

10/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Calculation of head plate thickness
These are approx ways to calculate the thickness of the head plate.
tp min = 20 mm

Case I:No row of bolts over the tension flange, bolts are only between the 2 flanges.
As shown in figure.
This method can be used for both pretension or non-pretension bolts.
We take a strip of height h1 as in figure,
we calculate the moment from this strip
Mp = force in bolt x e
h1 = edge + pitch / 2 and e B/4
This moment is acting on a rectangular section
so we have to check bending stresses on that
section.
fb =

MP
t
2
( P ) Fb = 0.72 Fy t/cm we get tp
3
h t
2
( 1 P)
12

min tp = 20 mm
Note that: I / y = S = h1 * t2 / 6

11/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Case II:1 row of bolts over the tension flange and the head plate is stiffened with a
vertical stiffener, As shown in figure.
This method can be used for both pretension or non-pretension bolts.
We take a strip of width b/2 as in figure, we calculate the
moment from this strip
Mp = force in bolt x e
This moment is acting on a rectangular section so we
have to check bending stresses on that section.
MP
t
2
( P ) Fb = 0.72 Fy t/cm , we get tp
3
h1 t P
2
(
)
12
h1 = hstiffener and e B/4

fb =

min tp = 20 mm

Case III:1 row of bolts over the tension flange and the head plate is unstiffened, As
shown in figure.

12/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
A for non-pretension bolts
We take a strip of width b/2 as in figure, we calculate the moment from this strip
Mp = force in bolt x e
This moment is acting on a rectangular section so we have to check bending stresses
on that section.
b/2
fb =

MP
t
2
( P ) Fb = 0.72Fy t/cm , we get tp
3
b / 2 t P
2
(
)
12

min tp = 20 mm

tP

B for pretensioned bolts

We take a strip of width w = bf/2 as in figure, we calculate the moment from this strip
M1= P x a ; M2 = P x a ( Text, b1, M + Text, b ) x b
MP = bigger of M1 and M2
So we check bending stress on the plate section.

fb =

MP
t
2
( P ) Fb = 1.4 t/cm , we get tp
3
w tP
2
(
)
12

min tp = 20 mm

13/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 1:It is required to design the shown connection:Non-Pretensioned bolts M20 grade "4.6".
Given:Px = 1.0 ton, Py = 10 ton.

Col. Section I.P.E 500

Bracket Beam I.P.E 300

Solution:-

I- Non-Pretensioned Bolts.
Design Steps:
1- Dim of Head plate.
The given drawing is with 2 stiffeners
Assume H = 30 + 7.5 cm + 7.5 cm = 45 cm

as shown

in figure
B = 15 + 2 cm + 2 cm = 19

20 cm

bf column = 20 cm

2- Arrange bolts.
Assume p = (3.5)

and arrange bolts as in figure.

14/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
3- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.
i- Assume x =
ii- Aeff = 0.7
iii-Snv =

"N-A Position"

H
45
= = 7.5 cm" approx N-A"
6
6

2
= 0.7
4

2.02
= 2.2 cm2
4

20 x 2
2 2.2[(41 x ) + (33 x ) + ( 26 x ) + (19 x ) + (12 x )) = zero
2

x2 + 2.2 x 57.64 = zero , so x = 6.57 cm , other value too big rejected.

Inv =

20 6.573
+ 2 2.2[(41 6.57)2 + (33 6.57)2 + (26 6.57)2 + (19 6.57)2 + (12 6.57)2 )
3

= 12650.75 cm4
4- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.
T = Px = 1.0 ton, Qy = Py = 10 ton
Mt = (Qy x ex + T x ey) = 10 x 0.35 + 1.0 x (0.55 + 0.3 + 0.075-0.0657) = 4.36 mt
5- Check the critical bolt.
The critical bolt is the most far bolt from the N-A.
Calculate:- fb1 =

4.36 100
(41 6.57) *2.2= 2.61 t
12650.75

- ft1 =

1.0
= 0.083 t
12

- ftot = 2.61 + 0.083 = 2.69 t

- A =

2
=
4

2.02
= 3.14 cm2
4

Ft = 0.33 x 4 x 2.2 = 2.9 t

q1 =

10
= 0.83 t
12

Rss = 0.25 x 4 x 3.14 = 3.14 t

Then we apply the interaction equation:

(

2.69 2
0.83 2
) +(
) = 0.93 1.00 Safe
2.9
3.14

6- Calculation of head plate thickness:

Assume e = 4.5cm , Mp = F*e = 2.69*4.5 = 12.1 cmt
S= 7.5*t2/6
f = Mp / S

h1= hstiffener = 7.5 cm

Fb = 0.72Fy = 1.73 t/cm2

1.73 =

6 * 12.1
7.5 * t 2

t = 2.36 cm taken 24mm

15/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 2:1- It is required to design the shown connection:Using Pretensioned bolts M20 grade "8.8".
Calculate the thickness of the head plate.
Given:Px = 1.0 ton, Py = 10 ton.
Col. Section I.P.E 500
Bracket Beam I.P.E 300

Solution:From table: As = 2.45 cm2; Ps = 0.7 x 4.93 = 3.45 ton,

T = 0.7 x 15.43 = 10.81 ton
Design Steps:
1- Number of bolts: n =

417 / 32 + 1
=2.29 taken min 4 bolts
0.6 *10.81

2- Dim of Head plate.

Assume e = 2

= 2 x 20 = 40 mm = 4 cm

H = 30 + 2 cm + 2 x 4 cm = 40 cm
B = 15 cm < b f of column = 20 cm
3- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement. "N-A Position"
The C.G. will be the same C.G. of the head plate, at H/2
4- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.
Text = Px = 1.0 ton, Qy = Py = 10 ton
M = (Qy x ex + Text x ey) = 10 x 0.35 + 1.0 x (0.55 + 0.3+0.02 0.2) = 4.17 mt
5- Arrange bolts. As shown in the question
1 row of bolts over the tension flange of the bracket
1 row of bolts under the tension flange
1 row at the compression side

16/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
6- Effect of moment "M" on bolts.
The moment will create a tensile force on each bolt in the tension side "Text, b, M"
B H 3 15 403
=
=80000cm4
12
12

IX =

fc = ft =

M H
4.17 100 40
2
( )=
( ) = 0.104 t/cm
IX 2
80000
2

X1 = 2 e +
X2 =
f1 =

tb
1.07
=2x4+
=8.535 cm
2
2

H
40
- X 1=
- 8.535 = 11.46 cm
2
2

M
4.17 100
2
(X 2 ) =
(11.46) = 0.06 t/cm
IX
80000

Text, b1, M =

1 ft +f1
1 0.1 + 0.06
(
) B X 1 = (
) 15 8.53 = 5.25t
2
2
2
2

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 + f2
1 0.06 + 0
(
) B X 2 = (
) 15 11.46 = 2.57t
2
2
2
2

0.8T=8.64
0.8T=8.64

Tbigger = 5.25t
7- Effect of tension "Text" on bolts.
The tensile force Text will by distributed on all bolts in the connection.
Text, b1 = Text, b2 = Text, b =

T ext PX 1.0
=
=
= 0.1666 t
n
6
n

0.6 T = 6.48

8- Effect of prying force on bolts. There is row of bolts over flange and there is no
stiffener, so there is prying force.
W=

B
= 7.5 cm
2

tpl = 0.613

M (2b + 2S + t b )
4.17*100(2*3 + 2*1 + 1.07)
=2.13 cm = 2.2 cm
= 0.613
d b *W * Fb
(30 1.07)*7.5*1.4

1
7.5 2.2 4

2 30 4 32 2.45
P=[
] (0.166+5.25) =0.31 x 5.41 = 1.68 ton
3 4
4
7.5 2.2 4
(
)(
+ 1) +
43 43
30 4 32 2.45

17/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1

9-Check bolts.
I- Tensile force: Text, b1, M + Text, b + P = 5.25 + 0.166 + 1.68 = 7.0 ton < 0.8 T
II- Shear force: Qbolt =

Q 10
0.166
= = 1.66 < 0.7 4.93(1 (
)) = 3.39
n
6
10.738

10- Calculate the Head plate thickness "tp"

M1= P x a = 1.68 x 4 = 6.72 cmt

M2 = P x a (Text, b1, M + Text, b) x b = 6.72 (5.41) x 3 = -9.51 cmt
MP = 9.51 cmt
fb =

9.51
MP
t
t
2
( P ) =
( P ) = Fb = 0.72 Fy t/cm ,
3
3
w tP
7.5 t P
2
2
(
)
(
)
12
12

We get tp=2.33 cm = 2.4 cm = 24 mm.

18/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 3:
It is required to design the shown connection:Using Pretensioned bolts M20 grade "10.9" .
And calculate the thickness of the head plate.
Given:Mx = 17.0 mt, Q = 12.0 ton.
Col Sec IPE 600

Frame Sec. IPE 500

Solution:As = 2.45 cm2 ; Ps = 4.93 ton

T = 15.43 ton

Design Steps:
1- Number of bolts: n =

1700 / 48
=3.82 taken min 4 bolts
0.6 *15.43

2- Dim of Head plate.

Since the shape of the connection is not given so we assume that there is a stiffener
in the tension side to neglect prying force
Assume e = 2

= 2 x 20 = 40 mm = 4 cm

H = 50 + 2 cm + 2 x 4 cm = 60 cm
B = 20 cm < b f of column
3- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

"N-A Position"

The C.G. will be the same C.G. of the head plate, at H/2
4- Effect of moment "M" on bolts.
The moment will create a tensile force on each bolt in the tension side "Text, b, M"
IX =

B H 3 20 603
=
=360000cm4
12
12

fc = ft =

M H
17 100 60
2
( )=
( ) = 0.14 t/cm
IX 2
360000 2

X1 = 2 e +
X2 =

tb
1.6
=2x4+
=8.8 cm
2
2

H
60
- X 1=
- 8.8 = 21.2 cm
2
2

19/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
f1 =

M
17 100
2
(X 2 ) =
(21.2) = 0.1 t/cm
IX
80000

Text, b1, M =

1 ft + f1
1 0.14 + 0.1
(
) B X 1 = (
) 20 8.8 = 10.56 < 0.8T=12.34
2
2
2
2

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 + f 2
1 0.1 + 0
(
)B X 2 = (
) 20 21.2 = 10.55 < 0.8T=12.34
2
2
2
2

5- Effect of prying force on bolts. No prying force

6- Check bolts.
Tensile force: Text, b1, M + P = 10.56 ton < 0.8 T =12.34
Shear force: Qbolt =

Q
12
=
= 2 < 4.93
n
6

7- Calculate the Head plate thickness "tp"

Assume e = 4.5cm
Mp = F*e = 10.56*4.5 = 47.52 cmt

h1= hstiffener = 8 cm

S= 8*t2/6

Fb = 0.72Fy = 1.73 t/cm2

f = Mp / S

1.73 =

6 * 47.52
8*t2

t = 4.53 cm taken 46mm

20/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 4:
It is required to design the shown connection:Using Pretensioned bolts M20 grade "10.9".
Arrange all bolts under flange
Rafter is IPE 500
Solution:Design Steps:
As = 2.45 cm2; Ps = 4.93 ton

T = 15.43 ton

Calculation of straining action

Fx = 7.07 cos 45 = 5ton,
Mx = 5 x 2 = 10 mt,

Fy = 7.07 sin 45 = 5ton

Q = 5 ton and Text = 5 ton

1- Number of bolts. N=

1000 / 43.2 + 5
=3.04 taken 4
0.6 *15.43

2- Dim of Head plate.

Assume e = 2

= 2 x 20 = 40 mm = 4 cm

H = 50 + 2 cm + 2 cm = 54 cm

B = 20 cm < bf of column

3- Arrange bolts.
2 row of bolts under the tension flange
1 row at the compression side
4- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

"N-A Position"

The C.G. will be the same C.G. of the head

plate, at H/2
5- Effect of moment "M" on bolts.
The moment will create a tensile force on each
bolt in the tension side "Text, b, M"
IX =

B H 3 20 543
=
=262440cm4
12
12

fc = ft =

M H
10 100 54
2
( )=
( ) = 0.102 t/cm
IX 2
262440 2

21/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
X1 = e + 2 cm + tb +
X2 =
f1 =

P
= 4 + 2 + 1.6 + 4 = 11.6 cm
2

H
54
- X1= - 11.6 = 15.4 cm
2
2

M
10 100
2
(X 2 ) =
(15.4) = 0.059 t/cm
IX
262440

Text, b1, M =

1 ft +f1
1 0.102 + 0.059
(
)B X 1 = (
) 20 11.6 = 9.3 t
2
2
2
2

Text, b2, M =

1 f1 +f 2
1 0.059 + 0
(
)B X 2 = (
) 20 15.4 = 4.54 t 0.8T=12.34
2
2
2
2

0.8T=12.34

Bigger = 9.3t
6- Effect of tension "Text" on bolts.
The tensile force Text will by distributed on all bolts in the connection.
Text, b1 = Text, b2 = Text, b =

T ext FX 5
=
= = 0.833
n
n
6

0.6 T = 9.26

7- Effect of prying force on bolts. Neglect prying effect

8- Check bolts.
Tensile force:
Shear force.

Text, b1, M
0.8T

Qbolt =

Text, b1
0.6T

9.4 0.833
+
= 0.85 < 1
12.34 9.26

Q
5
0.833
= = 0.833 < 4.93(1)
9.26
n
6

9- Calculation of head plate thickness:

Assume e = 4.5cm
Total force in bolt due to moment and tension = 9.4 + 0.833 = 10.23 t
Mp = F*e = 10.23*4.5 = 46.05 cmt

h1= 4+8/2 = 8cm

S= 8*t2/6

Fb = 0.72Fy = 1.73 t/cm2

f = Mp / S

1.73 =

6 * 46.05
8*t2

t = 4.46 cm taken 45mm

22/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 5:
For the shown portal frame it is required to:20 mt

20 mt
13 mt

Moment
A Design the shown connection between the rafter and the column.
B Design the shown connection between the two rafters.
Use M24 grade ( 10.9 ). T = 22.23 ton Ps = 7.11 ton
Given that: Q at haunch = 5t and = zero at mid span
PL. 10 MM

STEEL SHEET
RAIN GUTTER .7MM
IPE 360

PART OF IPE
360

RIDGE CAP .7MM

L 80X80X8

C 140X65X4

IPE 360

IPE 360

23/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Solution:
A) Connection between rafter and column:
IPE

h1
e

X1

fb
f1

X2

PART OF IPE

Mact = 20 mt

, Qact = 6 ton

H= 2x36+4 = 76 cm

Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 76 3 / 12 = 621882.667 cm4
Y = H / 2 = 38 cm
X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2 = 2 + 1.27 + 4 + 4 = 11.27 cm
X2 = H / 2 X1 = 38 11.27 = 26.73 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 2000 x 38 / 621882.6 = 0.12 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 2000 x 26.73 / 621882.6 = 0.086 t/cm2

Check bending on bolts :

Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.12 + 0.08 ) /2 x ( 17 x 11.27 ) ) = 9.886 < 0.8 T = 17.84

safe

Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.08 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 26.73 ) ) = 9.76 < 0.8 T safe

Check shear on bolts :
Qact / n = 6 / 6 = 1 ton < Ps = 7.11 ton

safe

Thickness of head plate:

Assume e = 4cm

h1 = 8cm

Mmax = 4 x 9.89 = 39.56 cmt

t=

6 x39.56
= 4.14 cm taken 42 mm
8 x0.72 x 2.4

24/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
B )connection between2 rafter:
17.0

Mact = 13 mt

, Qact = 0

2.0

1.27
4.0

36.0

From figure there is a haunch

H = 2 + 36 + 36 + 2 = 76 cm
Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 76 3 / 12 = 621882.667 cm4

26.73
36.0

Y = H / 2 = 38 cm

f1

8.0

X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2 = 2 + 1.27 + 4 + 4 = 11.27 cm

4.0
1.27

2.0

fb

X2 = H / 2 X1 = 38 11.27 = 26.73 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 1300 x 38 / 621882.6 = 0.079 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 1300 x 26.73 / 621882.6 = 0.056 t/cm2
Check bending on bolts :
Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.079 + 0.056 ) /2 x ( 17 x 11.27 ) ) = 6.46 < 0.8 T = 17.84
safe
Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.056 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 26.73 ) ) = 6.36 < 0.8 T safe
Check shear on bolts :
Qact / n = 0 / 6 = 0 ton < Ps = 7.11 ton

safe

Thickness of head plate:

Assume e = 4cm

h1 = 8cm

Mmax = 4 x 6.46 = 25.84 cmt

t=

6 x 25.84
= 3.35 cm taken 34 mm
8 x0.72 x 2.4

25/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

11.27

Eccentric Connections 1
Other shapes of rafter to rafter connection

R ID G E C A P .7M M

C 140X 65X
4

L 80X 80X 8
IP E

IP E

S T IF F . P L .1 0M M

X2

f1

X1

fb

S T IF F . PL 1 0M M

S E C 1-1
R ID G E C A P .7M M

C 140X 65X
4

L 80X 80X 8

IP E 3 00

IPE 3 00

f1
fb

X2
X1

S E C 1-1
26/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Example 5:

Conn A
5.0

Col 1

The previous figure shows the main system of an industrial building. It is required
to:
Design the welded and bolted connection "connection A" between the double crane
bracket and column 1 using pretensioned bolts M24 grade 8.8.
Data:.
Section of column 1 is BFIB 600.
head plate of Thickness 20 & use stiffener 10cm *10

32.15 t
2.5 t

0.4m

32.15 t
0.4m

0.9 t
2.5 t

BFIB 360
IPE 500

Case of max normal

32.15 t
0.4m

0.4m

2.5 t
BFIB 360

IPE 500

Case of max moment

27/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 1
Solution:
Case of max moment & corresponding normal

M = (32.15 0.9) 0.4 + 2.5(0.5+0.36) = 14.65 mt

N= 33.05 t,
Q = 2.5 t

Case of max normal

M = 2.52 (0.5 + 0.36) = 4.3 mt

N = 64.3t,
Q = 5t

Q Vertical force causes normal force on bolt. Since the compression force on bolts

is neglected, so for Bolts only case of Max moment to be considered.

Design of bolted connections:
We neglect effect of normal force as it's not critical for bolts
3
X 1 = 10+ = 11.5 cm
2

40
5 5 5

X2 = 40 11.5 = 28.5 cm
30 80
I=
12

= 1280000 cm4

f1 =

1465 80
2
( ) = 0.046 t/cm

f2 =

1465
2
* 28.5 = 0.033 t/cm

T = 0.7*22.23
Text, b1, M=(

BFIB 600
X2
f2

for M24 = 15.56t

0.046 + 0.033
1
) * 30 * 11.5 * = 6.8t < 0.8T = 12.44 t
2
2

Text, b2, M = (

0.033 + 0
1
) * 30 * 28.5 * = 7t < 0.8T =12.44 t
2
2

No prying force (there is a stiff)

Qs =

X1

5 max shear
= 0.625 < Ps
8 4 each side

Ps = 0.7 * 5.55 cranes Ps = 3.88

4

28/28-E.C.1
2007-2008

f1

Eccentric Connections 2
1- Connections subjected to shear, tension and bending moment:
Note that: The bracket can be either welded to column or welded to head plate,
which is in turn bolted to column as shown in the figure.

III- Welded connections:

Design Steps:
Dim of Weld.
Assume size of weld
S=

Smin = 4 mm for static load

6 mm for dynamic load

Smax= tmin
(Always for moments use maximum
size of weld because it is critical)
hweld =0.8 x h
bw1 =bf
bw2 =0.4 x bf

Calculate the C.G. of Weld.

X=

A X
A
W

,Y=

A Y
A
W

1/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of weld.

T = Px, Qy = Py , M = (Qy x ex + T x ey)

Distribution of T, Qy and M on weld.
i. Effect of Q y:
Qy will cause shear stress on vl weld only " q =

QY
"
Aw vl

ii. Effect of Bending moment M.

The total weld will be subjected to a diff. Bending stress resulting from
the bending moment.

fb =

M
IX

iii. Effect of T.
T will cause tensile stress on total weld " ft =

T
Awtot

Mechanical properties of weld.

1- Awtot = 4 bw2 x S + 2 bw1 x S + 2 hweld x S
2- Awvl = 2 hweld x S
3- Ix = 2

3
S hweld

12

+ 2 bw1 S (

h+S 2
h
S
) + 4 b w2 S ( t f ) 2
2
2
2

2/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Check the critical points of weld.
Point 1 " Hz weld "
Stresses at 1:Shear stress:
q1 = 0

no effect of Q y on Hz weld

Normal stress:
f1 =

M
T
y1 +
0.2 Fu =0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72
Awtot
IX

Point 2 " VL weld "

Shear stress:
q2 =

QY
Aw vl

Normal stress:
f2 =

M
T
y2 +
Awtot
IX

R = 3q 22 + f 22 1.1*0.2Fu = 1.1*0.2*3.6 = 0.79 t/cm2

If unsafe:1- We increase h to increase the weld length by adding a stiff of length 10cm and
thickness 10mm (size of weld will be 10mm also) as in figure. In case we can add
two stiff it will be better, as the weld will remain symmetric "C.G. is the same"

3/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Example 1:It is required to design the shown connection using Fillet weld. "between head pl
and Bracket"
Given:Px = 1.0 ton, Py = 10 ton.

Col. Section I.P.E 500

Bracket Beam I.P.E 300

Solution:I- Fillet Weld between head plate and bracket.

Design Steps:
1- Dim of Weld.
Assume size of weld S= 8mm = 0.8 cm
hweld =0.8 x h = 0.8 x 30 = 24 cm
hws =0.8 x hstiff= 0.8 x 7.5 = 6 cm
bw2 =0.4 x bf = 0.4 x 15 = 6 cm

2- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

As weld is symmetric so C.G. of bracket is C.G. of weld.

4/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2

3- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of

weld.
T = Px = 1.0 ton, Qy = Py = 10 ton
Mt = (Qy x ex + T x ey) = 10 x 0.33 + 1.0 x (0.55 + 0.15) = 4.00 mt

4- Mechanical properties of weld.

1- Awtot = 8 bw2 x S + 4 hws x S + 2 hweld x S = 8 x 6 x 0.8 + 4 x 6 x 0.8 + 2 x 24 x 0.8 = 96 cm2
2- Awvl = 2 hweld x S + 4 hws x S = 2 x 24 x 0.8 + 4 x 6 x 0.8 = 57.6 cm2
0.8 243
30
0.8 2
30 0.8 2
) + 4 6 0.8 ( +
)
+ 4 6 0.8 ( 1.07
12
2
2
2
2
3- Ix =
63
30 + 7.5 2
+4 0.8 + 4 6 0.8 (
) = 16719cm 4
12
2
2

5- Check the critical points of weld.

In this case we only have 1 critical point "in Vl weld" to be checked, as it is subjected
to shear, tension and max effect of bending (the most far point from N-A)

Point 1 " Hz weld"

Shear stress:
q1 =

10
QY
2
= 0.173 t/cm
=
AWvl 57.6

Normal stress:
f1 = fb1 + ft1 =

T
M
y1 +
Awtot
IX
=

4.0 100 30
1 .0
( + 6) +
= 0.52 t/cm2
16719
2
96

Resultant:
R1 = 3q12 + f12 = 3 0.1732 + 0.522 = 0.60 < 0.2 x 1.1 x 3.6 = 0.792 t/cm2

Safe

5/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Example2:
For the shown figure:
Design the weld between bracket and column given that
The bracket is IPE 500. If the weld is unsafe suggest a
suitable solution and design it.
Py = 32.28 t
Px = 2.5 t

Solution:
1- Dim of Weld.
Use max size of weld because there are no
stiffeners
Sw = 10 mm, Sf = 16 mm, bf1 = 20 cm,
bf2 = 0.4 * 20 = 8 cm
h = 0.8 * 50 = 40 cm
2- Mechanical properties of weld.
AT = (20*1.6)* 2 + 4 * (8*1.6) + (40*1) * 2
= 195.2 cm2
AV = 40*1*2 = 80 cm2
Ix = 2* (1*40 3 / 12) + 4*(8*1.6) * (25 - 1.6 - 1.6/2)2 + 2*(20*1.6)*(25+1.6/2)2 = 79418 cm4
3- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of weld.
Q = 32.28 t, T = 2.5 t
M = 32.28 * 0.5 + 2.5 * (0.45 + 0.5/2) = 17.89
4 - Check the critical points of weld.
Here we have 2 points. The first is subjected to maximum moment
stresses but no shear, while the second is affected with both shear
and moment

6/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Point 1:
f1 =

2 .5
17.89 * 100 50
2
2
+
* ( + 1.6) = 0.61 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm
195.2
79418
2

Point 2:
f2 =

2.5
17.89 * 100 40
+
*
= 0.46 t/cm2
195.2
79418
2

q2 =

32.28
2
* 0.4 t/cm
80

R = 0.46 2 + 3 * 0.4 2 = 0.84 t/cm2 > 1.1*0.2*3.6 = 0.79 t/cm2 Unsafe

To be symmetric, we can use 2 stiffeners, 10 cm each with thickness

10 cm and recheck as previous example
Ix = 2* (1*40 3 / 12) + 4*(8*1.6) * (25 - 1.6 - 1.6/2)2 +
4*(8*1.6)*(25+1.6/2)2 + 4 *

83
50
4
+ 8 * ( + 10 4) 2 = 110340.7 cm
12
2

Check point 1 only:

[Critical because point 1 is subjected to max moment, Tension as all points and
shear as all verticals]
f1 =

2.5
1789
50
2
+
* ( + 10) = 0.58 t/cm
227.2 110340.7
2

q1 =

32.28
= 0.29 t/cm2
112

R = 0.58 2 + 3 * 0.29 2 = 0.76 t/cm2 < 0.79 t/cm2 Ok safe

7/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Example3:
For the shown figure:
Design the weld between bracket and column given that the
crane girder is HEB 450 and the crane girder supports a
crane of 2 wheel loads 15 t each spaced 2m. The spacing
between frames is 6m. The bracket is IPE 500. If the weld is
unsafe suggest a suitable solution and design it.
Py = 32.28 t
Px = 2.5 t

Solution:
1- Dim of Weld.

Sw = 10 mm, Sf = 16 mm, bf1 = 20 cm,

bf2 = 0.4 * 20 = 8 cm
h = 0.8 * 50 = 40 cm
hstiff = 0.8 x 10 = 8 cm
2- Mechanical properties of weld.
Av = 2*8 + 2*40 = 96 cm2
AT = 96 + 6*8*1.6 + 20*1.6 = 204.8 cm2
y =

20 * 1.6 * 0.8 + 2 * 8 * 1.6 * (4 + 49.2 + 52.4) + 2 * 40 * 26.6 + 2 * 8 * (57.6)

= 28.2 cm
204.8

Ix = 20*1.6*(28.8-0.8)2 + 2*8*1.6[(28.8- 4)2 + (28.8- 49.2)2 + (28.852.4)2] + 2*40*(28.8- 52.4)2 + 2*8*(57.6- 28.8)2 + 2*8 3/12 +
2*403/12 = 90155 cm4
3- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of
weld.
M= 32.28*0.5 + 2.5(0.45+0.5-0.266) = 17.85 mt
(We can take moment as if c.g. is at mid height)
8/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Q = 32.28 t, T=2.5 t
Checks: check on point 1 only
f1 =

1785
2 .5
* 33.4 +
= 0.67 t/cm2
90155
204.8

q1 =

32.28
= 0.34 t/cm2
96

R = 0.67 2 + 3 * 0.34 2 = 0.89 t/cm2 > 0.79 t/cm2 Use another stiffener
No need to check point 2 because y < y 1
NOTE that:
If y 1 < y , so we have to check the shown 2 points
The first is as before, while the second is in the compression side
and its check will be:
f2 =

T M

y < 0.2 Fu
A I

(Tension and the moment are subtracted)

9/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Example4:
For the shown portal frame it is required to:20 mt

20 mt
13 mt

Moment
A Design the shown connection between the rafter and the column.
B Design the shown connection between the two rafters.
Design the welded connection only
Given that: Q at haunch = 5t and = zero at mid span
PL. 10 MM

STEEL SHEET
RAIN GUTTER .7MM
IPE 360

PART OF IPE
360

RIDGE CAP .7MM

L 80X80X8

C 140X65X4

IPE 360

IPE 360

10/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2

Solution:
A) Connection between rafter and column:
IPE

h1
e

X1

fb
f1

X2

PART OF IPE

Mact = 20 mt

, Qact = 6 ton

H= 2x36+4 = 76 cm

Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:

Properties of the weld :
Assume size of weld S = 8 mm for web
and S flange = 10 mm
Awvl = 4 x 28 x 0.8 = 89.6 cm2
Ix = 2 (17 x 1 x 36.52 + 2 x 6 x 1.0 x (36 1.27 0.5)2 + 2 x 0.8 x 28 3 / 12 + 2 x 0.8 x 28
x 18 2) = 108301.4 cm4
Checks:

17.0

At point 16.0

q1 = 0 t/cm2
f1 = 2000 x ( 36 + 1 ) / 108301.4 = 0.69 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2
28.0

11/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
At point 2q2 = 6 / 89.6 = 0.067 t/cm2
f2 = 2000 x ( 18 + 28 / 2 ) / 108301.4 = 0.59 t/cm2
R1 =

( 0.592 + 3x0.0672 ) = 0.6 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2 x 1.1

B )connection between2 rafter:

Mact = 13 mt

, Qact = 0

Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:

Properties of the weld:

17.0

Assume size of weld S = 6 mm

Ix = 2 ( 17 x 0.6 x 36.32 + 2 x 6 x 0.6 x ( 36 1.27 0.3 )2
+ 2 x 0.6 x 283 / 12 + 2 x 0.6 x 28 x 182 )

6.0

= 70213.472 cm4
28.0

Checks:
No shear so only point 1 is critical
At point 1q1 = 0 t/cm2
f1 = 1300 x (36 + 0.6) / 70213.472 = 0.67 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2
Other shapes of rafter to rafter connection

12/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2

R ID G E C A P .7M M

C 140X 65X
4

L 80X 80X 8
IP E

IP E

S T IF F . P L .1 0M M

X2

f1

X1

fb

S T IF F . PL 1 0M M

S E C 1-1
R ID G E C A P .7M M

C 140X 65X
4

L 80X 80X 8

IP E 3 00

IPE 3 00

f1
fb

X2
X1

S E C 1-1

13/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Example 5:

Conn A
5.0

Col 1

The previous figure shows the main system of an industrial building. It is required
to:
The previous figure shows the main system of an industrial building. It is required
to:
Design the welded and bolted connection "connection A" between the double crane
bracket and column 1 using pretensioned bolts M24 grade 8.8.
Data:.
Section of column 1 is BFIB 600.
head plate of Thickness 20 & use stiffener 10cm *10

32.15 t
2.5 t

0.4m

32.15 t
0.4m

0.9 t
2.5 t

BFIB 360
IPE 500

Case of max normal

32.15 t
0.4m

0.4m

2.5 t
BFIB 360

IPE 500

Case of max moment

14/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
Solution:
Design of welded connection
Case of max moment & corresponding normal

N= 33.05 t
M = (32.15 0.9) 0.4 + 2.5(0.5+0.36) = 14.65 mt
Q = 2.5 t
Case of max normal

N = 64.3t
M = 2.52 (0.5 + 0.36) = 4.3 mt
Q = 5t
Q Vertical force causes normal force on both weld and bolt. Since the compression

force on bolts is neglected while it is not neglected for weld.

For weld we have to check both cases, for Bolts only case of Max moment to be

considered.
Use head plate of Thickness 20 & use stiffener 10cm *10

Design of weld between head plate and column

24x2

1
48x1.4

8x1

Lw stiffener = 0.8 10 = 8cm

BFIB 600
Lw web = 0.8 60 = 48 cm

Lw flange (total on two sides) = 0.4 30 = 12 cm

Properties of weld
Ah = 814 + 481.42 = 166.4 cm2
Atotal = 166.4 + 8122 = 358.4 cm2

15/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 2
3

48
8
60
8 2
3 2
4
Ix = 21.4
+ 4[ + 8 * ( + 10 ) ] + 8 24 2 (30 ) = 379350 cm
12
12
2
2
2

Or Ix exactly
3

48
8
60
8 2
60 2 2
60
2 2
Ix = 2 1.4
+ 4[ + 8 ( + 10 ) ] + 4 ( 24 2) ( + ) + 4 ( 24 2)( 3 )
12
12
2
2
2 2
2
2

Check stresses for case 1 (Max moment)

q=

2 .5
2
= 0.015 t/cm
166.4

f=

33.05
1465
60
2
+
* ( + 10) = 0.246 t/cm
358.4 379350 2
2

R = 0.246 + 3 0.015 = 0.25t / cm < 0.72 1.1

Check stresses for case 2 (Max Normal )
q=

5
2
= 0.03 t/cm
166.4

f=

64.3
430
2
+
* 40 = 0.224 t/cm
358.4 379350
2

R= f + 3q = 0.224 + 3 0.03 = 0.23t / cm p 0.72 1.1

We may decrease size of weld

16/16-E.C.2
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
2- Connections subjected to shear and torsion:
I- Using Pretension or Non-Pretension bolts.

1/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Design Steps:
1- Dim of Bracket plates.
Assume h = (1 1.25) x d
2- Arrange bolts.
Assume e = (2 3) , p = (4 5)

n
h
Calculate bolt =
p
2
Then we round nbolt and calculate the new h =

nbolt
xp
2

3- Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.(If the bolts are not symmetric)
X=

A X b
A Yb
,Y=
A
A

Note: Get C.G. without calculations if bolts are symmetric

Where A =

2
4

4- Calculation of straining actions by moving the load from its point of

application to the C.G. of bolts.

Qx = P x / 2, Qy = Py / 2 (we divide by 2 because we have 2 brackets in 2 sides)

Mt = (Qy x ex + Qx x ey)
N.B.:
In case Px is of reversible direction, we must choose the direction which gives max Mt
2/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Distribution of Qx, Q y and Mt on bolts.
a- Effect of shear force on bolts:
Each bolt will be subjected to same
Shear force in X direction = H =
And in Y-direction = V =

QX
n

QY
n

b- Effect of torsion moment on bolts.

Each bolt will be subjected to a diff.
shear force resulting from the torsion
moment.
Fi =

Mt
2
ri

ri where ri2 = x i2 + yi2

y
x
Sin = i , Cos = i
ri
ri
Fix = Fi sin =

Mt
2

ri

yi

Fiy = Fi cos

Mt
2

ri

xi

Max effect of torsion is at corners, as yi and xi are max at corners.

5- Check the critical bolt for safety against shear from Qx, Qy & Mt.
The critical bolt is the bolt where H and Fix are of same direction;
V and Fiy are of same direction too.
Therefore, from the figure bolt 1 is the critical bolt.
Rx =H + Fix
R=

Ry =V + Fiy

R X2 + RY2 Rleast

Where Rleast = min of Rs.s. and Rb for Non-Pretension bolts.

= Ps for Pretension bolts.
If R > Rleast we increase h to increase the number of bolts and recheck.
3/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
II- Using fillet weld.
We may use fillet weld instead of bolts to connect the two brackets plates
to the column Section.

4/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Design Steps:
1- Dim of Bracket plates.
Assume h = (1 to 1.25) x d

2- Dim of Weld.
Assume size of weld S= (We may assume S=10mm)
Smin = 4 mm for static load
6 mm for dynamic load
Smax= tmin ,

hweld=hbracket 2 S = h 2 S, bweld=bf 2 S

3- Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of weld.

Qx = P x / 2, Qy = Py / 2 (we divide by 2 because we have 2 brackets in 2 sides)

Mt = (Qy x ex + Qx x ey)
N.B.: In case Px is of reversible direction, we must choose the direction which
gives max Mt
Distribution of Qx, Q y and Mt on weld.
a- Effect of shear force on weld:
The Hz weld will be subjected to shear stress in X direction = H =

QX
AWhz

The Vl weld will be subjected to shear stress in Y direction = V =

QY
AWvl

5/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
b- Effect of torsion moment on weld.
The total weld will be subjected to a diff. shear stress resulting from the torsion
moment.
Fi =

y
x
Mt
ri ; Sin = i , Cos = i
ri
ri
IP

Fix = Fi sin

Mt
yi
IP

; Fiy = Fi cos =

Mt
xi
IP

Max effect of torsion is at corners, as yi and x i are max at corners. So to calculate H,

V, q ix and qiy we need to calculate some mechanical properties.
4- Mechanical properties of weld:
1- Awhz = 4 bweld x S
2- Awvl = 2 hweld x S
3- Ix = 2

3
S hweld
h
+ 4 bweld S ( ) 2
12
2

S b 3weld
d ' bf 2
)
+ 4 b weld S (
12
2
4- Iy =
d'
+2 h weld S ( )2
2
4

5- Ip = Ix + Iy
5- Check the critical point of weld
Point 1 " Hz weld "
Shear stress at 1 in:1- X direction
q 1x = H + F1x =

Shear stress at 2 in:1- X direction

M
QX
+ t y1
AWhz I P

2- Y direction
q 1y = 0 + F1y = 0 +

Point 2 " VL weld "

Mt
x1
IP

No effect of V on Hz weld
Resultant
R1 = q12X + q12Y 0.2 FU =
0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2

q 2x = 0 + F2x =0 +

Mt
y2
IP

No effect of H on Vl weld
2- Y direction
q 2y = V + F2y =

QY
M
+ t x2
AWVl
IP

Resultant
R2 = q22X + q22Y 0.2 FU =
0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2

6/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
If R1 > 0.2 x Fu:1- We increase height of bracket to increase the weld length and recheck.
2- Or increase S up to Smax and recheck, where Snew = Sold

R1
0.2 Fu

Example1:

For the shown figure, it is required to design the shown connection:1- Using non-Pretension bolts M16 grade "8.8".
2- Using Pretension bolts M16 grade "8.8".
3- Using fillet weld.
Given:Col. Section 2C 350
Bracket pl. 14mm
Py = 17.85 t
Px = 1.36 t

7/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Solution:1- Using Non-Pretension.
Design Steps:
Dim of Bracket plates.
Assume h = 1.25 x d
= 1.25 x 40 = 50cm
Arrange bolts.
Assume e = 2.5
p=5

= 2.5 x 16 = 40mm

= 5 x 16 = 80mm

500
nbolt
h
= 6.25 taken 6 bolts
=
=
2
p
80
h=

nbolt
x p = 6 x 80 = 480 mm
2

Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.

Due to symmetry, the c.g. of bolts arr. is
X = 150 mm, Y = 200 mm

Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.
Qx = Px / 2= 1.36 /2 = 0.68 ton
Qy = Py / 2 = 17.85 /2 = 8.925 ton
Mt = (Qy x ex + Qx x ey) = 8.925 x (0.2 + 0.3) + 0.68 x (0.36 + 0.02 + 0.48 / 2) = 4.88 mt
Check the critical bolt for safety against shear from Qx, Qy & Mt.
The critical bolt is the bolt where H and Fix are of same direction;
V and Fiy are of same direction too.
So from the figure bolt 1 is the critical bolt.
ri2 = x i2 + yi2 = 12 (15)2 + 4 (42+122+202) = 4940 cm2
Rx = H + F1x =

Mt
QX
0.68
488
yi =
+
+
20 = 2.03 t
2
12
4940
n
ri

8/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Ry = V + F1y =

RS.S =

M
QY
488
8.92
+ t xi =
+
15 = 2.23 t
2
4940
12
n
ri

1.6 2
0.25 x 8 = 4.01 ton,
4

Rb = 0.8*3.6*1.6*tmin, where tmin is minimum of bracket thickness (14mm) and tf =

17.5 mm (tmin = 14mm)
Rb = 0.8*3.6*1.4*1.6 = 6.45 t

R=

Rleast = 4.01 t

R X2 + RY2 = 2.03 2 + 2.23 2 = 3.01ton Rleast Safe

2- Using pretension bolts:

Ps = 0.7* 2.47 = 1.73 t
R=

"from table page 106 bridges and cranes"

R X2 + RY2 = 2.032 + 2.232 = 3.01ton > Rleast = 1.73 unsafe

So we have to increase number of bolts

9/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
3- Using fillet weld.
Dim of Bracket plates.
Assume h = 1.0 x d = 1 x 400 = 400 mm
Dim of Weld.
Assume size of weld S= 10 mm
bweld=bf 2S = 10 2 = 8 cm
hweld=h 2S = 40 2 = 38 cm

Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of weld.
Qx = Px / 2= 1.36 /2 = 0.68 ton, Qy = Py / 2 = 17.85 /2 = 8.925 ton
Mt = (Qy x ex + Px x ey) = 8.925 x (0.2 + 0.3) + 0.68 x (0.36 + 0.02 + 0.40 / 2)
= 4.86 mt
Mechanical properties of weld.
Awhz = 4 bweld x S = 4 x 1.0 x 8 = 32 cm2
Awvl = 2 hweld x S = 2 x 1.0 x 38 = 76 cm2
3
S hweld
h+S 2
)
+ 4 bweld S (
12
2
1 383
40 + 1 2
4
=2
) = 22593 cm
+ 4 8 1 (
2
12
3
d '+ S 2
d ' b f 2
S bweld
+ 4 bweld S (
) + 2 hweld S (
)
Iy = 4
12
2
2

Ix = 2

10/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
=4

1 83
12

+ 4 8 1 (

40 + 1 2
40 10 2
4
) = 39309 cm
) + 2 38 1 (
2
2

Ip = Ix + Iy = 61902 cm4
Check the critical points of weld.
Point 1 " Hz weld "
Shear stress at 1 in:1- X direction
QX
M
+ t y1
AWhz I P
0.68
486
40
+
( + 1) =0.18
=
32 61902
2

q1x = H + F1x =

2- Y direction
Mt
x1
IP
486
40
( 1) = 0.15
=0+
61902
2

q1y = 0 + F1y = 0 +

Resultant
2
2
R1 = q1X
+ q1Y
= 0.182 + 0.152
= 0.234 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

Point 2 " VL weld "

Shear stress at 2 in:1- X direction
Mt
y2
IP
486
38
=0.15
=0+
61902 2

q2x = 0 + F2x =0 +

2- Y direction
QY
M
+ t x2
AWVl
IP
8.925
486
40
+
( + 1) = 0.282
=
76
61902
2

q2y = V + F2y =

Resultant
2
R2 = q 22X + q 2Y
= 0.152 + 0.2822 =
0.32 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

11/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
N.B.:Case of bracket carries 2 crane girders:
If we have 2 crane girders as shown in figure.

We have to make two cases of loading to check

a) Case of maximum torsion:
Put one crane (the largest) on one side, while the other is only DL
b) Case of maximum shear:
Put two cranes and put both Px in the direction to increase torsion moment of
the largest crane (If the 2 cranes are not equal)

12/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Example2:
For the shown figure, the right crane girder C1 supports 2 cranes.
It is required to design the connection between the bracket and built-up column
using: 1- Fillet weld (Take h = 40cm)
2- Non-pretension bolts M16 grade 8.8 (Take h = 48cm)
Loads:
From right crane girder:

From left crane girder:

PDL = 1.48 t = Pmin

PDL = 1.48 t= Pmin

PY = 36.3 t = Pmax

PY = 30.94 t = Pmax

Px = 2.8 t

Px = 2.36 t

Solution:
1- Design using fillet weld:
Dim of Weld.
Assume size of weld S= 10 mm
bweld=bf 2S = 10 2 = 8 cm
hweld=h 2S = 40 2 = 38 cm

13/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of weld.
We have 2 cases:
Case 1:
Maximum torsion and corresponding shear
Qx = 1.4 ton,
Qy = 0.74 + 18.15 = 18.89 ton
Mt = (18.15 0.74) x (0.45/2 + 0.35) + 1.4 x
(0.6 + 0.02 + 0.4/2) = 11.16 mt

Case 2:
Maximum shear and corresponding torsion:
Qx = 1.4+1.18 = 2.58 ton,
Qy = 15.47 + 18.15 = 33.62 ton
Mt = (18.15 15.47) * (0.45/2 + 0.35) +
(1.4+1.18) * (0.6 + 0.02 + 0.4/2) = 3.66 mt
Mechanical properties of weld. ( As
previous example)
Awhz = 32 cm2
Awvl = 76 cm2
Ix = 22593 cm4
Iy = 39309 cm4
Ip = Ix + Iy = 61902 cm4

Then we have to check as before for 2 points and twice. First, for case of
maximum torsion and corresponding shear, while the second time, for case of
maximum shear and corresponding torsion.
14/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
Check the critical point of weld in case of maximum torsion.
Point 1 " Hz weld "
Shear stress at 1 in:3- X direction
QX
M
+ t y1
AWhz I P
1.4 1116
40
= +
( + 1) =0.42
32 61902
2

q1x = H + F1x =

4- Y direction
M
q1y = 0 + F1y = 0 + t x1
IP
1116
40
( 1) = 0.34
=0+
61902
2

Resultant
2
2
R1 = q1X
+ q1Y
= 0.422 + 0.342
= 0.542 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

Point 2 " VL weld "

Shear stress at 2 in:3- X direction
Mt
y2
IP
1116 38
=0+
=0.34
61902 2

q2x = 0 + F2x =0 +

4- Y direction
M
QY
+ t x2
IP
AWVl
18.89
1116
40
+
( + 1) = 0.627
=
76
61902
2

q2y = V + F2y =

Resultant
2
R2 = q 22X + q 2Y
= 0.34 2 + 0.6272 =
0.71 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

Check the critical point of weld in case of maximum shear.

Point 1 " Hz weld "
Shear stress at 1 in:5- X direction
M
QX
+ t y1
AWhz I P
2.58
366
40
+
( + 1) =0.2
=
32 61902
2

q1x = H + F1x =

6- Y direction
Mt
x1
IP
366
40
=0+
( 1) = 0.11
61902
2

q1y = 0 + F1y = 0 +

Resultant
2
2
R1 = q1X
+ q1Y
= 0.22 + 0.112
= 0.228 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

Point 2 " VL weld "

Shear stress at 2 in:5- X direction
Mt
y2
IP
366 38
=0.11
=0+
61902 2

q2x = 0 + F2x =0 +

6- Y direction
QY
M
+ t x2
AWVl
IP
33.62
366
40
+
=
( + 1) = 0.566
76
61902
2

q2y = V + F2y =

Resultant
2
R2 = q 22X + q 2Y
= 0.112 + 0.562
= 0.57 < 0.2 x 3.6 = 0.72 t/cm2
Safe

15/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

Eccentric Connections 3
2- Design using non-pretension bolts:
Design Steps:
Dim of Bracket plates.
Assume h = 1.25 x d
= 1.25 x 40 = 50cm
Arrange bolts. As in previous example
Calculate the C.G. of bolts arrangement.
Due to symmetry, X = 150 mm, Y = 200 mm
Moving the load from its point of application to the C.G. of bolts.
The 2 cases of loading as in case of weld:
Case of maximum shear and corresponding torsion:
Qx = 2.58 t

Qy = 33.62 t

Mt = 3.66 mt

Case of maximum torsion and corresponding shear:

Qx = 1.4 t

Qy = 18.89 t

Mt = 11.16 mt

Check case of maximum shear :

ri2 = 4940 cm2
Rx =

from previous example

2.58
366
+
20 = 1.7 t
12
4940

Ry =

33.62
366
+
15 = 3.91 t
12
4940

Ry =

18.89 1116
+
15 = 4.96 t
12
4940

R = R X2 + RY2 = 3.912 + 1.7 2 = 4.27ton

Check case of maximum torsion :
Rx =

1.4
1116
+
20 = 4.63 t
12
4940

R = R X2 + RY2 = 4.632 + 4.96 2 = 6.78ton >>>>> 4.01 t

Where Rleast = 4.01 t (from previous example)
So we may use pitch 3 = 3 x 1.6 = 4.8 cm, p = 48/4.8 = 10 bolts instead of 6 bolts

16/16-E.C.3
2007-2008

L.R.F.D
Design using L.R.F.D.
- There are two design philosophies in steel structures design:
1) Allowable stress design (ASD)
Depending on working stress

(0.58 Fy)

(Dead and live load)

2) Load and resistance factor design (LRFD)

Depending on limit states with ultimate load

(0.85Fy & 0.7Fu)

(1.2 Pd & 1.4 PL)

- Basic concept of (ASD & LRFD):

i

Qi

Concept of (LRFD)

Rn

Capacity of the member

Actual load affect the member
= Summation
= Load factor
Q = Nominal load
= Resistance factor
Rn = Nominal resistance
Qi

R n
Rn
)

factor of safety

Concept of (ASD)

.
Load combinations for (LRFD) design;
(1) 1.4 D
(2) 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 0.5 Lr
(3) 1.2 D + 1.6 Lr + (0.5 L or 0.8 W)
1/18

L.R.F.D
(4) 1.2 D + 1.3 W + 0.5 L + 0.5 Lr
(5) 1.2 D E + 0.5 L
(6) 0.9 D (1.3 W or E)
Where D = dead load, L= live load, Lr= roof live load, W= wind load, E=
earthquake load.
Note that: For all our examples, we use either 1.4D or 1.2D+1.6L

Comparison of (LRFD) with (ASD) for tension members:

Using (ASD): allowable stresses 0.58 Fy
Actual force L + D
Using (LRFD): allowable stresses 0.85 Fy
Actual force 1.2 D + 1.6 L or 1.4 D

LRFD (1.2D + 1.6L ) / 0.85 1.41D + 1.88L 0.82 + 1.09( L / D)

=
=
=
ASD
( D + L) / 0.58
1.72D + 1.72L
1 + ( L / D)

LRFD (1.4D) / 0.85

1.65D
0.96
=
=
=
ASD ( D + L) / 0.58 1.72D + 1.72L 1 + ( L / D)
Relation between (LRFD/ASD) and (L/D)
1.2

LRFD/ASD

0.8

1.4D
0.6

1.2D+1.6L
0.4

0.2

0
0

L/D

2/18

L.R.F.D
From the curve, it is clear that LRFD is more economic for L/D less than 2,
while ASD is more economic if L/D more than 2.

The advantages of (LRFD) method;

1- LRFD provides a flexibility options for the designers.
.

-1

2- Using multiple load factor combinations should lead to economy and

more reliable.
.

-2

3- Change in resistance factor " " are much easier to make than (ASD)
ASD

LRFD

-3

4- LRFD makes design in all materials more compatible and can be used for
any material.
-4
.
5- For low live load to dead ratio, this method is economic.
.

-5

6- Gives safer structures because this method lead to a better awareness of

structural behavior
.

-6

3/18

L.R.F.D

Comparison between LRFD and ASD in compression members:

Egyptian code (ASD)

Egyptian code (LRFD)

c

1.1, Fcr = (1-0.384

1.1, Fcr = (

Where

0.648
2c

For

) Fy

Fc = 0.58 Fy -

) Fy

100, Fc = 7500 /

ASD
2.5

LRFD
4

3.5

Critical stress

0 . 58 F y 0 . 75
10

Fy
E

c=

100,

Allowable stress

For

yield=2.4

2.5

yield=2.8

yield=3.6

1.5

yield=2.4

1.5
yield=2.8
yield=3.6

0.5

20

0.5

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Slenderness

0
0

0.5

1.5

2.5

Slenderness

Design of tension members using L.R.F.D.

Calculate the capacity of the member "Pu" from the following conditions:
1) Failure based on yielding stresses (gross area):
Pn =

Ag (gross) Fy

2) Failure based on fracture (net area):

Pn =

Ae (effective) Fu

Ae = U * Anet = reduction factor * net area (look page 6)

U will be given in the exam

4/18

L.R.F.D

3) Failures of block shear rupture:

For Fu Ant (net tension)
Pn =

0.6 Fu Anv (net shear)

[0.6 Fy Agv (gross shear) + Fu Ant (net tension) ]

For Fu Ant (net tension) < 0.6 Fu Anv (net shear)

Pu =

[0.6 Fu Anv (net shear) + Fy Agt (gross tension) ]

Where

= load factor = 0.85 in case of yielding stress

= 0.7 in case of ultimate stress (facture or block shear

rupture)

How to calculate area tension Ant, Agt and shear area Anv, Agv?

m
a-m
1- Angle or plate with one row:
Agt = m*t, Agv = (e+L)*t, Ant = (m 0.5 d/ ) t, Anv = [ e + L (n -0.5) d/ ] t
d/ = d + 0.4 cm, n = number of bolts, L = ( n- 1) p'
p' is pitch between bolts in direction of force , t is tL or tplate

How to calculate x (connection eccentricity) in different angle shapes?

1- Single angle bolted:
The angle is considered to be fixed from one point so the
_

eccentricity x is the greater of ex Or m - ex

Where m = t +

at
(if not given)
2

m
e x

5/18

L.R.F.D

2- Single angle welded:

The angle is considered to be fixed from two points so the
eccentricity

x = ex (distance perpendicular to gusset plate)

e x

3- Double angle (bolted and welded):

_

x = zero (because there is no eccentricity) and the load will be transmitted

with no moment.

Calculation of the reduction factor of Anet "U"

"U" is the effect of eccentricity because of using single angle in which the
tension is transferred with moment (un-symmetric section)
_

U=1i.e.

x
L

0.9

where L is the length of the connection

L= (n-1) p

in case of bolted connections

L= Lact

in case of welded connections

U = 1 for double angles (symmetric sections)

Note that:

Ae = Aeffective = U Anet

For 2 angles welded:

U =1, Anet = Agross

So Ae = Ag

For 2 angles bolted:

U=1, Anet

So Ae

0.85Ag

For single angle welded:

U= 0.85, Anet = Agross

So Ae

0.85Ag

For single angle bolted:

Ae = UAnet

15 % for bolts and

0.85 Ag

0.7 Ag (because we have reduction

15% for eccentricity) which gives the same concept as

in ASD.

U may be given in exam

6/18

L.R.F.D

Calculation of Anet:
In the LRFD code, the clearance of the hole is taken 2mm from each side.
Bolt hole = nominal standard hole dimension + 2mm
i.e. if d = 20mm, so d' = 2 + 0.2 + 0.2 = 2.4cm

How to calculate Anet in case of bolted angles:

1- If there is one hole:
In single angle:

Anet = Ag d' t

In double angles:

Anet = 2(Ag d' t)

2- If there are two holes:

In single angle:

Anet = Ag 2d' t

In double angles:

Anet = 2(Ag 2d' t)

Where Ag is the gross area from tables, d' = d + 0.4

Note that: If the angle to be checked is not given in the exam.

LRFD is a check for an angle and since the section of the angle is so near to the
angle designed using ASD, so we may choose using same concept of ASD
(Don't write this in the exam).

Examples:
Calculate the capacity load (define the load) of the following sections connected
to gusset plate using non-pretensioned bolts M20. Steel used is st.37. Check also
if the given load is safe or not.

a- Angles bolted to gusset plate:

Example 1: Data: Single angle 80x8, Pd = 4t, Pl = 9t
The angle is as shown.

30

3*60

30

36
44

7/18

L.R.F.D
Solution:
1- Yield: Ag = 12.3 cm2 (from tables)
Pn = 0.85*2.4*12.3 = 25.09t
2- Fracture: (U may be given in exam)
Anet = 12.3 (2+0.4)*0.8 = 10.38 cm2
_

x = ex = 2.26 cm, or x = 4.4 2.26 = 2.14cm (bigger)

l= 3*6 = 18cm (distance between first and last bolt)
U = 1-(2.26/18) = 0.87<0.9 ok
Ae = UAnet = 0.87*10.38 = 9.02cm2
*****

Ae
= 9.02/12.3 = 0.73 0.7 Ag
Ag

ok

Pn = 0.7*3.6*9.02 = 22.73t
3- Block shear rupture: Li = 3+3*6 = 21cm, d' = 2.4cm
Agt = 3.6*0.8 = 2.88 cm2, Agv = 21*0.8 = 16.8 cm2
Ant = (3.6-0.5*2.4)0.8 = 1.92 cm2, Anv = (21-3.5*2.4)0.8 = 10.08 cm2
**** 0.6 Fu Anv = 0.6*3.6*10.08 = 21.77
**** Fu Ant = 3.6*1.92 = 6.91
So 0.6 Fu Anv> Fu Ant
Pn = 0.7(0.6*3.6*10.08+2.4*2.88) = 20t
So Pn is the smaller value which is 20t

Using A.S.D.: (Only if required to compare between both)

A1 = (a-d')t = (8-2.4)*0.8 = 4.48 cm2, A2 = (a-t)t = (8-0.8)*0.8 = 5.76 cm2
R.F. =

3 * 4.48
= 0.7, Anet = 4.48 + 0.7*5.76 = 8.51 cm2
3 * 4.48 + 5.76

P = 8.51 * 0.58Fy = 8.51*1.4 = 11.92t

Note that we used Anv and Ant previously calculated in L.R.F.D.

8/18

L.R.F.D
****

L.R.F.D.
20
=
= 1.68
A.S.D. 11.92

To check given loads:

1- Using A.S.D. = 4+9 = 13 >11.92

unsafe

2- Using L.R.F.D. or 1.4*4 = 5.6t or = 1.2*4+1.6*9 = 19.2t (bigger) <20t

This example shows that the L.R.F.D. is more economic than A.S.D. as the
angle is safe if designed using L.R.F.D and unsafe using A.S.D.

Example 2: Data: Double angles (2 angles back to

30

back or star shape) 80x8,

Pd = 10t

Pl = 15t

the angles are as shown.

3*60

30

36
44

Solution:
1- Yield: Ag = 12.3 cm2 (from tables)
Pn = 0.85*2.4*12.3*2 = 50.18t
2- Fracture: (U = 1) Symmetric
Anet =2[12.3 (2+0.4)*0.8] = 20.76 cm2
Ae = UAnet = 1*20.76 = 20.76cm2
*****

Ae
= 20.76/24.6 = 0.84 0.85 Ag
Ag

ok

Pn = 0.7*3.6*20.76 = 52.31t
3- Block shear rupture: Same as before for single angle
This means that if we have 2 angles, so treat them like one angle, then multiply
the resultant *2
Pn = 2*20 = 40t
So Pn is the smaller value which is 40t

Using A.S.D.:
Anet = 2(12.3-2.4*0.8) = 20.76 cm2
9/18

L.R.F.D
P = 20.76 * 0.58Fy = 20.76*1.4 = 29.06t
Note that we used the values in example 1
****

L.R.F.D.
40
=
= 1.54
A.S.D.
26.04

To check given loads:

1- Using A.S.D. = 10+15 = 25 <26.04

ok

2- Using L.R.F.D. or 1.4*10 = 14t (bigger) or = 1.2*10+1.6*15 = 36t <40t

b- Angles welded to gusset plate:

Example 3: Single angle: PD = 5 t, PL = 8 t
Estimate a section and check using both LRFD and ASD, length of weld =18 cm
Solution: 1) Estimate of section as in case of ASD
AL = 13 / (0.85*1.4) = 10.92 cm2

Use 80*8

1) Yield: Ag = 12.3 cm2

Pn = 0.85*2.4*12.3 = 25.09 t
2) Fracture:
_

x = ex = 2.26 cm
U=1-

2.26
= 0.87 < 0.9
18

ok

Ae = 0.87 *12.3 = 10.75 cm2

Ae
= 0.87 0.85 ok
Ag
Pn = 0.7*3.6*10.75 = 27.1 t

*****

No block shear rupture for welded connections

Therefore max capacity = 25.09 t
ASD:
A1 = 8*0.8 = 6.4 cm2, A2 = (8-0.8) 0.8 = 5.76 cm 2
Anet = 6.4 +

3x 6.4
x5.76 = 10.83 cm2
3x 6.4 + 5.76
10/18

L.R.F.D
F = 10.83 * 1.4 = 15.16 t
*****

LRFD 25.09
=
= 1.65
ASD 15.16

Check of angle:
Using ASD: 5 + 8 = 13 t < 15.16 t
Using LRFD: 1.2*5 + 8*1.6 = 18.8 t < 25.09 t

Example 2: Double angles

As previous example but PD = 15 t, PL = 15 t
Solution:
Estimation of section AL =

30
/ 2 = 10.71cm2
1.4

Use 2Ls 80 * 8
1) Yield: Pn = 0.85*2.4*2*12.3 = 50.18 t
2) Fracture: U = 1
Therefore Ae = Ag = 2*12.3 = 24.6 cm2
Pn = 0.7*3.6*24.6 = 61.99 t
ASD:
T = (2*12.3) * 1.4 = 34.44 t
*****

LRFD 50.18
=
= 1.46
ASD 34.44

Check of angle:
Using ASD: 15 + 15 = 30 t < 34.44 t
Using LRFD: 1.2*5 + 1.6*15 = 42 t < 50.18 t

11/18

L.R.F.D
Design of compression members using L.R.F.D.
The capacity of the section is calculated from:
Pu =

Ag Fcr

Where:

= resistance factor = 0.8 (for Egyptian code)

Ag = gross area
Fcr = critical stresses, it is calculated from:

If

1.1

Fcr = (1 0.384

If

1.1

Fcr = (

= normalized slenderness ratio =

0.648
2
c

) * Q Fy

)* Q Fy

Fy
E

buckling length = l b
as in ASD, E = 2100 t/cm2
raduis of gyration = r

Design of 2 angles back to back:

For truss members:

ry2L =

( rx ) 2 + (e +

If 2 angles back to back:

t G.PL. 2
)
2

Assume 2 tie plate

l
2
z = z max & 60
rv 3

Lz =

in =

lbin

/ = l out
& out

ry

rx

/ = L /r
out
out y

l
("l" is length of member)
3

max is the max. of

l
/ = l out
in= in & out
r
r
x

l
l
2
If z = z > max or 60 , use 3 tie plates Lz =
rv

out =

( global ) 2 + (local ) 2 =

l
l
( out ) 2 + ( z ) 2
rv
ry

< 180

12/18

L.R.F.D
Calculate c in both X & Y direction, and then calculate Fcr in both X & Y
direction.
Calculate flexural torsional buckling:
ro2 = rx2 + r y2 + x o2 + y o2
J=

H = 1

1
4
b t3 a t3

3
3

x o2 + y o2
ro2

G = 810 t/cm2

GJ

For angles Fcz =

Ag ro2

Ag is the total area of the section = 2Aangle for 2 angles back to back

Fcft =

Fcy + Fcz
2H

4F * F * H
cy
cz

* 1 1
2

( Fcy + F )

cz

y-axis of symmetry

Design of 2 angles as star shape:

/
lb
out
= out
ru

taking local buckling into consideration

Assume 2 tie plate

Lz =

l
("l" is length of member)
3

l
2
z = z max & 60
rv 3
out =

( global ) 2 + (local ) 2 =

l
l
( out ) 2 + ( z ) 2
ru
rv

< 180

Design of single angle:

If single angle:

out

lbout
rv

Fcr = critical stresses, it is calculated from:

If

1.1

Fcr = 0.6* (1 0.384

) * Q Fy
13/18

L.R.F.D
If

1.1

Fcr = 0.6* (

= normalized slenderness ratio =

0.648
2
c

)* Q Fy

Fy
E

Multiply allowable * 0.6

For columns: The buckling lengths are as shown in ECP page 53

Fixed-Fixed
lb =0.65L

Fixed-Hinged
lb =0.8L

Hinged-Hinged
Pined column
l b =L

Cantilever
l b =2.1L

Q = 1 for compact and non compact sections

ECP pages 9, 10, 11, 12 (For sections subjected to compression)

a- Single angles welded or bolted to gusset plate:

Example1:
Select a suitable one angle section of steel 37 to be used as a compression
member, 1.5m long and carrying an axial compressive load of D = 2 t (dead
load) and L = 1.2 t (live load) in a diagonal of a roof truss.
Solution: LRFD:
Pu = 1.4 D = 1.4 * 2 = 2.8 t
Or Pu = 1.2 D + 1.6 L
= 1.2 * 2 + 1.6 * 1.2 = 4.32 t (controls)
14/18

L.R.F.D
When choose use the method of ASD:
Fc = 0.75 * 0.6 = 0.45 t/cm2

Assume

A = 3.2 / 0.45 = 7.1 cm2, a = 6.5 cm

= 100 = 150 / 0.2a, a = 7.5 cm
Therefore aav =

7.5 + 6.5
= 7 cm
2

Use L 70 * 7

Check class of section (non-compact or slender):

The section is non-compact. Q=1
v

= (KL/r)v = lout / rv = 150 / 1.37 = 109 < 180

cv

2.4
= 1.17
3.14 * 2100

= 109

Fcr = 0.6*

0.648
1.17

= 1.17 > 1.1

*1*2.4 = 0.68 t/cm2 (We multiplied *0.6 because of single

angle).
Pn = 0.80*9.4*0.68 = 5.11t > 4.32 t. The chosen section is satisfactory

ASD
Pw = D + L = 2 + 1.2 = 3.2 t
Try one angle 70 x 70 x 7, having rv = 1.37 cm
Check class of section (non-compact or slender):
The section is non-compact.
v

Since

= (KL/r)v = 150 / 1.37 = 109 < 180

> 100
Fc

= [7500 / ( v)2] * 0.6

= [7500 / (85.1)2] * 0.6 = 0.37 t/cm2

fact

= 3.2 / 0.4 = 0.34 t/cm2 < Fc = 0.37 t/cm2. The chosen section is

satisfactory

15/18

L.R.F.D
b- Double angles welded or bolted to gusset plate:
Example1: Select a suitable section of steel 37 to be

2.0

used as a compression member shown.

1.5
D.L.=12t
L.L.=8t

Solution: Estimation of section:

Lin = 200cm, lout = 400cm
Assume Fc = 0.75t/cm2, AL = (20/0.75)/2 = 13.3cm2
Choose L 90*9.
Assume

= 100, 100= (200/0.3a),

a=6.7cm

100= (400/0.45a), a=8.9cm

So use aav = (8.9+9)/2

Use 2Ls 90*9

Using L.R.F.D: 1.4Pd = 1.4*12=16.8t or 1.2Pd + 1.6P; = 27.2t

in

= 200/2.74 = 73,

2.742 + (0.5 + 2.54) 2 =4.09cm,

ry =

Assume 2 tie plate

z =
out =

Lz =

/
out

= 400/4.09 =97.8 (controls)

200
= 66.7 cm
3

66.7
2
= 37.9 * 97.8 = 65.2 & 60
1.76
3

(97.8) 2 + (37.9) 2 = 104.9

2.4
= 0.785 <1.1
x 2100

cx

= 73*

cy

= 104.9*

< 180
Fcrx = 2.4*(1-0.384*0.7852) = 1.83 t/cm2

2.4
= 1.13 >1.1
x 2100

Fcr y = 2.4*

0.648
1.13

= 1.22 t/cm2

Since the angle is singly symmetric, so we have to calculation of flexural

torsional buckling:
ro2 = 2.74 + 4.09 + 2.54 = 30.7 cm
2

J=

4
* 9 * 0.93 = 8.75 cm4
3

H = 1

2.542
= 0.79
30.7

G = 810 t/cm2

16/18

L.R.F.D
810 * 8.75
Fcz =
= 7.45 t/cm2

2 * 15.5 * 30.7
Fcft =

4 * 1.22 * 7.45 * 0.79

1.22 + 7.45
=1.15t/cm2
* 1 1
2

2 * 0.79

(1.22 + 7.45)

Slightly lower than Fcr y

Pn = 0.8*(2*15.5)*1.15 = 28.52t > 27.2t

c- Other sections:
Example1:
Select a suitable I-section of steel 37 to be used as a fixed-hinged column 4m
long and carrying an axial compressive load of D = 55t (dead load) and L= 45t
(live load) in a braced structure.

LRFD
Pu

= 1.4 D = 1.4 x 55 = 77t

Or, Pu = 1.2 D + 1.6 L = 1.2 x 55 + 1.6 x 45 = 138t (controls)

pworking = 55+45 = 100t.
Assume f=0.75t/cm2, so A = (100/0.75) = 133.3cm2. Choose H.E.A. No 340.
Assume

= 100, ry is min., 100= (0.8*400/ry), ry = 3.2cm. Choose H.E.A. No

140. Use average

Try a B.F.I.B. (H.E.A.) No 240, having rx = 10.1 cm, ry = 6 cm
Check class of section (compact, non-compact or slender):
For flanges: b = 24 cm, r = tf = 1.7 cm, tw = 1.0 cm
C = (24 1.0 2x1.7) / 2 = 9.8 cm
C/ tf = 9.8 / 1.7 = 5.76 < 16.9 /

Fy = 10.9

Flange is thus compact

17/18

L.R.F.D
For web:
dw = 24 4 x 1.7 = 17.2 cm
dw / tw = 17.2 / 1.0 = 17.2 < 64 /

Fy = 41.29 (this limit is non-compact limit for

web subjected to pure compression)

Web is thus compact
The section is thus fully compact, Q=1
x

= (KL/r)x = 0.8 * 400 /10.1 = 31.68

= (KL/r)y = 0.8 * 400 /6 = 60 < 180 (the bigger, controls)

= 60 *

2.4
= 0.645 < 1.1
x 2100
2

Fcr = Fy (1-0.384

2
c

) = 2.01 t/cm2

The design strength is:

Pn = 0.80 * 76.8 * 2.01 = 123.5t
= 123.5 t < 138 t. The chosen section is NOT satisfactory.
Choose H.E.A. No. 260 and recheck
Using ASD:

= 60, Fc = 1.4-6.5*10 -5 x 602 = 1.16 t/cm2

Fact = 100 / 76.8 = 1.3 t/cm2 > 1.16 t/cm2

18/18

Design of beams
Introduction:
Beams are sections subjected to moment and shear only (no
tension or compression forces with the moment and shear). This moment
may be from concrete floor as in case of floor beams, may be from
corrugated sheets as in case of purlins or may be from wind as in case of
side and end girt.

Design of beams:
Beams have same concept of design. We have to choose a section
in which the actual stresses due to moment and shear are less than the
allowable stresses of each of them.
As in case of sections subjected to tension or compression, we have
to estimate an approximate section and check.

In order to check the beam we have to check 2 conditions:

Strength criterion: This requires that the chosen beam cross
section must resist the applied bending moments and shear forces. In
terms of stresses, this means that the actual bending and shear stresses
must not exceed the allowable stresses of each type.
Serviceability criterion: This requires that the beam deflection
under the service loads be within the acceptable range in specifications.

In Classification of section whether compact, non-compact or slender:

Table (2.1a) in page 9, is the limit ratios for stiffened compression
members where stiffened members are webs. This is because the upper
and lower flanges stiffen the web. (The web is stiffened from both
directions by the upper and the lower flange). This table is used for rolled
sections, built-up sections (sections composed of welded plates), box
section or channels.

Table (2.1c) in page 11, is the ratios for un-stiffened compression

members where un-stiffened members are flanges. This is because the
flanges are stiffened from one side only with the web and the other end is
free. This table is used for the flanges of the same section as table (2.1a).

Table (2.1d) in page 12, is used for the ratios of equal and unequal
angles as well as T-sections (T-stub) and circular sections. In case of
unequal angles, we have to make 2 checks (look page 12). Angles and
channels cannot be compact.
Shape of cross section after later torsional buckling
Section at mid section

a) Before applying load

c) Due to torsion

b) After deflection

Section at support section

To calculate Lu

act

: This depends mainly on the given structure. We

have to study the COMPRESSION flange.

Support

Support
L

Figure 1

Figure 2

The 2 given beams are simply supported and laterally restrained

at both ends at supports. In figure 1, the upper flange of beam is
restrained at its mid point. While in figure 2, the lower flange of beam is
restrained at its mid point.
The main difference is that, this beam is simply supported, so the
lower flanges subjected to tension while upper flange subjected to
compression.
For beam in figure 1, Lu

act

= L/2 because the compression flange is

restrained at its mid span. The beam in figure 2, Lu act = L because the
additional support has no effect on the compression flange.
Why to use smaller of FLTB and 0.58Fy?
This is because if FLTB is smaller, so the section will perform
L.T.B. before reach yield. This means that the L.T.B. is guide in design.
While if 0.58Fy is smaller this means that, the section will reach its
maximum stress capacity before maximum stress of L.T.B.

How to calculate the actual stress:

qall =

QS
, but since we can neglect
Ib

the contribution of flanges (about 5%),

so we may consider that the web only

Q
ht

QS
Ib

carry shear.
We may also assume that the shear
is distributed equally on the web.
Therefore, qall =

Q
,
Area

The effective area in resisting shear is taken as follows: ECP13

Aeff sh = d tw

for rolled section

Aeff sh = hw tw

for built-up section

Where (d) is the total depth of rolled section

Design of Beams 1
Beams are subjected to moment and shear
We will study how to calculate the actual and allowable stresses:
1- Stress due to moment:
fact =

My
Fbcx
I

Where: fact is the actual stresses due to actual moment affecting the beam. We
calculate "M" using load distribution due to either concrete slab or corrugated
sheets.
Fbcx is: the allowable stress of bending in compression side due to
moment about x-x axis.
For rolled section: we can use "S" in cm3 from tables (in some tables it is called
"Z") instead of (I /Y)

How to calculate F bcx which is the allowable of moment?

In order to calculate the allowable of moment we have to check:
a-Compactness of the section: This is the ability of the section to perform local
buckling for either flange or web only.
We have 3 types of sections:
1- Compact sections:
Are those sections which can achieve the plastic
moment capacity without local buckling of any of its
compression elements.

2- Non-compact sections:
Are those sections which can achieve the yield moment
without local buckling of any of its compression elements.

1/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
3- Slender sections:
Are those sections, which undergo local buckling before
achieving the yield moment.

Sections are classified according to their width-thickness ratios. Each

sections component (flanges and webs) is treated separately as follows:
Look ECP page 9, 10, 11, 12
Rolled I-section

Rolled UPN

welded I-section

tf

r=
Axis of bending

dw

tw

Rolled I-section

dw

dw

tw

Welded I-section
2/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
1
(b t w 2 r )
2
d w = h 2(t f + r )

c=

16.9

Fy

c 23

tf
Fy

> 23

Fy

127

Fy

d w 190

tw
Fy

> 190

Fy

Non compact

Slender

Compact

Compact

Non compact

Slender

1
c = ( b 2s t w )
2
d w = h 2( t f + s)
15.3

Compact

Fy

c 21

Non compact

tf
Fy

21

Slender
>

F
y

127

Fy

d w 190

tw
Fy
190
>

Fy

Non compact

Slender

Compact

From tables pages 9 to 12, we can see that we treat every portion of the
section as a separate part.
Note that in all tables we use the flat portions.
Important note: For rolled section and if "r" is not given, we can take "r" tf
So c =

1
1
(b-tw-2r) = (b-tw-2tf)
2
2

And d w = h-2(tf + r) = h-2(tf + tf) = h-4tf

Important note: If for example, the flange is non-compact and the web is
compact, so we consider the whole section as non-compact (more safe).

3/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Important note:
a) In ECP 9, Web is subjected to moment (
compression (

) in case of beams, to

) for columns and to bending and compression (

) in beam-columns.
.

b) In ECP 11, Flange is always subjected to moment (

) in case

of beams, columns and beam-columns. If there is My, the flange is subjected to

bending and compression (

).
.

b-Lateral torsional buckling:

We have to know if the section will suffer from lateral torsional buckling or not.
What is L.T.B.?
The COMPRESSION flange of the beam will buckle outside the plan due to
compression forces. At the same time the tension flange will not buckle. This
causes torsion to the section.
Plan of upper flange

Section at
support

Section at
mid section

How to check whether there is L.T.B. or not?

We have to calculate Lu max and Lu act

4/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Lu max is the maximum unsupported length. This is the maximum length with no
lateral torsional buckling. Lu max calculated from 2 equations in the code.
Lu act is the actual unsupported length. Lu act calculated from the given structure.
To calculate Lu max : ECP page 16
We take the smaller of the following 2 values:

L u . max =

20b f
Fy

OR
L u . max =

1380A f
Cb
Fy d

Where: bf is the flange width (from tables), Af = bf x tf (from tables)

Fy = 2.4t/cm 2, d is the beam height= h (for IPE 300, d=30cm)
Lu = the actual unsupported length of the beam
Cb (For beams) = coefficient depending on the type of load and support as
shown in the following table. ECP page 20
Note that:
1- End restrains about Y-axis is always simple
2- If there are end moments, this means that this is an indication for continuous
beams.

5/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1

For secondary beam:

Shape of moment of section "1" is not in code so we can take it either 1.13 or
1.30 (1.13 is preferable because it is critical)
Shape of moment of section "2" is given in code = 2.1
For main beam: Shape of moment is not in code but it is near to that of
distributed load with cb = 1.13
To calculate Lu act : This depends mainly on the given structure. We have to
study the COMPRESSION flange.

What restrains the compression flange:

1- The connection of beam with column.
2- The tension in flange (if part is compression and then changes to be
tension, Lu act will be from the support to the compression part only)
3- R.C. slabs and steel deck if the flange is completely restrained using shear
connector or the flange embedded in the concrete.

6/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Closed ring
Hooked bar
Spiral
Studs

Friction only

Fle

Compression flange
embedded in conc

xib

le

n
con

ect

or

4- Beams perpendicular to the beam under study

But in all cases we have to study the compression flange

1-Floor beams (with concrete slab or steel deck): (Mezzanine floors, tanks)
a- For Simple floor beams:
The system is either main and secondary beams, or secondary, main beams and
main girders as shown in the following figures:

S.B.

S.B.
Main girder

S.B.

S.B.

S.B.

M.B.

S.B.

Direction
of load

S.B.

Main girder

S.B.

S.B.

S.B.

S.B.

S.B.

Direction
of load

S.B.

M.B.

M.B.

M.B.

M.B.

System consists of secondary and meain beams

System consists of Main and secondary beams

together with main girder

1- If we are using steel decking:

For the shown system, there is a ONE WAY concrete slab regardless of the
dimensions of the slab because we use corrugated sheets in the direction of
secondary beams, which are spaced 1.75m to 2.25m. Since all the beams are
simply supported, therefore the compression flange is the upper flange.
WE

DONOT

DEPEND

ON

FRICTION

TO

RESTRAIN

THE

COMPRESSION FLANGE.
We use shear connector to ensure that the concrete restrain the flange.
7/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
If there is shear connector:
The concrete will be supported over the upper compression flange of both
secondary and main beams, So Lu act = zero.
If there is NO shear connector:
The concrete will Not support the upper compression flange of both
secondary and main beams, So Lu act = length of beam.

If we are using wood shuttering: (

If the flange is embedded:

The upper flange of both the secondary and the main is restraint laterally and if
they are both simple, Lu act for both will be equal to zero.
If the flange is NOT embedded:
The concrete will Not support the upper compression flange of both
secondary and main beams, So Lu act = length of beam.
b- For Continuous secondary floor beams: (two panels or more):
Lu act = 0.2L for the section at the support (this is an approximate value).
For secondary beams, the upper flange is supported. However, near supports, the
compression flange is the lower flange, which is not supported.
8/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1

We have to check 2 sections. One at

sec1

sec2

mid span where Lu act = zero because

the compression flange is the upper

0.2L

flange, while the other is near the support, where Lu act 0.2L and calculate the
allowable of moment for each section.

2- For simply supported beams with no slab or steel deck:

The beams carry concentrated loads resulted from machines or hanged
equipments and for beams carry grating or chequered pates
a- Simply supported beams:
The compression flange is the upper flange and not restrained. Lu

act

will be

equal to distance between secondary beams.

Note that: L.T.B. occurs outside plan, so the members perpendicular to the
member under study support L.T.B. For beams connected to columns, the
column is a support for L.T.B.
i.e. If we have a system of floor beams (main girder and secondary beams),
Always the main girder supports the secondary beams and vise versa.

b- For Continuous beams: (two panels or more):

sec1

0.8L

sec2

0.2L

sec3
0.6L

We have 3 sections.
Section 1, the positive section of the first panel, Lu act is 0.8L because the
compression flange is the upper flange. The upper flange is supported laterally
with the column and tension in the flange at distance 0.2L from support.

9/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Section 2, the negative section, Lu

act

is 0.2L because the compression

flange is the lower flange. The lower flange is supported laterally with the
column and tension in the lower flange at distance 0.2L from support.
Section 3, the positive section of the intermediate panel, Lu

act

is 0.6L

because the compression flange is the upper flange. The upper flange is
supported laterally with the tension in the upper flange at distance 0.2L from
supports from each side.

For Cantilever beams: Will be discussed later

Allowable bending stresses for moment about major axis x-x:

Allowable bending stresses for I-sections:
The shear center coincides on the C.G. of the section
The allowable bending stress depends on the section classification and the
presence of L.T.B.
1- If the section is compact and there is no L.T.B., so Fbc = 0.64Fy
2- If the section is non-compact and there is no L.T.B., so Fbc = 0.58Fy
3- If the section is compact or non-compact and there is L.T.B.
Therefore, F bc will be the smaller of F LTB or 0.58Fy.
Important Notes:
We will know lateral, how to deal with the section if it is slender. So now,
all the sections will be either compact or non-compact.
We must check compactness of the section to be sure that it is not slender,
this means we cannot begin with the check of L.T.B.

How to calculate F LTB?

Very important note: FLTB is calculated using system of equations, but if at any
step the value exceeds 0.58Fy, so we stop calculation and take Fbcx = 0.58Fy.
10/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
i.e. if FLTB 1 is bigger than 0.58Fy, so stop calculations and take Fbcx = 0.58Fy
For the following equations, see page 18 and 19 in the ECP

Fbc =

(F

2
ltb1

+ F 2 ltb 2 ) 0.58Fy

Where Fltb1 =

800A f C b
0.58F
Lud

Fltb 2 = 0.58Fy
Fltb 2 = (0.64
Fltb 2 =

for

Lu
C
84 b
rt
Fy

( L u / rt ) 2
C
L
C
Fy , for 84 b u 188 b
5
1.176 *10 * c b
Fy
rt
Fy

C
L
12000
* c b , for u > 188 b
2
Fy
rt
( L u / rt )

Where rt is the radius of gyration about Y-Y axis for the compression flange and
(1/6) of the web.
rt =

I yy
1
, where A = bf * tf + hw * tw
A
6

1h
6 w

Iy-y =

t f * b3f (1 / 6) h w * t 3w
+
(the second term can be
12
12

neglected)
Very important note: Lu in the equations is Lu act NOT Lu max

Allowable bending stresses for Channel sections:

The shear center does not coincide on the C.G. of the section. Therefore, this
section cannot be compact. This section is either non-compact or slender. We
have to check this section by the limits of non-compact only.
When calculating FLTB: There is FLTB 1 only

Fltb1 =

800A f C b
0.58F
Lud

11/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
How to determine allowable compressive bending stress

If compact section, and

Lu

max

1380A f
F d Cc
y

= the least of
Lu
20
b
f

Fy

LU
C
84 b
rT
Fy
The section is compact
Fbt = 0.64Fy
Fbc = 0.64Fy

Yes

Fltb2 = 0.58 Fy

No
The section is non-compact
Fbt = 0.58Fy
Fbc =

(F

ltb1

+ F 2 ltb2 0.58Fy

84

Cb LU
C

188 b
Fy rT
Fy

Fltb2

2
LU

(
rT ) FY
Fy 0.58 Fy
= 0.64
1.176 105 Cb

2
Calculate (Lu/rT)

1
Fltb1 =

800 A f C b
LU d

0.58F y

Lu
C
188 b
rt
Fy
Fltb2 =

12000C b
Lu
r
t

0.58F y

12/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Allowable shear stress:
On the gross effective area-resisting shear, the actual shear stresses must not
exceed the following allowable value:
q all = 0.35Fy

How to calculate the actual stress:

q all =

Q
Q
=
Area
dt w

Allowable deflection of beams:

The calculated deflection due to live load only of any beam shall not be greater
than the values indicated on the table page 132 in the ECP:
For simple or continuous beams with or without concrete slab
all

L
300

For cantilever beams:

all

L
180

How to calculate the actual deflection of beam?

5 wL4
For simple beam with distributed load: act =
384 EI
For continuous beam with distributed load:

act

= 0.8*

act

For simple beam with one concentrated load at mid span:

of simple beam.
act=

PL3
48EI

wL4
For cantilever with distributed load: act =
8EI
PL3
For cantilever with concentrated load at its end: act=
3EI
13/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
If we have 2 of the previous cases, we can make superposition. i.e.
calculate the effect of each load alone and add them together.
If we do not have any of the previous studied cases, we have to use
conjugate beam or any other method to calculate deflection. In this
method , the elastic moments (the area of the actual bending moment
diagram) are calculated and the supports are changed as following:
Hinged or roller support remains as it is
Free end turns to be fixed, while the fixed end turns to be free

Some examples of how to use conjugate beam to calculate deflection:

1-Beam with 2 concentrated loads:
P

M = pa, R1 = Ma/2, R2 = 0.5a M

R = R1 +R2
M = R(a+a/2) R2 (0.5a+a/3) R1(a/4)
M1

M in m3t (don't forget to

act =
EI
multiply * 106 to change to cm3t)

R
R1

R2

2-Beam with 3 concentrated loads

P

R1 = 0.5aM1, R2 = aM1

P
a

P
a

R3 = 0.5a (M2 M1)

R = R1 + R2 + R3
M = R*2a R1 (a/3) R2 (a/2)
R3 (a+a/3).
act

M1
R

R1

M2
R2
R3

= M in m3t
EI

14/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Estimation of Rolled sections:
In order to make the previous checks, we have to choose a section near to the
safe and economic section.
Nearly all the rolled sections in the tables are compact with respect to
dimensions. Therefore, Lu act and Lu max will be the guide. For this if
Lu act < 3m , assume that Fbcx = 0.64Fy = 1.536 t/cm2 for steel 37
Lu act < 6m , assume that Fbcx = 0.58Fy = 1.4 t/cm2 for steel 37
Lu act > 6m , assume that Fbcx = 1.0 t/cm2 for steel 37
Choose the section from the equation: Sx =

M
and note that M is usually
Fbcx

calculated in mt so we must change it to be in cmt by multiplying it *100.

Choose the section from tables
If there is Mx only so choose I.P.E. or S.I.B (I.P.E. is preferable)
If there is Mx and My choose B.F.I.B.

Steps of beam design:

1- Calculate the actual loads acting on the system. Calculate each of
dead and live load separately.
2- Estimate a section by assuming that the section is compact and
L.T.B. is as mentioned before.
3- Calculate the allowable stress for moment Fbcx
4- Check the 3 checks.

My
Fbcx
I

Q
0.35Fy
A = dt w

act

L
L
in case of beams or
in case of cantilever.
300
180

15/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Example:
These shown beams are used to support a
13 t

13 t

13 t

13 t

3*2.33=7m

machine (No R.C. slab)

For the given secondary I.P.E. 600, it is
required to:
1. Check the safety of the given beam
due to the applied shown loads

3*3=9m

2. If the beam is unsafe, suggest adding

members to make it safe (the members shouldn't carry any vertical loads)
3. Recheck the beam after adding the suggested members
4. Design the main beam
Solution:
1. Check for secondary I.P.E. 600:
Calculation of loads:
a Dead load:
o.w. = 122 kg / m\ = 0.122 t / m\

92
WD = 0.122 *
= 1.23 m t
8
QD = 0.122 * 9/2 = 0.55 t
b Live load:
M = 39 m t

13 t

Q = 13 t

3m

13 t
3m

3m

To calculate Fbcx:
1 Check compactness:
C = 0.5 (22 1.2 2 * 2.4) = 8 cm,

C
16.9
= 8/1.9 = 4.21 <
= 10.9
tf
2.4

d w = 60 2 * 1.9 2 * 2.4 = 51.4 cm

dw
127
= 82
= 51.4/1.2 = 42.8 <
tw
2 .4

So the section is compact

2. Check lateral torsional buckling:

16/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Lu act = 900 cm

Lu max =

20 * 22
= 284 cm < 900
2.4

No need to calculate the other equation L.T.B. will occur and we have to
calculate Fltb . (Cb for simple beam carrying concentrated load = 1.35)
Fltb1 =

800 * (22 *1.9)

*1.35 = 0.836 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
900 * 60

Therefore, we have to calculate Fltb2

I
A

rt =

1.9 * 223 (60 / 6) *1.23

Iy-y =
+
= 1686 + 1.44 = 1687cm 4
12
12

We can neglect the 2nd term

A = 1.9 * 22 + (60/6) * 1.2 = 53.8 cm2

rt =

1687
= 5.6 cm
53.8

900
L
u =
= 160.7
rt
5.6
84

Cb
1.35
= 84
= 63
Fy
2.4

188

Cb
= 141
Fy

C
L
u f 188 b
Fy
rt
Fltb2 = (12000/160.72) * 1.35 = 0.63 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
Fltb =

0.836 2 + 0.632 = 1.04 t / cm2 < 1.4 t/ cm2

Fbcx = 1.04 t / cm2

Check Stresses:
1 Moment : Fact =

(39 + 1.23) * 100

= 1.31t / cm 2 > 1.04t / cm 2
3070

Unsafe (Don't complete checks)

act,

we may add
3*2.33=7m

In order to decrease Lu

columns (especially under the loads), but he said

that the members should not carry vertical loads.
Therefore, we want to add members to prevent
3*3=9m

17/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
lateral movement & at the same time don't carry vertical loads. These members
are bracing as shown
Lu act = 9/3 = 3m
Lu max = 284 < 300 cm

Fltb =
1

800 * ( 22 *1.9)
*1.35 = 2.51t / cm 2 f 1.4t / m 2
300 * 60

So take Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm2

Checks:
1. Moment : Fact =

(39 + 1.23) *100

= 1.31t / cm 2 p 1.4t / cm 2
3070

2. Shear : qact =

(13 + 0.55)
= 0.19t / cm2 p 0.84t / cm2
60 *1.2

3. Deflection

calculate

elastic

13

ME

13

reactions

OK

117*4.558.5*(1.5/2)

58.5*(1.5+1) = 336.4 m3t

39mt
117

336.4 *106
900
act =
= 1.74cm p
2100 * 92080
300
= 3cm

58.5

58.5

Design of main beam:

R = 13t, assume o.w. = 100 kg/m\

13
2.33

Dead load:

13
2.33

2.33

MD = 0.1*(72/8) = 0.61 mt
QD = 0.1*(7/2) = 0.35 t

13

Live load:
ML = 13*2.33 = 30.3 mt
QL = 13 t
Total loads:
18/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
MD+ ML = 30.3+0.61 = 30.91 mt
QD+ QL = 0.35+13 = 13.35 t
Estimation of section
Lu act = 2.33 < 3 m, therefore
Assume section is compact and Fbcx = 0.64 Fy = 1.536 t/cm2

Sx =

30.91*100
= 2012cm3
1.536

Choose I.P.E. 550

Check compactness:
C = 0.5 (21 - 1.11 - 2 * 2.4) = 7.545 cm
dw = 55 2 * 1.72 2 * 2.4 = 46.76 cm

C
16.9
= 7.546/1.72 = 4.38 <
= 10.9
tf
2.4
127
dw
= 82
= 46.76/1.11 = 42.13 <
tw
2 .4
The section is compact
Check lateral torsional buckling:
Lu act = 7/3 = 2.33 m

1380 * ( 21*1.72)
*1.35 = 510cm

55 * 2.4

L u max = the least of

> Lu
21
*
20

= 271cm

2.4
where cb = 1.35 (simple beam with concentrated loads)
Lu act < Lu max
So No lateral torsional buckling
The section is compact and no lateral torsional buckling
Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2 (0.64 Fy)
Checks:
1. Moment : Fact =

30.91*100
= 1.27t / cm 2 < 1.536t / cm2
2440
19/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
2. Shear = 13.35 / (55 * 1.11) = 0.21 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
3. Deflection: Exactly as before in secondary beam but using the dimensions
of Main beam.

Applications of beams
1- Floor beams
The system consists of secondary and main beams
Calculation of loads for floor beams:
Loads:
Rc slab 10 14 cm
F.C.

150 kg / m2

L.L.

300 kg / m2

1 Design of secondary beam as simply supported on Main beam:

Always distribute loads as one-way slab because of the presence of corrugated
sheets.
a Dead load:
wd = ts

+ F.C. = .t / m 2

= 2.5 t/m3

WD = o.w. + (wd)a = .t / m\ (assume o.w. of secondary beam = 50kg/m')

assume o.w. = 0.05 t / m \ = 50 kg / m\

S2
..m t
MD = WD *
8
Q D = WD *

S
.t
2

Where S is the span of secondary beam

b Live load:
WL = L.L. * a = t / m\
Assume L.L.

300 kg / m\

20/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
S2
ML = W L *
..m t
8

Q L = WL *

S
.t
2

c Total loads:
MTot = MD + ML

Q Tot = QD + QL

Design of Main beam:

Concentrated loads = Reaction of secondary beams = WTot * S
Assume o.w. = 0.1 t / m\ = 100 kg / m\
Calculate Mx & Q x
Note that the deflection is calculated due to L.L. only, so we have to RECALCULATE the values of the reaction from the secondary beams.

2 Design of secondary beam as continuously supported on Main beam:

Calculate loads as before to get Msimple beam
The moment will be as follows:
0.75M
sec1

0.9M

0.75M

0.75M

0.75M

sec2

0.2L

0.8M

0.8M

0.8M

The moment at the end panel is the largest moment, so we estimate the section
from it. We have to design 2 sections. One at the mid of the first panel where
M=0.9Mo and Lu act = zero, while the second is of smaller moment, M=0.75Mo,
but its Lu act = 0.2S
For shear: Q max = 0.6wS as shown in the following figure:
0.4wS

R=0.4wS

0.5wS

0.6wS
R=1.1wS

0.5wS

0.5wS
R=wS

0.5wS

0.5wS
R=wS

Design of Main beam when :

21/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
The second main beam is the most critical main beam as it is subjected to the
maximum reaction, which is 1.1wS as shown above.
Concentrated loads = Reaction of secondary beams = 1.1WTot * S
Assume o.w. = 0.1 t / m\ = 100 kg / m\
Calculate Mx & Q x
Note that the deflection is calculated due to L.L. only, so we have to RECALCULATE the values of the reaction from the secondary beams.

Example:
2.0

Main beam

2.5*4m = 10m

For the shown mezzanine floor, it is required to design:

1) Secondary beams as simple beams
2) Secondary beams as continuous beams
3) Main beams in case of secondary beam simple
4) Main beams in case of secondary beam continuous
Given that: ts = 12 cm, F.C. = 175 kg/m2, L.L. = 400 kg/m2
Spacing between trusses is 6m. Assume using steel deck with shear
connector only for secondary beams.

Solution:
1) Secondary beam simple:
a- Dead load:
wD = 0.12 * 2.5 + 0.175 = 0.475 t/m2
22/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
Assume o.w. = 50 kg/m2
WD = 0.475 * 2.5 + 0.05 = 1.24 t/m2
MD = 1.24 * 6 2 / 8 = 5.58 mt

QD = 1.24 * (6/2) = 3.72 t

b- Live load:
WL = 0.4 * 2.5 = 1 t/m'

ML = 1 * 62 / 8 = 4.5 mt

QL = 1 * (6/2) = 3 t
c- Total loads:
MT = 5.58 + 4.5 = 10.08 mt

QT = 3.72 + 3 = 6.72 t

Estimation of section:
Simple beams upper flange is compression.
Therefore Lu act = zero < 3m
Therefore assume Fbcx = 0.64 Fy = 1.536 t/cm2
Sx =

10.08 *100
= 656.25 cm3
1.536

Choose Ip E 330
Note the difference between concrete and steel, the beam is of length 600 cm
and depth 33 cm
i.e. d =

Span
for secondary beams.
20

(important)

- Without calculations of Lu max there is no L.T.B. because Luact = zero

Checks:
C = 0.5 (16 0.75 2 * 1.8) = 5.825 c m
dw = 33 2*1.15 2*1.8 = 27.1 cm

5.825
C
= 5.06 < 10.9
=
1.15
tf

dw
27.1
= 36.1 < 82
=
0.75
tw

The section is compact and No L.T.B.

1-

fact =

qact =

10.08 *100
= 1.41 t/cm2 < 1.536 t/cm2
713

6.72
= 0.27 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
33 * 0.75
23/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
act

due to live load only

WL.L = 1 t/m/

5
1* 64
600
*
* 10 6 = 0.68 <
= 2 cm
L.L =
384 2100 * 11770
300
DONOT forget to multiply *106 to change m4 to cm4 and t/m to t/cm
m4 * t/m' = m 3t = 106 cm3t

b- Design of main girder:

13.44
2.5

Rtotal = WD+L * S = (1.24 + 1)

13.44

13.44
2.5
o.w.

2.5

2.5

* 6 = 13.44 t
RL = WL * S = 1 * 6 = 6 t

M
20.66

Assume o.w. = 100 kg/m2

MT = 68.45 mt
QT = 20.66 t

There is haunch so Lu act = spacing between secondary beams.

Lu act = 2.5 m < 3
Sx =

Assume Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2

68.45 *100
= 4456 cm3
1.536

Max Sx in tables of IPE is 3070 cm3

So use board flange I-beam HEA

Choose HEA 600
1- Check compactness
C = 0.5 (30 1.3 2*2.7) = 11.65 cm
dw = 59 -2*2.5 2*2.7 = 48.6 cm

C 11.65
=
= 4.66 < 10.8
tf
2.5
d w 48.6
=
= 37.4 < 82
tw
1.3
Compact sections
24/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1

20 * 30

2.4 = 387cm
L u max = the least of

1380 * (30 * 2.5) *1.35 = 986cm

59 * 2.4
Where cb = 1.35, simple beam with concentrated loads (distributed
o.w. is not effective)
Lu act = 250 < 387 cm

Therefore No L.T.B

Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2

Checks:
1-

68.45 *100
= 1.43 t/cm2 < 1.536 t/cm2
4790

fact =

2- q act =

20.66
= 0.27 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
59 *1.3

3- the shown beam is loaded with live load only

R1 = 0.5 * 2.5 (30- 22.5) =
9.375 m2t

6
2

R2 = 2.5 * 22.5 = 56.25 m t

2.5

6
2.5

6
2.5

2.5

R3 = 0.5 * 2.5 * 22.5 = 28.1

m 2t

22.5

R = 9.375 + 56.25 + 28.1 =

93.75

30

28.1 25.25

93.75 m t

9.4

M = 93.75*5 9.375*2.5/3
56.25*2.5/2 28.1*(2.5+2.5/3)
= 297 m3t
act =

297 *106
1000
= 1 cm <
= 3.3 cm
2100 *141200
300

25/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
3) Design of secondary beam as Continuous beam:
Same as before in calculating Mo = 10.08mt,
Moment in first panel = 0.9*10.08 = 9.07 mt
M-ve (near support)= 0.75*10.08 = 7.56 mt

7.56mt
sec1

9.07mt

Choice of section: S =

sec2

0.2L

8.06

9.07 *100
= 590 cm3
1.536

Choose IPE 330 (same as in case of simple beam)

Checks:
1- Moment:
For sec 1: same as before for compactness
Lu act = zero (compression flange is the upper flange contacted with R.C. slab
Therefore fact = 9.07*100/713 = 1.27 t/cm2 < 1.536 t/cm2
For sec 2: Lu act = 0.2*6 = 1.2 m
Therefore, we have to calculate Lu max
Cb = 1.3 (continuous beam with distributed load)

20 *16

2.4 = 206cm
Lu
= the least of

max
1380
*
(
16
*
0
.
75
)

*1.3 = 272cm

33 * 2.4
Therefore Lu act < Lu max , NO L.T.B.
fact =

7.56 *100
= 1.06 t/cm2 < 1.536 t/cm2
713
26/27 Beams

Design of Beams 1
2- Shear:
6.72t

6.72t

8.06t

6.72t

6.72t

6.72t

Qmax = 0.6 W S = 0.6 * (1.24 + 1) * 6 = 8.06 t

Note that Qmax = 0.6 wS not 0.5 wS as in case of simple beam.
qact = 8.06 / (33*0.75) = 0.32 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
3- Deflection:
act

of simple beam due to L.L = 0.68 cm (calculated before)

act

of continuous beam = 0.8

act

of simple beam

= 0.8*0.68 = 0.54 cm < 600/300 =2 cm

4) Design of Main beam (when the secondary is continuous beam)

Note that reaction is (1.1 w*S) not (w*S) as in case of simple beam
RT =1.1 WD+L S =1.1*2.24*6 =
14.78

14.78 t
2.5

14.78

14.78
2.5
o.w.

2.5

RL = 1.1 WL S = 1.1*1*6 = 6.6 t

2.5

Assume o.w. = 100 kg/m2

MT = 75.15 mt

M
20.66

QT = 22.67 t
Sx = 75.15*100 / 1.536 = 4892 cm3
Use BFIB 650

6.6
2.5

6.6
2.5

6.6
2.5

Exactly as before with the new values of

moment and shear and the new BFIB
(HEA) chosen
Note: use loads 6.6 t in check deflection

27/27 Beams

2.5

Design of Beams 2
Allowable bending stresses for Channel sections:
The shear center does not coincide on the C.G. of the section. Therefore, this
section cannot be compact. This section is either non-compact or slender. We
have to check this section by the limits of non-compact only.
When calculating FLTB: There is FLTB 1 only

Fltb1 =

800A f C b
0.58F
Lud

How to calculate Luact for sections of mezzanine floor ?

Sec 1
Case 1
Sec 1

Sec 3
Case 2
Sec 2

For Case 1 :
a- If there is no shear connector :

b- If there is shear connector :

Luact = L

Luact = zero

&M=

WL2
8

WL2
&M=
8

1/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
For Case 2 :
a -If there is no shear connector:
Sec

Luact

0.9M 0

0.8 L

0.75 M 0

0.2 L

0.8M 0

0.6 L

Sec

Luact

0.9M 0

zero

0.75 M 0

0.2 L

0.8M 0

zero

So only, check Section 1

b -If there is shear connector:

So check Section 1 & 2

How to calculate Luact for section in the cantilever ?

For Cantilever beams ECP page 65 to 67:
Will be later

How and when to calculate F btx?

Fbtx is the allowable of bending moment for the tension
flange due to moment about the major axis x-x. We use this
value only is the section is built-up, un-symmetric as shown.
For symmetric sections, (all table sections are called rolled
sections and are symmetric).
Fbtx = 0.64Fy if the section is compact and no L.T.B. occurs
2/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
Or Fbtx = 0.58Fy otherwise (in all other cases).

Allowable bending stresses for moment about minor axis y-y:

:
-1
-2
For doubly symmetric sections (I-shapes) meet the compact requirements,
the allowable for moment when bent about its minor axis is 0.72Fy.
If Fbcx = 0.64Fy

then Fbcy = 0.72Fy

Otherwise (in all other cases), the allowable of moment = Fbcy = 0.58 Fy.
If Fbcx = 0.58 Fy or Fltb

then Fbcy = 0.58 Fy

For I-beam, box sections

Mx only

Un-symmetric

Mx and My

section
Compact and
No

Fbcx = 0.64 Fy
= 1.54

LTB

Otherwise

Fbcx = least of
0.58Fy and Fltb

Fbtx = 0.64 Fy
= 1.54
Fbtx = 0.58 Fy
= 1.4

Fbcy = 0.72 Fy
= 1.73
Fbcy = 0.58 Fy
= 1.4

For channel section

Mx only

Un-symmetric

Mx and My

section
All Cases

Fbcx = least of
0.58Fy and Fltb

Fbtx = 0.58 Fy
= 1.4

Fbcy = 0.58 Fy
= 1.4

3/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
Example 1:

600cm

For the shown plan & elevation of inclined roof

4*200cm

30

It is required to design an intermediate sec. beam twice. First, if there is shear

connector & Second if there is no shear connector
Given that t s = 16 cm

, FC = 150 kg / m 2

, LL = 500 kg / m 2

Solution:
Dead load: W DL = (0.160*02.5 + 0.15) 2 + 0.05 = 1.15 t / m/
W LL = 0.5 * 2 = 1 t / m/

LL

W T = 1 + 1.15 = 2.15 t / m/
W X = 2.15 * cos 30 = 1.86 t / m/
W y = 2.15 * sin 30 = 1.075 t / m/

Mx =

1.86 * 6 2
= 8.37 m t
8

wy
w

wx

1.075 * 6 2
My =
= 4.84 m t
8
Q x = 1.86 *

6
= 5.58 t
2

Q y = 1.075 * 3 = 3.2 t

4/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
1) If there is shear connector:
Estimation

M x + 6M y
0.64F y

SX = 2435 cm3
Check

(8.37 + 6 * 4.84) *100

= Sx
0.64 * 2.4

= Sx

Choose IPE 550

C dw
,
---------- compact
t f tw

Fbcx = 0.64F y = 1.536 t / cm 2

Lu act = zero

& Fb cy = 0.72 * 2.4 = 1.728 t / cm 2

837 / 2440 484 / 254

+
= 0.22 + 1.1 = 1.32 > 1
1.536
1.728

Check stresses

This is because Stress due to M y is so large because IPE is very weak in

resisting M y
Estimation

M x + 4M y
0.64 Fy

SX = 1805 cm 3
Check

= Sx

(8.37 + 4 * 4.84) *100

= Sx
0.64 * 2.4

Choose HEB 320

C dw
,
---------- compact
t f tw

Check Stresses:

837 / 1930 484 / 616

+
= 0.28 + 0.45 = 0.73<1 O.K
1.536
1.728

Check vertical shear =

5.58
= 0.15 t / cm 2 < 0.35 * 2.4 = 0.84 t / cm 2
32 *1.15

Check horizontal shear =

3.2
= 0.03 t / cm 2 < 0.84 t / cm 2
2 * 30 * 2.05

Note that the parallel area is the area of flanges

Check deflection: W LL = 1 t / m /
W LLx = 1 * cos 30 = 0.87 t / m /

5
0.87 * 6 4
600
u =
*
*106 = 0.23cm <
= 2 cm
384 2100 * 30820
300
5/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
2) If there is no shear connector

Lu act = 600 cm

Assume Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm 2

(8.37 + 4 * 4.84) *100

= S x = 1980 cm 3
1 .4
Check

C dw
,
---------- compact
t f tw
20 * 30
= 387 cm
2.4

Lu max =
Fltb1 =

Choose HEB 340

800 * (30 * 2.15)

*1.13 = 2.86 t / cm 2 > 1.4 t / cm 2
600 * 34

Check Stresses: f =

837 / 2160 484 / 646

+
= 0.28 + 0.45 = 0.73< 1
1.4
1.4

O.K

Check shear and deflection as before.

Example 2:

B2

B3

B1

1.5

1.5

For the shown plan, A silo. (

3.0

1.5

1.5

) of weight 40 t & is supported on the 4

shown points. The rest of the ceiling is covered with chequered plate of weight
50 kg / m

(the chequered plate doesn't support lateral movement) & LL on

ceiling = 300 kg / m 2
It is required to design B1, B2 & B 3 using channel section for B1 & B 3 & I
section for B2
6/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
Solution:

10t

For Beam B1

0.225

50
W DL = 0.05 +
* 0.5 = 0.075 t / m /
1000
W LL = 0.3 * 0.5 = 0.15 t / m

3m

W T = 0.15 + 0.075 = 0.225 t / m /

M = 10 *

3
32
+ 0.225 *
= 7.75 m t
4
8

Q = 5 + 0.225 * 1.5 = 5.34 t

Assume Fb cx = 1.4 t / cm 2 (Channel can not be compact)

Sx =

775
= 553 cm 4
1.4

Check

tf

Choose UPN (channel) 320

10 1.4
23
= 4.9 <
= 14.8 (limit of non-compact)
1.75
2.4

d w 32 4 *1.75
190
=
= 122.6 (limit of non-compact)
= 17.8 <
tw
1.4
2.4
Lu act = 300

Lu max =

20 *10
=129 cm < 300
2.4

There will be LTB

Fltb1 =

800 * (10 *1.75)

*1.35 = 1.97 t / cm 2 > 1.4 t / cm 2
300 * 32

Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm 2
Note: c b = 1.35 because the effective load is conc. Load
Check moment stress =
Shear q =

u =

775
= 1.14 t / cm 2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
679

5.34
= 0.12 t / cm 2 < 0.84 t / cm 2
32 *1.4

5
0.15 * 34
10 * 33
*10 6 = 0.25 cm
*
*10 6 +
384 2100 *10870
48 * 2100 *10870
<

300
= 1cm
300

O.K
7/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
0.575

For Beam B 3 :
W D = 0.05 +

W L = 0.3 * 1.5 = 0.45 t / m /

M = 0.575 *

Sx =

W T = 0.125 + 0.45 = 0.275 t / m /

62
= 2.6 m t
8

Q = 0.575 * 3 = 1.725 t

260
= 186 cm 3
1.4

Check

c
tf

6m

50
* 1.5 = 0.125 t / m /
1000

Choose UPN 200

dw
as before
tw
Lu max =

Lu act = 600 cm

20 * 7.5
=96.8 cm < 600 cm
2.4

There is L.T.B.

Fltb =

800 * (7.5 *1.15)

*1.13 = 0.65 t / cm 2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
600 * 20

Fbcx = 0.65 t / cm 2
Check moment f =
Choose S x =

Fltb =

260
= 400 cm 4
0.65

UNSAFE

Choose UPN 280

800 * (9.5 *1.5)

*1.13 = 0.77t / cm 2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
600 * 28

Check f =

q=

260
= 1.36 t / cm 2 > 0.654 t / cm 2
191

260
= 0.58 t / cm 2 < 0.77 t / cm 2
448

SAFE

1.725
= 0.06 t / cm 2 < 0.84 t / cm 2
28 *1

5
0.45 * 6 4
600
LL =
*
*10 6 = < 0.57 cm <
= 2 cm
384 2100 * 6280
300

8/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
Design of Beam B2:

5.34

Reaction of B1 = 5.34t
W D = 0.05 + 0.05 *

10

5.34

0.31

1.5
= 0.09 t / m /
2

W L = 0.3 * 1.5 / 2 = 0.225 t / m /

W T = 0.225 + 0.09 = 0.31 t / m /
Q = 11.27t,

M = 11.27 * 3 0.31 * 3 * 1.5 5.34 * 2 = 21.73 m t

Assume Fb cx = 0.64 F y = 1.536 t / cm 2

Sx =

2173
= 1415 cm 3
1.536
c

Check

tf

IPE 450

dw
compact
tw

Lu act = 400 cm (distance between sec. beams)

Lu max =

20 *19
= 245 cm < 400
2.4

there is L T B

Fltb1 =

800 * (19 *1.46)

*1.13 (For distributed load) = 1.39 1.4 t / cm 2
400 * 45

1 f =

2173
= 1.45 t / cm 2 > 1.4 t / cm 2
1500

2- q=

11.27
= 0.22 t / cm 2 < 0.84 t / cm 2
50 *1.02

Choose IPE 500

3 Neglect check deflection

OW = 0.1 t / m /

Loads on M.B:
1.725

11.27

0.1
1.5

1.5

11.27

1.725

0.275

3.0

0.1
1.5

1.5

w = 0.1 + (0.05 + 0.3) 0.5 = 0.275 t / m 2

9/10 Beams

Design of Beams 2
Example 3:
For the shown plan.

4*5m
It is required to design a secondary beam if it is continuously supported over
MG without using shear connector
Solution:
W D = (0.2 * 2.5 + 0.15) 2 + 0.05 = 1.35 t / m /
W L = 0.4 * 2 = 0.8 t / m /

52
M 0 = 2.15 *
= 6.72 m t
8

W T = 1.35 + 0.8 = 2.15 t / m /

Sx =

672
= 480 cm 3
1.4

Choose IPE 300

Critical section is section 1 with M = 0.9 M 0 (biggest moment) &

Lu act = 0.8 L = 0.8 * 5 = 4 m (biggest Lu act ).

Check

c
tf

dw
tw

Lu act = 400 cm

Fltb1 =

& Lu max =

20 *15
=194 cm < 400
2 .4

There is L T B

800 * (15 *1.07)

*1.3 = 1.39 t / cm 2 1.4 t / cm 2
400 * 30

f =

672
= 1.21 t / cm 2 < 1.4 t / cm 2
557

q=

0.6 * 2.15 * 5
= 0.3 t/cm2 < 0.84 t / cm 2
30 * 0.71

5
0.8 * 5 4
500
*10 6 = < 0.3 cm <
LL = 0.8 *
*
= 1.67 cm
384 2100 * 8360
300

10/10 Beams

Beam connections
Design of beam connections:
1. We always design FROM ONE SIDE ONLY (take the reaction and
moment of one side to calculate the number of bolts from one side).
2. Always design on the reaction of the smaller element. If we are designing
the connection between secondary and main beam, so use reactions of
secondary beam. If we are designing the connection between main beam
and column, so use reactions of main beam. If we are designing the
connection between secondary beam and column, so use reactions of
secondary beam.
3. Beams are always flushed (their upper flanges are on the same level)
except otherwise indicated.

1- Beam to beam connection:

I- Design of connection between secondary beam and main beam:
a- The secondary beam is simply supported over main beam:
Connection "A": Secondary beams from 2 sides:
1- n1 =

R sec
Rl

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.5*w*S
Rl is the least of RD.S. or Rb where tmin is the least of 2tL (2*0.8) or tw of
secondary beam.
2- n2 =

R sec
Rl

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.5*w*S

1/20C

Beam connections
Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of tL (0.8) or tw of main
beam. n2 must be even number ( 2 sides)

Connection "B": Secondary beam from 1 side: (Must be simple

connection)
Same design in calculating n1 and n2 as if the secondary beam from 2 sides
because we always design on one side only.

2/20C

Beam connections

b- The secondary beam is continuously supported over main beam:

0.5wS

0.4wS

0.6wS

0.6wS

0.4wS

0.5wS
R=1.1wS

R=0.4wS

0.5wS

0.5wS

0.5wS

0.5wS

0.5wS

0.5wS

0.5wS
R=wS

0.5wS
R=wS

If we have secondary beams with different reactions (0.5wS, 0.6wS) at the

same connection as shown in the above figure, we choose the largest value.
1- n1 =

R sec
Rl

(Same as before)

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.6*w*S
Rl is the least of RD.S. or Rb where tmin is the least of 2tL (2*0.8) or tw of
secondary beam.

2- n2 =

R sec
Rl

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.6*w*S

3/20C

Beam connections
Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of tL (0.8) or tw of main
beam. n2 must be even number ( 2 sides)
3- n3 =

M
T
Where T = connection and M connection = 0.75Mo
hsec
Rl

Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of tupper

tie plate

(assumed

1cm) or tf of secondary beam. n3 must be even number ( 2 sides)

4- n4 =

M
0.6C
Where C = connection and M connection = 0.75Mo
hsec
Rl

We assume that 40% of the compression is transferred by bearing.

Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of lower tie plate (assumed 1cm)
or tf of secondary beam. n3 must be even number ( 2 sides)

4/20C

Beam connections
Design of upper tie plate:
The plate is subjected to tension so we have to calculate Anet
We have 2 sections as shown:
We have to measure the lengths "L1", "a" and "b"
L1 (

from drawing

L2 can be calculated by 2 methods:

(1) L2= (a+

2b
) from drawing (
1.1

Approximate method

(Length "b" is decreased by 10% because it is inclined on the direction of

tension)
(2) We can exactly calculate the length using the projection perpendicular
"g" to force +

S2
S2
. L2 = a+2g+2
4g
4g

And assume tpl = 1 cm and check as following:

Take smaller of A1 = (L1-4d')*tpl

& A2 = (L2-2d')* tpl

5/20C

Beam connections
T
= .....< 1.4 t/cm2
(A1orA 2 )

Design of lower tie plate:

The plate is subjected to compression 0.6C,

= zero, so Fc = 1.4t/cm2

0.6C
= .... < 1.4t / cm 2 Where bfl is the flange width of the secondary beam.
b fl * t

Design of connection "C":

Connection C is cantilever so it must be continuous
Using moment and shear diagrams
M

cant

Q
1

Q
3

M1
Q2

Straining actions used in design are:

1- For shear: The greater of Q 2 and Q3
2- For moment: Mconnection = Mcant (not 0.75Mo)
For drawing: Same as secondary beam continuously supported over main
beam.

6/20C

Beam connections
2. Beam to column connection:
I-

Design of connection between secondary beam and column:

This connection is designed on the reaction of secondary beam.

1- n1 =

R sec
Rl

(Same as before)

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.5*w*S
Rl is the least of RD.S. or Rb where tmin is the least of 2tL (2*0.8) or tw of
secondary beam.

2- n2 =

R sec
Rl

Where: Rsec is the reaction of secondary beam from one side only = 0.5*w*S
Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of tL (0.8) or tw of column.
n2 must be even number ( 2 sides)

II-

Design of connection between main beam and column:

1- n1 =

R main
Rl

(Same as before)

Where: Rmain is the reaction of main beam from one side only
Rl is the least of RD.S. or Rb where tmin is the least of 2tL (2*0.8) or tw of main
beam.

2- n2 =

R main
Rl

Where: Rmain is the reaction of main beam from one side only

7/20C

Beam connections
Rl is the least of RS.S. Or Rb where tmin is the least of tL (0.8) or tf (connected to

40

80

80

80

40

flange) of column. n2 must be even number (2 sides).

8/20C

Beam connections
Example:
Design the shown connections using nonpretensioned M18 grade 5.6. Given that total
dead load (slab + ow) is 0.5t/m2 and live load
is 0.35t/m2. Assume that secondary beam is
IPE 270, main beam is IPE 400 and column
is IPE 600.
Solution:
W = (0.5 + 0.35)1.5 = 1.275 t / m /
RSS =

* 1.82 * 0.25 * 5 = 3.18 t

4

RDS = 2*3.18 = 6.36 t

Assume e = 2 d,

= 0.8

Rb = 0.8 * 3.6 * 1.8 * tmin = 5.18 tmin

Connection A:
If secondary beam is simply supported over M.B.
R = 0.5 w s = 0.5 * 1.27 * 6 = 3.83 t
n1 : tmin = least of (2 * 0.8) or tw of secondary beam = 0.66 cm
Rb = 5.18 * 0.66 = 3.42 t < RDS

n1 =

3.83
= 1.12 use 2 bolts
3.42

n2 : tmin = least of (0.8) or tw of main beam = 0.86 cm

Rb = 5.18 * 0.86 = 4.45 t > RSS
n2 =

3.83
= 1.2
3.18

taken 4 bolts, 2 each side

If secondary beam is continuously supported over M.B.

R = 0.6 w s = 0.6 * 1.275 * 6 = 4.59 t

n1 =

4.59
= 1.34 taken 2 bolts
3.42

9/20C

Beam connections
n2 =

4.59
= 1.44 taken 4 bolts, 2 each side
3.18

1.275 * 62
M0 =
= 5.74 m t
8
M connection = 0.75 * 5.74 * 100 = 430 cm t
T=C=

430
= 15.9 t
27

assume t plate = 1 cm

n3 and n4 : t min =1 cm or t f of secondary beam = 1.02 cm

R b = 5.18 * 1 = 5.18 t > RSS

n3 =

15.9
= 5 bolts
3.18

n4 =

(0.6 *15.9)
= 3 bolts
3.18

taken 6 bolts, 3 each side

taken 4 bolts, 2 each side

Design of tension tie plate:

From drawing:
L1 = 7.1+2*6.8/1.1=19.46 cm
(approximate)
OR L1 = 7.1+2*6.57 +
2*

1.76 2
= 20.47 cm
4 * 6.57

(Exact as ECP)
L2 = 24.2 cm
d' = 1.8 + 0.2 = 2cm
A1 = (19.46 - 2*2)*1
= 15.46 cm2
A2 = (24.2 4*2)*1
= 16.2 cm2
Take smaller area (critical)
ft = 15.9 / 15.46 = 1.03t/cm2
We may decrease thickness of the plate to be 8mm and recheck
10/20C

Beam connections
Design of compression tie plate
A = 13.5 * 1 = 13.5 cm2

fc =

0.6 *15.9
= 0.71 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
13.5

We may use plate of thickness 8 mm and recheck

Connection B:
If the secondary beam is simply supported over M.B.
This connection is designed same as before
R= 0.5 w s = 3.83 t

n1 =

3.83
= 2 bolts
3.42

n2 =

3.83
= 4 bolts, 2 each side
3.18

If secondary beam is continuously supported

R = 0.4 w s = 0.4 * 1.275 * 6 = 3.06 t

n1 =

3.06
= 2 b0lts
3.42

n2 =

3.06
= 4 bolts, 2 each side
3.18

Design of connection C
If secondary beam is simply supported over
1.275 t/m'

M.G, This connection must be continuous.

Max. Shear = 4.25 t
M connection = 1.275 *

3.4

2.55

22
= 2.55 m t
2
4.25

n1 =

4.25
3.42

taken 2 bolts

n2 =

4.25
3.18

Taken 4 bolts, 2 each side

11/20C

Beam connections
Design of connection D
I - Secondary beam with column
Assume all beams as simply supported

1.275
) = 1.91 t
R = 0.5 w s = 0.5 * 6 * (
2
Note that: The beam connected to column carry half weight
n1: t min is the least of (2 * 0.8) or t w secondary = 0.66 cm
Rb = 5.18 * 0.66 = 3.42 < RDS

n1 =

1.91
= 0.5 use 2 bolts
3.42

n2 = tmin is the least of (0.8) or tw of column = 1.2 cm

Rb = 5.18 * 0.8 = 4.14 t > RSS

n2 =

1.91
= 0.46
4.14

taken 4 bolts, 2 each side

II Main beam with column

R sec = 1.275 * 6 = 7.65 t
n1= t min is the least of (2 * 0.8) or t w

7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65 7.65

main = 0.86 cm
Rb = 5.18 * 0.86 = 4.45 < RDS

n1 =

22.95
= 5.16 bolts, taken 6 bolts
4.45

We may increase edge distance to be 2.5d and

22.95

= 1.0

Rb = 1 * 3.6 * 1.8 * 0.86 = 5.57t

n1 = 22.95 / 5.57 = 4.12 taken 5 bolts
n2 = tmin is the least of (0.8) or tf of column = 1.9 cm
Rb = 5.18 * 0.8 = 4.14 t > RSS

n2 =

22.95
= 7.2
3.18

taken 8 bolts, 4 each side

Detailed drawing with enlarged scale:

Simple beam: Connection "A"
12/20C

Beam connections

13/20C

Beam connections

14/20C

Beam connections
Continuous connection: Connection "A" and "C"

15/20C

Beam connections

16/20C

Beam connections

40

80

80

80

40

Connection of beam with column: Connection "D"

17/20C

Beam connections

Isometric:
(1) IF the main beam is simply supported over column:

Column

S.B.
M.B.

18/20C

Beam connections
(2) IF the main beam is rigidly connected with column:

Column

M.B.

(3) Connection between main beam and secondary beam: (Simple)

19/20C

Beam connections
(4) Connection between main beam and secondary beam: (Continuous)

20/20C

1/20 LRFD beams

DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS (BEAMS)

..LRFD..

The ultimate moment of the section is calculated from:

Mu = .Mn
Mn depends on
class of section

resistance
factor =0.85

f=Fy

f=Fy

f=Fy

f<Fy

plastic
elastic
plastic

I-section

M=Mp
plastic
section
Mn=Zx Fy

plastic
My<M<Mp

M=My
Mn=Sx Fy

M<My

2/20 LRFD beams

(1)

according to limitations of width to thickness ratio

(pages 9,10,11 and 12 EC-2001):
Flange

web
rolled
welded
d w 127
C 16.9
C 15.3

compact
Fy
Fy
tf
tf
tw
Fy
16.9 C
23 15.3 C
21 127 d w 190
Non<

<

<

Fy
tf
Fy
tf
Fy
tw
Fy
Fy
Fy
compact
d w 190
C
23
C
21
>
>
>
slender
tf
tf
tw
Fy
Fy
Fy

C
tf

C
tf

tw

dw

welded

tw

dw

rolled

If the section is compact:

M n = M p = Z .F y

If the section is non-compact:

M n = M r = S .( F y F r )

If the section is slender:

taking the effect of reduced section into consideration

0.7t/cm2 (rolled)
1.16t/cm2 (welded)

3/20 LRFD beams

Where:

Z = plastic section modulus,

S = elastic section modulus (given in the tables),
.. For I-section only, Zx 1.10 Sx
Seff = effective elastic section modulus for
reduced slender section,
Fr = compressive residual stresses in the flange.
:

For non-compact or slender section..

Fy
Flange
(welded built-up
Fr
Mr = S. (Fyf Fr) or (Fyw)

web
) hybrid section
. flange

(A.y)
)

C.G.
f=Fy

plastic section modulus

stress
.(
f=Fy

d/2
s
t
I-section

plastic

M=Mp
= ZFy

M=My
= SFy

d 2
d
) / 2 ( b s )( t ) 2 / 2 ] x 2 xF y
2
2
d
d
Z = b ( ) 2 ( b s )( t ) 2
2
2

M p = [ b(

4/20 LRFD beams

(2)

according to limitations of lateral unbraced length

(lateral torsional buckling):
plastic range

My

Mr

nominal moment strength Mn

Mp
inelastic range

elastic range

laterally unbraced length Lb

Lp

Lr

Lb = actual laterally unbraced (unsupported) length of the

compression flange of the beam
80 r y
1380 Af 1
Lr =
Lp =
,
[1 + 1 + ( 2.X .FL ) 2 ]
F yf
d FL
2

where:
ry radius of gyration of I-section
about y-axis
0.104 rT d 2
X =(
) , Af = bf t f
Af
rT =

t f bf3 16 dt w3
+
12
12
t f bf + 16 dtw

bf
tf
1/6 d

d
tw

T-section

5/20 LRFD beams

If Lb Lp the section is in plastic range

M n = M p = Z .F y

If Lp Lb < Lr the section is in inelastic range

Lb Lp
]
M n = C b M p ( M p M r )[

L
L
r
p

Lb L p

plastic range

Lr L p

Mp
Mn

M p M n
M p Mr

inelastic range

Mr

elastic range

Lp

Lb

Lr

If Lr < Lb the section is in elastic range

1380 Af 2
20700 2
M n = M cr = C b S x (
) +(
)
d Lb
( Lb / rT ) 2

6/20 LRFD beams

Where:

Mp = z.Fy
Mr = S.FL
FL = smaller value of (Fyw) or (Fyf Fr)
Fr = 0.7t/cm2 (rolled) , 1.16t/cm2 (built-up)
Cb = is the modification factor for non-uniform
moment diagram (page 20 EC-2001) or.
M1
M
+ 0.3 ( 1 ) 2 2.3
M2
M2
12.5 M max
Cb =
2.3
2.5 M max + 3 M a + 4 M b + 3 M c

C b = 1.75 + 1.05

M2
big

+ve

M2
-ve

0.75L
0.5L

M1
small
M1

Mc
Mmax

Mb

Ma

0.25L

7/20 LRFD beams

The ultimate shear of the section is calculated from:

Vu = .Vn
Vn depends on
the ratio h/tw

resistance
factor =0.85

If

h
112

F yw
tw

Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw

112
h 140
<

F yw tw
F yw
140
h
If
<
260
F yw tw

Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw (

If

112 /

Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw (

F yw

h / tw

9500
)
( h / tw ) 2

Taking Aweb = d x tw

tw

h d

tw

shear yielding

rolled

nominal shear strength Vn

welded
inelastic buckling
in shear

elastic buckling
in shear

web slenderness h/tw

112
F yw

140
F yw

260

h d

8/20 LRFD beams

Example
Design an IPE section to be used as a beam to support
machines in a floor of an industrial building. The beam carries
an equivalent uniformly distributed dead load of 1.2t/m\
including its own weight, and an equivalent distributed live
load of 0.4t/m\. The beam span is 5m, and is simply
supported to other main beams.
- Design the beam using LRFD
1) taking the compression flange of the beam is fully laterally
unsupported.
2) taking the compression flange of the beam is fully laterally
supported.
- Redesign the beam using ASD.
Solution:
Using LRFD method (laterally unsupported):
(1) calculation of loads:
wL=0.4t/m\
1.2 x 5 2
Md =
= 3.75 mt
wd=1.2t/m\
8
0.4 x 5 2
ML =
= 1.25 mt
8
5.0m
Mu = 1.4x3.75 = 5.25mt
Or
1.2x3.75+1.6x1.25= 6.5mt (controls)
1.2 x 5
= 3t
2
0.4 x 5
VL =
= 1m
2
Vu = 1.4x3 = 4.2t
Or
1.2x3+1.6x1= 5.2t (controls)
Vd =

Where:
Ultimate load = (1.4dead) or (1.2dead+1.6live)

9/20 LRFD beams

(2) estimation of the section:

because the section is laterally unsupported
assume Fb = 0.58Fy = 1.4t/cm2
Md+ML = 5mt (working load with 1.4t/cm2)
5 x100
1.4 =
Sx = 357cm3 choose IPE270
Sx
(3) classification of the section:
(3-a) width to thickness ratio:
d w 21.9
127
=
= 33.2 <
= 125
tw
0.66
2.4

135
10.2

compact web
C 13.5 / 2 .66 / 2 1.5
=
= 4.82
tf
1.02
16.9
<
= 10.9 compact flange
2.4
so the whole section is compact.

(3-b) lateral torsional buckling

Lb = 500cm
80 ry
80 x 3.02
=
= 156 cm
Lp =
F yf
2.4

to calculate Lr:
Af = bf tf = 13.5 x1.02 = 13.77 cm 2

270
6.6

15

IPE 270

135
10.2
270
6.6

1.02 x13.5 3 16 x 27 x 0.66 3

+
12
12
rT =
= 3.535 cm
1.02 x13.5 + 16 x 27 x 0.66

T-section
1
6x270=45

10/20 LRFD beams

0.104 x 3.535 x 27 2
) = 0.52
13.77
FL = 2.4 0.7 = 1.7t/cm2
1380 x13.77 1
Lr =
[1 + 1 + ( 2 x 0.52 x1.7 ) 2 ] = 510 cm
27 x1.7
2
X =(

because (Lp = 156) < (Lb = 500) (Lr = 510cm) the

section is in inelastic range
(4) check the safety of the section:
(4-a) check bending moment:
d
d
Z = b ( ) 2 ( b s )( t ) 2
2
2
= 13.5 x ( 27 / 2 ) 2 (13.5 0.66 )( 27 / 2 1.02 ) 2
= 460.5 cm 3
Sx = 429cm3 from tables
Mp = 460.5 x 2.4 =1105.2cm.t
Mr = 429 x (2.4 0.7) = 729.3cm.t
Cb = 1.13 for distributed load on simple beam (EC page20)
500 156
M n = 1.13 1105 (1105 729 )[
]
510 156

=835.8cm.t
Mu = 605cm.t < 0.85x835.8 = 710.4cm.t
safe.

(4-b) check shear force:

h = 21.9
112
= 33.2
= 72.3
t w = 0.66
2.4
Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw = 0.6x2.4x27x0.66 = 25.7t
Vu = 5.2t < 0.85x25.7 = 21.8t
safe.

11/20 LRFD beams

(4-c) check deflection:

5
WLS 4
5
0.4 x10 2 x 500 4
=
=
x
x
384
EI x
384
2100 x 5790
span = 500
= 0.268 cm <
= 1.67 cm
300

safe.

Using LRFD method (laterally supported):

(1)
calculation of loads:
Mu = 6.5mt
Vu = 5.2t
(2)
estimation of the section:
because the section is laterally supported
assume Fb = 0.64Fy = 1.54t/cm2
Md+ML = 5mt (working load with 1.54t/cm2)
5 x100
1.54 =
Sx = 325cm3 choose IPE240
Sx
(3)
classification of the section:
(3-a) width to thickness ratio:
dw
19
127
=
= 30.6 <
= 125
0.62
tw
2.4
compact web
C 12 / 2 0.62 / 2 1.5
=
= 4.28
tf
0.98
16.9
<
= 10.9 compact flange
2.4
so the whole section is compact.

120
9.8
240
6.2

15

IPE 240

12/20 LRFD beams

(3-b) lateral torsional buckling

Lb = zero
the section is in plastic range
(4)
check the safety of the section:
(4-a) check bending moment:
d
d
Z = b ( ) 2 ( b s )( t ) 2
2
2
= 12 x ( 24 / 2 ) 2 (12 0.62 )( 24 / 2 0.98 ) 2
= 346 cm 3
Mp = 346 x 2.4 =830.4cm.t
Mu = 605cm.t < 0.85x830.4 = 705.8cm.t

safe.

(4-b) check shear force:

h = 19
112
= 30.6
= 72.3
t w = 0.62
2.4
Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw = 0.6x2.4x24x0.62 = 21.4t

Vu = 5.2t < 0.85x21.4 = 18.2t

(4-c) check deflection:
5
WLS 4
5
0.4 x10 2 x 500 4
=
=
x
x
384
EI x
384
2100 x 3890
span = 500
= 0.4 cm <
= 1.67 cm
300

safe.

safe.

13/20 LRFD beams

DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS (BEAMS)

..ASD..

The nominal moment of the section is calculated from:

Mn = S.Fy
The working (applied) moment is calculated from:
M = Mn / factor of safety = S.[Fy / f.o.s]
Fy/f.o.s depends
on class of section

(1) according to limitations of width to thickness ratio

(pages 9,10,11 and 12 EC-2001):

If the section is compact:

M = Sx 0.64 F y
M = Sx 0.72 F y rec tan gular

If the section is non-compact:

M = Sx 0.58 F y

If the section is slender:

M = Seff x 0.58 F y

14/20 LRFD beams

(2) according to limitations of lateral unbraced length

(lateral torsional buckling):
Lu act = actual laterally unbraced (unsupported) length of the
compression flange of the beam
20 bf
1380 Af
T-section
Lu =
or Lu =
Cb
bf
F yf
d Fy
tf
where
Af = bf t f
rt =

1/6 d

t f bf3 16 dt w3
+
12
12
t f bf + 16 dt w

tw

If Lu act Lu
there is no lateral torsional buckling (LTB)
And the moment is calculated according to compact or noncompact section

If Lu < Lu act
there is LTB, thus M = SxF LTB
2
2
+ FLTB
0.58Fy = 1.4t/cm2
where FLTB = FLTB
1
2

FLTB1 =

800 Af
Cb
Lu act d

FLTB 2
LTB

1.4t/cm2
FLTB 1
2
1.4t/cm
.
1.4t/cm2

15/20 LRFD beams

FLTB2 = 0.58 F y
FLTB2 = [ 0.64

FLTB2 = [

If
( Lu act / rT ) 2 F y

1.176 x10 5 C b

12000
]Cb
( Lu act / rT ) 2

Lu act
rt

< 84

Cb
Fy

] Fy

If 188

C b Lu act
Cb

84
rt
Fy
Fy

If 188

C b Lu act
<
Fy
rt

The applied shear of the section is calculated from:

V = Aweb .qb
qb depends on
the ratio h/tw

Aweb = d x tw

h
105

tw
F yw
105
h
159
If
<

F yw
F yw tw

If

q b = 0.35 F yw

q b = [1.5

If

159
h
<
F yw tw

qb = [

( h / tw ) F yw
212

] 0.35 F y

119
] 0.35 F y
( h / tw ) F y
:
rolled
0.35Fy

16/20 LRFD beams

Continue the example

Using ASD method (laterally unsupported):
(1)
calculation of loads:
1.2 x 5 2
Md =
= 3.75 mt
8
wL=0.4t/m\
0.4 x 5 2
wd=1.2t/m\
ML =
= 1.25 mt
8
1.2 x 5
Vd =
= 3t
5.0m
2
0.4 x 5
VL =
= 1m
2
Mmax = 3.75+1.25 = 5mt

Qmax = 3+1 = 4t

(2)
estimation of the section:
because the section is laterally unsupported
assume Fb = 0.58Fy = 1.4t/cm2
5 x100
1.4 =
Sx = 357cm3 choose IPE270
Sx
(3)
classification of the section:
(3-a) width to thickness ratio:
d w 21.9
127
=
= 33.2 <
= 125
tw
0.66
2.4
compact web
C 13.5 / 2 .66 / 2 1.5
=
= 4.82
tf
1.02
16.9
<
= 10.9 compact flange
2.4
so the section is compact.

135
10.2
270
6.6

15

IPE 270

17/20 LRFD beams

(3-b) lateral torsional buckling

Lu act = 500cm
20 bf = 20 x13.5
Lu =
= 174 cm
F yf = 2.4
Lu act
LTB
Lu =
=

T-section

135
10.2

1
6x270=45

270
6.6

1380 Af
Cb
d Fy

1380 x13.5 x1.02

x1.13 = 331cm
27 x 2.4

where Cb = 1.13 for distributed load on simple beam (EC

page20)
because (Lu = 174) < (Lb = 500cm)
there is lateral torsional buckling
(4)
check the safety of the section:
(4-a) check bending moment:
FLTB1 =

800 Af
800 x13.5 x1.02
Cb =
x1.13 = 0.92 t / cm 2
Lu act d
500 x 27

to calculate FLTB 2:

Af = bf tf = 13.5 x1.02 = 13.77 cm 2

1.02 x13.5 3 16 x 27 x 0.66 3
+
12
12
rT =
= 3.535 cm
1.02 x13.5 + 16 x 27 x 0.66

18/20 LRFD beams

Lu act = 500

rT = 3.535
Lu act = 500

rT = 3.535

= 141 > 84

C b = 1.13
= 57.6
F y = 2.4

= 141 > 188

C b = 1.13
= 129
F y = 2.4

C b Lu act
<
Fy
rt
12000
12000
2
x
1
.
13
0
.
682
t
/
cm
=[
]
C
=
=
b
1412
( Lu act / rT ) 2

So for 188
FLTB2

FLTB = 0.682 2 +0.92 2 = 1.145 t / cm 2

Mmax = 500cm.t > 1.145x429 = 491cm.t
. safe
9/500 = 2%

unsafe.

(4-b) check shear force:

h
105
if

q b = 0.35 F yw
tw
F yw
h = 21.9
105
= 33.2
= 67.8
t w = 0.66
2.4
rolled

0.35Fy

Vmax = 4t < 0.35x2.4x(27x0.66)= 15t

safe.

(4-c) check deflection:

5
WLS 4
5
0.4 x10 2 x 500 4
=
=
x
x
384
EI x
384
2100 x 5790
span = 500
= 0.268 cm <
= 1.67 cm
300

safe.

19/20 LRFD beams

Using ASD method (laterally supported):

(1)

calculation of loads:

Mmax = 3.75+1.25 = 5mt

Qmax = 3+1 = 4t
(2)

estimation of the section:

because the section is laterally supported

assume Fb = 0.64Fy = 1.54t/cm2
5 x100
1.54 =
Sx = 325cm3 choose IPE240
Sx
(3)
classification of the section:
(3-a) width to thickness ratio:
dw
19
127
=
= 30.6 <
= 125
0.62
tw
2.4
compact web
C 12 / 2 0.62 / 2 1.5
=
= 4.28
tf
0.98
16.9
<
= 10.9 compact flange
2.4

120
9.8
240

so the section is compact.

(3-b) lateral torsional buckling
Lb = zero
No lateral torsional buckling
So form previous check, the section is compact

6.2

15

IPE 240

20/20 LRFD beams

(4)
check the safety of the section:
(4-a) check bending moment:
Mmax = 500cm.t 0.64x2.4x324 = 498cm.t

safe.

(4-b) check shear force:

h
105

q b = 0.35 F yw
F yw
tw
h = 19
105
= 30.6
= 67.8
t w = 0.62
2.4

if

Vmax = 4t < 0.35x2.4x(24x0.62)= 12.5t

safe.

(4-c) check deflection:

5
WLS 4
5
0.4 x10 2 x 500 4
=
=
x
x
384
EI x
384
2100 x 3890
span = 500
= 0.4 cm <
= 1.67 cm
300

safe.

/7 LRFD beams

DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS (BEAMS)

..LRFD..
Example
Design an IPE section to be used as a
secondary beam using LRFD philosophy to
support the shown machine in a floor of an
industrial building as shown in the following
diagram.

2.5

3.0

2.5

The weight of the mashine is 30t

The machine is vibrating
Solution:
Using LRFD method (laterally unsupported):
(1) calculation of loads:

Assume O.W. = 0.1 t/m

0.1x 82
Md =
= 0.8mt
8

0.1x8
Vd =
= 0.4mt
2

7.5

7.5

Load on one support = 30/4 = 7.5t

Since the machine is vibrating (given)
So we have to include impact (25%)
ML = 7.5*2.5 = 18.75mt

2.5

3.0

2.5

/7 LRFD beams

ML+I = 18.75*1.25 = 23.4mt

VL = 7.5t

VL+I = 7.5*1.25 = 9.4mt

Mu = 1.4x0.8 = 1.12mt
Or

1.2x0.8+1.6x23.4= 38.4mt (controls)

Vu = 1.4x0.4 = 0.56t
Or

1.2x0.4+1.6x9.4= 15.52t (controls)

Where:
Ultimate load = (1.4dead) or (1.2dead+1.6live)
(2) estimation of the section:
because the section is laterally unsupported
assume Fb = 1.0 t/cm2
Md+ML = 18.75+0.8 = 19.55mt (working loads)
1.0 =

19.55x 100
Sx

Sx = 1955cm3 choose IPE500

(3) classification of the section:

(3-a) width to thickness ratio:
dw
4 2 .6
127
=
= 4 1 .8 <
= 82
tw
1 .0 2
2 .4
c o m p a c t w eb

/7 LRFD beams

16.9
C 20 / 2
=
= 6.25 <
= 10.9 compact flange
tf
1.6
2.4

So the whole section is compact.

(3-b) lateral torsional buckling
Lb = 800cm
80ry

Lp =

Fyf

80 x 4.31
= 222.6cm
2.4

To calculate Lr:
A f = b f t f = 20x 1.6 = 32cm2

1.6x 20 3 1 6 x 50 x1.02 3
+
12
12
= 5.1cm
1
1.6 x 20 + 6 x 50x1.02

rT =
X =(

0.104 x 5.1x 50 2
) = 0.91
32

FL = 2.4 0.7 = 1.7t/cm2

Lr =

1380x 32 1
[1 + 1 + (2 x0.91x 1.7)2 ] = 757.5cm
50x1.7 2

Lb = 800 > Lr = 757.5cm

/7 LRFD beams

(4) check the safety of the section:

(4-a) check bending moment:
Cb 1.35

(concentrated loads)

Or to calculate the exact Cb:

2.0m 0.5m

18.75mt

18.75mt

Mmax = Mb = 18. 75 mt
Ma = Mb = 18.75*2/2.5 = 15mt
Cb =

12.5 * 18.75
= 1.1
2.5 * 18.75 + 3 * 15 + 4 * 18.75 + 3 * 15

Mn = Mcr = 1.35*1930 (

1380 * 32 2
20700
) +(
)2
2
50 * 800
(800 / 5.1)

= 3761mt
Mu = 3840 cm.t > 0.85x3761= 3197cm.t

unsafe.

Try IPE 600 and recheck

(4-b) check shear force:
h = 42.6
112
= 41.8
= 72.3
t w = 1.02
2.4

Vn = 0.6 F yw Aw = 0.6x2.4x50x1.02 = 73.44t

Vu = 15.52t < 0.85x73.44 = 62.4t

safe.

/7 LRFD beams

(4-c) check deflection:

LL without impact

1.5m

2.5m

51.55
18.75mt

23.43

18.75mt

28.12

Melastic = 51.55*4-28.12*.75-23.43*(1.5+2.5/3) =
130.44 m3t
span = 800
130.44 * 10 6
=
= 1.29cm <
= 2.67 cm
2100 x 48200
300

/7 LRFD beams

If these equations are given we have to check web

buckling, web local yielding for all beams designed with
LRFD and to check crippling for beams with concentrated
loads
Web local yielding
= 0.95
R n = (5k + N )Fyw tw
R n = (2.5k + N )Fyw tw

if load is at distance > d from the end

if load is at distance d from the end

web crippling
= 0.7
t
d
N tw 1.5
)( ) ]{E Fyw f }0.5
if load is at distance > from the end
d tf
tw
2
d
if load is at distance
from the end
2
if N/d 0.2
t
N t
R n = 0.1813tw2 [1 + 3( )( w )1.5 ]{E Fyw f }0.5
d tf
tw
if N/d > 0.2
t
t
N
R n = 0.1813tw2 [1 + (4 0.2)( w )1.5 ]{E Fyw f }0.5
d
tf
tw
R n = 0.3627tw2 [1 + 3(

For the previous example:

Assume N = 10cm

K = tf + r = c = 3.7cm

Load at distance 250 cm > d = 50 cm (IPE 500)

R n = (5 * 3.7 + 10) * 2.4 * 1.02 = 69.7 t
R u = 1.6*(1.25*7.5) =15 t < 0.95 * 69.7 = 66.3 t

safe

/7 LRFD beams

Load at distance 250 cm > d/2 = 25 cm (IPE 500)

1.5
0.5

1.6
10 1.02
R n = 0.3627 * 1.02 * 1 + 3
2100 * 2.4 *
= 43.8 t
50
1.6
1.02

R u = 1.6*(1.25*7.5) =15 t < 0.7 * 43.8 = 60.3 t

safe

Crane Girder I
Important Structural Notes on moving loads
1 - How to get the position of maximum moment:
If we have, many moving concentrated loads and want to get the position of
maximum moment on certain beam.
,

,
(

p1

3
p
2 R
x

p4

p
1

p
2

p
3

p
4

X/2

Example: Calculate the maximum moment on a beam of length

15

10

10

15

10m and subjected to the given set of moving loads.

2.0

Solution:
R = 10+10+11+15= 50t,

X' =

1.5

2.0

10 2 + 15 3.5 + 15 5.5
= 3.1 m , X = 3.5 3.1 = 0.4 m
50

10 1.7 + 10 3.7 + 15 5.2 + 15 7.2

= 24 t
Y=
10

1.1

0.4
50

10

X'

15

15

10
X

Mmax = 24 x 4.8 15 x 2 = 85.2 mt

2 .0

3.0

2.0

3.23

1.7

15

10

10

2.0

1.3

0.2

15

2.0

2.8

1/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
2 - How to calculate maximum shear:
We can make the moving loads over support to get the maximum shear and reaction.

Example: Calculate the maximum shear on a beam of length

15

10

10

15

10m and subjected to the given moving loads.

Solution:

2.0

10 4.5 + 10 6.5 + 15 8 + 15 10
= 38.0 t = Q max
10

4.5

2.0

15

15

10

10

R=

1.5

2.0

1.5

2.0
R

Important special case:

P
a

For the case of 2 equal loads parted with distance "a"

1. The case of loading which gives maximum moment

P a/2

2P P
a/2

is:
One load lies at distance "a/4" from the C.G. of the

beam, while the other is at "3a /4" from the C.G.

Calculate the moment under the nearest load "a/4".

a/4 3a/4

2. The case of loading which gives maximum shear is:

R = Q max at support

P
a

2/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Design of crane girder
Def:
Crane girder is a beam used to carry a crane; a frame or truss column may
simply or continuously supports it. We prefer it to be simply supported to avoid the
effect of diff- settlement at the ends.
We will study two types of cranes:
1- Overhead crane (with 2 wheels) moving over the crane girder.
2- Monorail (with 1 wheel) suspended by the crane girder.

1- Design of crane girder for overhead crane:-

The crane girder used here is an I-section, it can be rolled section or B.U.S. of I
shape.
3/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I

ne
cra

pla

bra

2
(B. chan
U . ne
col ls
um
n

cke

gir

der

te

Crane Data
1- Maximum wheel load "P ".
2- Distance between wheels "a ".
3- Crane girder span = Spacing between columns, frames, trusses "S ".
4/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Very very very important note:
When we study and design the crane girder, we calculate the loads and
straining action "Moment and Shear" on crane girder.
However, when we study and design the column or the connection between the
crane girder and the column, we calculate the loads from crane girder "max
reaction of crane girder ".

I- Loads on crane girder:

We always design crane girder as a simple beam to avoid diff. settlement.
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Assume Wd = O.W. of the crane girder = (0.15 0.20) t/m'

Wd * S 2
=mt
MD.L. =
8

QD.L. =

Wd * S
=t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"
As the wheels load are moving load so we have to study 2 cases to get the max
straining actions "case of Max Moment, case of Max Shear" and have to add the
dynamic effect "Impact factor I".
Impact factor I
If automatically operated

I = 25 % = 0.25

If manually operated

I=10% = 0.1

If not given take it 25% = 0.25

5/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I

ML.L. = mt

as calculated before from case of max moment of 2 moving loads

QL.L. = Rshear = t as calculated from case of max shear

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"
During the motion of the crane it causes an Hz force acting only on the
upper flange of the crane girder, this force is the Lateral shock. This force is
classified as secondary load "Case B".
Plateral =

P
10

it will cause moment @ Y-axis.

My = M lateral shock max =

M L.L.
10

"Case B".

III- Longitudinal load: "Braking force"

When we apply brakes to stop the crane a longitudinal force called
braking force will be created. B =

P
7

This force will cause normal force on the beam "we neglect it in the design of the
beam".
Finally the max straining actions on the Crane girder are:
Mx = Md + ML.L. ( 1 + I ) = mt Case A
My = Mlateral shock =

M L.L.
= mt
10

Qmax = Qd + Q L.L. ( 1 + I ) = t

Case B

Theses values are used only

when we design crane girder.

Case A
6/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
II- Loads from Crane girder "on connection or column or base"
Here we need to calculate the max reaction = case of max shear
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Assume Wd = O.W. of the crane girder = (0.15 0.20) t/m'
Pd =2 Rd =2*

W d *S
= Wd x S = t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"

Impact factor I = 25 %

PL.L. = RL.L.

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock":

Plateral =

P
10

Px = R lateral shock max =

R L.L.
10

"Case B"

7/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
III- Longitudinal load: "Braking force" NOT NEGLECTED
B=

P
7

Finally the max forces from the Crane girder are:

PYMax = Pd + PL.L. (1+ I) = t
PYMin = Pd "no crane"

R
PX = L.L. = t
10
B=

P
7

Theses values are used when we

design the column or the
connection of the crane girder.

=t

Important note: The braking force is not neglected when calculating the straining
actions on columns and connection.

8/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Example: Calculate the maximum moment and shear on the crane girder given that
the maximum wheel load is 8t and the 2 loads are parted 2m. The distance between
columns is 6m. Calculate also the max & min reactions acting on column and column
connection.
Solution:
1- Straining actions on crane girder: "Loads on Crane girder"
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Assume Wd = O.W. of the crane girder = 0.15 t/m'

MD.L. =

0.15 62
= 0.675mt
8

QD.L. =

0.15 6
=0.45t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"

MLL =6.67*2.5=16.67 mt
QL.L. = Rshear =8 + 8*

62
=13.3 t
6

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"

My =

M L.L.
=1.67 mt
10

"Case B".

III- Longitudinal load: Braking force neglected

9/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Final Straining actions on Crane Girder
Mx = Md + ML.L. ( 1 + I ) =0.675 + 16.7 (1+0.25)=21.5 mt Case A
My =

M L.L.
= 1.67 mt
10

Case B

Qmax = Qd + Q L.L. ( 1 + I ) = 0.45 + 13.3 (1+0.25) = 17.07t

Case A

2- Reaction of crane girder on bracket "Loads

from Crane girder":
RLL = 8 + 8*

62
=13.3 t,
6

RDL=0.15*6=0.9t

A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"

Pd =2 Rd =2 x 0.45 = 0.9t

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"

Impact factor I = 25 %

PL.L. = RL.L.= 13.3t

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock":

Plateral =
Px =

P
= 0.8ton
10

R L.L. 13.3
=
=1.33ton
10
10

"Case B"

10/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I

III- Longitudinal load: "Braking force" NOT NEGLECTED

B=

P = 8 + 8 =2.28ton
7

Finally the max forces from the Crane girder are:

PYMax = Pd + PL.L. (1+ I) =0.9 + 13.3(1.25) = 17.52t
PYMin = Pd "no crane" = 0.9 t

R
PX = L.L. = 1.33t
10
B=

P
7

= 2.28t
P
=17.52 t
y max
P
=0.9 t
y min
P
=1.33 t
x max
P
= zero
x min
10cm

I.P.E.
No. 500

I.P.E.
No. 500

Stiffener pls.
10mm th.

Very important note: The lateral shock and the braking forces have no direction. We
take the critical direction in the design. Both the 2 forces are case "B".

11/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Fatigue effect:
a. Fatigue effect results from changing the load on any member from maximum
to minimum to maximum to , this change is most probably due to a moving
load. As crane girder is subjected to moving load so we must study fatigue
effect on it.
b. Stress range fsr is the range between maximum and minimum stress.

Fmax

Fsr

Fsr
Fmax

c. To safeguard fatigue stresses we need to make sure that the difference between
the maximum and the minimum stress fsr is < the allowable stress range Fsr
fsr = F max - F min =
Where

M max M min M max M min

=
Fsr
SX
SX
SX

M max = M D + M L+I

Mmin = MD M -ve

For simple beams:

M -ve = zero and Mmin = MD
fsr =

(M d + M L ) M d M L
Fsr
=
Sx
Sx

For simplicity we can take Mmin = MD for ALL cases

How to calculate F sr
Allowable fatigue stress range depends on No. of stress cycles and the detailing
of cross section of the design member.
12/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
1- No. of cycles: ECP 40 table 3.1c
We can get the number of cycles according to the type of use (field of
application) Occasional, regular, severe, (This will be given in exam)
If not given assume n = 100000 or 500000 or 2000000
2- Different details for crane girder: Tables ECP 43 to 50
1.1 Base metal with rolled un-machined section (Rolled

) detail "A"

[ For rolled crane girder at mid span] ECP 43

2.3 At position of connection using non-pretension bolts. Detail "D"
[Only if there is continuous crane girder]. ECP 43
4.1 Built-up section subjected to moment. Detail "B" [welded built-up
section for crane girder]. ECP 44
Using table ECP 41, we can get Fsr knowing "n" and the detail.
Note that:
1- Cracks that may form in fluctuating Compression regions are self arresting.
Therefore, these Compression regions are not subjected to fatigue failure (ECP
35). [This means we check fatigue for tension flange only]

Illustrative Example 1:
If MD = 50 m t

, ML+I = 80 m t., for a crane girder HEA 700 of an occasionally

use crane, check fatigue stresses.

Solution:
Occasionally used crane n = 100000
Rolled section detail A
Fsr = 4.3 t/cm2

table 3.2 ECP 41

Check of fatigue stresses:

Mmin = MD = 50mt = 5000 cmt
Mmax = 50+80 = 130mt = 13000 cmt
fsr =

13000 5000
8000
=
= 1.28 < 4.3 safe
6240
SX

13/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Crippling: ECP 22 & 25
We have to check crippling if there is direct loading on the flange of the I-beam. Since for
crane girders, the wheel is moving directly over flange, so we have to check crane girder
against crippling. [Assume contact length after the rail = 10cm if not given]
The contact length in ECP is "n" (Not "n" which is number of cycles)
fcrp =

P
0.75Fy
(n + 2 K ) * t w

n= contact length, 10cm if not given

K= tf + r 2 tf

Design of Crane girder:

A) As Rolled section:
As the crane girder is subjected to both Mx and My so we will use
BFIB"HEA, HEM, HEB" as it can resist both Mx and My.
A- Straining actions:
Mx = mt, My = mt, Qmax = t Values from load on crane girder

B- Choice of section
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbcx x 1.2
SY
SX
2

My is case B

As My is resisted only by the upper flange

14/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Important note: My is resisted only by the upper flange, so we take Sy/2 because Sy
of one flange is

0.5 Sy of the whole section.

But as we dont know the section so we can't calculate Fbc,

Because no concrete slab so Luact > Lumax, so assume Fbc = 0.58 x Fy = 1.4 t/cm2
In addition, assume Sx
SX =

M x + 8M y
1.4 *1.2

4 Sy

for BFIB.

= cm3 from tables choose BFIB No

C- Checks:

Check fatigue:

M max M min
Fsr
Sx

For simply supported beams:

M L+I
Fsr
Sx

If the section is unsafe, increase the dimensions, recheck fatigue and continue the
checks.
Determine F bc :
Calculate c/tf, dW/tW to determine compact, non-compact or slender.
Luact = "S", as the compression flange is only supported at column.

1380 AF
Cb ,
FY d
Lumax = min of

Cb = 1.35 (Case of concentrated load)

20 b f
FY

If Luact

Lumax, So Fbcx = 0.64Fy, Fbcy = 0.72Fy and Fbtx = 0.64Fy

If Luact > Lumax, So Fbcx = Fltb or 0.58Fy, Fbcy = 0.58Fy and Fbtx = 0.58Fy

15/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Check bending stress:
From the shown bending stresses @ X and Y-axes
we will have to check 2 points.

Point 1 " subjected to Mx only

fbc1 =

"Case A"

MX
Fbcx
SX

Point 2 " subjected to Mx & My

fbc2 =

"Case B"

M y /( S y / 2 )
M x / Sx
+
Fbcx
Fbcy

1 x 1.2

Check shear stress:

qact =

Qmax
h * tw

qall = 0.35 x Fy =0.84 t /cm2

Check web crippling under wheel load

fcrp =

P
0.75Fy
(n + 2 K ) * t w

n= contact length, 10cm if not given

K= tf + r 2 tf

Check deflection " using conjugate beam method "

From the shown case of loading:

We calculate act =

M
EI x

all =

Span
S
=
800 800

ECP 132

16/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
B) As Built-up section "B.U.S. of I shape"
As My is only resisted by the upper flange so we will reduce the lower flange and so
we get an economic section, and that's why we use BUS.
A- Straining actions:
Mx = mt, My = mt, Qmax = t

Values from load on crane girder

B- Choice of section
Here we are going to create the section shown in figure.
we need to find hw,tw,bu,tu,bL and tL.
I- Web dim.:hw =

Span
Span
= . cm, for crane girder supporting two cranes, take it
10 15
10

8 mm
tw = max of

hW
(190 / Fy )

Qmax
0.35 FY hW
Explanations:
1- Recommended minimum thickness is 8mm
2- Non-compact web limit
3- We must choose the web to resist shear:

Qmax
= 0.35F y
hw * t w
17/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
II- flanges dim.:-

MX

A flange plate
bf
tf

hw
T

T=C=

Mx
= ton (changing moment to force)
0.98 hw

Neglect My and assume Fbcx = 1.2 t/cm2

A flange plate = Afl =

Force C
=
= cm2
Stress 1.2

Area of the 2 flanges = 2*Afl

The area of upper flange is 2/3 total area of the two flanges and the area of the lower
flange is assumed 1/3 of the total flange area.
A Upper fl =

2
*(2A flange plate) = b u x tu
3

A Lower fl =

Assume bu = (15 20) t u , so we get bu and tu

1
*(2A flange plate)
3
b
bL = U
2

and tl = tu

N.B.: All thicknesses "tw , tu and tl "in mm are rounded to an

even number or a number dividable by 5 , such as "8, 10, 12,14,
15, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25, 26"
Now we have chosen the section but we have to calculate its
properties of area.
Mechanical Properties:
1- C.G. of the section Y =

A Y

2- Ix of the whole section Ix = cm4

t u bU3
3- Iy of the upper flange only Iy =
= cm4
12
18/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Checks:
Check fatigue: (

M max M min
M
) Y = ( L + I ) Y Fsr
Ix
Ix

We check the lower flange "tension flange"

If the section is unsafe, increase the dimensions, recheck fatigue and continue the
checks.
Determine F bc
Calculate c/tf, dW/tW to determine compact, non-compact or slender.
Note that: For flange C/tf = < 21 / F y (welded section ECP page 11)
Luact = "S", as the compression flange is only supported at column.

1380 AF
Cb , Cb = 1.35
FY d
Lumax = min of

20 b f
FY

Af is the area of the compression flange.

If Luact

Lumax and the section is compact, So Fbcx = 0.64Fy and Fbcy = 0.72Fy

Otherwise, Fbcx = 0.58Fy or Fltb and Fbcy = 0.58Fy

Check bending stress:
From the shown bending stresses @ X and Y axes and as the section is
Un-symmetrical, so we will have to check 3 points.
Point 1 " subjected to Mx only, on compression flange "Case A"
Fbc1 =

M X y1
Fbcx
IX

Point 2 " subjected to Mx & My, on compression flange

"Case B"
fbc2 =

(M x / I x ) * y2 (M y / I y ) * x2
+
Fbcx
Fbcy

1 x 1.2

19/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Point 3"subjected to Mx only, on tension flange "Case A"

fb3 =

M X y3
Fbt =
IX

0.64 x Fy

Compact Sec. and no LTB

0.58 x Fy

Otherwise

Check web crippling under wheel load

fcrp =

P
0.75Fy
(n + 2 K ) * t w
K= tf + sw 2 tf

n= contact length, 10cm if not given

Check shear stress
q act =

Qmax
dw * tw

qb

For

d w 105

tw
Fy

q b = 0.35 Fy t/cm2

For

105 d w 159

<
tw
Fy
Fy

q b = [1.5 -

For

d w 159
>
tw
Fy

qb=[

( hw / t w ) F y
212

][0.35 F y ] 0.35F y

119
][0.35F y ] 0.35F y
( hw / t w ) F y

Check deflection "using conjugate beam method"

As before

Web to flange weld:

" shear flow " =

Q (d + L + I ) S
Ix

= 2S w 0.2 Fu

Where:
S = first moment of inertia of upper flange only = bu t u (hw + t u + t l Y )
Ix = Ix of crane girder
Get sw, sw min = 6 mm

20/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Example:
For the shown figure, it is required to:
1- Design the crane girder.
a- As a rolled sec.
b- As a built up sec.
2- Calculate the maximum and minimum reactions Px
and Py
Given: Spacing between frames = 6.0 m, Crane wheel
loads P = 12 t , regular use crane
with intermittent operation.
Solution:
I- Design of crane girder:
Loads on crane girder
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Assume Wd = O.W. of the crane girder = 0.20 t/m'
MD.L. =

0.20 6 2
= 0.90mt
8

QD.L. =

0.20 6
= 0.6t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"
Impact factor I = 25 %

ML.L. = 26.26 mt

QL.L. =Rshear= 20.50 t

21/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"
My = M lateral shock max =

M L.L. 26.26
=
= 2.626 mt
10
10

"Case B"

Finally the max straining actions on the Crane girder are:

Mx = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 0.9 + 26.26 (1+0.25) = 33.73 mt
My = Mlateral shock =

M L.L.
= 2.626 mt
10

Qmax = Qd + Q L.L. (1 + I) = 0.6 + 20.5 (1+0.25) = 26.23 t

1-Design of crane girder as rolled section:

Choice of section:
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbcx x 1.2 My is case B
SY
SX
2

Assume non-compact section Fbc = 0.58 x Fy = 1.4 t/cm2

And Sx
SX =

4 Sy

for BFIB.

M X + 8M Y 33.73 100 + 8 2.626 100

=
=3258 cm3
1.4 1.2
1.4 1.2

From tables choose BFIB (HEB) No 450

Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Regular use with intermittent operation n = 500000
Rolled section detail A
Fsr = 2.52 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 33.73 mt
M min = Md = 0.9 mt

fsr = (

33.73 0.9
3283
)100 =
= 0.924 < 2.52 safe
SX
3550

Determine F bc:
C = 0.5 x (30- 2 x 2.6 - 1.4) = 11.7 cm, dw = h 4tf = 45 4 x 2.6 = 34.6 cm
22/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
C / tf = 11.7 / 2.6 = 4.5 < 10.91 compact flange
dW / tW = 34.6 / 1.4 = 24.71 < 82 compact web
As both are compact, so regarding local buckling the section is a compact section.
Luact = "S" = 600 cm

20 b f

Lumax = min of

FY

20 30
=387.3cm
2 .4

1380 AF
1380 30 2.6
Cb =
1.35 =1346cm
2.4 45
FY d
As Luact > Lumax

Sec is non compact, and LTB may occur

2
2
Fltb
1 + Fltb 2

Fbcx = Fltb =
Fltb1 =

Lumax = 387.3 cm

800 A f
800 30 2.6
2
2
1.35 = 3.11 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
Cb =
600 45
Lu d

So Fbcx = Fltb =1.4 t/cm2, Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Check bending stress:
Point 1 " subjected to Mx only
fbc1 =

"Case A"

M X 33.73 100
=
= 0.95 t/cm2 <Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2
SX
3550

Point 2 " subjected to Mx & My

"Case B"

fbc2=
M

Sx

Fbcx

MY
+

SY 2

Fbcy

33.73 100
1.4

2.626 100
3550 +

781 2

1.4

=1.16 t/cm < 1.0 x 1.2

Check shear stress
qact =

Q max
26.23
2
=
= 0.42 < qall = 0.35 x Fy = 0.84 t /cm
Aweb 45 1.4

Check web crippling

fcrp =

P
12
= 0.42 t/cm2 < 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
=
(10
+
2

5.2)1.4
(n + 2 K ) * t w

n= 10 cm, K= tf + r 2 tf = 2 x 2.6 = 5.2 cm

23/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Check deflection "using conjugate beam method"
From the shown case of loading

= 95.55 m3t
act

M
95.55 106
=
=
= 0.57cm
E IX
2100 79890

all

Span 600
=
= 0.75cm.
800 800

Therefore, we can use BFIB 450

2- Design of crane girder as BUS:Choice of section:

hw =

600
Span
= 50 cm
=
12 15
12

8 mm
tw = max of

50
(190 / 2.4)

= 0.407 cm= 4.1 mm

Q max
26.23
=
= 0.62cm = 6.2 mm
0.35 FY hW 0.35 2.4 50

Take tw = 8mm = 0.8 cm.

Dimensions of flanges:
T=C=

Mx
33.73 100
= 68.84 ton
=
0.98 50
0.98 hw

Assume F=1.2t/cm2. A flange plate =

A2 fl = 57.4*2 = 114.8 cm2,

C 68.84
=
= 57.4 cm2
1.2 1.2
A Upper fl =

2
2
A Tot = x 114.8 = 76.53 cm2
3
3

Assume bU =20tU, so A Upper fl =76.53 = 20 tU x tU = 20 tU2

24/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
tU = 1.96 cm

2 cm = 20 mm

b
40
bL = u =
= 20cm and
2
2

bU = 20 x 2 = 40 cm

tL = tU = 2 cm

Properties of area:
1- C.G. of the section Y =

A Y

2-Ix=

2021+ 500.827+ 40253

= 33.5cm
202 + 40 2 + 500.8

0.8 503
+ 0.8 50 (27 33.5)2 + 40 2 (53 33.5) 2 + 20 2 (33.5 1)2
12

= 82693.3 cm4
3- Iy of the upper flange (compression flange only)
3
t u bu3 2 40
=
= 10666.66 cm4
Iy =
12
12

Checks:
-Check fatigue stress:
Regular use with intermittent operation n = 500000
BUS section detail B
Fsr = 2.0 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 33.73 mt
M min = Md = 0.9 mt

fsr = (

33.73 0.9
3283
33.5 = 1.329 < 2.0 safe
)100 Y =
82693.3
IX

-Determine F bc
Assume Size of weld = 8mm " can't be > tw"
C = (bf tw 2S)/ 2 = (40 0.8 2 x 0.8) / 2 = 18.8 cm,
dw = hw 2S = 50 2 x 0.8 = 48.4 cm
C / tf = 18.8 / 2.0 = 9.4 <

15.3
=9.88 compact flange
2.4

dW / tW = 48.4 / 0.8 = 60.5 < 82 compact web

25/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
As both are compact, so regarding local buckling the section is a compact section:
Luact = "S" = 600 cm
Lumax = min of

Or

20 b f
FY

20 40
2.4

=516.4cm

1380 AF
1380 40 2.0
1.35 = 1150cm, so Lumax = 516.4 cm
Cb =
2.4 (50 + 2 2)
FY d

As Luact > Lumax Section is non compact, and LTB may occur
Fbcx = Fltb =
Fltb1 =

2
2
2
Fltb
1 + Fltb 2 and Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm

800 A f
800 40 2.0
2
2
1.35 = 2.673 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
Cb =
600 54
Lu d

So Fbc = Fltb = Fltb1 = 1.4 t/cm2 and Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Check bending stress

Point 1 " Subjected to Mx only, on compression flange
"Case A" "
fbc1 =

M X y1 33.73 100 20.5

= 0.83 < Fbt = 1.4 t/cm2
=
IX
82693.3

non-compact sec.
Point 2 " Subjected to Mx & My, on compression flange "Case B" "
fbc2=

(M x / I x ) * y2 (M y / I y ) * x2
+
=
Fbcx
Fbcy

33.73 100 (54 33.5)

1.4

82693.3 +

2.626 100 20
1.4

10666.66 = 0.94 < 1.0 x 1.2 case B

Point 3 " Subjected to Mx only, on tension flange "Case A" "

fbt1 =

M X y 3 33.73 100 33.5

=
= 1.36 < Fbt = 1.4 t/cm2 non-compact sec.
IX
82693.3

26/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Check web crippling
fcrp =

P
12
= 0.83 t/cm2 < 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
=
( n + 2 K ) * t w (10 + 2 4)0.8

n= 10 cm, K= tf + sw 2 tf = 2 x 2.0 = 4.0 cm

Check shear stress

d w 50
105
=
= 62.5 <
= 67.8 q b = 0.35Fy
t w 0.8
2.4
qact =

Q max
26.23
2
=
= 0.65 < q b = 0.35*2.4 = 0.84 t/cm
Aweb 50 0.8

Web to flange weld

=

Q (d + L + I ) S
Ix

= 2S w 0.2 Fu

S = first moment of inertia of upper flange only = 40 2 (50 + 2 + 2 33.5) =1640

=

26.23 1640
= 2S w 0.2 3.6
82693.3

sw = 0.36 cm = 4 mm
take sw = 6 mm min

Check deflection "using conjugate beam method"

= 95.55 m3t
act =

M
95.55 106
=
= 0.55cm
E IX
2100 82693.3

all

Span 600
=
= 0.75cm.
800 800

27/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
II-Maximum and minimum reactions of crane Px and Py :
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Wd = 0.20 t/m' as assumed before.
Pd = 2 x

WD L
0.2 6
=2 x
= 1.2 t
2
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

PL.L. =RL.L. = 20.50 t

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"

Plateral =

P 12
= = 1.2 t
10 10

Px = R lateral shock max =

20.50
=2.05 t "Case B"
10

III- Longitudinal load: "Braking force"

B=

12 + 12
= 3.42 t
7

Finally the max forces from the Crane girder are:

PYmax = Pd + PL.L. ( 1+ I ) = 1.2 + 20.5 (1+.25) = 26.825 t
PYmin = Pd = 1.2 t
PX =
B=

PL .L . R L.L.
=2.05 t
=
10
10

P
7

Case B

=3.42 t

28/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Example:
Design a suitable Rolled section and BUS for a crane girder carrying 2 cranes
each has 2 wheel loads. The 1st crane with 2 loads of 10 t spaced 2m and the other
with 2 loads of 15t & spaced 2.5m. The minimum distance between the 2 cranes is
0.5m, the spacing between frames is 8m. Calculate also the straining actions acting
on the bracket. Impact 25%
Solution:
1. Loads on crane girder
Dead Load:Assume O.W. = 0.15 t/m'
MDL = 0.15 x 82 / 8 = 1.2 mt
QDL = 0.15 x 8 / 2 =0.6 t
Live Load:Case of Max Moment:R = 2 (10 + 15) = 50 t
X' = (10 x 2 + 15 x 2.5 + 15 x 5)/50 = 2.65 m
X = 2.65 2.5 = 0.15m

10 1.425 + 10 3.425 + 15 3.925 + 15 6.425

= 25.5 t
8
M C = 25.5 4.075 15 2.5 = 66.4 mt
R right =

Case of max shear:-

Qmax = 35.31 t
29/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Total straining actions:
Mx = 1.2 + 66.4 x 1.25 = 84 mt
My = 0.1 x 66.4 = 6.64 mt
Qx = 0.6 + 1.25 x 35.31 = 44.74 t
2- Design of sections
I- As a Rolled Section
Choice of section:
Assume Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

Sx =

(84 + 8 * 6.64) *100

= 8152 cm3
1.4 *1.2

Sx = 4Sy
Choose H.E.B. 800

Continue as before
Note that:
1. O.W. of HEB 800 is 0.26 t/m\ not 0.15 t/m\ which is not effective
2. Design of large crane girders is preferable to be built up section which is
very economic

II- As a B.U.S.
Choice of section
For crane girder carrying 2 cranes, hw = span / 10
hw =

800
= 80 cm
10

Continue as before exactly

30/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
2. Straining actions on Bracket from crane with BUS on bracket:
The maximum reaction

5.5
= 25.31 t
8
10 * 5.5 + 10 * 7.5
R2 =
= 16.25 t
8
R = 25.31 + 16.25 = 41.56 t
R1 = 15 + 15 *

Assume o.w. = 200 kg/m\

P
=53.55 t
y max
P
=1.6 t
y min

WD = 0.2*4*2 = 1.6 t

Py = 0.2 * 8 + 1.25 * 41.56 = 53.55 t

Px = 0.1* 41.56 = 4.16 t
Q y = 53.55 t

P
=4.16 t
x max
P
= zero
x min

50
10cm

M A = 53.55 * 0.5 = 26.78 mt

assume
I.P.E.
No. 500

I.P.E.
No. 500

Stiffener pls.
10mm th.

Assume bracket is IPE 500

80 + 2 * 2.6 + 50 / 2
M B = 26.78 + 4.16 *
= 31.36 mt
100

M A 31.36
=
= 1.17 < 1.2
M B 26.78
Therefore, Case A is more critical
If the design of the bracket is required, we design a cantilever beam same as before
Note:
1. Cantilever: Destabilizing load (on upper flange)
2. At Support: continuous with lateral & torsional restraint (completely
welded in column)
3. At Tip : free
So Lu act = 2.5 lc
31/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Example: Calculate the straining action acting on crane girder carrying 2 cranes each
has 2 wheel loads. The 1st crane with 2 loads of 10 t spaced 2m and the other with 2
loads of 15t & spaced 2.5m. The minimum distance between the 2 cranes is 0.5m, the
spacing between frames is 5m.
Solution:
Case of Max Moment:
As before, we have to calculate the position of the resultant
X = 2.75 2 / 2 2.5 / 2 = 0.5m
R = 2 (10 + 15) = 50 t
X' = (10 * 2 + 15 * 2.5 + 15 * 5) / 50= 2.65
X = 2.65 2.5 = 0.15 m
As shown, the 4th load lies outside the beam (or in other case so near to support), so
we have to use only 3 loads and calculate their resultant. The 3 loads are 15, 15 and
10t "big loads"
R = 2 (15) + 10 = 40 t

X' = (15 x 0.5 + 15 x 3)/40 = 1.3125 m

X = 1.312 0.5 = 0.812m

15 0.406 + 15 2.906 + 10 3.406
= 16.74 t
5
= 16.74 2.094 10 0.5 = 30.07 mt

R left =
MC

Case of max shear:Qmax = 26.5 t

32/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Important notes:
If the distance between the 2 frames is small, while the spacing between the 2
wheels is large, after putting the loads as before to get case of max moment, we find
out that 1 wheel is very close to the support or even out of the span, we use only one
load in the middle to get max moment, But for case of shear we put the 2 loads
Approximately: a > S/2

Example: Calculate the straining actions acting on crane girder, given that the
distance between 2 frames is 4m, and the crane with 2 wheels 10t each spaced 2.4m.
Solution:
Case of max Moment:2 loads , so we put the load at a/4 from mid span as before, but we can see that the
second load is soooo near the support, so try another case putting only 1 load at mid
span "more critical"

MLL=9.8mt

"case 2 wheels"

MLL = 10 x 4/4 = 10mt "case 1 wheel load at mid span"

more critical
Case of max Shear
Putting 1 load at support and the other at distance a from the
support we get max shear. " as before "

QLL=14t

33/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I
Drawing of connection between crane girder and column:

34/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Crane Girder I

35/35-C.G.I
2007-2008

Bolted Moment Connections

Crane Girder II
2-Design of monorail crane girder:
The monorail is the same as overhanging crane except:

Pt. 3

1- The monorail has only one wheel.

Compression
Side

2- The monorail is hanged from the lower flange.

3- The compression flange is the upper flange because the
crane girder acts as simple beam.
4- The lower flange is the flange subjected to lateral shock.

Pt. 1

Tension
Side
Pt. 2

i.e in case of Built up section, the shape of the section will

be as shown.
For design of B.U.S. take hw =

Span
15

The lower flange is the tension flange and subjected to Mx and My, while the
upper flange which is the compression flange is subjected to Mx only.
So the maximum moment and the maximum shear are calculated from the
following cases:

M LL = P

S
4

My = 0.1 MLL

Qy = R = P

Example 1:
For the shown figure, it is required to

Rafter

1- Design the crane girder supporting the shown monorail twice

using Rolled and Bu-Section given that load of monorail is 8 t.

Spacing=7m

Given that: The spacing between frames is 7m and the frame carries
the monorail only.
4m

1/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Solution:
1-Design of Crane Girder
Loads on Crane Girder
-Dead Load:Assume o.w. = 0.15 t/m2
MDL = 0.15 x (72 / 8) = 0.92 mt

QDL = 0.15 x (7 / 2) = 0.525 t

-Live Load:-

8t
3.5m
M LL = 8

8t
3.5m

7
= 14mt
4

QLL = 8 t

Total straining actions :

Mx = 0.92 + 14 x 1.25 = 18.42 mt
My = 1.4 mt
Qx = 0.525 + 8 x 1.25 = 10.5 t
A- Design as Rolled section :
- Choice of section
Assume non compact section and Sx = 4 Sy for BFIB

Sx =

(18.42 + 8 *1.4) *100

= 1763cm 3
1.4 *1.2

Use HEB 320

- Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with intermittent operation n = 500000
Rolled section detail A
Fsr = 2.52 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 18.42 mt
M min = Md = 0.92 mt

fsr = (

18.42 0.92
1750
)100 =
= 0.906 < 2.52 safe
1930
SX

2/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Determination of F bcx and F bcy

c
tf

0.5(30 1.15 2 * 2.05)

= 6.04 < 10.9
2.05

d w h 2c 22.5
=
=
= 19.6 < 82
tw
tw
1.15
The section regarding local buckling is compact

Lu max

Lu act = 700 cm

20 * 30
= 387cm < 700
2.4

So L.T.B may occur and Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Cb = 1.35 (one concentrated load at mid span).

Fltb1 =

800 *30 * 2.05

*1.35 = 2.196 t / cm 2 > 1.4 t / cm 2
700 * 32

2
Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm 2 , Fbtx = 1.4 t/cm

Check bending stress:

Point 1 " subjected to Mx only, compression side
fbc1 =

Pt1

M X 18.42 100
=
= 0.95 t/cm2 < Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2
1930
SX

Point 2 " subjected to Mx & My, tension side

M

fbt2 =

"Case A"

Sx

Fbtx

MY
+

SY 2
=
Fbty

18.42 100
1.4

"Case B"

1.4 100
1930 +

616 2

Pt2

1.4

=1.001 t/cm2 < 1.0 x 1.2

Check web crippling:

No crippling as the wheel is hanged from the lower flange not rested on the upper
flange as in case of overhead crane.
Check shear:

q=

10.5
= 0.28 t/cm < 0.84 t/cm
32 *1.15
3/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Check deflection:
=

PL3
48 EI X

8 7003
700
= 0.88 >
= 0.875 cm
48 2100 30820
800

8t
3.5m

3.5m

So use HEB 340 and recheck deflection

=

8 7003
= 0.74 < 0.875 cm
48 2100 36660

Ok use HEB 340

Design as B.U.S, I shape:

- Choice of section
* Web dimension
hw =

700
Span
= 45 cm
=
12 15
15

8 mm
tw = max of

hw
(190 / Fy )

45
= 0.366
(190 / 2.4)

Q max
10.5
=
= 0.28cm = 2.8mm
0.35 FY hW 0.35 2.4 45

Take tw = 8mm = 0.8 cm.

16*1.6

Dimensions of flanges:
T=C=

Mx
18.42 *100
=
= 41.8 ton
0.98 hw
0.98 * 45

A flange plate =

41.8
= 34.81 cm 2
1.2

45*0.8

At = 34.81*2 = 69.6 cm2

18.81
32*1.6

2
A Lower fl =
*69.6 = 46.4 cm2
3
Assume bL = 20tL, so A Lower fl =46.4 = 20 tL x tL = 20 tL2
tL = 1.52 cm = 16 mm

bL = 20 x 1.6 = 32 cm
4/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
bU =

bL
32
=
= 16cm and
2
2

tU = tL = 1.6 cm

Properties of area:

y=

45
+ 1.6) + 16 *1.6 * (1.6 + 45 + 0.8)
2
= 18.81 cm
32 *1.6 + 45 * 0.8 + 16 *1.6

32 *1.6 * 0.8 + 45 * 0.8 * (

I x = 32 1.6 (18.81 0.8) 2 +

I y (lower flange) =

0.8 453
4
+ 0.8 45 (18.81 24.1)2 + 16 1.6 (47.4 18.81)2 = 61813 cm
12

1.6 323
= 4369 cm 4
12

Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with intermittent operation n = 500000
Built up section detail B
Fsr = 2.0 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 18.42 mt
M min = Md = 0.92 mt

fsr = (

18.42 0.92
1750
)100 Y =
18.81 = 0.53 < 2.0 safe
IX
61813

Determination of F bcx, F bcy & F bt

Assume size of weld = 8 mm

c
tf

0.5(32 0.8 2 * 0.8)

15.3
= 9.25 <
= 9.4
1.6
2.4

d w 45 2 * 0.8
=
= 54.25 < 82
tw
0 .8

16

1.6
0.8

7.5

Lu act = 700 cm
Lu max =

20 *16
= 206.6 cm < 700 cm
2.4

So L.T.B. may occur

5/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Fltb1 =

800 * (16 * 1.6) * 1.35

= 0.82 t/cm 2 < 1.4 t/cm 2
700 * ( 45 + 2 *1.6)

Note that we used the area of the upper flange, which is the compression flange
Iy = 1.6 * (163 / 3) = 546.1 cm4
A = 16 * 1.6 + 7.5 * 0.8 = 31.6 cm2

Lu 700
=
= 168.3
rt 4.16
84

1.35
= 63
2.4

188

1.35
= 141
2.4

546.1
L
c
= 4.16 cm u > 188 b
rt
Fy
31.6

r=

Fltb2 =

12000
2

168.3

*1.35 = 0.57 t / cm 2

Fltb = 0.572 + 0.822 = 1 t / cm 2

Tension side: Fbt = 1.4 t/cm2

Check bending stress

3

Point 1 " Subjected to Mx only, on tension flange "Case A"

fbt1=

M X y 1 18.42 100 (18.81)

2
=
= 0.56 < Fbt =1.4 t/cm
IX
61813

Compression
Side

Point 2 " Subjected to Mx & My, on tension flange "Case B" "
18.81

(M x / I x ) * y2 (M y / I y ) * x2
+
=
fbc2=
Fbcx
Fbcy
18.42 100 (18.81)

1.4

61813 +

1.4 100 16
1.4

4369 = 0.764 < 1.0 x 1.2 case B

Point 3 " Subjected to Mx only, on compression flange "Case A" "

fbc3 =

M X y 3 18.42 100 (45 + 2 1.6 18.81)

2
=
= 0.88 < Fltb = 1.0 t/cm
IX
61813

6/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Tension
Side
2

Crane Girder II
Check web crippling:
No crippling as the wheel is hanged from the lower flange not rested on the upper
flange as in case of overhead crane.

Check shear:

d w 45
105
= 56.25 <
=
= 67.8 , so q b = 0.35Fy
t w 0 .8
Fy
qact = 10.5 / (45 * 0.8) = 0.29 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2

Check deflection:
=

8* 7003
700
= 0.44cm <
= 0.875cm
48* 2100 * 61813
800

Web to flange weld

=

Q (d + L + I ) S
Ix

= 2S w 0.2Fu

S = first moment of inertia of upper flange only = 16 1.6 (45 + 1.6 + 1.6 18.81) =752
=

10.5 752
= 2S w 0.2 3.6
61813

sw = 0.08 cm = 1 mm
take sw = 6 mm min

7/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Design of different shapes of built-up crane girders:
a- Design using IPE and channel:

1. Calculate Mx, My, Q exactly as before

2. Estimation of section: Assume Mx is carried

x
X

by IPE and My carried by channel

Assume F = 1.2 t/cm2

X
Local axes

Mx
= S x of IPE (get IPE from
1.2

tables)

My
1.2

= S x of channel (We use Sx of channel because the My affects on Ix

of channel)
Check the minimum channel [ bf IPE + 2 tf channel ] (
Properties of section:

e
h
AI * I + AC * (hI + t w channel ec )
2
y=
AI + AC

h
2

h
Ix = Ix-IPE (from tables) + AIPE * ( y - IPE ) 2
2

y
y

+ Iy channel + AC * (h I +t w channel - ec - y ) 2
Iy (for channel and upper flange only) = Ix-channel + (Iy-IPE / 2)
For calculating the allowable, always consider that the section is non-compact
with no LTB

i.e. Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Check same 3 points as before in B.U.S.

8/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
b- Design using IPE and 2 angles:
1- Calculate Mx, My, Q exactly as before
2- Estimation of section:
Assume Mx is carried by IPE and My carried by angles
Assume F = 1.2 t/cm2
3-

Mx
= S x of IPE (get IPE from tables)
1.2

4- C = T "on angle" =

My
d

where d = b f-IPE, AL = C / 1.2 ( Get area from tables )

Properties of section:

h
AI * I + 2 * AL * ( hI e L )
2
y=
AI + 2 * AL

h
Ix = Ix-IPE (from tables) + AIPE * ( y - IPE ) + 2*Ix angle
2

Stiffener
y

+ 2*AL * (h I - ec - y ) 2
Iy (for 2 angles and upper flange only) = 2*Ix-L+ 2* AL * (bf / 2 + a e) 2+ (Iy-IPE / 2)
For calculating the allowable, always consider that the section is non-compact
with no LTB

i.e. Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Check same 3 points as before

9/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Example 2: Design a built- up crane girder supports a crane, given that its maximum
wheel load is 8t and the 2 loads are parted 2m. The distance between columns is 6m.
Using:

a- IPE and channel

b- IPE and 2 angles

Solution: A- Dead load "O.W. of the crane girder"

Assume WD = O.W. of the crane girder = 0.15 t/m'

MD.L. =

0.15 62
= 0.675mt
8

QD.L. =

0.15 6
=0.45t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load"

MLL =6.67*2.5=16.67 mt
QL.L. = Rshear =8 + 8*

62
=13.3 t
6

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"

My =

M L.L.
=1.67 mt
10

"Case B".

Final Straining actions on Crane Girder

Mx = Md + ML.L. ( 1 + I ) =0.675 + 16.7 (1+0.25) =21.5 mt Case A
My =

M L.L.
= 1.67 mt
10

Case B

Qmax = Qd + Q L.L. (1 + I) = 0.45 + 13.3 (1+0.25) = 17.07t

Case A

10/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
a- Design using IPE and channel:
Estimation of section: Assume Fbcx = 1.2 t/cm2
Assume IPE is subjected to Mx only
Sx-IPE =

21.5 *100
= 1792 cm3 Choose IPE 500
1.2

Assume Channel is subjected to My only

Sx-C =

1.67 *100
= 139.2 cm3
1.2

Choose Channel 180

Min channel is 20+2t, taken channel 220.

The clear distance = 22-2*1.25 = 19.5cm < 20cm (b of IPE 500)
Therefore, we have to use Channel 240

116 * 25 + 42.3 * (50 + 0.95 2.23)

y=
= 31.34cm
42.3 + 116
Ix = 48200+116*(31.34-25)2 + 248 + 42.3*(19.61-

1 y

2.23

2.23)2 = 65888 cm4

2
x

19.61

31.34

25

Iy = 3600 (channel) + 2140/2 (Upper flange only)

3 y

= 4670 cm4
OR Iy = 3600 + 1.6*203/12 = 4667 cm4
Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with continuous operation n = 2000000

Built up section detail A, take care this section at tension side "lower flange" is a
rolled section, no weld, so take it detail A
Fsr = 1.68 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 21.5 mt
M min = Md = 0.675 mt

fsr = (

21.5 0.675
2087
31.34 = 0.99 < 1.68 safe
)100 Y =
IX
65888

Check bending stress:

Assume no LTB and the section is non-compact Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2
11/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Point 1:

21.5 *100
*19.61 = 0.64 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
65888

21.5 * 100
1.67 * 100
* 19.61
* 12
65888
4670
+
= 0.76 < 1.2
Point 2:
1.4
1.4
Point 3:

21.5 *100
* 31.34 = 1.02 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
65888

The section seems to be waste because the required channel is 180, while the used
section is channel 240, which is minimum.

Shear stress
Q / Aweb = 17 / ( 50 x 1.02 ) = 0.33 < .35 Fy safe

Web to flange weld

Here the weld is between the channel and the upper flange
=

Q (d + L + I ) S
Ix

= 2S w 0.2 Fu

S = first moment of inertia of channel only = 42.3 (50 + 0.95 31.34 2.23) =735
=

17.07 735
= 2S w 0.2 3.6
65888

sw = 0.13 cm = 1.3 mm
take sw = 6 mm min

Check web crippling:

fcrp =

P
8
=
= 0.43 t/cm2 < 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
( n + 2 K ) * t w (10 + 2 4.15)1.02

n= 10 cm, K= tw of channel + tf + sw tw of channel + 2 tf = 0.95 + 2 x 1.6 = 4.15 cm

Continue deflection as before

12/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
b- Using IPE and 2 angles:
Estimation of section: Assume Fbcx = 1.2 t/cm2
Assume IPE is subjected to Mx only
Sx-IPE =

21.5 *100
= 1792 cm3 Choose IPE 500
1.2

Assume angles are subjected to MY only

h = b f = 20cm

C=T=

167
= 8.35t
20

AL =

8.35
= 6.95 cm2
1.2

Choose 2 angles 65
y =

116 * 25 + 2 *8.7 * (50 1.85)

= 28.02cm
2 *8.7 + 116

Ix = 48200+116*(28.02-25)2 + 2*33.4 + 2*8.7*(21.981.85)2 = 56375 cm4

1 y

Iy = 2[33.4+8.7*(10+6.5-1.85)2] + 2140/2 (Upper flange

only)
= 4871 cm

21.98
x

OR Iy = 2[33.4+8.7*(10+6.5-1.85)2] + 1.6*20 3/12 = 4867

cm4

28.02

Stiffener

Assume no LTB and the section is non-compact

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with continuous operation n = 2000000
Built up section detail A, take care this section at tension side "lower flange" is a
rolled section, no weld, so take it detail A
Fsr = 1.68 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 21.5 mt
M min = Md = 0.675 mt

fsr = (

21.5 0.675
2087
)100 Y =
28.02 = 1.037 < 1.68 safe
IX
56375

13/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Check bending stress
Point 1:

21.5*100
2
2
* 21.98 = 0.83 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm
56375

21.5*100
1.67 *100
* 21.98
*(10 + 6.5)
Point 2: 56375
+ 4867
= 1.00 < 1.2
1.4
1.4

Point 3:

21.5*100
2
2
* 28.02 = 1.06 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm
56375

Continue check shear, crippling, web to flange weld and deflection as before

14/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Example 3:

For the shown figure, it is required to:

Find the max Wheel load, which can be used on the
shown crane girder section BFIB 450.
Given that: Spacing between frames = 6.0 m and wheel
spacing is 2 m and regular use with continuous operation
crane.
Solution:
Max wheel load: Loads on crane girder
A- Dead load: "O.W. of the crane girder"
Wd = O.W. of the crane girder = 0.171 t/m' from tables of BFIB 450

MD.L. =

0.171 62
= 0.77mt
8

QD.L. =

0.171 6
= 0.513t
2

B- Live Load: "Crane Load"

I-Vertical load: "Wheel load":

I = 25 %

ML.L. = 2.0833P mt

QL.L. =Rshear= 1.666P t

II- Horizontal load: "Lateral Shock"

My = M lateral shock max =

M L .L .
2.0833P
=
= 0.2083P mt
10
10

"Case B"

15/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Finally the max straining actions on the Crane girder are:
Mx = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 0.77 + 2.0833P (1+0.25) = (0.77 + 2.6 P) mt
My = Mlateral shock =

M L .L .
= 0.2083 P mt
10

Qmax = Qd + Q L.L. (1 + I) = 0.513 + 1.666 P (1+0.25) = (0.513 + 2.083 P) t

Checks:
From fatigue stress:
Regular use with continuous operation n = 2000000
Rolled section detail A
Fsr = 1.68 t/cm2

table 3.2 ECP 41

For fatigue stresses:

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 0.77 2.6P

M min = Md = 0.77

fsr = (

2.6P
260 P
)100 =
= 1.68
SX
3550

So P = 22.93 ton

Determine F bc
C = bf / 2 = 30 / 2 = 15 cm, dw = h 4tf = 45 4 x 2.6 = 34.6 cm
C / tf = 15 / 2.6 = 5.77 < 10.91 compact flange
dW / tW = 34.6 / 1.4 = 24.71 < 82 compact web
Luact = "S" = 600 cm
20 30
20 b f
=
= 387.3cm
FY
2.4

Lumax = min of
1380 A F
1380 30 2.6
Cb =
1.0 =996.3cm
FY d
2.4 45

Lumax = 387.3 cm
As Luact > Lumax
Sec is non-compact, and LTB may occur.

2
2
Fbc = Fltb = FFltb
1 + FFltb 2

16/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Fltb1 =

800 A f
800 30 2.6
2
2
1.35 = 3.11 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
Cb =
600 45
Lu d

So F bc = Fltb = Fltb1 = 1.4 t/cm2 No LTB will occur.

Non- compact, Fbcx = 0.58Fy , Fbtx = 0.58Fy and Fbcy = 0.58Fy
From bending stress:
Point 1 " subjected to Mx only, Compression Side "Case A" "
fbc1 =

MX
M
= X Fbc = 1.4
3550
SX

to get max Mx we put

MX
M
= X = Fbc = 1.4 ,so Mx = 4970 cmt =
3550
SX

49.7 mt
Mx = (0.77 + 2.6 P) = 49.7,
So P = 18.8 ton
Point 2 " subjected to Mx & My

"Case B" "

fbc2 =

MX
M
M
MY
2
+ Y = X +
= Fbc x 1.2 = 1.4 x 1.2 = 1.68 t/cm
SX
SY 2 3550 781 2

fbc2 =

(0.77 + 2.6P ) 0.2083P

+
= 1.68 , we get P = 13.27 ton
3550
781 2

From shear stress:

qact =

Q max (0.513 + 2.083 P)

2
=
= qall = 0.35 x Fy = 0.84 t /cm
Aweb
45 1.4

We get P = 25.16 ton

From web crippling:
fcrp =

P
P
= 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
=
(n + 2 K ) * t w (10 + 2 5.2)1.4

n= 10 cm, K= tf + r 2 tf = 2 x 21.6 = 5.2 cm

We get P = 51.4 ton

17/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Check deflection " using conjugate beam method "
From the shown case of loading

= 7.66 P m 3t
M
act =

E IX

7.68P 106
=
2100 79890

all

Span 600
=
= 0.75cm.
800 800

We get P = 16.38 ton

So the max wheel load to be used is the less value of all the calculated P =
13.27 13 ton

Very Important notes:

If only IPE is available:
The crane girder may be in the shape of IPE and a channel
we want to prevent MY from acting on the upper flange of the crane girder we
put an Hz bracing between the upper flange and the Hz member of the bracing
system this will also make Luact = zero. This system is called cat walk (

).

Hz Bracing

18/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Example 4:
Design an economic crane girder using these available sections in market
IPE 450, BFIB 600, C 260 and C200.
Given that: The spacing between frames is 6m.
I = 30 %
Solution:
Loads on crane girder:
1- D.L.:
Assume OW = 0.2 t/m'
Qdl = Wdl x S / 2 = 0.2 x 6 / 2 = 0.6 ton
Mdl = Wdl x S2 / 8 = .2 x 62 / 8 = 0.9 mt
2- L.L.
Case of max Shear:
Rll = 10 + 10 x 2/6 = 13.3 ton

Case of max Moment: Making the usual case:

So since one wheel is not on the beam, so the critical case is one load at mid span.

Mll = 10*6/4 = 15 mt
Mx = Mdl + Mll (1 + I) =0.9 + 15 x 1.3 = 20.4mt
Qmax = Qdl + Rll (1 + I) =0.6 + 13.3 x 1.3 = 18 ton
My = (1 / 10) Mll = 15 / 10 = 1.5 mt
19/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Choice of sec:
Assume non-compact sec.
Sx = ( Mx + 8 My ) / (1.4 x 1.2 ) = 1929 cm3
From tables required sec is BFIB 400
Available sections in market:
BFIB 600

Sx = 4790 cm3

IPE

450

Sx = 1500 cm3

260

Sx = 371 cm3

If we use BFIB 600, it won't be an economic section.

Try IPE 450
Checks:
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with continuous operation n = 2000000
Rolled section detail A
Fsr = 1.68 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 20.4 mt
M min = Md = 0.9 mt

fsr =

1950
= 1.01 < 1.68 safe
1930

Determination of F bcx and F bcy

Check compact or non compact
dw / tw = ( 45 4 x 1.46 ) / 0.94 = 41 < 82
C / tf = 9.5 / 1.46 = 6.55 < 10.9
Sec is compact regarding local buckling
Luact = 600 cm

Lumax = 20 bf /

Fy = 20 x 19 / 2.4 = 245 < 600

Section is non-compact regarding LTB

Cb = 1.35
Fltb1 =

800A f
800 19 1.46
2
Cb =
1.35 = 1.09 < 1.4 t/cm
Lu d
600 45

20/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
At = 19 x 1.46 + 7 x .94 = 34.3 cm2
IYt = 1.46 x 193 / 12 + 7 x .943 / 12 = 835 cm4
rt =
84

I yt
At

= 4.93

Lu / rt = 600 / 4.93 = 121.6

Cb
C
= 63 > (Lu / rt ) > 188 b = 141
Fy
Fy

Fltb2 = (0.64

(Lu / rT ) 2 Fy
1.176 10 C b
5

)Fy = 0.999 = 1.0 t / cm

Fltb = (1.09)2 + (1.0)2 =1.48 > 1.4 t / cm2

So Fbcx = Fltb = 1.4 t / cm2
Fbtx = Fbcy =1.4 t / cm2

Bending stresses:
Point 1:
Fb = Mx / Sx = 2040 / 1500 = 1.36 < 1.4 t / cm2 safe
Point 2:
Mx My
20.4 *100 1.5*100
Sy
Sx
Fb =
+
= 1500 + 176 / 2 = 2.4 >>> 1.2
1.15 1.4
1.15
1.4

unsafe

As point 1 is safe and point 2 is very unsafe so the prob. is the My.
That's why we dont use IPE.

21/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Sol 1:
Use lateral bracing between the upper flange of the crane girder and the Hz
member of the vertical bracing, so the lateral shock will be carried without causing
My on crane girder.
Mx = Mdl + Mll (1 + I) = 0.9 + 15 x 1.3 = 20.4 mt

Hz Bracing

Q = Q dl + Rll (1 + I) = 0.6 + 15 x 1.3 = 18.0 ton

My = 0
As section is compact and Luact = zero
So Fbc = 1.536 t/cm2
Bending stresses:
Point 1: Fb = Mx / Sx = 2040 / 1500 = 1.36 < 1.536 t / cm2 safe
Shear stress:
q = Q / Aweb = 18 / (45 x 0.94) = 0.42 < .35 Fy

safe

Check web crippling:

fcrp =

P
10
=
= 0.671 t/cm2 < 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
( n + 2 K ) * t w (10 + 2 2.92)0.94

n= 10 cm, K= tf + sw 2 tf = 2 x 1.46 = 2.92 cm

Deflection:

Mc = 43.35 m3t
= 43.35 x 106 / (2100 x 33740) = 0.62 < 600 / 800 = 0.75 Safe and economic

22/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Sol 2:

e
c

Use a built up section of IPE 450 + C 260,

but we must make sure that the flange of the IPE

y
c

450 can enter inside the Channel as in figure

45
Y

y
I

Bfl of IPE 450 = 21 cm < (hw of the C 260 2 tf) = 26 2 x 1.4 = 23.2

ok

Prop of Sec :
IxC = 4820 cm4
AI = 98.8 cm2
Y=

AY/

IYC = 317 cm4, IxI = 33740 cm4 IYI = 1680 cm4

AC = 48.3 cm2

A = (48.3 x 43.64 + 98.8 x 22.5) / (98.8 + 48.3) = 29.44 cm

Yupper = 16.56 cm

X upper = hc / 2 = 13 cm

Ix = Iyc + AC (Y Yc)2 + IxI + AI ( Y Y I )2

= 317 + 48.3 (29.44 - 43.64)2 + 33740 + 98.8 (29.44 22.5)2 = 48554.775 cm4
Iy upper flange = Ixc + t b3 / 12 = 4820 + 1.46 x 193 / 12 = 5654.5 cm4
Non-compact and No L.T.B.
Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm2, Fbtx = 1.4 t / cm2 and Fbcy = 1.4 t / cm2
Check fatigue stress:
Assume regular use with continuous operation n = 2000000
Built up section detail A, take care this section at tension side "lower flange" is a
rolled section, no weld, so take it detail A
Fsr = 1.68 t/cm2
For fatigue stresses:

table 3.2 ECP 41

M max = Md + ML.L. (1 + I) = 20.4 mt
M min = Md = 0.9 mt

fsr = (

M ll + I
1950
)100 Y =
29.44 = 1.18 < 1.68 safe
IX
48554.77

Bending stresses:
Point 1:"middle of upper flange"
Fbc1 =

Mx
2040
2
16.56 = 0.695 < 1.4 t / cm
y =
48554.77
Ix

safe

23/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Point 2: "end of upper flange"
My
Mx
2040
150
x
y
16.56
13
Iy
Ix
= 48554.77
Fbc2 =
+ 5654.5 = 0.74 < 1.2 safe
+
Fbcy
Fbcx
1.4
1.4

Point 3: "middle of lower flange"

Fbt3 =

Mx
2040
2
29.44 = 1.23 < 1.4 t / cm safe
y=
48554.77
Ix

Shear stress
Q / Aweb = 18 / (45 x 0.94) = 0.425 < .35 Fy safe

Web to flange weld

Here the weld is between the channel and the upper flange
=

Q (d + L + I ) S
Ix

= 2S w 0.2Fu

S = first moment of inertia of channel only = 48.3 (45 + 1.0 29.44 2.36) =685.86
=

18 685.86
= 2S w 0.2 3.6
48554.7

sw = 0.17 cm = 1.7 mm
Take sw = 6 mm min

Check web crippling:

fcrp =

P
10
=
= 0.596 t/cm2 < 0.75Fy = 1.8 t/cm2
(10
+
2

3.92)0.94
(n + 2 K ) * t w

n= 10 cm, K= tw of channel + tf + sw tw of channel + 2 tf = 1.0 + 2 x 1.46 = 3.92 cm

Deflection
Mc = 43.35 m3t
= 43.35 x 106 / (2100 x 48554.7) = 0.42 < 600 / 800 = 0.75
Safe and economic
24/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Example 5:
A factory is to be constructed over an area of 40x20m. Trusses of span 20m are to be
constructed. The spacing between trusses is 6.0 m.
The truss column carries a crane girder of an overhead crane, max wheel load equals
to 10 t and spaced by 2.0 m.
The crane girder is simply supported over the brackets, while the last crane girder has
a cantilever outside the factory with distance 3.25m as shown in figure.
It is required to:
1- Design the crane girder as rolled section.
2- Design the crane girder as unsymmetrical built-up section.

Main truss

Column

Crane
Girder

6.0*10

Axis B

6.0 m

Axis A

3.25
3.25 m
General plan for the whole factory

Isometric
Crane girder is simply supported over
bracekts and cantilever from the last
to outside factory with 3.25m

25/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Solution:
Calculation of loads on crane girder:
(a) Dead load:

0 .7 9 m t

o.w. = 0.15 t/m

0 .2 8 m t
6 .0 0 m

3 .2 5 m

3.252
M-ve = 0.15 *
= 0.79 mt
2

0 .5 8 t
0 .4 9 t

0.79 0.15 * 6 2
M+ve =
+
= 0.28mt
8
2

0 .3 2 t

Qmax = 0.58t

(b) Live load:

-Case of max. Moment: (for +ve sec)
R=

10

10 *1.5 + 10 * 3.5
= 8.33t
6

Mmax+ve= 8.33*2.5 = 20.83 mt

3.25m

8.33

2.5

10

0.5 1.5

1.5

-Case of max. Moment: (for -ve sec)

N.B. there is a stopper of about 50cm at the end of the cantilever. Therefore, to
calculate the max ve, we put the load at

10

10

distance 0.5m from the end.

0.75

Mmax-ve = 10*2.75+10*0.75=35mt

25.8
2.0

10 * 6.75 + 10 * 8.75
= 25.8t
6

0.5

R=

6.0

26/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
- Case of max shear:
10

10

10

16.7
3.25m

6.0

0.75

2.0

0.5

25.8

10

2.0

Case (1)

4.0
Case (2)

5.8
10
20

max

= 20 t (left of support)

max

= 16.7 t (right of support)

N.B.: If we want to design the bracket, we have to calculate the maximum

reaction. Rmax on the Bracket = 25.8 t
There are 2 sections to be checked, +ve and -ve
For +ve Section:

Luact = 6m

For ve Section: The section is cantilever, so Luact is calculated from table in ECP 66.
1- Load is on upper flange "Destabilizing"
2- At support "column". Continuous with lateral and torsional restraint
3- Free at tip

Luact = 3.25 2.5 = 8.125 m

My is on the upper flange.

So if it is built up section, the upper flange is bigger.

How to choose the section to make choice from

1) Luact of ve section > Luact of +ve section
2) Mve section f M-ve section
The ve section is the critical section and we can make the choice from this section

and check booth sections.

Note: the compression flange is the lower flange in the cantilever part, and the upper
flange for the other part of the beam.

27/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Straining actions:
Negative section
M-vemax = 35 1.25 + 0.79 = 44.54 mt
My = 0.1 35 = 3.5mt

on upper flange

Qmax = 0.49 + 20 1.25 = 25.5t

Positive section
M+vemax = 20.83 1.25 + 0.28 = 26.31 mt
My = 0.1 20.83 = 2.08mt

on upper flange

Qmax = 0.58 + 16.7 1.25 = 21.45t

Design as rolled section:

Estimation of section: " from cantilever part"

Sx =

( 44.54 + 8 * 3.5) *100

= 4318 cm3
1.4 *1.2

choose HEB 550

Checks: 1" negative section"

Check Fatigue
Assume regular use with continuous operation, take n = 2000000
Rolled (No weld in tension flange), detail A
F sr = 1.68 t / cm2

M L + I 35 *1.25 *100
=
= 0.88 t / cm2 < 1.68 t / cm2
Sx
4970
Determination of Fbcx, Fbcy, Fbtx and Fbty

c
tf

(30 1.5) / 2
16.9
= 4.9 <
= 10.9
2.9
2.4

d w 55 2 * 2.9
190
= 122.7
=
= 32.8 <
tw
1.5
2.4
L u act = 8.125 m = 812.5 cm

L u max =

20 * 30
= 387 cm < 812.5 cm
2.4

So there is L.T.B.
28/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Fltb1 =

800 * 30 * 2.9
*1.5 = 2.33 t / cm2 > 1.4 t / cm2
812.5 * 55

C b = 1.5 (cantilever with concentrated load)

Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = Fbty = 1.4 t / cm2

My

Point "1" in compression side:

Mx

Sx

Fbcx

44.54 *100
1.4

2
4970 = 0.64 < 1.0

Mx

Point "2" in tension side:

M x / S x M y / S y ( 44.54 *100) /( 4970) (3.5 *100) /( 0.5 * 873)

+
=
+
Fbtx
Fbty
1.4
1.4
1.21 1.2
Check Shear:

O.K.

Safe

25.5
= 0.31 t / cm2 < 0.35 * 2.8 = 0.98 t / cm2
55 *1.5

Deflection: and Check crippling as before.

2 "Positive section"
Determination of Fbcx, Fbcy, Fbtx and Fbty
L u act = 600 cm < L u max = 387 cm

Fltb1 =

800 * 30 * 2.9
*1.35 = 2.85 t / cm2 > 1.4 t / cm2
600 * 55

Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = Fbty = 1.4 t / cm

Point "1" in compression side:

Mx

Sx

Fbcx

26.32 *100
1.4

My

2
Mx

4970 = 0.37 < 1.0

Point "2" in compression side:

M x / S x M y / S y (26.32 *100) /(4970) (2.08*100) /(0.5*873)
= 0.72 < 1.2 Safe
+
=
+
Fbcx
Fbcy
1.4
1.4

Continue other checks

29/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Design as built-up section:
Negative section
M-vemax = 35 1.25 + 0.79 = 44.54 mt
My = 0.1 35 = 3.5mt

on upper flange

Qmax = 0.49 + 20 1.25 = 25.5t

Positive section
M+vemax = 20.83 1.25 + 0.28 = 26.31 mt
My = 0.1 20.83 = 2.08mt

on upper flange

Qmax = 0.58 + 16.7 1.25 = 21.45t

Estimation of section:
hw =

600
= 40cm (for simple span)
10 15

or

325
= 40-55cm (for cantilever span)
6 8

Take hw = 45cm
8 mm

25.5
= 0.67cm
45 * 0.35 2.4

60 * 2.4
= 0.49 cm
190
T = C=

44.54 100
= 101t
0.98 45

Assume f = 1.2 t/cm2

4
2
84 = 112 cm
3

tu = 2.2cm

101
= 84 cm 2
1.2
44*2.2

20t = 112

Assume b = 20t

bu = 44cm

Take tl = 2.2 cm

Y =

Af1 =

18.4

Af1 upper =

Take tw = 8 mm

& bl = 22cm.

31

tw =

45*0.8
22*2.2

45
) + 44 2.2 (2.2 + 45 + 1.1)
2
= 31cm.
22 2.2 + 45 0.8 + 44 2.2

22 2.2 1.1 + 45 0.8 (2.2 +

30/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Ix = 222.2 * (31 -

2.2 2
453
45
) + 0.8
+ 0.845*(31-2.2- )2 + 44*2.2* (18.4 1.1)2
2
12
2

= 79754 cm4
Iy =

22 443
= 15617 cm4 (of upper flange only because the upper flange is the
12

flange which will carry My)

Luact = 8.125 m
Check fatigue:
n=2000000 Detail B (welded tension flange) Fsr =1.26 t / cm2
fsr =

35 *1.25 *100
* 22.4 = 0.82 t/cm2 <1.26 t/cm2
119732

Determination of Fbcx, Fbtx, Fbcy and Fbty

Luact = 8.125 m
Lu max =

20

22
2.4

= 284 cm (We used "b" lower compression flange)

Check compactness [Assume size of weld = 1cm]

C
( 44 2 0.8) / 2
= 9.36 <10.91
=
2.2
tf
hw 45 2
=
=53.75 < 82
tw
0.8
There is L.T.B.
Fltb1 =

800 ( 22 2.2) 1.5

= 1.59 t/cm2 >1.4 t/cm2
812.5 * 45

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm

My

& Fbt = 1.4 t/cm2

Point (1) in compression side:

f1 =

44.54 100
2
2
31 = 1.73 t/cm > Fbcx=1.4 t/cm `
79745

So we have to increase the dimensions of section

Mx
1

Take hw = 55cm (we can also increase dimensions of

flanges)
31/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II

55
) + 44 2.2 (2.2 + 55 + 1.1)
2
=37cm.
22 2.2 + 55 0.8 + 44 2.2

22 2.2 1.1 + 55 0.8 (2.2 +

44*2.2

55*0.8

37

Y =

22.4

hw 55 2
=
= 66.25 < 82
tw
0.8

22*2.2

2.2 2
553
55
Ix = 222.2 * (37 ) + 0.8
+ 0.855*(37-2.2- )2 + 44*2.2*
2
12
2
(22.4 1.1)2 = 119732 cm4
Iy =

55 *0.8
6

2.2 443
= 15617 cm4
12

22*2.2

800 ( 22 2.2) 1.5

Fltb1 =
= 1.3 t/cm2 <1.4 t/cm2
812.5 * 55
AT = 22*2.2+55/6*0.8 = 55.73cm 2

2.2 223
Iy of T =
= 1952 cm4
12
Lu 812.5
=
= 137
rt
5.92

84

rt =

1952
= 5.92cm
55.73

1 .5
= 66.4
2.4

Cb Lu
Cb
<
84
< 188
rt
Fy
Fy

Fltb2 = (0.64-

188

1.5
= 148.6
2.4

(137) 2 * 2.4
1.176 *10 5 *1.5

) * 2.4 =0.92 t/cm2

Fltb = 1.32 + 0.92 2 = 1.59 t/cm2 >1.4 t/cm2, Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = Fbty = 1.4 t/cm2
Point (1) in compression side:

44.54 100
2
2
37 = 1.38 t/cm < Fbcx=1.4 t/cm `
119732
Point (2) in tension side:

44.54 100
2
22.4 = 0.83 t/cm < Fbt
119732
Point (3) in tension side:

3.5 *100 44
44.54 *100
*
* 22.4
15617
2 = 0.95 < 1.2
119732
+
1 .4
1.4
32/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
Check shear:

hw 55
105
=
= 68.75 >
= 67.8
t w 0.8
2.4
h
105
159
= 67.8 < w <
= 103
tw
2.4
2.4
qb=[1.5-

68.75 * 2.4
] * 0.35 * 2.4 = 0.84 t/cm2
212

25.5
= 0.58 t / cm2 < 0.84 t / cm2 safe
55 * 0.8
Design of weld between web & flange
S = 44 * 2.2 * (22.4 1.1) = 2062 cm3

QS 25.5 * 2062
=
= 0.44 t/cm/
I
119732
Force
0.44
=
= 0.2 * 3.6 S = 0.3 cm = 3 mm
Area 1 * S * 2
Take S min = 6 mm
Continue other checks

33/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder II
+ ve section
Determination of Fbcx, Fbtx, Fbcy and Fbty
L u act = 600 cm
The compression flange is the upper flange, with b u = 44 cm & t u = 2.2 cm &
C b = 1.35

Lu max =

20 * 44
= 568 cm < 600 cm
2.4

My

There is L.T.B.

Mx

Point (1) in compression side:

Mx
y 26.31*100 22.4
Ix
= 119732
= 0.35 < 1.0
Fbcx
1.4

37

Fbcx = Fbtx = Fbcy = Fbty = 1.4 t/cm

1
22.4

800 * 44 * 2.2
*1.35 = 3.17 t/cm2 > 1.4 t/cm2
Fltb1 =
600 * 55

Point (2) in compression side:

26.31*100
2.08*100 44
22.4
*
119732
15617
2 = 0.56 < 1.2
+
1.4
1.4
Point (3) in tension side:

Mx
y 26.31*100 *37
Ix
= 119732
= 0.58 < 1.0
Fbtx
1.4
Check shear, deflection & crippling as before

34/34-C.G.II
2007-2008

Crane Girder I

cra

pla

bra

2
(B. c h a n
U. n e
col l s
um
n

cke

ir
eg

der

te

1/1-C.G.I
2006

Roof Purlins 1
Purlins are those roof beams used to support the roof covering materials.
Usually, purlins are designed as simply supported beam with span equal to the
spacing between trusses or the main frames.

Loads:

Purlin

a/cos

1-Dead load:
Own weight of corrugated sheets:
Single layer Wc = (5~8) kg/m2
a

Double layer Wc = (10~15) kg/m2

Own weight of purlin = (15~20) kg/m\. For hot-rolled channels

Own weight of purlin = (5~8) kg/m\. For cold-formed channels
Note that: if he did not mention the type of channel, we take it hot-rolled
WD.L = WC a + O.W
cos

Wx D.L = WD.L*cos

Corrugated
sheets

Wy D.L = WD.L * sin

S2
Mx D.L. = Wx D.L *
8
S2
My D.L. = Wy D.L *
8

X
X

W yD . L .
WD.L.

WxD . L.
.

Qx D.L. = Wx D.L * S/2

Important note: Neglect shear in y-direction Qy because it is very small.
(Moments are in kg.m, and we want to change it to cm t, so we multiply it
*(100/1000). Shear is in kg so divide by 1000 to change to tons
Where ( ) is the roof inclination angle with the horizontal direction, and (S) is
the spacing between trusses.

1/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
2-Live load:
The moment due to live load is taken the bigger of uniform load or 100 kg
concentrated load.
a-Due to uniform load:
WL.L
S

Case of inaccessible roof L.L. = 60-66.67tan (on horizontal projection)

Case of accessible roof

L.L. = 200-300tan

(on horizontal projection)

L.L. (kg/m2)

WL.L = L.L. * a
Wx L.L = WL.L*cos
Wy L.L = WL.L * sin
Mx L.L. = Wx L.L *

200

S2
8

Accessible
roof

My L.L. = Wy L.L *

Inaccessible
roof

60

S
8

20 kg/m2
Tan

Qx L.L. = Wx L.L * S/2

0.6

b-Due to one concentrated load P = 100kg.

P = 100 kg Px = 100cos

Py =

100sin
Mx L.L = Px L.L. S/4
My L.L = Py L.L. S/4
Qx L.L. = Px/2

Take bigger of both the 2 previous cases of loading

3-Due to wind load

Wind load affects perpendicular to the surface WW .L = W x

W .L

2/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Wx L.L = ( C k q)

a
cos

a/cos

Where:

q = wind intensity which depends on

the location of the structure.

q = 70 and 80 kg\m2 in ( Cairo

and Alex. respectively)
k = factor depends on the height of the structure.
Height

0 10 m

1.0

10 20 m

1.1

20 30 m
30 ....

1.3
....

Ce

+ 0.8

Ce = factor depends on the shape of the

0.4

structure and the angle ( )

Tan

0.8
-0.8

The value of (Ce) is determined from the

shown graph:

Important note:
When Ce is ve value (suction), neglect wind load in the design of purlin
as it reduces the positive moment due to dead load and live load. This
case occurs for all trusses when the slope of roof "tan " is less than 0.4
When Ce is +ve value (pressure), take effect of wind load in the design of
purlin as it increases the positive moment due to dead load and live load.
This case occurs for all trusses when the slope of roof "tan " is more than
0.4. We have to take the effect of wind on the design of roof purlin as
following:
3/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
If Wx W.L. is +ve
Mx W.L. = Wx W.L

S2
8

My W.L. = zero
Q x W.L. = WW.L. (S/2)

4-Combinations of loads:
a- If the wind is suction: tan 0.4, Ce negative
Case (I) D.L+L.L
Mx = M x D.L + M x L.L

My = M y D.L + M y L.L

Qx = Q x D.L + Q x L.L
Where ML.L. is the bigger of the 2 cases of either distributed or concentrated
load. This case of design is case A

b- If the wind is pressure: tan >0.4, Ce positive

Case (I) D.L+L.L

"This case of design is case A"

Mx = M x D.L + M x L.L

My = M y D.L + M y L.L

Qx = Q x D.L + Q x L.L
Case (II) D.L+L.L+W.L

"This case of design is case B"

Mx = Mx D.L + Mx L.L + Mx W.L

My = My D.L + My L.L

Qx = Qx D.L + Qx L.L + Qx W.L

Roof purlins can be Hot rolled steel section Channel section UPN or
Cold formed steel section C, Z,

4/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Design as Hot rolled
Choice of section:
Channel sections are commonly used for purlins.
According to the Egyptian code, channel sections are treated as non-compact.
Since purlins are simple beams, and the corrugated sheets restrains the upper
flange which is the compression flange. The allowable compressive bending
stress is as follows: (Do not forget to check the class of the section
"compactness" to be sure that the used section is not slender.
Fbcx = Fbcy = 0.58Fy.
If the design is governed by case (I)
fb =

Mx My
+
= .... Fbcx = 0.58Fy
Sx
Sy

N.B. for C sections assume Sx 7Sy

S xreq =

M x + 7M y

=cm3

Fbc

If the design is governed by case (II)

S xreq =

M x + 7M y

=cm3

Fbc 1.2

Check stresses:
Normal stresses
Case( I )

fb =

M xA

Case( II )

fb =

M xB

M yA

M yB

Sx
Sx

Sy
Sy

= ... Fbc = 0.58F y

= ... 0.58F y 1.2

Shear stresses
Case( I )

Case( II )

q act =

Q zA

q act =

t wd
Q zB
t wd

0.35Fy

Where d = total depth of channel

0.35Fy 1.2

5/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1

Check deflection:
Due to live load only
L . L. =

5W x L.L S 4
384EI x

= ...

span
300

Using of tie rods in purlins:

Tie rods are used to reduce My in:
1) High slopes (e.g. fink truss)
2) Cold formed sections (Sy is quite small)
We can either use:
1) One tie rod at the mid-span of each purlin
2) Two tie rods at one third of the span.
Very important note:
Adding tie rod will affect only Y-direction, but has no effect on X-direction
Case of using one tie rod at mid span
Truss
T5

S/2
T1

T2

T3

T4

S/2
Truss
S/3

T5
T1

T2

T3

T4

S/3
S/3
Truss

Case of using two tie rods at the third point

of spacing

6/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
1-Dead load:
WD.L = WC a + O.W
cos

Wx D.L = WD.L*cos

Wy D.L = WD.L * sin

S2
Mx D.L. = Wx D.L *
8
Case of using one tie rod at mid span:

(S / 2) 2 1
My D.L. = Wy D.L *
= My D.L (case of no tie rods)
8
4
Case of using 2 tie rods at middle thirds:
My D.L. = Wy D.L *

(S / 3) 2 1
= My D.L (case of no tie rods)
8
9

Qx D.L. = Wx D.L * S/2

2-Live load:
a- case of uniform load:
WL.L = L.L. a
Wx L.L = WL.L*cos

Wy L.L = WL.L * sin

S2
Mx D.L. = Wx D.L *
8
Case of using one tie rod at mid span:

(S / 2) 2 1
My L.L. = Wy L.L *
= My L.L (case of no tie rods)
8
4
Case of using 2 tie rods at middle thirds:

(S / 3) 2 1
= My L.L (case of no tie rods)
My L.L. = Wy L.L *
8
9
Qx L.L. = Wx L.L * S/2

7/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
b-Due to one concentrated load P = 100kg.
P = 100 kg Px = 100cos

Py = 100sin

Mx L.L = Px L.L. S/4

Case of using one tie rod at mid span:
My L.L. = Px L.L *

S/ 2 1
=
My L.L (case of no tie rods)
2
4

Case of using 2 tie rods at middle thirds:

My L.L. = Px L.L *

S/3 1
= My L.L (case of no tie rods)
3
4

Qx L.L. = Px/2

Take bigger of both the 2 previous cases of loading

3-Wind load:
The same as before, as in case of purlins without tie rods because the
moments are in direction of X-only and tie rods affect only in Y-direction.

Design of tie rods

The force in the tie rod is calculated from the reaction in y-direction of the
purlin.

Wy = Wy D.L+Wy
Tie rod

8/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
In case of one tie rod in the middle:
T1 =

1
Wy S
2
2

T2 = T1 + Wy S

T3 = T2 + Wy S

T4 = T3 + Wy S

T5 = T4 + Wy S

Q 2T5 sin = T5

'

'

T5 =

T5
2 sin

In case of two tie rods:

T1 =

1
Wy S ,
2
3

T2 = T1 + Wy S

T3 = T2 + Wy S ,

T4 = T3 + Wy S

T5 = T4 + Wy S

'

T5 =

T5
sin

T5 in its general form = (0.5wy *S/2) + n (wy *S/2) for using one tie rod
= (0.5wy *S/3) + n (wy *S/3) for using two tie rods
Force = area stress
T5 = 0.7 A Ft = 0.7

2 Ft
4

Get =
Use minimum rienforcement bar 12 mm

9/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Example 1:
For a system of trusses with spacing = 6.00 m and panel length =2.00m
Design an intermediate purlin using hot rolled section, Slope 1:10
Assume any missing data.

Solution:
As hot rolled section
Q l (span of purlin ) = 6.00 m

& a (panel length) = 2.00 m

&

= tan-1

1
= 5.710
10

1) Dead Load:
Assume wc =6 kg / m2
wD.L. = 6 *

& o.w. (purlin) = 20 kg / m/

2
+ 20 = 32.06 kg / m/
COS 5.71

wx D.L. = 32.06 * cos5.71 = 31.9 kg / m/

wy D.L. =32.06 * sin 5.71 = 3.19 kg / m/
MX D.L. =

(31.9)(6) 2
= 143.55 kg .m.
8

My D.L. =

(3.19)(6)2
= 14.355 kg. m
8

QXD.L. =

(31.9)(6)
= 95.7 kg
2

2) Live load:
a) Uniform load
L .L . = 60 66.67 * (0.1) = 53.33 kg / m2
Wl.l. = 53.33 * 2 = 106.66 kg / m/
wx l.l. = 106.66 * cos5.71 = 106.13 kg / m/
wy l.l. = 106.66 * sin5.71 =10.61 kg / m/

10/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Mx L.L.=

(106.13)(6)2
= 477.59 kg . m
8

My l.l. =

(10.61)(6)2
= 47.76 kg .m.
8

Qx L.L. =

(106.13)(6)
= 318.39 kg
2

b) 100 kg conc. Load

Px = 100 * cos5.71 = 99.5
Mx l.l. =

Py = 100 * sin 5.71 = 9.95

99.5 * 6
= 149.3 kg. m
4

My l.l. =

9.95 * 6
= 14.93 kg. m
4

Uniform L.L. is more critical

3) Wind Load:.
Q tan

= 0.1 < 0.4

wind is suction

neglect wind load

4-Combination of loads
Mx = 143.55 + 477.59 = 621.14m. kg = 62.11 cm. t.
My = 14.355 + 47.75 = 62.1m. kg = 6.21 cm. t.
Qx = 95.7 + 318.39 = 414.1kg = 0.41 t
Choice of section
Assume
Sx =

Sx = 7 Sy

Fbc = 0.58Fy =1.4 t / cm2

&

62.11 + 6.21* 7
= 75.41 cm3
1.4

choose channel 140

Check compactness: Channel section, non-compact section

C= 6-0.7-1 = 4.3cm

dw= 14-2*1-2-1 = 10

cm

c 4.3
23
23
=
= 4.3 <
=
= 14.84
t f 1.0
Fy
2.4

d w 10
190
190
=
= 122.6
=
= 14.3 <
t w 0.7
Fy
2.4

Note that we used the limits of non-compact because we know that according to the
Egyptian code, the channels are non-compact.

11/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Simple beam, Compression flange is the upper flange and supported with corrugated
sheets, so Luact = zero (no need to calculate Lu max).
Check stresses:
1- fact =

62.11 6.21
+
= 1.14 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
86.4 14.8

2- q act =

0.41
= 0.04t / cm 2 <<<< 0.35Fy = 0.84 t/cm2
14 * 0.7

Shear is not critical in purlins at all

5 ( WxLL ) * S 4
5 (106.13) * 6 4
600
=
*103 = 1.4 <
3- L.L. =
=2cm
384
EI
384 2100 * 605
300

Example 2:
For a system of trusses with spacing =
6.00 m
Design an intermediate purlin using hot

3.5m

rolled section and any other additional

member given that the maximum
available section is channel 100
(

1.75

9m

7m

) only available

Sheets are of weight 10kg/m2

Solution:

= tan 1
1) DL:

3.5
= 26.60
7

tan

= 0.5

a
1.75
=
= 1.96m, o.w = 20 kg / m/
cos cos 26.6

WDL = 10 * 1.96 + 20 = 39.6 kg / m/

Wx DL = 39.6 cos = 35.4 kg / m/ , Wy DL = 39.6 sin
MxDL = 35.4 *

= 17.7 kg / m/

62
= 159.3 kg m
8

12/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
62
= 79.6 kg m
8

MyDL= 17.7 *

Shear is not critical

LL WLL = 60 66.66 tan 26.6 = 26.67 > 20 kg / m2
wLL = 26.67 * 1.75 = 46.67 kg /m/
wx LL = 46.67 cos = 41.73 kg / m /
Mx LL = 41.73 *

62
= 187.78 kg m
8

Conc. Load check 100 kg (

wy LL = 46.67 sin = 20.9 kg / m /

My LL = 20.9 *

62
= 94.05 kg m
8

3) Wind load:
Q tan

= 0.5 > 0.4

There is pressure & suction

0.5 0.4 C e
=
0.8 0.4 0.8
Ce = 0.2

& and neglect the suction value of Ce

ww= 0.2*1.1(clear height is 9 m)*70*1.96=30.18 kg /m

Mx wl = 30.18 *

62
= 135.8 kg m
8

Design loads:
Case I : MxDL + Mx LL = 159.3 + 187.8 = 347.1 kg m =34.7cmt
Case ` : MxD + MXl +Mxw = 347.1 + 135.8 = 482.9 kg m =48.3cmt
In both cases:

My = 79.6 + 94.05 = 173.65 kg m =17.4cmt

caseB 482.9
=
= 1.39 > 1.2
caseA 347.1
Use case B

i.e. D + L +W

Estimation of section: Sx =

48.3 + 17.4 * 7
= 101.2 cm3
1.4 *1.2

Choose channel 160 > channel 100 which is available

13/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Add one tie Rod at mid Span

Mx = 48.3 cm t

Sx =

& My =

17.4
= 4.35 cm t
4

48.3 + 4.35 * 7
= 46.9 cm3
1.4 *1.2

Choose channel120 > channel 100

Add 2 tie Rods at middle thirds

Mx = 48.3 cm t
Sx =

& My =

17.4
= 1.93 cm t
9

48.3 + 1.93 * 7
= 36.8 cm3
1.4 *1.2
Use channel100

Check compactness: Channel section, non-compact section

C= 5-0.6-0.85=3.55cm

dw= 10-2*0.85-2*0.85=6.6cm

c 3.55
23
23
=
= 4.17 <
=
= 14.84
t f 0.85
Fy
2.4

d w 6.6
190
190
=
= 11<
=
= 122.6
t w 0.6
Fy
2.4

Note that we used the limits of non-compact because we know that according to the
Egyptian code, the channels are non-compact.
Simple beam, Compression flange is the upper flange and supported with corrugated
sheets, so Luact = zero (no need to calculate Lu max).
Checks: 1)

f=

48.3 1.93
+
= 1.4 t / cm2 < 1.4*1.2=1.68 t / cm2
41.2 8.49

f=

34.71 1.93
+
= 1.07 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
41.2 8.49

(2) (Not critical for shear)

(3) Check deflection

5 41.73 * 6 4
600
=
*
* 103 = 1.62 cm <
= 2 cm
300
384 2100 * 206

O.K.

Design of tie Rod:

14/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Roof Purlins 1
Wy = wy LL + wy DL = 17.7+20.9 = 38.6 kg / m/
T4/ =

1
6
6
* 38.6 * + 3 * (38.6 * ) = 270.4 kg = 0.27 t
2
3
3

T4 cos = T4/
-1

= tan

Truss

2
= 490
1.75

T4 cos 49 = 0.27

T1 T2 T3 T4

T4 = 0.39 t

0.41 = 0.7 A * 1.4

2

A = 0.42 cm
2
= 0.4
4

6m
Truss
7m

= 0.7 cm = 7 mm

min = 12 mm (minimum)

15/15 R.P. 1
2007-2008

Cold Formed Section

Cold formed sections are sections with very small thickness "from 1.5 to 6 mm"

Types of sections:

0.58Fy
Cold formed sections are most probably slender sections so Fbc = the min of
Fltb
The problem here is that due to the very small thickness, cold formed sections
are subjected to local buckling, so we have to calculate the effective part of the
section "the part of the section which will not buckle".

Only straight parts subjected to compression stress are subjected to buckling,

straight parts subjected to tensile stress and corners will not buckle.

Sections subjected to M x

Sections subjected to Normal force only

1/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Calculation of effective parts
For flange

For web

For lip

be =

he =

de =

1- =

P 0.15 0.05
P2

2- =

f1
stress in tension side
=
f 2 stress in compression side

3- P =

b t
44

Fy
K

Where b = b for flange, = h for web and = d for lip.

So to calculate be, he and de we will calculate

3 times, to get

we need

and to

get it we need K .

So the first step to do is to calculate K "buckling coefficient" which depends on:1- The case of the studied part "stiffened, unstiffened or partially stiffened.

N.B.
All webs are stiffened by the two flanges.
All lips are unstiffened.
2-

2/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

So briefly we can calculate K as follow:-

Stiff or unstiff

Straining

action
Stiff.

Comp

Unstiff.

Comp

0.43

Stiff.

-1

Moment

23.9

Partially stiff.

Comp

????

3/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

So it is clear that for only the partially stiffened parts K is not of a constant value.
In case of partially stiffened we have 3 cases:
1- Calculate S = 1.28

E
Fy

where Fy = 2.4 t/cm2 and E = 2100 t/cm2

t d 3
IS = stiffener moment of inertia =
12
No edge stiff required
b
t

S
3

=1
be = b
D
0.25
b

S < b <S
t
3

K = [4.82 5(
0.25<

I a = 399[

IS
+ 0.43 4.0
Ia

K = 3.57

D
0.8
b

b t
0.33]3 t 4
S

D
0.25
b

5.25 5(

K = 3.57

D
)
b

IS
+ 0.43 4.0
Ia

b
>S
t

D
0.25<
0.8
b
115(b t )
Ia = [
+ 5] t 4
S

I
D
)] S + 0.43
b
Ia

K = [4.82 5(
5.25 5(

I
D
)] S + 0.43
b
Ia

D
)
b

4/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

After calculating

If

for the compression flange, the web and the lip

for all parts is > 1 so the whole section is fully effective and we get Ix, Iy,

A, Sx and Sy from tables for fully effective section.

But if

of any part is < 1 so the section is not fully effective and we must

calculate the mechanical properties of the new section following this way:

We have to calculate the new position of the N-A but we can neglect this step
and suppose that the N-A is the same.

IX eff = IX table IX of the reduced part

IY eff = IY table IY of the reduced part
A eff = A table A of the reduced part

Notes:

If the section is subjected to tension, no reduction will occur and the

allowable stress will be equals to 1.4 t/cm2
If the section is given in the exam and this section is not one of the tables
section, so we have to calculate the properties of area as following:
1. For corners: There is no reduction at all. The given radius "R" is the
inner radius unless otherwise mentioned.

Radius of center line R' = R + t /2

R'

Area of the curve = L x t = 1.57R' x t (t is the thickness of

plates)

Location of C.G. from outer fiber = 0.637 R'

Inertia of the curve about its local axes = small and can be neglected

5/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

I- Design of Purlins "sections subjected to Mx & My" using cold formed sections.
1- Calculate the loads, Mx and My as before in purlins.
2- Choice of section
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbc
SX
SY

And assume Sx

Assume no Fltb so Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2

6 Sy

for all sections and Sx

Sy

for Box section.

M X + (6 or 1)M Y
= cm3 from tables choose section
1.4

SX =
3- Checks:-

a- Code limits for slender sections. ECP page183-189 (Not Important)

h
200
t

For web subjected to moment

For flanges subjected to compression

Stiff.

b
300
t

unstiff.

b
40
t

Partially stiff.

b
60
t
d
40
t

For Lip
b- Determine the effective parts of the section.
Calculate

for each part, and get be, de and he

c- Check bending stress.

fbc =

My
Mx
*y+
*x
Iy
I x eff
eff

1.4

If the section is fully effective so use Sx and Sy from tables, Else calculate the new Sx and Sy.
d- Check shear.
q=

Q
0.35Fy
Aweb

e- Check deflection.
act =

5 WLL L4

384 E I X

all

= span / 200

6/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

II-Design of columns "sections subjected to N" using cold formed sections "C.F.S."
1- Calculate the loads = N.
2- Choice of section
fc =
A=

N
= Fc
A

N
= cm2 from tables choose section
Fc

3- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections. (Not Important)

h
300
t

For web subjected to compression

For flanges subjected to compression

Stiff.

b
300
t

unstiff.

b
40
t

Partially stiff.

b
60
t
d
40
t

For Lip
b- Determine in =

Lbin
L
, out = bout
rin
rout

max = bigger of in and out

2
1.4 6.5 105 max
if max < 100

Fc = 7500
if max 100
2
max

c- Determine the effective parts of the section.

Calculate

for each part, and get be, de and he

d- Check normal stress.

fc =

N
A eff

Fc

If the section is fully effective so use Aeff = A from tables.

Else calculate the new Aeff.

7/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

III. If it is require to calculate the maximum capacity of the section:
If the section is subjected to compression:

We have to calculate the area and inertia of the fully effective section.
Calculate =

kl
, where r =
r

I
. (Note that KL will be given inside and outside plan)
A

Calculate Fc
Maximum capacity = Fc x Aeffective (After reduction)

If the section is subjected to moment:

Calculate Ix effective (after reduction) only
M max = F bcx x S effective Where S effective =

I effective
y

8/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Examples:

1- Design an intermediate roof purlin using: a- Unstiffened C section.

b- Stiffened C section.
c- Box section.

- spacing between frames = 6.00 m

- spacing between purlins = 1.75 m
- Slope of the roof = 8o

Solution:
1- Calculate the loads and straining actions.
I- dead load:
Assume Wc = 6 kg/m2, o.w. = 10 kg/m'
Wd.l. =

Wc a
6 1.75
+ o .w . =
+ 10 = 20.6 kg/m'
cos
cos8

Wxdl = W d cos = 20.6 cos8 = 20.4 kg/m'

Wydl = W d sin = 20.6 sin 8 = 2.87 kg/m'
W xdl S 2 20.4 62
=
= 91.8 mkg
Mxdl =
8
8

Mydl =
Qxdl =

W ydl S 2
8

2.87 6 2
= 12.92 mkg
8

W xdl S 20.4 6
=
= 61.2 kg
2
2

II- Live Load:

a- uniform load:
L.L. = 60 - 66.67 tan

= 60 66.67 tan 8 = 50.63 kg/m2

Wl.l. = L .L . a = 50.63 1.75 = 88.6 kg/m'

Wxll = W L .L . cos = 88.6 cos8 = 87.74 kg/m'

9/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Wyll = W L .L . sin = 88.6 sin 8 = 12.33 kg/m'

Mxll

W X L .L . S 2 87.74 62
=
= 394 mkg
=
8
8

Myll =
Qxll =

WY L .L . S 2 12.33 62
=
= 55.5 mkg
8
8

W xll S 87.74 6
=
= 263.22 kg
2
2

b- concentrated load:
P = 100 kg
Pxll = P cos = 100 cos8 = 99 kg
Pyll = P sin = 100 sin 8 = 13.91 kg
Mxll =

PX L .L . S 99 6
=
= 148.5 mkg
4
4

Myll =

PY L .L . S 13.91 6
=
= 20.86 mkg
4
4

Uniform load is more critical

III- Wind load:

As

= 8o so tan

= tan 8 = 0.14 < 0.4 wind load is suction "

neglected"

Final straining actions:

Mx = Mxdl + Mxll = 91.8 + 394 = 485.8 m kg = 48.85 cm t
My = Mydl + Myll = 12.91 + 55.5 = 68.42 m kg = 6.84 cm t
Qx = Qxdl + Qxll = 61.2 + 263.22 = 324.4 kg = 0.325 t

10/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Design as unstiffened C section:
2- Choice of section
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbc
SX
SY

And assume Sx

SX =

Assume no Fltb so Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2

6 Sy

M X + 6M Y
48.58 + 6 6.84
3
=
= 64 .0cm from tables choose C180x75x4
1.4
1.4

3- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections. (Not Important)

For web subjected to moment
h = H 2r 2 t = 180 2(6)-2(4) = 160 mm
h 160
=
= 40 < 200 Ok
t
4

For Unstiff. flange

b = B r t = 75 6 4 = 65 mm
b 65
=
= 16.25 < 40 Ok
t
4

Section satisfies code limits.

b-

Determine the effective parts of the section.

1-

Flange

Unstiffened flange subjected to compression

K = 0.43
P =
=

b t
44

=1,

b = 65 mm
Fy
K

65 4 2.4
= 0.87
44 0.43

P 0.15 0.05 0.87 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 0.885 < 1
P2
0.87 2

be =

b = 0.885 x 65 = 57.53 mm

11/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

2- Web
Stiff. Web subjected to moment

= -1 , K = 23.9

h = 160 mm
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

160 4 2.4
= 0.29
44
23.9

P 0.15 0.05 0.29 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 2.25 > 1
P2
0.292

The web is fully effective.

As the flange is not fully effective so we must
calculate the new properties of the section.

IX eff = IX table IX of the reduced part = 606.25 0.747x0.4

(9-0.2)2 = 583.11 cm4

IY eff = IY table IY of the reduced part = 67.2 (

0.40.7473
0.747 2
4
+0.40.747(7.5 1.9
) )= 59cm
12
2

c- Check bending stress.

fbc =

MX
M
48.58
6.84
2
y + Y x =
9+
(7.5 1.9) =1.39 < 1.4 t/cm
IX
IY
583.11
59

d- Check shear.
q=

0.325
= 0.054 < 0.35Fy
16 0.4

e- Check deflection.
act =

5 W LL L 4
5 87.84 6004 5
10 = 1.21 cm <

384 E I X
384 2100 583

all

600
=3cm
200

12/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Design as stiffened C section:
2- Choice of section
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbc
SX
SY

And assume Sx
SX =

Assume no Fltb so Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2

6 Sy

M X + 6M Y
48.58 + 6 6.84
3
=
= 64 .0cm from tables choose C160x80x30x4
1.4
1.4

3- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections.

For web subjected to moment
h = H 2r 2 t = 160 2(6)-2(4) = 140 mm
h 140
=
= 35 < 200 Ok
t
4

For partially stiff. flange

b = B 2 r 2 t = 80 2(6) 2(4) = 60 mm
b 60
=
= 15 < 60 Ok
t
4

For lip
d = D r t = 30 6 4 = 20 mm
d 20
=
= 5 < 40 Ok
t
4

Section satisfies code limits.

b- Determine the effective parts of the section.

1- Flange:

Partially stiff. flange subjected to compression

=1,

K = ???

13/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

b = 60 mm
S = 1.28

E
2100
= 1.28
=37.86
Fy
2.4
b 60
=
= 15 < S =37.86
t
4

S
= 12.62
3

<

I a = 399[

15
b t
4
0.33]3 t 4 = 399[
0.33]3 0.4 4 = 0.00296 cm
S
37.86

IS = stiffener moment of inertia =

0.25 <

t d 3 0.4 23
=
=0.266 cm4
12
12

D 30
= = 0.5 <0.8
b 60

K = [4.82 5(

I
D
0.26
)] S + 0.43 = [4.82 5(0.5)]
+ 0.43 = 22.44
b
Ia
0.00296

so take K = 2.75

D
> 5.25 5( ) = 5.25 5(0.5) = 2.75
b
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

60 4 2.4
= 0.318
44 2.75

P 0.15 0.05 0.318 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 1.17> 1
P2
0.3182

Flange is fully effective

2- Web
Stiff. Web subjected to moment

= -1 , K = 23.9

h = 140 mm
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

140 4 2.4
= 0.25
44
23.9

P 0.15 0.05 0.25 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 2.4 > 1
P2
0.252

The web is fully effective.

14/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

3- Lip
Unstiff. lip subjected to compression

= 1 , K = 0.43

d = 20 mm
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

20 4 2.4
= 0.27
44 0.43

P 0.15 0.05 0.27 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 0.96
P2
0.27 2

The lip is fully effective.

As all parts are fully effective so we can use Sx and Sy from tables.

c- Check bending stress.

fbc =

MX
MY
48.58
6.84
+
=
+
=0.99 < 1.4 t/cm2
SX
SY
68.23 24.35

d- Check shear.
q=

0.325
= 0.058 < 0.35Fy
14 0.4

e- Check deflection.
act

5 W LL L 4
5 87.84 600 4 5
=

10 = 1.26 cm <
384 E I X
384 2100 554.9

all

600
=3cm
200

15/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Design as Box section:
1- Choice of section
fbc =

M X MY
+
= Fbc
SX
SY

And assume Sx
SX =

Assume no Fltb so Fbc = 1.4 t/cm2

Sy

M X + MY
48.58 + 6.84
3
=
= 39.6 .0cm from tables choose box 100x100x4
1.4
1.4

2- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections.

For web subjected to moment
h = H 2r 2 t = 100 2(8) - 2(4) = 76 mm
h 76
=
= 19 < 200 Ok
t
4

For stiff. flange

b = B 2 r 2 t = 100 2(8) 2(4) = 76 mm
b 76
=
= 19 < 300 Ok
t
4

Section satisfies code limits.

b- Determine the effective parts of the section.

1- Flange
stiff. flange subjected to compression

=1,K =4

b = 76 mm
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

76 4 2.4
= 0.33
44
4

P 0.15 0.05 0.33 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 1.19> 1
P2
0.332

Flange is fully effective

16/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

2- Web
Stiff. Web subjected to moment

= -1 , K = 23.9

h = 76 mm
P =
=

b t
44

Fy
K

76 4 2.4
= 0.14
44 23.9

P 0.15 0.05 0.14 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 1.88 > 1
P2
0.142

The web is fully effective.

As all parts are fully effective so we can use Zx and Zy from tables.

c- Check bending stress.

fbc =

MX
M
48.58 6.84
+ Y =
+
=1.2 < 1.4 t/cm2
ZX
ZY
46.8
46.8

d- Check shear.
q=

0.325
= 0.054 < 0.35Fy
2 7.6 0.4

e- Check deflection.
act

5 W LL L4
5 87.84 6004 5
=

10 = 3.01 cm
384 E I X
384 2100 234

all

600
=3cm
200

17/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

Example:
It is required to design the marked member using box cold formed section.

Solution:
1- Calculate the loads = N.
From the equilibrium of the shown bracing system:
2 F2 cos 45 = 10 ton
F2 =

10
= 7ton
2 cos 45

Equilibrium of joint 1
X = 0 = 10 F2 cos 45 F1 = 10 5 F1 = 0
F1 = 5ton

2- Choice of section
fc =
A=

N
= Fc
A

Assume Fc = 0.4 t/cm2

N
5
2
=
= 12.5 cm from tables choose Box 100x100x4
0.4 0.4

3- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections. (Not Important)

For web subjected to compression
h = H 2r 2 t = 100 2(8) - 2(4) = 76 mm

18/19-C.F.

Cold Formed Section

h 76
=
= 19 < 300 Ok
t
4

For stiff. flange

b = B 2 r 2 t = 100 2(8) 2(4) = 76 mm
b 76
=
= 19 < 300 Ok
t
4

Section satisfies code limits.

b- Determine
in =

Lbin Lbin 500

=
=
=127.87 <180
rin
rx
3.91

out =

Lbout Lbout 500

=
=
=127.87 <180
rout
ry
3.91

max = bigger of in and out = 127.87 > 100

7500
7500
2
=
=0.458 t/cm
2
2
max 127.87

Fc =

c- Determine the effective parts of the section.

1- Flange & Web:

(Square section)

Stiff. Flange subjected to compression

K =4
P =
=

b t
44

= 1,

b = 76 mm
Fy
K

76 4 2.4
= 0.33
44
4

P 0.15 0.05 0.33 0.15 0.05 1

=
= 1.19> 1
P2
0.332

Flange & web are fully effective

d- Check normal stress.

fc =

N
5
2
=
= 0.326 < Fc 0.458 t/cm
A eff
15.3

Use box 100x100x4

19/19-C.F.

 Local buckling of web (thin-walled web), while very small

local buckling in flange
This section is subjected to pure normal because the whole
web buckled

 Local buckling of web & flange

This section is subjected to pure normal because the whole
web & flange buckled

The next beam is subjected to moment. The local buckling is

in upper part of web while it has non-compact flange.

Beam-Column I
The beam-column members are subjected to both normal and moment, so their
stress is calculated using the formula:

N Mx My
+
+
Fallowable . Since allowable of
A
Sx
Sy

moment is different than allowable of compression, so the equation turns to be

interaction equation in the following form:

M /S
N / A M x /Sx
A1 + y y A 2 1 ,
+
Fc
Fbcx
Fbcy

where A1, A2 are magnification factor and will be explained later.

Steel sections used:
1) Rolled sections:

IPE

BFIB

Used for section subjected to N and

Mx

2) Built upysections:

xx

2 Channels
y

Used for section subjected to N, Mx

and My

x x

4 Angles
y

2 IPE
y

2 IPE

Used for section subjected to N and My

1/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Design steps of columns:
1- Suggest a suitable bracing system
2- Calculate moment and normal and determine the critical sections to be
designed. ( the column may have more than one critical section and the
design is to check the stresses in all the critical sections)
3- Estimation of section.
4- Apply in the interaction equation.
1- If the bracing is not given in the exam, we have to suggest a suitable
bracing system:
Positions of horizontal member in vertical bracing:
1- Level of upper and lower chord of truss.
2- Level of rafter in portal frames.
3- Level of crane girder to avoid braking force.
4- Level of any beam connected to the column especially if this beam carry
load perpendicular to plane of column, (gives My) on column.

h > 5m or 6m

5- If hcolumn > 5m and the bracing is not given in the exam.

post
Beam
End gable section

2/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
For the design of column we have to calculate all the terms of the interaction
equation, so we need to calculate Fc (allowable of compression), which in turns
requires the calculation of both

in

Lbin
and
rin

out

L = k in L
Lbout
. Where bin
rout
Lbout = k out L

I- Buckling of Beam-columns
K = is the buckling coefficient, which will be calculated twice, first for in-plane
and second for out-plane.
In order to calculate K for the column, we have to study two points "for in-plane
and for out-plane":A-Types of structures according to sway-:
a) Permitted to side sway. (Side movement)
b) Prevented from side sway .
The structure is prevented from sway when we use:
1- Tie member join the structure to the ground
The frame in the figure is prevented from sway
inside plane

2- Structures joined to fixed structure

The frame in the figure is prevented from sway inside
plane
3- Structures with vertical bracing
The frame in the figure is permitted to sway inside plane
while prevented from sway outside of plane

B-End points conditions of the columns

1-Types of bases-:
Bases may be fixed or hinged inside the plane (in the elevation)
We assume all bases are hinged outside plane (in the side view)
EXCEPT: in case of cantilever column out of plane
3/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
2-Types of connection between column and girder-:
a) Fixed:
When the inertia of the girder is too large related to that of the column, the girder
PREVENTS the column from ROTATION.
Example: When the truss is connected to the column with distance "h" min.
1.25m
No rotation (fixed) but sway
Sway

Fixed base

Hinged base

Sway

Fixed bases

Hinged bases

b) Free:
Cantilever .

c) Rigid:
When the inertia of the girder is smaller or bigger than that of the column with
small value and the connection is moment connection, the column and the girder
rotate while the angle between them remains CONSTANT.
Example: The column is connected to the girder with head plate while their
inertias are close to each other.
Usually inertia of girder is smaller than that of column (Ic = 2-3 Ig )
This structure is called PORTAL FRAME

Hinged bases

Fixed bases

4/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
d) Hinged:
When the connection is hinged (does not translate moment).
Example: The column is connected to the girder using angles connecting the
web of the girder.

Permitted to sway

prevented from sway

How to consider hinged or rigid connection:

If the beam is connected to the column using head plate (connecting
flanges carrying moment and web carrying shear), so the joint is rigid
If the beam is connected to the column using angles (connecting only web
carrying shear), so the joint is hinged.

Rigid connection

Hinged connection

e) Partially fixed ends-:

It occurs when 2 columns of different inertias are connected

5/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
In case the connection between the column and girder is fixed, hinged or
free we use the table ECP 53
Prevented from sway

Permitted to sway

Hinged-

Hinged-

Fixed-

Fixed

+ Fixed

+ Free

Hinged

Fixed

Fixed

free sway

free sway

1.00

0.80

0.65

2.00

1.3

Buckling
shape

k-value

2.10

Applications of buckling lengths Lb

Buckling length of columns in trusses:
i) For hinged base:

h1
h2
hinged

hinged

lbin = 2( h2+

h1
)
2

lbout = h1 or h2 (bigger)

ii ) For fixed base:

h1
h2
F ix e d
( I n s id e )

lbin = 1.3 ( h2+

h1
)
2

h in g e d
( o u ts id e )

lbout = h1 or h2

(bigger)

6/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
iii ) For partially fixed base :
h1

roof
column

h
2

Partially
fixed

h
3

Combined
column
Fixed
base

For roof column:

lbin = 1.5 ( h2+

h1
)
2

lbout = h1 or h2

(bigger)

For combined column:

lbin = 1.5 h3

lbout = h3

iv ) For partially fixed base :

If the bracing is given as shown below:

h4
h3
h2
h1

For roof column:

lbin = 1.5 ( h2+ h3+

h4
)
2

lbout = h3 or h4

(bigger)

For combined column:

lbin = 1.5 h1

lbout = h1 + h2

7/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
v ) For fink truss:

F ix e d
b ase

lbin = 2.10 h

lbout = h

vi ) For cantilever truss:

lbin = 2.10 ( h2+

h1
)
2

lbout = ( h1 or h2 )

(bigger)

vii ) For cantilever frame:

lbin = 2.10 ( h1)

lbout = h1

viii ) For cantilever truss and side sway prevented:

h

lbin = ( h2 + h1 )

lbout = ( h1 or h2 ) (bigger)
8/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
In case the connection between the column and girder is rigid we use the
alignment chart ECP page 60 and 61.
Buckling length of columns in rigid frames:
B

I
g
I
c

L
c

A
L
g

For column AB
lbin = KLc

lbout = Lc
:

(chart)

- for hinged base

GA = 10

- for fixed base

GA = 1.0
( rigidity of joint )

- GB =
Where

( I c / Lc )
[( I g / L g ) * F ]

(k)

ECP page 60 and 62

F = factor depends on the condition of the far end of girder and on the

case of frame.

1) F = 1 for frames (If there is no real support)

(

2) If there is support at the end of the girder:

Frame prevented from sway :
F = 2.0 for fixed far end

C
Col 2
B
Col 1
A

F = 1.5 for hinged far end

9/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Frame permitted to sway :

F = 0.67 for fixed far end

Col 2
F = 0.50 for hinged far end

B
Col 1
A

Important notes:
1- If the studied column is column 2 in the previous shape, so we have to
calculate Gb and Gc and use the alignment chart.
2- If the column is connected to a cantilever beam it has no effect on the
buckling of the column.
3- Inertia:
For beams and girders :We always use Ix
For columns :We have to check the direction of buckling whether it is around
X-axis or Y-axis of the member under consideration

10/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Examples for buckling:
Example 1:

IPE 500

Col 1

8.0

4.0

IPE 450
IPE 500

IPE 400

Col 4

Col 3

6.0

5.0

3.0

Col 2

IPE 400

IPE 550

4.5

IPE 600

IPE 500

IPE 400

8.0

Calculate the buckling lengths for columns 1, 2, 3 and 4 in figures 1

respectively. Assume there is vertical bracing outside plane connecting columns

at floor levels only.

Figure(1): Frame permitted to sway inside plan and

3.0

Solution:

4.5

assume the bracing is as shown:

Column 1:
Inside plan:

GA = 10 (hinged base)
32080 48200
+
I c / Lc
450
300
GB =
=
48200
( I g / L g * F )
800

.. GB = 6.06
.. From chart permitted to s way

k = 2.65

.. lbin = 2.65*4.5=11.925 m
Out-plan:

lbout = Lc = 4.50 m.

11/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Column 2:
Inside plan:

48200
GC = 300 = 5.56
23130
800

GB = 6.06

From chart

k = 2.35

.. lbin = 2.35*3.0=7.05 m
Out-plan:

lbout = 3.00 m

Figure 2:
Column 3: Frame prevented from sway
GA = 1.00 (fixed base)

48200 23130
+
500
400
GB =
= 1.10
23130
33740
* 1. 5 +
* 2.0
600
800

Note that: although the left support is roller, but this floor level is prevented from
sway, so we use the factor "F" for the prevented from sway frames.
From chart prevented from sway

k = 0.78

.. lb in = 0.78*5.00 = 3.90 m
lb out = 5.00 m

Column 4: Upper part of the frame is allowed to sway

GB = 1.1 (from previous)

From chart allowed to sway

23130
400
GC =
= 1.03
67120
* 0.67
800

k = 1.3

.. lb in = 1.3*4.00 = 5.20 m
lb out = 5.00 m

12/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Example 2:
slope 1:10

IPE 400
3.00

col 1 IPE 500

5.50m

36.0m

Inside: GA (partially fixed) = 3.0

48200 / 300
GB =
= 25.0
23130 / 3600

K =2.6
lbin = 3x2.6
= 7.8m

Outside: 3m (using bracing outside)

Example 3:
3.00

4.00

col 2
col 1

3.00

3.00

col 1

5.00

3.00

col 2

Elevation
Side View
All beams are IPE 300.
Columns of first floor are IPE 500, second floor IPE 400
third floor IPE 360.
Take the floor height equals to 3 m.

13/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Solution:
To solve this problem, we have to draw plan to know exactly the location of the
columns.

Side view (Outside plan)

Buckling about y-axis of columns

3.00

4.00

3.00

3.00

5.00

col 2
3.00

col 1
Elevation (Inside plan)
Buckling about x-axis of columns

Column 1:
Inside: GA =

48200 / 300 + 23130 / 300

= 4. 9
8360 / 400 + 8360 / 300

GB =

23130 / 300 + 16270 / 300

= 2.7
8360 / 400 + 8360 / 300

lb in= 2.1 * 3 = 6.3 m

K = 2.1
Outside: GA =
GB =
K = 1.1

2140 / 300 + 1320 / 300

= 0.41
8360 / 300
1320 / 300 + 1040 / 300
= 0.28
8360 / 300

lbin = 1.1 * 3 = 3.3 m

Column 2:
Inside: lbin =6.3, same as col. no.1
Outside: GA =

2140 / 300 + 1320 / 300

= 0.26
8360 / 300 + 8360 / 500

GB =

1320 / 300 + 1040 / 300

= 0.18
8360 / 300 + 8360 / 500

K = 1.05

lbin = 3 1.05 = 3.15m

14/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Example 4:
Sec 1

Sec 2
IPE 270

28 m

28 m

3m

IPE 330

Sec 1
Portal frame
bracing

Sec 2
Vertical
bracing

Spacing between frames is 6m

Solution:
Col "1"Inside: Rigid connection
GA =

23130 / 700
= 5. 7
16270 / 2800

Allowed to sway

GB = 1.0 fixed
The crane bracket has no effect on the col., the col. length is 7.0m not 5.0 m
K = 1.7

lbout : Bracing

Col 3

Col 2

IPE 500

IPE 400
Col 1

5.0

IPE 360
IPE 400

IPE 360

2.0

lbin = 1.7 * 7 = 11.9 m

Prevented from sway & hinged connection

lbout = 3.5m
Col"2" :
Inside: GA = 1.0 fixed

15/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
GB =

48200 / 700
= 5.9
16270 / 2800 * 2

lb in = 1.7 * 7 = 11.9 m

K= 1.7

Outside: Rigid connection also, so we have to use the alignment chart

GA = 10.0 (hinged) Bases are hinged outside.
GB =

2140 / 700
= 0.15
11770 / 600

K = 1.75

lb in = 1.75 * 7 = 12.25 m

Col 3: Same as col."1" because we neglect effect of cantilever (Its stiffness = zero)

Example 5:
IPE 300

Col 1

IPE 360

IPE 330

IPE 500

2.5

Col 2

3.5

IPE 360
IPE 500

3.5

2.5

IPE 300

4.0

4.0

Side View

Col 2
IPE 330
R.C.
Building
Col 1

4.0

4.0

Elevation

For column "1":

Q There is bracing, so the connections in the outside directions are all

hinged.
bracing

frame

lbout = 3.5m
Lbin

rigid connections, so use chants

GA = 1.0 fixed
GB =

48200 / 350 + 16270 / 250

= 6.9
11770 / 400

Q Upper connection is prevented from sway

16/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
The frame is connected to R.C. building which prevent the Sway at the
level of the 1st floor
K = 0.28

from chart of prevented from sway

lbin = 0.85 * 3.5 = 2.97,

Column "2":
Outside is prevented from Sway (bracing) and the connections between
beams & columns are hinged
lbout = 2.5m
Inside: The column is allowed to sway because its top is allowed to Sway
GA (column 2) = GB (column 1) = 6.9
GB (column 2) = 16270 / 250 = 3.1
8360 / 400

K = 2.2 (From chart of allowed to sway)

lbin = 2.2 2.5 = 5.5 m

Notes:
1. If the link member is removed from 1st floor and added to second floor.
The 2 columns will be permitted to sway.
2. If 2 link members are added at the levels & 1st & second floor.
The 2 columns will be prevented from Sway .
3. For side view, if the bracing is removed from the 2nd floor:
lout of col"1"= l
lout of col"2"= K l
Where K is the buckling

Col 2

There is no bracing
Allowed to sway
Connections are rigid

Col 1

There is bracing
Prevented from sway
Connections are hinged

coefficient calculated using

G A & GB

Side view

17/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Example 6:
Calculate the buckling lengths of columns 1, 2 and 3.

IPE 500
Col 3 Col 4

IPE 400
Col 2

IPE330
3.5

IPE 500
Col 1

7.0m

IPE400

8.0m
25.0m

6.0m
For Col 1,3 and 4

6.0m
For Col 2

Solution:Column 1:
Inside plan:

GA = 10 (hinged base)
48200
I c / Lc
GB =
= 700 = 7.44
( I g / L g * F ) 23130
2500

.. From chart permitted to sway

k = 2.85

.. lbin = 2.85*7.0=19.95 m
Out-plan:

lbout = Lc = 7.0 m. from bracing system

Column 2:
Inside plan: fixed base, hinged connection with girder and frame is permitted to
sway, as the case of fixed free, K = 2.1
.. lbin = 2.1*3.5=7.35 m
Out-plan:

lbout = Lc = 3.5 m. from bracing system

18/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Column 3:
Inside plan:
GA = 10 (hinged base)

48200 48200
+
350 = 27.08
GB = 350
16270
*0.5
800

.. From chart permitted to sway

k = 3.6

.. lbin = 3.6*3.5=12.6 m
Out-plan:

lbout = Lc = 7.0 m. from bracing system

Column 4:
Inside plan:
GB = 27.08

48200
GB = 350 = 14.88
23130
2500

.. From chart permitted to sway

k = 4.1

.. lbin = 4.1*3.5=14.35 m
Out-plan:

lbout = Lc = 7.0 m. from bracing system

19/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
To determine Fbcx and Fbcy we have to know whether this section is
compact or non-compact and relation between Lu act and Lu max

To determine compact or non-compact section in case of columns (M,N)

a) Flanges :

Subjected to compression as in case of beams

Rolled section

built-up section

10.91 compact

C
tf

9.87 compact

C
tf

14.8 non-compact
> 14.8 slender

13.5 non-compact
> 13.5 slender

b) Web: Subjected to moment and normal (not as case of beams which are
subjected to moment only) ECP 9
Calculate

dw = h 2 [ tf + r ] h 4tf (rolled)
= h 2 [ tf + s ]

( built-up)

Assume compact section:

+ve

-ve

dw

+ve

-ve

dw

Fy
-ve

Fy

Fy

Fy
Moment

dw = h 2tf
dw =

N = 2a x tw x Fy

dw
+a
2

dw =

2a

Fy
Compression
a=

N
2t w F y

dw
N
1
N
+
= x( d w +
)
2
2t w F y 2
t w Fy

N
1
(
+ 1)
2 d w t w Fy

20/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Very important note: N is +ve for compression and ve for tension

tw

(case

of

compression

and

moment)

Fy

699

(13 1) Fy

-ve

dw

0.5

dw
+ve

< 0.5 (case of tension and moment)

dw

>

dw
63.6

t w Fy

Fy

= 0.5 means pure moment, where

Note that:

dw
63.6
127

=
tw
0.5 * F y
Fy

1 means the web is subjected to pure compression, where

While

dw
699
699 / 12
58

=
=
tw
(13 * 1 1) F y
Fy
Fy

If

dw
is greater than the above ratios
tw

Web may be non-compact or slender

(2) Assume non-compact:

Fy

N / A + M x / Sx
Tension
=
N / A M x / S x Compression

>-1 (compression)

dw
190

t w (2 + ) F y

-1 (tension)

d w 95(1 )

tw
Fy

For

= -1(pure moment)

dw
+

-ve

Calculate

Fy

dw
190
190
=
=
tw
Fy
(2 + ( 1)) F y

21/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
For

If

= 1 (pure compression)

dw
190
64
=
=
tw
(2 + 1) F y
Fy

dw
is greater than the above ratios
tw

Web is slender

To calculate LTB:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05
=

+ 0.3

M
2

2.3

M1
smaller moment
=
bigger moment
M2

Lumax =

1380 AF
Cb
F y .d

M1

or

Lumax =

20b f

M1

Fy

M2

= - ve

M1
M1
M2

The maximum value of Cb is 2.3, if Cb calculated from the equation is

larger than 2.3, then take Cb = 2.3
Smaller gives smaller Cb which is more critical
Negative value of is more critical than positive value.
Important: When the bending moment at any point within the un-braced
length is larger than the values at both ends of this length, the value of Cb
shall be taken as unity.

ECP

22/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

= + ve

Beam-Column I
II- We need also to calculate the straining actions on the beam-columns
inplane and outplane N, Mx and My:
Edge columns with and without crane
Internal columns with crane

E d g e C o lu m n

In tern al C ran e C o lum n

Edge columns without cranes:

N

N
M1

M1

1
Inplane

Inplane
2

M2

X
Y

Outplane

N
M1

R wind

M1

Inplane

Inplane
2

M2

X
Y

Rwind

Outplane

Min = M1 = X x h , N1 = Y

Min = M1 = given

Critical section is 1

Min = M2 = given or = M1/2

Max M and N

Mout = zero

N1 = N 2 = N = Y
Critical section:
sec1 - if M1 > M2
sec2 - if M2 > M1

23/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
A- Cantilever column:
The base must be FIXED inside plan to maintain stability
N
M
M
Cantilever

Cantilever

To calculate M and N:
wtot = (wc + ws + wLL) t/m2,
Where wc = (5-8) kg/m2 (corrugated sheets), ws = (20-35) kg/m2
WLL = (60-66.66 tan ) kg/m2

(Note that the value to wtot may be given)

W = wtot x Spacing t/m'

Min = W x L2c /2

N = WLc

Mout = zero

Important note: If there is a frame with double cantilever, we have to make

cases of loading to get 2 cases:
1- Case of max. moment and corresponding normal (T, D)
2- Case of max normal and corresponding moment (T, T)
If there is long and short cant, we have to use (for case of max moment) total
on the long cant and dead on the short one. Design always on the case of
maximum moment (it is usually critical) and check on the case of max normal.

Note:

Dead

Total

Total

Total

If the load is given in t/m', use this

load to calculate M and N.
If the load is given in t/m2, so

Cantilever

Cantilever

multiply load * spacing then calculate M

and N.
Max moment

Max normal
24/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
B- Edge columns with cranes:
Cranes give 3 loads in 3 different directions loads from crane:
PY = RDL + RLL+I , PX = 0.1*RLL and B =

P
7

*-Braking force always distributed on 2 successive columns unless given in

the exam.
The braking force is carried by the bracing if there
is a horizontal member at the same level of the
crane OR cause Mout on the column at section at

M
B

the position of crane

a- If there is horizontal member in the vertical bracing at the level of crane:

N2

M2

N2

PY

M1 M'1

PX

B/2

PX

Inplane

Inplane
3

N1

M3

N1

Outplane

Y
N2

N2

Rwind

M2

M2

2
M'1

M1

Rwind

PY

M'1

M1

M2

PY
Inplane

M1 M'1

PX

N1
Y

Inplane

3
X

PY
B/2
PX

M3

N1
Y

Given X and Y, calculate M1, M1, M2 and if fixed base M3

Outplane

Mout = zero

N1 = Y and N2 = Y PY
Critical Sections:
- If M1 > M2

25/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Sec1 only (Min=M1, N1 and Mout = zero)
- If M2 > M1
Sec1 (Min=M1, N1 and Mout = zero)
and sec2 (Min=M2, N2 and Mout = zero)

b- If there is NO horizontal member in the vertical bracing at the level of crane:

Assume column is simply supported by bracing
N2

M2

N2

M1

PX

M'1

B/2

PX

Inplane

Inplane
3

N1

M3

N1

Outplane

Y
N2

N2

R wind

M2

M2

2
M'1

M1

R wind

PY

PY

M'1

M1

M2

PY
Inplane

M1

PX

M'1

Inplane

3
X

PY

N1

M3

B/2

PX

N1
Outplane

Given X and Y, calculate M1, M1, M2 and if fixed base M3

Mout = ..

N1 = Y and N2 = Y PY
R

Critical Sections:
B

- If M1 > M2
Sec1 only (Min=M1, N1 and Mout = .)

h
h

- If M2 > M1
Sec1 (Min=M1, N1 and Mout = .)
and sec2 (Min=M2, N2 and Mout = zero)
26/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
C- External combined columns:
The following figures show the BMD and NFD of combined columns and
roof columns, the moment at the partially fixed connection between the 2
columns must be given in the exam.

Roof

Roof

Partially
fixed

Partially
fixed

Combined
Column

Combined
Column

BM and NF diagrams for

combined and roof columns

Note: If the moment at the partially fixed connection between the 2 columns
is not in the exam, we may consider the connection to be hinged with moment
equals zero as shown:

Roof

Roof

Partially
fixed

Partially
fixed

Combined
Column

Combined
Column

27/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
D- Internal columns with cranes:

Internal
This short column is used to carry the crane girder, s it will be subjected to loads
from crane Px , Py and B
Case 1 the column carry 1 crane girder

PY

Inplane
The shown column is cant. Inplane

PX

So Min = Px (h+hI)
N = Py

h
Min

28/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Outplane
As this column is inside the building, we have three diff ways for
the outside plane.
a- Ordinary bracing system
Very Very important note: This column did not carry any wind load because it
is an internal column.
Since we used bracing, so the bases outside are hinged

B/2

Internal column with bracing

Mout = zero
Lbin = 2.1 h
Lbout = h

29/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
b- Portal frame bracing system.

Internal column with portal

frame bracing
Inside: Cantilever as previous

Lbin = 2.1 h

Outside: The column is connected with the beam with rigid connection, outside
(base is hinged)

Use GA = 10 & GB =

(I
(I

/ l)c

/ l )b

If section of the beam not given assume Ic= 2Ig

B=

P
7

Mout =

B
xh
2

B/2
2

B/2
M out

1
B/2

B/2

Outplane
So we have to design 2 sections
Section "1" at the base: N & Min , while Mout = zero
Section "2"at the top of the column: N & Mout , while Min = zero

30/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
c- No bracing cant. Col. In the outside plane
This system is unstable outside. So the column must be

Cantilever outside (ie the base is fixed)

The column is cant. Inside & outside

Internal free column

Here we have 1 critical section at the base
Min = Px (h+hI)
Mout =

B
xh
2

N = Py
And Lbin = Lbout = 2.1h

31/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
Case 2 the column carry 2 crane girders
We have here 2 cases of loading
1- 2 cranes working at same time.

PY1

PY2

PX1

PX2

h
d
h

B total
2

B total
2

Min
Inplane

Outplane

Inplane
The shown column is cant. Inplane
Assume crane 1 > crane 2
So Min = Px1 (h+d+hI) + Px2 (h+d+hI) + Py1 (e1) - Py2(e2)
N = Py1 + Py2
Outplane
We have the same 3 diff bracing systems.
a- Ordinary bracing system
Mout = zero
Lbin = 2.1 h
Lbout = h
Btotal =

P1 P2
+
7
7

Same for the other systems with the shown Btotal

32/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column I
2- The max crane working and the other at rest.

PY1

Pd2

h
d
h

PX1

Btotal
2

Btotal
2

Min
Inplane

Outplane

Inplane
The shown column is cant. Inplane
So Min = Px1 (h+d+hI) + Py1 (e1) + Pd2 (e1)
N = Py1
Outplane
We have the same 3 diff bracing systems.
b- Ordinary bracing system
Mout = zero
Lbin = 2.1 h
Lbout = h
Btotal =

P1
7

Same for the other systems with the shown Btotal

33/33-B.C.I
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Design of rolled columns
After calculating the straining actins and choosing the critical sections, we
get Min, Mout and N.
Orientation of the Section:
1- If the column is subjected to Min and N only
Put Min = Mx so My = Mout = zero
N2

M2

2
M'1

M1

1
Inplane
X

N1

Outplane

Y
X

2- If the column is subjected to Min, Mout and N

Case 1 Min > Mout or Min < Mout
Put Min = Mx so My = Mout
N2

M2

2
M'1

M1

1
Inplane
X
Y

N1
Y

Outplane

1/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Case 2 Mout >>>> Min very rare case
Put Min = My so MX = Mout
M2

N2

2
M'1

M1

Mout
1
Inplane
N1

Outplane

X
Y

1- Estimation of section (rolled):

a- Section subjected to N only
Assume fca =

N
= 0.75 t/cm2
A

Get A from IPE or BFIB tables.

b- Section subjected to Mx and N
Assume fbcx =

Mx
= (0.8 to 1.2) t/cm2
Sx

Get S x req. from IPE or BFIB tables.

c- Section subjected to Mx, My and N
Assume fbcx =

Mx
= (0.4 to 0.7) t/cm2
Sx

Get S x req. from BFIB tables.

2- Interaction equation of columns and how to use it:

For columns subjected to N, Mx and My, they should be designed to satisfy the
following interaction equation: ECP 25 and 26
(

f by
f
f ca
) A2 1.00
) + ( bx ) A1 + (
Fbcy
Fc
Fbcx

case (A)

1.20

case (B)

Where
2/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
-fca = actual axial compressive stress =

N
A

-Fc = allowable axial compressive stress =

=

-fbcx = actual bending stress @ x axis =

-fbcy = actual bending stress @ y axis =

1.4 6.5 10-5 2

<100

7500

>100

Mx
Sx

My
Sy

-Fbcx , Fbcy = allowable compressive bending stress for x , y axes resp.

Where:
Fbcx depends on .Lumax < Luact .
Fbcy = 0.72Fy or 0.58 Fy according to category of the section
A1 =

C mx
1.00
f ca
(1 )
FEx

, FEX =

7500
2x

(even if

A2 =

smaller and smaller than 100)

C my
f
(1 ca )
FEy

1.00

is the , FEy = 7500 (even if

2y

is the

smaller and smaller than 100)

A1 and A2 are modification factors due to p- effect (additional moment)

To calculate A1 and A2
For case

f ca
0.15
Fc

Take A1 = A2 = 1.00

- if (fca / Fc ) > 0.15 get A1 , A2 as follows:

3/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Cmx , Cmy = moment modification factor
a) For frames permitted to sway Cm = 0.85
b) For frames prevented from sway and with transverse loads:

= 1.00

Fixed end

Transverse load

Cm = 0.85

Hinged end

Cmx =1

c) For frames prevented from sway and without transverse load

Cm = 0.60 0.40 (
=

M1
) > 0.40
M2

M 1 smaller moment
=
bigger moment
M2

M1

M1
M1

= - ve

M1

= + ve

M2

M2

The minimum value of magnification values A1 and A2 is 1. if A1 or A2

calculated from the equation is smaller than 1, then take them = 1
To determine Fbcx, we have to know whether this section is compact or
non-compact and relation between Lu act and Lu max
To determine compact or non-compact section in case of columns (M,N)
a) Flanges :

Subjected to compression
Rolled section

built-up section

10.91 compact

C
tf

14.8 non-compact

> 14.8 slender

9.87 compact

C
tf

13.5 non-compact

> 13.5 slender

4/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
b) Web: Subjected to moment and normal ECP 9
Calculate

dw = h 2 [ tf + r ] h 4tf (rolled)
= h 2 [ tf + s ]

( built-up)

Assume compact section:

=

N
1
(
+ 1)
2 d w t w Fy

Very important note: N is +ve for compression and ve for tension

> 0.5 (case of compression and moment)

dw
tw

< 0.5 (case of tension and moment)

If

699
(13 1) Fy

dw
63.6

t w Fy

dw
is greater than the above ratios
tw

Web may be non-compact or slender

(2) Assume non-compact:

Calculate
=

If

N / A + M x / Sx
N / A M x / Sx

>-1 (compression)

dw
190

t w (2 + ) F y

-1 (tension)

d w 95(1 )

tw
Fy

dw
is greater than the above ratios
tw

Web is slender

5/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
To calculate LTB:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05
=

+ 0.3

2.3

M1
smaller moment
=
bigger moment
M2

Lumax =

1380 AF
Cb
F y .d

(The same sign as before)

or

Lumax =

20b f
Fy

Take smaller

The maximum value of Cb is 2.3, if Cb calculated from the equation is

larger than 2.3, then take Cb = 2.3
Smaller gives smaller Cb which is more critical
Negative value of is more critical than positive value.
When calculating Cb, we have to consider the Un-braced length
The un-braced length is the distance between the points which are supported
outside using the horizontal member of the vertical bracing.
The column is to be divided into parts, which is braced outside.
Then we design the critical section for each part.
horizontal

segments
member of vertical bracing

Important: When the bending moment at any point within the un-braced
length is larger than the values at both ends of this length, the value of Cb
shall be taken as unity.

ECP

6/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Some examples to calculate both Cm and Cb :

Truss with fixed base

Truss with hinged base

=+M /M

= zero

C b = 1.75+1.05

C b = 1.75
Cmx = 0.85 (Sway)

Cmx

+0.3
= 0.85 (Sway)

Note that: If M1 for the truss with fixed base is not given, it can be assumed to
be 0.5 M2

M
Cantilever
= -1
Cb = 1
M

Cmx = 0.85 (Sway)

tie

M
Cantilever
= zero
C b = 1.75
Cmx = 0.6-0.4(0)
= 0.6

Fink truss
Base must be fixed
= zero
M

C b = 1.75
Cmx = 0.85 (Sway)

7/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
How to determine Lu act and Lout
Lu act. = distance between points, where the comp. flange is laterally braced.
What braces the compression flange? (Lu act)
1- Bracing outside plan (perpendicular to column)
2- Presence of side girts
3- Knee bracing at the level of any side grit
4- If compression in the flange changes to be tension.
Corrugated
sheets

side
girt

IPE

Elevation

Plan

Knee bracing

What braces the column? (Lb out)

1- Bracing outside plan
Note that: the side girts and the knee bracing does not affect Lb out

8/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Examples:
If h > 6m
h2

h2

Truss with hinged base

h1

h1

h1
2

=L
=
u act
b out

=L
=h
u act
b out 1
with no knee bracing

h1
OR L
L
=
h
AND
=
b out
u act
1
2
Using knee bracing at mid height
If h > 6m
h

Sec1-1

1
2

1
Sec2-2

b out

h1
2

Case 2

= h1
b out

Truss with fixed base

Case 1

In this example, the buckling outside is h1 or h2 according to shape of bracing,

but Lu act varies according to the location of the compression flange with respect
to side girts.
For section 1-1, the compression flange is the inner flange, while for section 2-2,
the compression flange is the outer flange.
Case 1:
Sec. 1-1: Luact. = L
Sec. 2-2: Lu act. = a (maximum distance between side girts which is mostly the
height of the wall)
9/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Case 2:
Sec. 1-1: Luact. = h1 / 2
Sec. 2-2: Lu act. = a (maximum distance between side girts which is mostly the
height of the wall)

(2) If there is no side grits (cantilever sheds)

We can't use knee bracing
We can add a hz. Member in the v l bracing at the mid height of the

column
Luact =

1
h1= Lb out
2

If h > 6m
h

M
Cantilever

h1
h
L

u act

=L

b out

h1
M

=L
=h
u act
b out 1

In this example, we can not use knee bracing because there is no side girts

Note that: If the column has 2 different sections as shown, we have to study the
2 sections
N

Sec 2
M2

Sec 1

3.0m
M

M3
5.0m

10/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
For Section 1:

For Section 2:

Luact = 3m

Luact = 5.0

For Section 1:

For Section 2:

Lb out = 3m

Lb out = 5.0

This means that Lu

act

and Lb

out

varies according to the place of the section

studied.
For section 1:

= zero and Cb = 1.75, while for section 2:

M3
M2

11/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Summary
The design of column is the design of compression member subjected to
pure normal force, then design of beam subjected to pure moment except
in 3 differences:
1. There is a magnification factor called A1 due to p

effect

(additional moment). In the direction of Mx, and A2 in direction of

My. (If there is My)
2. The Cb is calculated from the equation Cb = 1.75 + 1.05 + 0.3 2
instead of using the table of beams.
3. When check the compactness of web, the limit used for beam is
h / t 82, while for columns the web, is subjected to moment and
normal or normal force only, so the limit is completely changed and
has to be calculated

A) Design of rolled section:

Given or calculated:

N=P

Mx=P

Choice of section:
Assume

f=

Mx
= (0.8 1.20) t/cm2
Sx

S x req. =

approx 1 t/cm2

Mx
= cm3
f

Choose IPE no
check:

Calculate
x=

Lbout = P

Lbin =P
Lbin
rx

y=

Lbout
ry

from max get Fc =P

fca

N
A

12/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
f ca
= P 0.15 A1 = A2 = 1.00
Fc

Get

> 0.15 A1 =

fbcx =

C mx
F
(1 ca )
FEx

Mx
=P
Sx

Determine compact or non-compact

Lu max =

1380 A f
Cb = P
Fy . d
20bf
Fy

min

>Luact Fbcx = 1.536 or 1.4

<Luact Fbcx = Fltb

=P

* Finally apply in interaction eq to check the safety of stresses.

Example 1:
2.0

Design the column shown

in the

fig using rolled

5.0

section.

4.0 t
5.0

12.0 t

Solution:
N = 12 ton.
Min = Mx = 4 * 5.00 = 20 m.t.

Choice of section
Assume fbcx = 1.00 t/cm2
Sxreq. =

20 100
= 2000 cm3
1.00

Choose IPE 500

13/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
Checks:
Flange:

C
20 / 2
= 6.25 <10.9
=
1. 6
tf

Web:

N co1
1
(
+ 1)
2 d w t w Fy

dw = 50 41.6 = 43.6 cm

1
12
(
+ 1 ) = 0.556 > 0.5
2 43.6 1.02 2.4

d
699
699 / 2.4
43.6
= 42.75] <[
[ w =
= 72.4]
=
1.02
(13 0.556 1
tw
(13 1) F y
The section is compact

> Lumax =

Luact = 500 cm

20 20
= 258
2.4

There is LTB
Fltb1 =

800 A f
Lu .d

.C b

QFor the lower column segment

Fltb1 =

M1
= Zero Cb = 1.75
M2

800 20 1.6
1.75 = 1.792 > 1.4 t/cm2
500 50
2

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm

QLbin = 2(5 +
x=

1200
= 58.82 <180
20.4

Fc =

fca =

2
) = 12 m
2

7500
(116) 2

Lbout = 5.00 m
y=

500
= 116 <180
4.31

= 0.557

N
12
=
= 0.103 t/cm2
A
116

f ca 0.103
=
= 0.186 > 0.15
0.557
Fc
14/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
A1 =

Cmx = 0.85 (permitted to sway )

7500
= 2.17 t/cm2
(58.82)2

fEx =

A1 =

fbx =

C mx
f
1 ca
Fex

0.85
= 0.89 < 1.00
0.103
)
(1
2.17

A1 = 1.00

Mx 20 100
=
= 1.04 t/cm2
Sx
1930

Applying interaction equation

(

f ca
f
) + ( bx ) A1
Fc
Fbcx

. = 0.186 + (

1.04
) * 1.00 = 0.93 < 1.00
1.4

Safe and economic

Example 2:
Design the column shown in the figure using rolled section. 2 .0
Spacing between trusses 5.0 m
Y = 12 ton and X = 3.33 ton

6 .0
X

Solution:

1- Bracing system:

2 .0
3 .0
3 .0
15/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
2- Straining action on the column.
In Plane

Out of Plane
N = 12ton

M1= 20mt
1

At sec 1 1: "critical section"

M = X x h' = 3.33 x 6.0 = 20 mt
N = Y = 12 ton
As the section is subjected to M in plane only, Min = Mx = 20.0 mt
3- Choice of section
Assume f =

20.0 100
Mx
2
3
= 1.0 t / cm , so Sx =
= 2000 cm
1.0
Sx

Choose I.P.E 500

4- Check:
Int. Equ. :
f bcy
f ca
f
+ A1 ( bcx ) + A 2 (
) 1.0
Fc
Fbcx
Fbcy

As M y = zero
f ca
f
+ A1 ( bcx ) 1.0
Fc
Fbcx

* fca =

N
12
2
=
= 0.103 t/cm
A 116

16/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
* fbcx =

M x 20.0 100
2
=
= 1.04 t/cm
Zx
1930
2
1.4 6.5 105 max

for

max

< 100

7500
2
max

for

max

> 100

Fc =

So we need for
in

max

max,

so we need Lbin = 2 (6 + 2 / 2) = 14.0 m, Lbout = 3.0 m

Lbin 1400 1400

=
=
= 68.62 < 180
rin
rx
20.4

out

Lbout 300 300

=
=
= 69.6 < 180
rout
ry
4.31

= 69.6 < 100

2
* Fc =1.4 6.5 105 max
= 1.4 6.5 105 69.62 = 1.085 t/cm2

f ca 0.103
=
= 0.095
Fc 1.085

* Fbcx :
1- Study the local buckling " compact or non compact "
C = bf / 2 = 20 / 2 = 10.0 cm, dw = h 4tf = 50 4 x 1.6 = 43.6 cm
C / tf = 10 / 1.6 = 6.25 < 10.9 compact flange

dW / tW = 43.6 / 1.02 = 42.75 < ????

1
N
1
12
+ 1) = (
+ 1) = 0.556
2 d w tw Fy
2 43.6 1.02 2.4

We need to calculate = (

As

> 0.5, so ???? =

699

FY

(13 1)

699 2.4
= 72.4
(13 0.556 1)

dW / tW = 42.75 < 72 .4 compact web

As both are compact, so regarding local buckling the section is a compact
section.
17/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 2
2- Study the L.T.B.
From the B M D the compression flange is the inner flange.
From the bracing, at sec 1 1 Luact = 3.0 m
Lumax =

20b f
20 20
=
= 258 cm
2.4
Fy

As Luact > Lumax Sec is Non-compact, and LTB may occur

2
2
Fbcx = Fltb = FFltb
1 + FFltb 2
Fltb1 =

800 A f
800 20 1.6
Cb =
Cb =
Lu d
300 50

Cb = 1.75 + 1.05
=

M small
M big

+0.3

, at sec 1 1

M small
10.0
= - 0.5
=
M big
20.0

Cb = 1.75 + 1.05 (- 0.5) + 0.3 (- 0.5)2 = 1.3

Fltb1 = =

800 20 1.6
2
2
1.3 = 1.7 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
300 50

So Fbcx = Fltb = Fltb1 = 1.4 t/cm2 No LTB will occur.

* A1
As

f ca 0.103
=
= 0.095 < 0.15 so A1 =1.0
Fc 1.085

Applying the interaction Equ:

f ca
f
1.04
+ A1 ( bcx ) = 0.096 + 1.0(
) = 0.83 < 1.0 Safe
Fc
Fbcx
1.4

18/18-B.C.2
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Design of built-up sections (combined columns)
After calculating the straining action as before, we have Min, Mout and N.
Orientation (Direction) of column:
Always make the axis which resist the moment (or resist the bigger
moment in case of Mx and My) is the bigger inertia axis.
a- if section subjected to Min and N
As for combined col Iy > Ix
So put Min = My
So the in-plane is the Y plane while the out-plane is the X.
b- if the section subjected to Min, Mout and N
case Min > Mout or Mout > Min
Put Min = My
So the in-plane is the Y plane while the out-plane is the X.
Case Mout>>>>Min

very rare case

Put Mout = My
So the out-plane is the Y plane and the in-plane is the X.

Combined columns are columns composed of rolled sections connected together

with lacing bars or batten plates. There are many shapes of combined columns
as following:
y

y
d

(1) 4 angles
and plate

y
d

(2) 4 angles

y
d

(3) 2 channels

1/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
y

y
d

y
d

(4) 2 IPE

(5) 4 angles
and plate

(6) 4 angles

2 I with batten plates

2 I with lacing bars

Design of section:y

1- Choice of section:For section formed from 2 C or 2I

For section subjected to My and N only

Assume d if not given, d = (30 60) cm

or we may take d =

H
12 15

y
d

Where "H" is height of column

Calculate compression force on one side:
A 1[ =

c=

N
M
+
2
d

Force(C)
= . Cm2
Fc

Assume Fc = (1.1 1.3) t/cm2, for section subjected to My and N only

2/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Assume Fc = (0.5 0.8) t/cm2, for section subjected to My, Mx and N only
Choose according to the required section

N.B.:For economic section

d = (1.5 2.0) h

Not a check

2- Checks:Calculate A, Ix, Iy, rx and ry for the combined section.

We apply the interaction equation:(

f by
f
f ca
) A2 1.00
) + ( bx ) A1 + (
Fbcy
Fc
Fbcx
1.20

case (A)
case (B)

Where,
* fca =

N
N
=
A 2[ 2A[

* fbcx =

Mx Mx
y
=
Sx2[ I x2[

,y=

h
, I x[ ] = 2(I x[ )
2

* fbcy =

My My
=
x
Sy2[ I y2[

,x=

d
d
+ e[ , I y[ ] = 2(I y[ + A[ ( )2 )
2
2

* Fc = 1.4 6.5 10-5 max2

=

7500
max 2

<100
>100

So we need to get max

3/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Global and local buckling:
As this section is composed of several parts so we have 3 buckling modes
Global buckling:
The whole section (all its components) will buckle inside
or outside (as in case of rolled section).
Local buckling:
Each individual section will buckle alone about its minor
axis (local buckling). The local buckling occurs inside
plan or outside plan or in both direction according to the
presence of batten plates or lacing bars as shown.
Overall buckling:
The sum of local and global buckling on each direction.
Calculate Lbin , Lbout (Exactly as before)
Global buckling: out =

L bout
rx[ ]

and in =

L bin
ry[ ]

Local buckling: z if there is lacing bars or batten plate, where z =

Lz
rmin

Where, Lz is the free distance where each individual part an buckle alone.
rmin is minimum radius of gyration of the part that buckles alone.

rmin = ry[ or ryI

Overall buckling:Sum of previous modes
in = y = ( 'in ) 2 + (c z )2 as both are about y axis
out = x = out

Where c = 1 if using lacing bars or 1.25 if using batten plate.

4/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Check: z =
If

Lz
2
= < 60 and <
max (of in and out)
3
rmin

is unsafe, decrease Lz by using double lacing system or hz lacing member

Or increase rmin by increasing the section

How to get Lz?
Different arrangement of lacing bars:

45

45

Single intesection
Lacing BARS

Single intesection Double intesection

Lacing BARS
Lacing BARS
with horizontal bar

Single intesection
Lacing ANGLES

Lz is the free distance where each individual part an buckle alone.

For batten plates or channels: Assume Lz = (1 2) d = (80-100) cm
For lacing bars: If single intersection system = 500 - 700
If double intersection system = 400 100 See ECP page 133
is the angle of inclination of lacing bar with vertical axis of member.
is the angle of inclination of lacing bar with horizontal axis.
We can take

= 450 in all cases (

i.e. Lz = 2d in single intersection system and lacing angles

Lz = d in double intersection system and single intersection system with
horizontal bar.

5/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Special case for Lz in case of 4L as in figures:-

Lz

Lz

*A2 =

C my
f
(1 ca )
FEy

1.00, FEy =

7500
2y

, in = y

* Fbcy and Fbcx

Always Lu act is neglected, so no need to calculate Lu max
For Combined sections:
Fbcy = Fbcy = 0.58Fy = 1.4 t/cm2 because these sections are non-compact

6/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Different types of built-up sections:
1- Section composed of 2 channels:
A2 channels = 2A one channel

rx[ ] = rx [ (from table) because the axis does not move.

Or rx 2 channels =

Ix 2 channels = 2 Ix one channels

Ix
(Ix and A are of the whole section)
A
d
2

Iy 2 channels = 2[Iy1 channel + A 1 channel ( ) 2]

y
d

Iy

, ry 2 channels =

rmin = min. radius gyration of one element of column which is ry of single

channel.
fbcy =

My d
( + e[ )
I y[] 2
y

2- Section composed of 2 IPE :

Exactly as section composed of 2 channels
fbcy =

My d
b
( + f)
I yII 2
2

y
d

3- Section composed of 4 angels:

2 IPE
y

y
d

4 angles

y
d

4 angles

Estimation of section: Force on one side = C =

N
M
+
(Force on 2 angels)
2
d

Assume Fc = (1.1 1.3) t/cm2

7/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Force(C)
= . cm2 (Area of 2 angles)
Fc

Area of each side =

Area of one angel = A / 2

Get angle from tables

Local buckling will occur in both directions.

x = out =

L
l
( bout ) 2 + (C z ) 2
rx 4 L
rmin

y = in =

l
L
( bin ) 2 + (C z ) 2
ry 4L
rmin

Where rmin is the minimum r for single angle = rv

h
h
rx 4 L = (rx1L ) 2 + ( ) 2
2
2

d
d
ry 4 L = ( rx1L ) 2 + ( ) 2
2
2

And complete as before

4- Section composed of 4 angles + 2 plates:
Force on each side =

N
M
+
2
d

Area of each side = Atot =

Force
= (A2L + Apl.)
f
y
d

Assume the height of the plate = h, and its thickness

4 angles
and plate

= 10-20mm
A1L =

Atot A pl
Get area of each angle from tables
2

Deal with section exactly like 2 channels

Local buckling will occur inside plan only, so
out =

Lbx
rx

in =

l
L
( bin ) 2 + (C z ) 2
ry
rmin

Where rx and ry are of the whole section (4 angles and plate). While rmin is the
minimum radius of gyration of the part buckles alone which is the 2 angles and
the plate of each side. So we have to calculate rmin =

I min
A2 Ls + pl

hp = h
tp as assumed before (10 20 mm)
Ap = hp tp
8/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Imin is Iy, so we have to calculate X and Iy
A = 2 A1L + Apl
Ap *

X =

Iy =

hp
2

+ 2 AL * (t p + e L )

yX

hp * t p3
12

tp

(can be neglected) + Ap X
2

2
y

part behaves
lonely

2
+ 2 I x1L + A1L * (t p + e L X )

rmin =

Iy
A

and complete as before

5- Section composed of 4 angles and plate:

This section has no local buckling but there is LTB.
Estimation of section: Assume d =
C (compression on 2 angles) =

H
, tp = 10mm
12 15

N M
+
2 d

Assume Fc = (1.1 1.3) t/cm ,

C/2
A1L =
Fc

4 angles
and plate

Calculate Ix, Iy, Fbcy ( Af = 2area of the angle)

6- Section composed of 3 plates: (Built-up)

Design as Built-up section of crane girder but with equal flanges.
Assume dw =

H
,
12 15

tw is max of 5mm or

dw
190 Fy
y

N M
Force on flange = +
2 d

Assume stress Fc = (1.1 1.3) t/cm2 and get area of flange.

Assume bf = 20 tf for both upper and lower flange. Then we have to deal with it
exactly as rolled section but My not Mx
9/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Design of Cross column:
flange

portal frame bracing

web

plan
The cross column can be with the following shapes:

Case 2

Case 1

Case 3

Economic

Easiest

Estimation of section:
Here we will deal with each section apart "each IPE resists the moment in its direction.
S x IPE 1 =
S x IPE 2 =

Mx
=P
0.9 1.3
My
0.9 1.3

get IPE no. P

=P

get IPE no. P (NOTE: Sx not Sy )

Checks:
Interaction equ.:
f
1.0 Case I
f ca
f
+ A1 bcx + A 2 bcy
Fc
Fbcx
Fbcy 1.2 Case II

* fca = N / Atot
f bcx =

Mx
y
I xtot

f bcy =

My

I ytot

Calculate Ix and Iy of the 2 IPE together.

in =

* Fc
out =

Lbin
, rx =
rx

I xtot
Atot

I ytot
Lbout
, ry =
ry
Atot

* A1 and A2 as before
10/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
* Calculation of Fbcx and Fbcy:
1- Check compactness:
All flanges as before

c
tf

< 10.91

Case 1:
Web of IPE 1 is always compact because
it is stiffened with flange of the other IPE

IPE 2

699 / F y
dw

<
Web of IPE 2
13 1
tw

Where

1
N IPE 2
+ 1)
*(
2 dw * t w * Fy

Where NIPE 2

IPE 1

A2
Ncol
A1 + A2

Case 2:
Web subjected to
bending and comp.

IPE 2

Web of IPE 1

58/ Fy Compact
0.5d w
<
tw
64/ Fy non - Compact

Web of IPE 2
Where

IPE 1

699 / F y
dw
<
13 1
tw

1
N IPE 2
+ 1)
*(
2 dw * t w * Fy

Where NIPE 2

A2
Ncol
A1 + A2

11/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Web subjected to
comp. only

Beam-Column 3
Case 3:
Web subjected to
comp. only

Web of both IPE 1 and IPE2

Web subjected to
bending and comp.

IPE 2

58/ Fy Compact
0.5d w
<
tw
64/ Fy non - Compact

IPE 1

2- There is no LTB because in these columns,

we use stiffener every 1-1.5 m in the vertical
direction, so the LTB is neglected
Stif

f
.5
1-1

12/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Design of lacing bars and batten plates for combined columns:
Important note: The design of lacing bars and batten plates are not calculated
in the exam except if it is required. (

I-

Design of lacing bars:

Lacing bars are designed on shear force of column as well as 2% of the normal
force.

Q* = Q + 0.02 N

(2% of the normal force is due to buckling)

Calculation of force using method of sections and joints:

The lacing bars together with the column act as a truss, where the 2 columns are
the upper and lower chord of the truss (carry moment and normal), while the
lacing bars (inclined and horizontal) act as its diagonals and verticals (carry
shear).
How to calculate force?
1- 2 plans of lacing bars with single intersection system:
F1

45

Q /2

F2

4 5

Q /2

Q /2

Q /2

Since the given shape has 2 plans of lacing bars, so Q* will be divided to the 2
plans affecting each plan with Q* / 2.
Force in the diagonal: Use method of sections.

x =0

F cos

Q*
2

F=

Q*
2 cos

Force in the horizontal (if any): Use method of joints.

x =0

F = Q* / 2

13/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
2- 1 plan of lacing bars with single intersection system:
F1

F2

4 5

45

Since the given shape has 1 plan of lacing bars, so Q* will be carried by one
plan.
Force in the diagonal: Use method of sections.

x =0

F cos

= Q*

F=

Q*
cos

Force in the horizontal (if any): Use method of joints.

x =0

F = Q*

3- 2 plans of lacing bars with double intersection system:

Q /2
Q /2

F1

F2
a

F1
4 5

F2

45

Q
Joint a
Q /2

Since the given shape has 2 plans of lacing bars, so Q* will be divided to the 2
plans affecting each plan with Q* / 2.
From the equilibrium of joint "a": F1 equals F2 and in opposite directions
So F1 = F2 = F
Force in the diagonal: Use method of sections.

x =0

2* F cos

Q*
2

F=

Q*
4 cos

14/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Summery of previous:
F=

Q*
n m cos

F=

(Force in inclined members)

Q*
(Force in horizontal member if any)
n

Where:

is the inclination of lacing bars with horizontal

n is number of lacing plans.

n = 1 if ONE plan of lacing bars, while n = 2 if TWO plans of lacing bars
m = 1 for single intersection system and m = 2 for double intersection
system.

Dimension of lacing bar:

Note that: The lacing bars may be bolted or welded to the column.
For inclined members: Length of lacing bar = L =

d
cos

(Lcos

= d)

For horizontal members: Length of lacing bar = L = d

- Width of lacing bar = b =
- Thickness of lacing bar

L
10

>3 (for bolted connection)

tmin =

L
(ECP 134)
50

8mm t 20mm

The lacing bars are designed as compression members and checked as tension
members.

- Check of lacing bar as comp. member:

Buckling outside is more critical because it is about the

Lbx = Lby = L

minor axis of the bar

15/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
bt 3
Ix =
rx =
12
x=

Fc =

L
rx

< 140

Ix
=
A

bt 3 / 12
=
bt

12

ECP 134

1.4 6.5 10-5 x2

100

7500

>100

2x

fact =

F
Fc
bt

- Check as tension member:

If bolted:

Anet = (b - / ) * t

If welded:

Anet = Agross = bt

1) fact =
2)

/ = + 2mm

Force
= t/cm2 < Ft = 1.4 t/cm2
Anet

L
L
= = .. 60 (b is the depth of bar)
d
b

If the previous system of lacing bar is unsafe:

1) Increase (t):
tmax = 20 mm

2) Use lacing angles:

Design of section as un-symmetric section and design it as following:

a) As comp. member:
v=

Where L = d / cos

Lout
= 140
rv

Lout = L
16/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Fc = 0.60

1.4 6.5 10-5 v2

v 100

7500

v >100

2v

Note that: we multiplied *0.6 because it is un-symmetric compression member

fact =

Force
= .. Fc
AL

b) As tension member:
Anet = A1 + A2 (

3 A1
)
3 A1 + A2

Where A1 = at
And

in case of welded connection

A1 = (a - / ) t

While A2 = ( a t ) * t
fact =

in case of bolted connection

for bolted and welded

Force
2
1.4 t/cm
Anet

L
60
d

3) Use double lacing bar system:

Force in lacing bar: F =
tmin =

Q*
(i.e the force is decreased to its half)
4 cos

L
50

Lbx = Lbout = 0.7L

ECP 134

Note that: In case of using double lacing bars, we must use packing under one of
the lacing bars with thickness equals to thickness of lacing bar.

17/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Design of connection:
a) If bolted connection:
Force < Rs.s.
0.25 Fu
2
)*
(
Force = (
0.2 Fu )
4
= ..mm 20 mm.

For big change system or use welded connection

b) If welded connection:
Assume

size of weld thickness of lacing bar

S = (5 or 6) mm

Get

Lact =

Force
+ 2S
(2 S ) * (0.2 Fu )

Smin = 4mm (building)

Smin = 6mm (dynamic loads)

Very important note for drawing:

Batten plates must be used at both ends of combined columns connected
by lacing bars.
Also, Batten plate must be used at any connection of vertical bracing.
Depth of batten plates is taken (1 1.25) d
If it is required to draw the whole column, arrangement of lacing bars
and end batten plates must be calculated before drawing.
(1-1.25)d

(1-1.25)d

(1-1.25)d

(1-1.25)d

(1-1.25)d

18/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
II-

Design of batten plates:

The system consists of batten plate together with column acts as multi-storey
frame.

Dimensions of batten plates

See ECP 136 and 137
(1-1.25)d

The height of the 2 end batten plates ranges from

(1-2)d

(1-1.25) d (minimum "d").

(0.75-1)d

The height of the intermediate batten plates

(1-2)d

ranges from (0.75-1) d (minimum "0.75d").

(0.75-1)d
(1-2)d

The distance between batten plates Lz = (1-2) d

(1-1.25)d

Calculation of forces on batten plates:

The force affecting batten plate = Q* = Q + 0.02N (as case of lacing bars)
If the system has 2 plans of batten plates, F = Q* / 2
If the system has one plan of batten plates, F = Q*

19/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
For system with 2 plans of batten plates:

Q /4
2

Q /2
d
2

d
2 R

1
Q /4

Q /4

Q /4

The system is said to be anti-symmetric, so reaction at joint 1 is

Q*/2 Q*
=
2
4

x = 0, so reaction at joint 2 = Q* / 4
d
2

M1 = 0,

R* =

Q*
*a
4

R=

Q * .a
2d

Where: tmin = d /50 Ecp 136 ( as lacing bars)

d is the distance between centerlines of column sections
"a" is distance between assumed joints = Lz + h batten pl
The forces affecting batten plate are
M = R*d/2

d
2

and Q = R

The batten plate may be welded or bolted to column

Checks:
1- Check flexure stress:

M h
0.72 F y
Ix 2

Where: Ix =

t.h
for welded batten plate
12

Or Ix =

t.h
- I for bolted batten plate
12

2- Check shear: q =

3Q
(we use total area for shear as given in ECP13
2 h.t

20/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Design of connection between batten plate and column:
This connection is subjected to torsion and shear
Qy = R

and

Mt = R* d / 2

1- Bolted connection:
The height of the batten plate is taken (0.75-1) d
So we arrange bolts with edge 2d and pitch (3-4) d

The critical bolt (the upper bolt) is subjected to:

Mt

r
Q
n

Vertical force V= Qy /n
Horizontal force = H=

Mt

r2

* y1

Where r 2 = y 2 and y1 is the ordinate of the critical bolt.

H 2 + V 2 Rleast Where R least is the smaller of Rb and RS.S

2- Welded connection:
The height of the weld = h batten plate

Mt

b = flange of column

Q
1
x

Assume size = 10 mm

Important: assume C.G. is the same as that of

Mt

the column.
Calculate Ip = Ix + Iy, also calculate Avl
Point 1

Point 2
V=

Q Mt
+
*x2
Avl I p

H 2 + V 2 0.2 Fu

H=

Mt
* y2
Ip

V=

Mt
*x1
Ip

H=

Mt
* y1
Ip

H 2 + V 2 0.2 Fu

21/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Solved examples:
Example 1:
Design the shown roof column (N=7.00 t., M = 4.00 m.t.). Design also the
combined column using welded batten plates (N = 25.00 t., M = 29.00m.t. Q =
3.00 t.). Design also the batten plate and its welded connection to the column
section. Recheck the batten plate if it is bolted to the column and check the M16
grade 4.6 bolts
1.5
roof
column

2.5

6.5

Combined
column
Fixed
base

Solution:
Q Moment at the partially fixed connection is not

1.5

given, so we can assume moment = zero (hinged

2.5

connection) and the bending moment is as shown

6.5

) Roof column:
Assume f = 1.00 t/cm2

.. Sx =

400
= 400cm 3
1.00

Choose IPE 270

Check:
lbin= 1.5(2.5 +
x=

1.5
) = 4.875m
2

487.5
= 43.5 < 180
11.2

lbout=2.5m
y=

250
= 82.8 < 180
3.02

Fc =1.4-6.5*10-5(82.8)2=0.95 t/cm2

22/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Fca=

N
7
=
= 0.153t / cm 2
A 45.9

f ca 0.153
=
= 0.16 > 0.15
fc
0.95

A1 =

Fbx =

.. [

= 3.96t / cm 2

Take A1 = 1

400
= 0.932t / cm 2
429

Flanges

assume compact .
=

7500
(43.5)

0.85
= 0.88 < 1.00
0.153
1
3.96

Check compactness:
web

FEX =

c
tf

13.5 / 2
= 6.6 < 10.9 compact
1.02

dw = 27 4*1.02 = 23.46 cm

1
7
(
+ 1) = 0.59
2 23.46 * 0.66 * 2.4
d w 23.46
699 / 2.4
= 67.6 compact
=
= 34.73 ] <
13 * 0.59 1
tw
0.66

Lu max =

20b f
Fy

20 * 13.5
2.4

= 174.3cm < Luact = 250cm

.. The cross Section may be non-compact.

F1tb1=

800 AF
800 * 13.5 * 1.02
.cb =
* 1.0 = 1.632 > 1.4 t/cm2
Lu d
250 * 27

.. Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2 (no lateral torsional buckling)

0.16+

0.932
*1.00 = 0.83 < 1.00
1.4

.. Safe and economic.

) Design of combined column:

Assume 2 channel spaced d =
.. Force on 1channel =

650
= 50 cm.
12 15

N M 25 29
+
=
+
= 70.5ton
2 d
2 0.5

23/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Assume f = 1.2 t/cm2

.. A1 [=
d 50
=
= 1.67
h 30

choose 2 channels 300

70.5
= 58.75cm 2
1.2

.. o.k.

Check:
lbin = 1.5*6.5 = 9.75 m

lbout = 6.50 m

Iy[ ] = 2[495+58.8(25)2] = 74490 cm4

rx[ ]= rx[ = 11.7 cm
out

ry[ ]=

Iy

/
in

L z 100
=
= 34.5 < 60
2.9
rZ

= 34.5 < * 57.94 = 38.62

2
3

/
y

975
= 38.7
25.17

rZ= r y of single channel = 2.9 cm

Assume Lz = 2d=100 cm
z

74490
d
= 25.17 ~
= 25cm
2
117.6

650
= 55.55
11.7

A[ ] = 2*58.8 =117.6 cm2

in

= (38.7) 2 + (1.25 * 34.5) 2 = 57.94

ok

Fc = 1.4-6.5*10-5(57.94)2 = 1.18 t/cm2

fca =

25
= 0.213t / cm 2
117.6

f
0.213
( ca ) =
= 0.18 > 0.15
tc
1.18

A2 =

fbcy =

C my
f
1 ca
t Ey

FEy =

0.85
= 0.94 < 1.00
0.213
1
2.23

7500
= 2.23t / cm 2
2
(57.94)

Take A2 = 1

My d
2900
( + e[ ) =
(25 + 2.7) = 1.08t / cm 2
I y[] 2
74490

Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Applying in the interaction equation:

1.08
(0.18) + (
)(1.00) = 0.95 < 1.00
1.4

.. Safe & economic.

24/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
) Design of batten plate:
N = 25 t.

.. Q = 3 +

Q=3t

2
(25) = 3.5t.
100

For using 2 channels, there is 2 plans of batten plate

Dimension of batten plate:
h = (0.75 1) d = 40 cm.

Assume

t=

d 50
=
= 1cm.
50 50

a = Lz + h = 100+40 = 140 cm
M1 = zero

Q /4

.. R*25 = (3.5/4)*140
Or R =

.. R = 4.90 ton.

Q * .a 3.5 * 140
=
= 4.9 t
nd
2 * 50

ECP 136

d
2 R

M = R * d/2 = 4.9*50/2 = 122.5 cmt

Q * a 3.5 * 140
Or M =
=
= 122.5 cmt
2n
2*2

1
ECP 136

Q /4

Very important note: If you want to use the equations of the ECP directly, you
must note that, the definition of "a" and "d" is the opposite (

). This

means the code says:

Qd
Q *a
The longitudinal shear force =
, so R =
na
nd

The moment =

Qd
Qa
, so M =
2n
2n

(n is the number of batten plate plans)

Straining action on batten plate:

Q = R = 4.90 t.

M = 122.5 cmt

If the batten plate is welded:

f=

Ix =

(1.0)(40) 3
= 5333.3cm 4
12

M h 122.5
* 20 = 0.46t / cm 2 < 0.72 * 2.4 = 1.73t / cm 2
=
I x 2 5333.3

25/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
q=

3Q 3
4.90
= *
= 0.12t / cm 2 <
2 A 2 1.0 * 40

Check on weld:

= 0.84t / cm

Qy = 4.90 t.

Mt = 122.5 cm.t

Assume size of weld = 10 mm

10

Avl = 40*1 = 40 cm2

Ix =

(1)(40)
+ 2(1)(10)( 20.5) 2 = 13738cm 4
12

Iy = 2[

(1)(10) 3
+ (1)(10)(5 2.7) 2 ] + (1)(40)( 2.7 0.5) 2 = 466cm 4
12

40
e=2.7

IP = Ix + Iy = 14204 cm4
Point (1):

q1x = 0 +

122.5 40
* ( + 1) = 0.18t / cm2
14204
2

q1y = 0 +

122.5
* (10 2.7) = 0.063t / cm 2
14204

q1 max = (0.063)2 + (0.18)2 = 0.19t / cm2 < 0.2Fu = 0.72t / cm

Point (2):

q2x = 0 +
q2y =

122.5 40
* ( + 1) = 0.18t / cm 2
14204
2

4.90 122.5
+
* (2.7) = 0.146t / cm 2
40 14204

q2 max = (0.146)2 + (0.18)2 = 0.23t / cm 2 < 0.2Fu = 0.72t / cm

Snew = 10*

0.23
= 3.2
0.72

take s = 5mm

If the batten plate is bolted: Dim of plate as before.

Assume e = 2*1.6 = 3.2 cm

40

40 2 * 3.2
Number of pitches =
= 5.25 Taken 5 bolts (6 bolts)
4 * 1.6

Pitch =

40 2 * 3.2
6.6 cm and e= 3.5 cm
5
/

Area of hole = d t= 1.8*1 = 1.8 cm

26/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Ix =

(1.0)(40) 3
2 * 1.8(3.3 2 + 9.9 2 + 16.5 2 ) = 4157cm 4
12

f=

M h 122.5
* 20 = 0.59t / cm 2 < 0.72 * 2.4 = 1.73t / cm 2
=
I x 2 4157

q=

3Q 3
4.90
= *
= 0.12t / cm 2 <
2 A 2 1.0 * 40

Check on bolt:

= 0.84t / cm (use gross area)

Qy = 4.90 t.

Mt = 122.5 cm.t

2
2
2
2
r 2 = 2 (3.3 + 9.9 + 16.5 ) = 762.3 cm

Bolt (1):

V= 4.9 / 6 = 0.82 t
122.5
H=
* 16.5 = 2.65 t
762.3

* 1.6 2
R= 2.65 + 0.82 = 2.77 t > Rss = 0.25*4
= 2.01t
4
2

So we have to increase dimensions of the plate to be 50 cm instead of 40 cm and

increase number of bolts, and then recheck.

27/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Example 2:
For the shown main system with spacing = 7.00 m
It is required to:
1- Design a built-up section for column 1using section composed of 4 angles.
2- Design also its welded lacing bars and its connection to the column.
3- Redesign the lacing bars if it is bolted to the column as well as its connection.
4- Redesign bolted lacing bars with horizontal member and its connection.
5- Redesign the lacing bars using double intersection system assuming welded
connection.
6- Redesign the lacing system using lacing angles assuming bolted connection.

IPE400

1.5

Col 1
5.0

7.0m

10 10

25.0m

Solution:
To get reactions from crane girder
Dead load: Assume o.w. of crane girder = 0.2 t /m'
RD.L. = 0.7*2 = 1.40 ton
Live load:

RL.L.

5.50
= 10 + 10 *
= 17.86ton
7.50

* Assume impact factor I = 25%

10

10

1.5

5.5

.. RL.L.+ I = RL.L. (1+I) = 17.86*1.25 = 22.32 t.

*

Lateral shock =
(Px) =

1
of wheel load without impact
10
1
RL.L. =1.79 ton.
10

28/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
*

Total braking force =

1
1
vertical loads without impact = (2 *10) = 2.86ton.
7
7

Since bracing is not given, so we can assume a suitable bracing system that the
braking force is resisted by the column and the column is not subjected to My

1- Straining actions on column (1):

Py = RD.L. + RL.L. +I = 1.40 + 22.32 = 24.22 ton

B
2

B
2 =1.43

Px = 1.79 ton, M = Px * h = 1.79*5.00 = 8.93 m.t.

Choice of section:
Assume d =

500
= 35 cm.
12 15

Assume h =

35
= 25 cm
1.5

.. F one side (on 2 angles) =

N M 24.22 8.93
+
=
+
= 37.62t
2 d
2
0.35

Force on one angle = 37.62 / 2 = 18.81t

Assume f = 1.20 t/cm2
Choose angles 90*9

A1L = 18.81 / 1.2 = 15.7 cm2

too large for h = 25 cm.

Take d = 40 cm and h = 30 cm and use angles 90*9

or any other estimation

Check:
A4Ls = 4AL = 4*15.5 = 62 cm2

y
40 cm

I y = 4 [116 + 15.5 * (20)2] = 25264 cm4

4 angles 90*9

I x = 4 [116 + 15.5 * (15)2] = 14414 cm4

ry =

x 30 cm

25264
= 20.19 20 cm
62

* f ca =

24.22
= 0.39 t / cm2
62

* f bx =

893
* ( 20 + 2.54) = 0.8 t / cm 2
25264

rx =

14414
= 15.25 15 cm
62

29/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
* Fc :
Lbin = 2.10*5.00 = 10.5 , Lbout = 5.00 m
1- Global buckling:/y =

1050
= 52
20.19

/x =

500
= 32.8
15.25

2- Local buckling:Shape of lacing bars:

So L Z = 35 cm d h

35 cm

70

70

r min = r v of single angle = 1.76 cm

z =

35
= 19.9 < 60
1.76

40
Elevation

30
Side view

3- Overall buckling: y = 52 2 + 19.9 2 = 55.67

x = 32.8 2 + 19.9 2 = 38.36
Z = 19.9 <

2
* 55.67 = 37.1
3

O.K.

F C = 1.4 6.5 * 10-5 * (55.67)2 = 1.2 t / cm2

* A2:
f ca 0.39
= 0.32 > 0.25
=
FC
1.2
FEX =

A2 =

7500
55.67 2

= 2.42 t / cm2

0.85
= 1.01
0.39
1
2.42

* Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Applying in the interaction equation:
0.32 +

0.8
* 1.01 = 0.9 < 1.2 (case of lateral shock)
1.4

So we may try 4 angles 80 * 8 to get an economic sec.

30/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
2- Design of lacing bar as single intersection system:
Q = 1.786 t

Force in lacing bar F = +

.. F = +

Q* = Q +

N = 24.22
Q*
2 cos

2
N = 2.27t
100

= tan-1 (35/40) = 410

2.27
= 1.5t
2 * 1 * cos 41

Dimension of lacing bar:

l=

d
40
=
= 53cm
cos 45 cos 41

Thickness of lacing bar t. =

Assume b =

l
= 5.00cm.
10

l
53
=
= 1.06cm Taken 12mm
50 50

Check of lacing bar as comp. member:

lbx = l = 53 cm
..

Fc =

1.4
12

132.5 2

12

1.2
12

= 0.35cm

t = 1.4 cm.

= 0.4

7500

lbx
53
=
= 151.5 > 140
rx
0.35

Increase (t)
rx =

rx =

= 0.43 t/cm2

fact =

53
= 132.5 < 140
0.4
1.5
= 0.21t / cm 2 < 0.43 t/cm2
5.00 * 1.40

Check as tension member:

fact =

1.5
2
= 0.21t / cm 2 < 1.4 t/cm no need for it in case of welded lacing
5.00 *1.40

l
53
=
= 10.6 << 60
b 5.00

Design of welded connection:

Assume size of weld s = 6 mm (min. size in case of dynamic loads)
lact =

F
1.61
+ 2S =
+ 2 * 0.6 = 3.06cm
2 * S (0.2 Fu )
2 * 0.6 * 0.72

take lact = 5.00 cm.

31/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
3- If lacing bars are bolted to the column: Assume use M16 grade 4.6
For dimensions, the same as in case of welded except b= 10cm > 3*1.6= 4.8 cm
because this is the minimum edge from both sides.
Check compression is the same as in welded
Check tension: f =

1.5
= 0.34t / cm 2 < 1.4 t/cm2
5 * 1.4 (1.8 * 1.4)

l
53
=
= 10.6 << 60
b 5.00

.. o.k. The same as in welded

Design of the bolted connection:

tmin = 14mm of lacing or 9mm of angle 90
Rss = 0.25*4

Rb = 0.8*3.6*1.6*0.9=4.1t

* 1.6 2
= 2.01t < 4.01t, so R least =2.01t > 1.5t (force on lacing)
4

Ok safe use one M16 bolt

4- If lacing bars are bolted to the column and have horizontal member:
The diagonal will be the same as previous
The horizontal member:
F=

Q * 2.27
=
= 1.135 t
2
2

lin = lout = d = 40 cm
Dimensions of horizontal bar:
l = 40 cm,

b= 40/10 = 4 cm, tmin= 40/50 = 0.8 cm

Check as compressions member:

r=

0.8
12

= 0.23 cm

40
= 173 > 140
0.23

40
= 138 < 140
0.29

Take t = 1 cm,

r=

1
12

= 0.29 cm

32/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Fc =

7500
138 2

= 0.39 t/ cm2

fca =

1.135
= 0.28 t/ cm2 < 0.39 t/ cm2
4 *1

Check as tension member (bolted)

l
40
=
=10 < 60
b
4

f=

1.135
= 0.51 t/ cm2 < 1.4 t/ cm2 o.k.
4 * 1 (1.8 * 1)

5- Design of lacing bar as double intersection system :( welded connection)

Q*
Force in lacing bar F = +
2 * 2 cos

.. F = +

= tan-1 (35/40) = 410

2.27
= 0.75t
2 * 2 * cos 41

Dimension of lacing bar:

l=

40
d
=
= 53cm
cos 45 cos 41

Thickness of lacing bar t. =

Assume b =

l
= 5.00cm.
10

53
l
=
= 1.06cm Taken 12mm
50 50

Check of lacing bar as comp. member:

lbx =0.7 l = 0.7*53 = 37.1cm
..
Fc =

7500
106 2

rx =

t
12

1.2
12

= 0.35cm

lbx 37.1
=
= 106 < 140
rx
0.35
= 0.67 t/cm2

fact =

0.75
= 0.125t / cm 2 < 0.67 t/cm2
5.00 * 1.20

Check as tension member welded:

fact =

0.75
2
= 0.125t / cm 2 < 1.4 t/cm
5.00 *1.20

l
53
=
= 10.6 << 60
b 5.00

33/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
6- Design of lacing angles: (bolted connection)
Q = 1.786 t

Force in lacing bar F = +

.. F = +

Q* = Q +

N = 24.22
Q*
2 cos

2
N = 2.27t
100

= tan-1 (35/40) = 410

2.27
= 1.5t
2 * 1 * cos 41

Dimension of lacing angle:

l=

40
d
=
= 53cm = Lb
cos 45 cos 41

Assume minimum angle 55*5 (using bolt M16) or choose as comp member
Check as compression member:
v

53
=49.53 < 140
1.07

Fc = 0.6 * [1.4 6.5*10-5(49.53)2] = 0.74 t/ cm2

fca =

1.5
5.32

= 0.28 t/ cm2 < 0.74 t/ cm2

Check as tension member:

A1 = (5.5 1.8) 0.5 = 1.85 cm2
Anet = 1.85 +
f=

A2 = (5.5 0.5) 0.5 = 2.5 cm2

3 * 1.85
*2.5 = 3.6 cm2
3 * 1.85 + 2.5

1.5
= 0.42 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/ cm2
3.6

l
53
=
= 9.6 < 60
d
5.5

34/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Example 3:
For the shown figure, it is required to design the B.U. column using the given
section (4 angles and 2 plates). The straining actions are M=30mt and N=40t.
1.5
roof
column

d
1

2.5

d
2

Combined
column

6.0
Proposed
section

Fixed
base

Solution:
Assume d1 =

6.0
= 40 cm
12 15
d1
= 1.5
d2

Note economic section

Take

d2 =

d1
= 25 cm
1.5 2

You can assume any other reasonable dimensions estimation of section:

Assume F c = 1.2 t / cm2
Force on one side:

3000 40
+
= 95 t
40
2

Assume h p 25 cm

Area of one side:

95
= 79 cm2
1.2

& t p = 1 cm

Actual h of plate = 25 + 2 e (but we don't know the angles yet)

Area of one angle =

79 25
= 27 cm2 use angle120
2

Too large

Spacing is 25 cm & angle is 120 mm is not logic

So we have to increase the estimated dimensions & take thicker plate
Assume d 1= 50 cm
Force on one side =
h p 30

& d 2 = 30 cm
3000 40
+
= 80 t
50
2

Area =

80
= 66.7 cm2
1.2

& t p = 15 mm

Area of one angle =

66.7 30 * 1.5
= 10.85 cm
2

35/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Use angle 75 * 7 (we may use 80*8)
h plate = 30 + 2 * 2.03 = 34 cm
I in = 4 [52.4 + 10.1* 252] + 2 *(34*1.5) (25 + 2.03 +
I out = 4 [52.4 + 10.1* 152] + 2 *

1.5 2
) = 104176 cm4
2

1.5 * 34 3
= 19126 cm4
12

A = 4 * 10.1 + 2 * 34 * 1.5 = 142.4 cm2

rin =
/
in
=

104176
= 27 cm
142.4

rout =

19126
= 11.6 cm
142.4

1.5 * 600
= 33.3
27

out =

600
= 51.7
11.6

Assume using lacing bar with angle 450

L z = 2 * 50 cm = 100 cm (2 d)
To calculate rmin for the part buckles alone:
yX

1.5
34 * 1.5 *
+ 2 * 10.1 * (1.5 + 2.03)
2
x=
= 1.54 cm
2 * 10.1 + 34 * 1.5

34 * 1.53
1.5
Iy=
+ 34 * 1.5 (1.54 - ) 2 + 2 [52.4
12
2

part behaves
lonely

+ 10.1 * (1.5 + 2.03 1.54)2] = 226.19 cm4

rmin =

226.19
= 1.78 cm
2 * 10.1 + 34 * 1.5

z =

100
= 56.2 < 60
1.78

in = 56.2 2 + 33.3 2 = 65.3

z = 56.2 >

2
* 65.3 = 43.5
3

Unsafe

So we can use horizontal member. Lz = d = 50 cm

z =

50
= 28.1
1.78

in = 28.12 + 33.3 2 = 43.6

FC = 1.4 6.5 * 10-5 * 51.72 = 1.23 t / cm2

f ca =

40
= 0.28 t / cm2
142.4

36/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
f ca 0.28
= 0.23 > 0.15
=
FC 1.23

A2 =
1

0.85
0.28

= 0.91 < 1

take A2 = 1

7500 / 43.6 2

Applying in the interaction equation:

3000
* ( 25 + 2.03 + 1.5)
104176
= 0.82 < 1
0.23 +
1.4

O. K.

Example 4:

L3

Calculate Lz for the shown section. The section

30

L1

and 30 cm.
60

L1

L3

L2

Point 1 is fixed by the lacing bar in the side

view

Pt1

Always for 4 angles we can use Lz = d

60 cm
Elevation

120 cm

Lz = 60 cm

60 cm

Solution:

L2

Pt1
60 cm

consists of 4 angles as shown. The distance is 60

30 cm
Side view

37/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Example 5:
For the shown frame it is required to:

7m

1. Suggest a suitable bracing system

2. Design column using the shown section
using batten plate

70cm

5t

3. Calculate force affecting batten plate

25 m

4. If lacing bars are used, calculate the

20 t

maximum force.
Solution:

N = 20 t

3.5m

2. M = 5 * 7 = 35 mt

3.5m

1. Bracing system is as shown

C = (20/2) + (35/0.7) = 60 t
Area of 2 angles = 60 / 1.2 = 50 cm2
6.0m

Area of 1 angle = 50/2 = 25 cm2

Use 4 angels 120 * 12
A = 4 * 27.5 = 110 cm2
Iy = 4 (368 + 27.5 * 352) = 136222 cm4

Assume thickness of batten plate = 70/50 = 1.4 cm (tmin)

2

1.4

Ix = 4368 + 27.5 * 3.4 + = 3321 cm4

2

ry =

136222
= 35.2 cm
110

rx =

3321
= 5.5 cm
110

To calculate buckling lengths:

Q It's a frame, so we have to use alignment chart

Assume

Ic = 2-3 Ig

So GA = 10 (hinged base)
GB =

Ic / 7
= 7.14
0.5 I c / 25

lb in = 2.8 * 7 = 19.6 m

K = 2.8
,

lb out = 3.5 m
38/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
'in =

1960
= 55.7
35.2

'
out
=

350
= 63.6
5.5

Assume Lz = d = 70 cm (use batten plate each 70 cm)

rmin = rv = 2.35 cm
z =

70
= 29.8 < 60
2.35

in = 55.7 2 + (1.25 * 29.8) 2 = 67

in = 63.6 2 + (1.25 * 29.8) 2 = 73.7

z = 29.8 < (2/3)* 73.7 = 49.1

Fc = 1.4 6.5 * 10-5 (73.7)2 = 1.05 t/cm2

fca = 20/110 = 0.18 t/cm2
f ca
= 0.18/1.05 = 0.17 > 0.15
Fc

FEX = 7500/672 = 1.67 t/cm2

A1 =

fbx =

0.85
= 0.95 < 1
0.18
1
1.67

take A1 = 1

3500
* (35 + 3.4) = 0.99 t/cm2
136222

Applying in the interaction equation

0.17 + (0.99 / 1.4) = 0.88 < 1

ok

3. There is one plan of batten plates

Assume hpl = (0.75 1) d = 60 cm
a = lz + hpl = 70 + 60 = 130 cm
d = 70 cm

n=1

Q
d
2

Q* = 5 + 0.02 * 20 = 5.4 t
Q=R=

5.4 * 130
= 10 t
1 * 70

Q /2

Q /2

39/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
5.4 * 130
= 351 cmt
2 *1
F1

4. If using lacing bars:

Q* = 5.4 t ,
F1 =

= 45 o

F2

45

M=

5.4
= 7.64 t
1 * 1 cos 45

F2 = Q* = 5.4 t

40/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Example 6:
The given figure shows the main structural system of an industrial building:
1:10
IPE 400
3.0 m
shape 1
7.0 m

col 1

H
V

30

shape 2

Design column "1" in the following cases:

1- Design a BU section for column "1" if we use portal frame bracing outside.
Use shape 1 for design.
2- Redesign a BU section for column "1" if we use portal frame bracing outside.
Use shape 2 for design.
Data :Crane girder wheel loads are 15t each and spaced 2m.
Spacing between frames = 6 m

41/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Solution
The crane is simply supported over columns
Assume ow = 0.15 t/m

15

15

RLL = 15+15*4/6 = 25 t
2

Py = 25 1.25 + 0.15 * 6 = 32.15 t (max)

PD = 0.15 6 = 0.9t (min)

Px = 0.1 25 = 2.5 t
For column "1"

32.15 t
0.4m

2.5 t

Inside plan [cantilever]

32.15 t
0.4m

0.9 t

32.15 t
0.4m

2.5 t

0.4m

2.5 t
BFIB 360

BFIB 360
IPE 500

IPE 500

5.0m

Case of max normal

5.0

Case of max moment

Case I : Max moment & corresponding normal

N = 32.15 + 0.9 = 33.05 t
Mx = (32.15 - .09) 0.4 + 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 27.15 mt
Case II: Max normal & corresponding moment
N = 32.15 * 2 = 64.3 t
Mx = 2 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 29.3 mt
Note that we have to design the column twice for each case BUT
Q For case II

Mx2 >Mx1 & N2 >N1

Case II is more critical

42/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
1) BU of shape 1 using portal frame bracing outside:
B=

2 15
= 4.28t
7

2B = 4.3 x 2 = 8.6 ton , will be carried by 2 columns.

Inplan:
From case of studying the column inside plan (cantilever) same as previous
case.
N = 32.15 * 2 = 64.3 t

4.3

4.3
My

Mx = 2 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 29.3 mt

Outplan:
My = 4.3 5 = 21.5 mt (outside plan)

4.3

4.3
6.0 m

So we must design 2 sections or design one & check the other

The 2 sections are:
(1) one at the Base Mx & N
(2) at top of column My & N
Estimation of section:
Fbcx = Fbcy = 1 t/cm2
Sx IPE 1 =

2930
= 2930 cm3
1

Sx IPE 2 =

Use IPE 600

2150
= 2150 cm3
1

Use IPE 550

Properties of section:
A = 134 + 156 = 290 cm2
IY (inside) = 92080 + 2670 = 94750 cm4
IX (outside)

needs y

y=

55
2 = 12.7 cm
290

134 *

IPE500
y
IPE600

IX (outside) = 3390 + 156 * 12.72 + 67120 + 134 (55/2 12.7)2 = 125023 cm4
43/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
94750
= 18 cm
290

rYin =

rxout =

125023
= 20.7 cm
290

lb in = 2.1*5 = 10.5 cm (cantilever)

Outside Allowed to sway with Rigid connections because it's frame
We must use GA & GB
QInertia of the girder is not given we have to assume it reasonably

Assume Ic = 2Ig
GA = 10 (hinged outside)

GB =

I c 15 (2 I g ) / 5
=
= 2.4
I g 16
Ig /6

From chart (Allowed to sway)

Lout = 2.2 5 = 11m

K =2.2
in

1050
= 58.3
18

out

1100
= 53.14
20.7

Fc = 1.4 6*10-5 (58.3)2 = 1.18 t/cm2

fca = 64.3 / 290 = 0.22 t/cm2

f ca 0.22
= 0.19 > 0.15
=
Fc
1.18

Use hl stiffener every 1m or 1.5

Lu act = 1 m or 1.5
Calculate Lu max =

20 * b

Stiff

2.4

Check for section 1: (at base)

Mx = 29.3 mt, N = 64.3 t and My = zero

M
x

Where b = 22 cm (inside for section at base)

Lu max =

20 * 22
2.4

= 284 cm > 100 or 150 cm

NO LTB (We can neglect this check as it is always no LTB)

44/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Check compactness:
IPE600
Check

0.5(22 1.2 2 * 1.9)

C
= 4.47 <10.9 compact
=
1.9
tf

Web of IPE 600 is stiffened by the flange of IPE 550, so it is compact

IPE550
0.5(21 1.11 2 * 1.72)
C
= 4.78 <10.9 compact
=
1.72
tf

For web of IPE 550: Get =

N IPE 500 = 64.3 *

1
N
+ 1

2 d w * t w * F y

134
= 29.7 t
134 + 156

M
y

dw = 0.5* (55 41.72) = 24.06cm.

=

1
29.7

+ 1 = 0.73

2 24.06 * 1.11 * 2.4

Limit =

699 / 2.4
= 53.1
13 * 0.73 1

d w 24.06
=
= 21.7 < 53.1
tw
1.11

Wes and flanges are compact, so Fbcx =Fbcy = 0.64Fy

fbcx =

2930
* 30 = 0.93 t/cm2
94750

FEx =

7500
= 2.2
58.32

A1 =

0.85
= 0.94
0.22
1
2.2

A1 = 1

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.19 + 0.93/1.536 = 0.79 < 1.2 (section at base) ok
If unsafe: use IPE 600 in both directions

45/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Stiff

Beam-Column 3
Check for section 2: (at base) Mx = zero, N = 64.3 t and My = 21.5mt
f bcy =

A2 =

2150
2
* (55 12.7) = 0.73 t/cm
125023

0.85
= 0.93
0.22
1
2.65

FEy =

7500
= 2.65
53.142

A2 = 1

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.19 + 0.73/1.536 = 0.66 < 1.2 (section at top) ok

2- If we use "shape 2":

Estimation of section:
Fbcx = Fbcy = 1 t/cm2
Sx IPE 1 =

2930
= 2930 cm3
1

Sx IPE 2 =

Use IPE 600

2150
= 2150 cm3
1

Use half IPE 550

Properties of section:
A = (1/2) * 134 + 156 = 223 cm2

y=

25.8 *

25.8
* 1.11 + 1.72 * 21 * 26.6
2
= 5.97cm
223

25.8 3
Iy = 3390 + 1.11 *
+ 1.11 * 25.8 (25.8 5.97)2
12

Mx
Stiff

1 IPE 550
2

IPE 600

I xin = 92080 + 0.5 * 2670 = 93415 cm4

21*1.72 (26.2)2 = ..

46/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Head PL.

Crane girder
Head PL.

Packing

Stiff PL.

Stiff.Pl
Bracket
Portal Frame Bracing Rafter

Stiff PL.

Stiff PL.

Stiff PL.

47/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3

Head PL.

Crane girder
Head PL.

Packing

Stiff PL.

Stiff.Pl
Bracket
Portal Frame Bracing Rafter

Stiff PL.

Stiff PL.

Stiff PL.

48/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Beam-Column 3
Head PL.

Crane girder
Head PL.

Packing

Stiff PL.

Stiff.Pl
Bracket
Portal Frame Bracing Rafter

Stiff PL.

Stiff PL.
Stiff PL.

49/49-B.C-3
2007-2008

Examples-Column 4
Very important solved example:
The given figure shows the main structural system of an industrial building:

1:10
IPE 400
Vc

3.0 m

col 2

5.0 m

col 1

H
V

30
It is required to:
a) Design column "1" in the following cases:
1- Design a rolled section for column "1" in the following cases using bracing
system and calculate the loads on the bracing system you suggested.
2- Redesign a rolled section for column "1" using portal frame bracing. If
unsafe, try BU section.
3- Redesign a BU section for column "1" (2 IPE with batten plates) using no
bracing at all (Cantilever)

b) Design the welded and bolted connection between the double crane bracket
and column "1" using pretensioned bolts M24 grade 8.8 for the case of using
portal frame bracing outside.

c) Design column 2 (the column is braced outside) in the following cases

1/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
1- Using horizontal member at the level of crane girder.
2- Without using horizontal member at the level of crane girder.
Data:

Crane girder wheel loads are 15t each and spaced 2m.
Spacing between frames = 6 m
Assume brackets are IPE 500, the crane girder BFIB360, distance between
centerline of crane girder and centerline of column is 40 cm. Assume braking
force is to be carried by 2 columns.
The total reactions due to roof loads and crane are as follows
H = 6t and V = 38 t

Solution:
The crane is simply supported over columns
Assume ow = 0.15 t/m

15

15

RLL = 15+15*4/6 = 25 t
Vc = 25 1.25 + 0.15 * 6 = 32.15 t (max)
Hc = 0.1 25 = 2.5 t
For column "1"

QD = 0.15 6 = 0.9t (min)

Inside plan [cantilever]

To calculate Mx:

2/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
32.15 t
0.4m

2.5 t

32.15 t
0.4m

0.9 t

32.15 t
0.4m

2.5 t

0.4m

2.5 t
BFIB 360

BFIB 360
IPE 500

IPE 500

5.0m

Case of max normal

5.0

Case of max moment

Case I : Max moment & corresponding normal

N = 32.15 + 0.9 = 33.05 t
Mx = (32.15 - .09) 0.4 + 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 27.15 mt
Case II: Max normal & corresponding moment
N = 32.15 * 2 = 64.3 t
Mx = 2 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 29.3 mt
Note that we have to design the column twice for each case BUT
Q For case II

Mx2 >Mx1 & N2 >N1

Case II is more critical

a) 1) using Bracing system :

B=

15
= 2.14t
7

2B * 2 = 4B = 2.14 4 = 8.6 t
For h 5m use horizontal member at mid height

3/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
2B

F1

4B = 8.6 t

2B

F2
F3

5.0

6.0

-1

= tan

5
= 39.8o
6

2F2 cos = 8.6

F2 = 5.6 t

F1 = 5.6 cos = 4.3t

F3 = zero

Design the 3 previous members as Tension & compression

M1 Star shape

Lin = Lout = 6m

M2 2 angles back to back

Lin = 0.5l Lout = 0.75l

2

Where l= 5 + 6 = 7.81m

Design of column:
Assume Fbcx = 1 t/cm2

Estimation of section
29.3 100
=1
Sx

fca =

Sx = 2930 cm

2
64.3
= 0.41t / cm
156

Fc Lin = 2.15 = 10.5m

in =

Use IPE 600

1050
= 43
24.3

Lout = 2.5 m
out =

250
= 54
4.66

Fc = 1.4 6.5 10-5 * 542 = 1.2 t/cm2

4/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
f ca
0.41
= 0.34 > 0.15
=
1.2
Fc

fbx =

2930
= 0.95 t/cm2
3070

Fbcx

11 1.2 1.9
C
2
= 4.47 <10.91
=

1.9
tf

dw = 60 4 1.9 = 52.4 cm
=

1
64.3
[
+ 1 ] = 0.71 > 0.5 (compression member)
2 52.4 1.2 2.4

d w 52.4
=
= 44 < 54.6
tw
1.2

699
= 54.6
(13 1) 2.4
The section is compact

Luact = 2.5 m
Lumax =

20 22
2.4

= 284cm

= -0.5 (for the suggested bracing system)

Cb = 1.75 1.05 0.5 + 0.3(0.5)2 = 1.3
Lu max =

0.5M

1380 (22 1.9)

1.3 = 520cm
60 2.4
2

No LTB Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm

A1 =

0.85
= 0.94 A1 = 1
0.41
1
4.06

Where FEx =

7500
2

= 4.06 t/cm2

43

Applying Interaction Equation

0.41 0.95
+
* 1 = 0.96 < 1.2 (Because presence of lateral shock)
1.2 1.536

This is the most economic solution. So if we can use Bracing, we must use
bracing.
bracing
5/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
2) Using portal frame bracing:
Bracing force of 2 cranes are

p
15
= 4.3t
* 2 each side = 2
7
7

My = 4.3 5 = 21.5 mt (outside plan)

From case of studying the column inside 4.3
plan (cantilever)

4.3
My

N = 32.15 * 2 = 64.3 t
Mx = 2 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 29.3 mt

4.3

4.3
6.0 m

So we must design 2 sections or design one & check the other

The 2 sections are:
(1) One at the Base Mx & N
(2) At top of column My & N

Estimation of section:
Assume f = 0.8 t/cm2 [for there is My]
2930
= 0.8 Sx = 3660 cm3
Sx
There is no IPE of Sx = 3660
There is Mx & My So use BFIB Use HEB 500

Lbin = 2.1 5 = 10.5m

Outside Allowed to sway with Rigid connections because it's frame
We must use GA & GB
QInertia of the girder is not given we have to assume it reasonably

Assume Ic = 2Ig
GA = 10 (hinged outside)

6/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
I c 15 (2 I g ) / 5
=
= 2.4
I g 16
Ig /6

GB =

"N "

:
"N "

We assume Ic = (2 3) Ig (if it's not given)

From chart (Allowed to sway)

Lout = 2.2 5 = 11m

K =2.2
1050
= 49.5
21.2

in =

out =

64.3
2
= 0.27 t/cm
239

fca =

1100
= 151.3 < 180
7.27
7500

Fc =

= 0.33 t/cm2

151.3

f ca 0.27
=
= 0.82
Fc
0.33

Too large

Use BFIB 600

in =

1050
= 41.7
25.2

7500

Fc =

out =
2

= 0.31 t/cm

Fca =

156

f ca

Fc

Fbcx

1100
= 156
7.07

64.3
2
= 0.24 t/cm
270

0.24
= 0.77
0.31

C
=
tf

15

1
* 1.55 3
2
= 3.74 <10.9
3

dw = 60 43 = 48 cm
=

64.3
1
[
+ 1 ] = 0.68 >0.5
2 48 1.55 * 2.4

699
= 57.5
(13 1) 2.4

dw
48
=
= 31 < 57.5
t w 1.55
7/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Compact
Lu act = 5m
Lu max =

20 30
2.4

= 387 cm

There is L.T.B

= zero
fltb 1 =
FEx =

Cb = 1.75

800 30 3
2
*1.75 = 4.2 t/cm
500 60

7500
2

Fbcx = Fbcy =1.4 t/cm

= 4.31 t/cm

41.7

A1 =

0.85
= 0.9
0.24
1
4.31

taken =1

Check for section at base Mx = 29.3 mt

fbx =

2930
2
= 0.51 t/cm
5700

0.24 0.51
+
*1 = 1.14 <1.2
0.31 1.4

Check for section at top of column

My = 21.5 mt
A2 FEy =

7500
2

= 0.31 t/cm

A2 =

156

Fby =

0.85
= 3.84
0.24
1
0.31

2150
= 2.7 >> 1.4 t/cm2
902

We must use BU.S.[

2150
2
= 1.97 t/cm >> 1.4]
1090

Note that: 1090 is the Sy of HEB 1000 (biggest section is the tables)
So if we have portal frame outside we have to use the cross
column as shown:

2 IPE
8/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
The previous 2 pages are only to prove that we cannot use single I-beam if we
have portal frame outside. In the exam, if there is portal frame outside, use
cross column directly.

Estimation of section: Assuming Mx is carried by IPE in direction x and My is

carried by IPE in direction y. Assume Fbcx = Fbcy = 1 t/cm2
Sx IPE 1 =

2930
= 2930 cm3
1

Sx IPE 2 =

Use IPE 600

2150
= 2150 cm3
1

Use IPE 550

We have to treat the whole section as one part:

A = A1 + A2 = 156 + 134 = 290 cm2

IPE 600

Properties of area:
Stiff

Ix = Ix 1 + Iy 2 = 92080 + 2670 = 94750 cm4

Iy = Iy 1 + Ix 2 = 3390 + 67120 = 70510 cm4
rx =

94750
= 18.07 cm
290

ry =

IPE 550

70510
= 15.6 cm
290

Fc: Lb in = 2.1*5 = 10.5 m

I c 15 (2 I g ) / 5
=
= 2.4
I g 16
Ig /6

Lb out GA = 10 (hinged base)

GB =

K =2.2

Lout = 2.2 5 = 11m

in =

1050
= 58.1 < 180
18.07

out =

1100
= 70.51 < 180
15.6

Fc = 1.4 6.5*10-5 *(70.51)2 = 1.076 t/cm2

Check for section 1: (at base) Mx = 29.3 mt, N = 64.3 t and My = zero
fca =
FEx =

64.3
= 0.22 t/cm2
290
7500
2

f ca
Fc

0.22
= 0.205 > 0.15
1.076

= 2.22 t/cm2

58.1

9/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4

fbx =

0.85
= 0.9 4
0.205
1
2.22

taken =1

29.3 * 100
* 30 = 0.927 t/cm2
94750

Fbcx

0.5(22 1.2 2 * 1.9)

C
= 4.47 <10.9
=
1.9
tf

Limit of compact:
Web of IPE 600:

58
2.4

Mx

= 37.44

Stiff

dw = 0.5* (60 41.9) = 26.2 cm.

IPE 600

A1 =

IPE 550

d w 26.5
=
= 22.1 < 37.44
tw
1.2

Lu act = distance between stiffeners (Take it 1m)

Lu max =

20 22
2.4

= 284 cm

There is no L.T.B

Fbcx =1.536 t/cm

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.205 +

0.927
= 0.8 < 1.2
1.536

Case "B" lateral shock is included

Check for section 2: (at base) Mx = zero, N = 64.3 t and My = 21.5mt

fby =

7500
70.512

f ca

= 1.51 t/cm2

Fc

A2 =

0.22
= 0.205 > 0.15
1.076

0.85
= 0.98
0.205
1
1.51

Taken =1

29.3 * 100
* 30 = 0.927 t/cm2
94750

0.5(21 1.11 2 * 1.72)

C
= 4.78 <10.9
=
1.72
tf

dw = 0.5* (55 41.72) = 24.06cm.

Stiff

IPE 600

FEy =

64.3
= 0.22 t/cm2
290

My

fca =

IPE 550

10/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
d w 24.06
=
= 21.7 < 37.44
tw
1.11

Compact

Lu act = distance between stiffeners (Take it 1m)

Lu max =

20 21
2.4

= 271 cm

There is no L.T.B

Fbcx =1.536 t/cm

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.205 +

0.927
= 0.8 < 1.2
1.536

Case "B" lateral shock is included

3) Using No bracing at all:

The braking force of the 2 cranes is distributed on 2
2B

successive columns
Each carries B

But we have 2 cranes

Each carries 2B
2B = 2

My = 4.3 5 = 21.5 mt

15
= 4.3t
7

From case of studying the column inside plan (cantilever)

My
Outside

N = 32.15 * 2 = 64.3 t
Mx = 2 2.5 (5 + 0.5 + 0.36) = 29.3 mt
Section 1 is subjected to Mx My & N
Lin = 2.1*5 = 10.5m = Lout
Note: The base is fixed in both directions (inside & outside)
Use 2 IPE.
F=

Assume spacing is 60cm

64.3 2930
+
= 81 t
2
60

Assume f = 0.8 t/cm2

A = 101 cm

(Presence of My)
Use 2 IPE 450

spaced 60 cm
11/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
d 60
= 1.3 <1.5
=
h 45

Min Mout

But QLin = Lout

d
may be = 1
h

Use batten plate (given) each 1.5d = 1m

A = 298.8 = 197.6 cm2

30

30

rx = 18.5 (outside)
2

ryII = (4.12) + (30) = 30.28

d
2

Ix = 2* 33740 = 67480 cm4

Iy = 2[1680 + 302 * 98.8] = 181200 cm4
out =
z=

1050
= 57
18.5

in =

Lz
rmin

1050
= 35
30.28

rmin of IPE is ry =4.12 cm

Lz assumed 1.5 60 = 100 cm

z=

100
= 24.3
4.12

< 60
<

in

2
57 = 38
3

= (35) + (1.25 24.3) = 46.3

Fc = 1.4 6510-5 572 = 1.19 t/cm2

fca = 64.3/197.6 = 0.32 t/cm2
f ca
= 0.27 > 0.15
Fc

For Built up closed section: Fbcx = Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm2

Outside fbx =
Inside fbx =

2150 45
2
*
= 0.72 t/cm
67480 2

2930
19
2
* (30 + ) = 0.64 t/cm
181200
2

12/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
FE in =

7500
2

= 3.5 t/cm2

FE out =

7500

46.3

Ainside =

= 2.31 t/cm

57

0.85
= 0.98 1
0.32
1
3.5

Aoutside =

0.85
= 0.98 1
0.32
1
2.31

Applying Interaction Eqn.

0.27 +

0.72
0.64
*1 +
* 1 = 1.24 > 1.2
1.4
1.4
We may increase distance between the 2IPE to be 70 cm

d 70
= 1.56
=
h 45

(1.5 2) ok

=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
(b) Design of welded & bolted connection for Bolt & weld.
Case of max moment & corresponding normal

N= 33.05 t

M = (32.15 0.9) 0.4 + 2.5(0.5+0.36) = 14.15 mt

Q = 2.5 t
For case of max normal [weld only]
N = 64.3t
Q= 5t

M = 2.52(0.5 + 0.36) = 4.3 mt

This is a solved example in Eccentric connections 3

=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=

13/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
C) Design of column "2": ( External column with crane):
1) Using horizontal member at level of crane:
41

5.85

Vc
x

Hc

3.0

15.6

38

30
5.0

6t
38t

x=36+25 = 61cm

N crane = V c = 32.15t

H c = 2.5t

M cant = 0.432.15 + 2.50.61 =14.4 mt

M upper = 68-32.150.4 + 2.5(3-0.61) = 41 mt
M1' = 30 - 14.4 = 15.6 mt
We have to check 2 sections
(1) Mx = 30 mt

N= 38t

(2) Mx = 41 mt

N= 5.85t

1) Estimation of section
Use bigger moment for estimation
Assume f= 1.0 t/cm2

4100
= Sx Sx = 4100 cm2
1.0

For IPE Max

Sx = 3070 cm3

Use HEB 500

Check for section 1: N = 38t and Mx = 30mt

Lin GA = 10

GB =

107200 / 8
= 17.4
23130 / 30

14/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Lin = 3.8 8 = 30.4m

Kin = 3.8
Lbont = 5m
3040
= 143.4 < 180
21.2

in =

7500

Fc =

143.4 2

Fbcx

out =

= 0.36 t/cm2

fbx =

500
= 68.8
7.27

3000
= 0.7 t/cm2
4290

C 0.5 * (30 1.45 2 * 2.8)

=
= 4.1 < 10.91
tf
2.8

dw = 50- 42.8 = 38.8 cm

1
38
= [
+ 1] = 0.64 > 0.5
2 38.8 1.45 2.4
d w 38.8
=
= 26.75 < 61.6
t w 1.45

699
= 61.6
(13 * 0.64 1) 2.4
The section is compact

Lu act =5m
= zero Cb = 1.75 (This column has no segments because there is no
horizontal member at mid height. If there is horizontal member at mid height,
will be equal -0.5)
Lu max =
filb1 =

20 30
2.4

= 387cm < 500cm

800 * (30 2.8)

1.75 = 4.7 t/cm2 >1.4 t/cm2
500 50

fca =

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm

38
= 0.16 t/cm2
239

f ca 0.16
=
= 0.44 > 0.15
Fc
0.36

A1 =

There is LTB

FEx =

7500
143.4 2

= 0.36 t/cm2

0.85
= 1.53
0.16
1
0.36

15/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Applying in the interaction equation:
0.44 +

0.7
1.53 = 1.205 1.2
1.4

Check using BFIB "450" for section 2: Section 2 is in the upper segment of
column with M = 41mt and N = 5.85 t
4100
= 0.95 t/cm2
4290

fbx =

Fbcx

C
= 4.1 < 10.91
tf

as before

dw = 38.8 cm
1
5.85
= [
+ 1] = 0.52 > 0.5
2 38.8 1.45 2.4
dw
= 26.75 < 78.3
tw

699
= 78.3
(13 * 0.52 1)( 2.4)

Lb out = 3m
out

Fc =

Lb in = 30.4 (as before)

300
= 41.3
7.27
7500

143.4 2

out

3040
= 143.4
21.2

= 0.36 t/cm2

Luact = 3m

15.6
= 0.38
41

Cb = 1.75 0.381.05+0.3(0.38)2 = 1.39

Lu max =
=

20 30
2.4

= 387cm

1380 * 30 2.8
1.39 = 1342cm
2.4 50

The section is compact & No LTB

Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2

16/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
f ca =

5.85
= 0.024 t/cm2
239

f ca 0.024
=
= 0.07 < 0.15
Fc
0.36

A1 = 1

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.07 +

4100 / 4290
1 = 0.82 < 1.2
1.536

=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Forces on bracing:
RB = 2
h1= 8m
hav =

F3

15
= 4.3 t
7

Rw

h2 = 8 +

15
= 9.5m
10

F4

F1

RB

8 + 9.5
= 8.75m
2

ww = 0.8170

3.0

F2

5.0

8.75
= 245 kg/m
2
6.0

245
Rw =
*15 = 3.675t
1000

For M1 Lin =L
F1

Lout = 1.2L

2F1 cos 45 = 3

For M2 L in = 0.5L

where L= 3 + 3 = 4.24m
F1= 2.6t
2

Lout= 0.75L

2F2 cos = (3.675 + 4.3)

where L= 5 + 6 = 7.81 m
where = tan-1

5
= 40
6

F2 = 5.2t
M3

Lin = Lout = 6m

use star shape ( L > 6m)

F3 = F1 cos = 1.84t
M4 Lin = 0.5L

Lout = L

where L =6m

F4 = F2 cos = 5.2 cos 40 = 4t

17/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Design all previous members as compression members & check

L
d

(2) Without horizontal member at the level of crane girder

5.85

Sec 2

38

8.06

Rw

41
3.0

15.6
30

Sec 1

5.0

M outside
y

M inside
x

6.0

Choose BFIB because of double moment

Assume f=0.5 t/cm2 (Neglecting of My and N)
Sx =

3000
3
= 6000 cm
0.5

Lin GA = 10

Use HEB 650

GB =

107200 / 8
= 17.4
23130 / 30

Lin = 3.8 8 = 30.4m as before

Kin = 3.8
Lout = 8m
in =

Fc =

3040
= 112.2
27.1

7500
2

= 0.57t / cm

out =

800
= 114
6.99

114

Check for section 1:

fca =

2
38
= 0.13t / cm
286

f ca 0.13
=
= 0.23 > 0.15
fc
0.57

18/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
fbx =

3000
= 0.46t / cm 2
6480

Fbcx

C
=
tf

15

fby =

2
806
= 0.84t / cm
932

1
1.6 3.1
2
= 3.58 < 10.9
3.1

dw = 65 43.1 = 52.6 cm
1
32
= [
+ 1] = 0.59 > 0.5
2 52.6 1.6 2.4
d w 52.6
=
= 17 < 67
tw
3.1

699
= 67
(13 * 0.59 1) 2.4

Luact = 8m

Lu max =

20 30
2.4

Ok compact

=387 cm

There is LTB

fltb1 =

800 30 3.1
* C b = 1.43Cb > 1.4t / cm 2
800 65

Since the segment of the column for the points braced outside is 8m, and since
the moment is not straight, so take Cb as unity
2

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm

FEX =

7500
112.2 2

Fbcy = 1.4 t/cm

= 0.6t / cm 2

FEy =

7500
2

= 0.57t / cm

114

The frame is allowed to sway inside plan (Mx)

A1 =

0.85
= 1.09
0.13
1
0.6

The frame is not allowed to sway outside plan (My) because of the presence of
bracing. RB causes transverse load and with hinged base (outside). Cmy=1.0
A2 =

C my = 1
0.13
1
0.57

= 1.3

Applying in the interaction equation:

0.23 +

0.46
0.84
1.09 +
1.3 = 1.37 > 1.2
1.4
1.4

Use HEB 700 & Recheck

19/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
We have to check section "2" with Mx = 41mt, N=5.85t and My = zero
Lu act = 8m, Lb in = 30.4m, Lb out = 8m, Cmx = 0.85
Cb = 1 (moment is not straight in the segment between the points braced outside)
Note: For bracing it carries Rw only
=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
Solved example "2":

(1) Design as hot rolled column if P=2t

(2) Design as cold formed box section (square) if P=2t
(3) Calculate Pmax if we use cold formed rectangular box section

4.0 m

3002006.3
Solution:
(1) Assume Fc = 0.75t/cm2
A =

in

2
2
= 2.7cm
0.75

out

= 100

Lin = Lout = 4m (hinged hinged)

400
= 100
ry

IPE 80

ry = 4cm

IPE 450
IPE =

fca =
Fc =

80 + 450
= 265
2

Choose IPE 270

2
2
= 0.04t / cm
45.9

7500
2

= 0.43t / cm

fca << Fc

(400 / 3.02)

Use smaller IPE & Recheck

Use IPE 200

Fc =

180 =
7500

(400 / 2.24)

fca =

400
r y = 2.22
ry

= 0.235t / cm 2

2
= 0.07 t/cm2 < 0.235 t/cm2
28.5
20/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4

(2) As cold formed:

= 100

A=

400
= 100
rx

2
2
= 2.7cm
0.75

40404

rx = 4 cm = 40
1001004

40 + 100
= 70
2

Use 707036
Fca =

2
= 0.21 t/cm 2
9.5

x=

400
= 148
2.7

Fc =

7500
148

= 0.34t / cm 2

(3)Max "P"

400
= 48.2
8.3

we may check 60603.2

A= 61.2 cm2

Fc = 1.4 6.5 10-5 48.22 = 1.25t/cm2

P
= 1.25 P = 76.4t
61.2

=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=

21/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Solved example "3":

1:10

For the shown cantilever, it is required to:

Spacing
6m

1 Suggest as suitable bracing system and design it

8m

2 Design a rolled section for the column

Take w corrugated sheets = 6 kg/m2

wsteel = 20 kg/m2
2m

8m

Solution:
Since it is double cantilever so we have to make cases of loading
W corr = 6 kg / m2

, W steel = 20 kg / m2

WLL = 60 66.66 * 0.1 = 53.3 kg / m2

WDL= (

6
+ 20) * 6 = 156 kg / m/ = 0.160 t / m/
cos

WLL =53.3 * 6 = 320 kg / m/ = 0.32 t / m/

WTotal = 0.16 + 0.32 = 0.48 t / m/

6.0

Case 1: Maximum normal and corresponding moment

N = 0.48 * 8 + 0.48 * 2 = 4.8 t
M = 0.48 * 8 * 4 - 0.48 * 2 * 1 = 14.4 m t
Case 2: Maximum moment and corresponding normal
N = 0.48 * 8 + 0.16 * 2 = 4.16 t
M = 0.48 * 8 * 4 - 0.16 * 2 * 1 = 15.04 m t
T

Case 1

Case 2
22/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Assume f = 1.2 t / cm2

Sx=

15.04 * 100
= 1253 cm3
1.2

Use I PE 450
Lb out = 4 m , L b in = 2.1 * 8 = 16.8 m
out =

400
= 97 ,
4.12

in =

1680
= 90.8
18.5

Fc = 1.4 6.5*10-5 (90.8)2 = 0.86 t / cm2

Calculation of Fbcx: Check compactness:
For flange:

C 0.5 * (18 0.86 2 * 1.35)

=
= 5.3 < 10.9
tf
1.35

For web: dw = h 2c = 37.8 cm

=

1
4.16
*(
+ 1) = 0.52 > 0.5
2 37.8 * 0.94 * 2.4

Limit =

699 / 2.4
= 78
13 * 0.52 1

d w 37.8
=
= 40 < 78
t w 0.94

Compact

Note that: we used the larger normal force, so the smaller will be compact also.
Segment between braced points
=-1 ,

C b = 1.75 + 0.5 (-1) + 0.3 (- 1)2 = 1

LU act = 4 m

4.0 m

20 *19
Lu max =
= 245 cm < 400 cm
2.4

Segment
SO LT B will occur

y
18*1.35

800 *19 *1.46

F1tb =
*1 = 1.23 t / cm2 < 1.4 t / cm2
1
400 * 45

1
h = (45 2 * 1.46) = 7 cm
6

I=

1.46 * 19
12

6.22*0.86
y

= 834.5 cm4

A = 19 * 1.46 + 7 * 0.94 = 34.32 cm2

rt =

834.5
= 4.9 cm
34.32
23/24-B.C.4

Examples-Column 4
Lu 400
= 82
=
rr
4.9

84

1
= 54.2
2.4

84

cb Lu
c
<
< 188 b
Fy
rt
Fy

Fltb2 = (0.64

, 188

1
= 121.35
2.4

82 2 * 2.4
2
2
)2.4 = 1.18 t / cm < 1.4 t / cm
1.176 * 105 *1

Fltb = 1.182 + 1.232 = 1.7 t / cm > 1.4 t / cm

2

Take F bcx = 1.4 t / cm2

Check for case 1:

f ca =

f ca 0.05
=
= 0.06 < 0.15
F
0.86

4.8
= 0.05 t / cm2
98.8

A1 = 1
0.06 +

, Fbx =

14.4 *100
= 0.96 t / cm2
1500

0.96
* 1 = 0.74 < 1
1. 4

Check for case 2:

f ca =

f ca 0.042
=
= 0.05 < 0.15
F
0.86

4.16
= 0.042 t / cm2
98.8

A1 = 1
0.05 +

, Fbx =

15.04 * 100
= 1 t / cm2
1500

1
* 1 = 0.76 < 1
1. 4

Waste try IPE 400

24/24-B.C.4

Design Of Column Bases

column
R.C.
column head

anchor bolts

base plate

H ING ED BASE
d

b
N

anchor bolts

R.C.
head column

anchor bolts
base
plate

(+0.00)

side view

elevation
horizontal weld
b

B
d
L
plan
1/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

(1) DESIGN OF HINGED BASE
1) Horizontal weld:
(connect column with base plate)
The horizontal weld (weld of web) resists 100% of shear on column,
while all weld resist 60% of the compression on the column, and the
other 40% will be transmitted direct by bearing on the base.
assume weld size "s" = 0.6cm < web thickness
then check
0.6xN
= ... t / cm 2 0.2F u
F =
Atotal
Q
q =
= ... t / cm 2 0.2F u
Aweb weld

Fweld = F 2 + 3q 2 = ... 0.2F u x1.1

0.8d
0.4b
d

where
Aweb weld = 2 x 0.8d x s
Atotal = 2 x 0.8d x s + 2 x b x s + 4 x 0.4b x s
if it unsafe or waste we can get new weld size
F weld
x s old
s new =
0.2F u x1.1

2) Bearing on concrete:
N
Wb =
= ... kg / cm 2
BxL
100kg/cm2
70kg/cm2
40kg/cm2

for C350 concrete

for C250 concrete
for stone
2/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

3) Anchor bolts:
(connect base plate with R.C. column head to resist shear)
assume No. of anchor bolts = 2 then get the diameter ""
to calculate required diameter of anchor bolt using
Q
( 0.25 or 0.2) xF ub x 0.85 =
nx 2 / 4
where
0.25Fub for bolts grades 4.6, 5.6 and 8.8
0.2Fub for bolts grades 4.8, 5.8, 6.8 and 10.9

anchor bolts
st.52
2
with Fy = 3.6t/cm , Fu = 5.2t/cm2
0.25Fu or 0.35Fy =

.
min. anchor bolts 2

19.

4) Base plate thickness:

t =

6xM plate
0.72F y

= ... cm (min . 2cm )

d
2

M plate = W b x

where

m or n

2
m = 0.5(L 0.95d)
n = 0.5(B 0.8b)

0.8b

n
m

0.95d

3/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

EXAMPLE-I
It is required to design the hinged base of IPE360 column subjected to
(N=8t , Q=2t).
Solution:
1) Horizontal weld:
0.8x36=28.8
assume weld size "s" = 0.6cm
Aweb weld = 2x28.8x0.6 = 34.6cm2
Atotal = 2x28.8x0.6 + 2x17x0.6
17
+ 4x6.8x0.6 = 71.28cm2
0.4x17=6.8
0 .6 x 8
2
F =
= 0.07t / cm 0.2x 3.6
71.28
2
q =
= 0.06t / cm 2 0.2x 3.6
36
34.6
Fweld = 0.072 + 3x 0.062 = 0.12 0.2x 3.6x1.1
2) Bearing on concrete:
take B = 17+2x2cm = 21cm , L = 36+2x2cm = 40cm
8 x1000
Wb =
= 10kg / cm 2 70kg/cm2 (for C250 concrete)
21x 40
3) Anchor bolts:
Q =2
take no. of anchor bolts = 2 , 0.25x 5.2x 0.85 =
2x2 / 4
get = 1.07cm , use min. anchor bolts 2 19
d=36cm
n

B=17+4=21cm

4) Base plate thickness:

10
3. 7 2
M plate =
x
= 0.07cmt
1000
2
m = 0.5(40 0.95x36) = 2.9cm
n = 0.5(21 0.8x17) = 3.7cm
0.07
0.72x 2.4 =
1 x t2 /6
get t = 0.49cm = 2.0cm (min.)

b=17cm

0.8b

n
m

0.95d
L=36+4=40cm

4/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

column
side plates
stiffeners
anchor bolts

base plate
R.C.
column head

FIXED BASE

5/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

b

side plate
stiffener
anchor bolts
R.C.
head column

base
plate

M
Q

L = 2-3 d

side view

elevation
base plate
horizontal weld

vertical
weld

10cm

10cm
d
L = 2-3 d
plan

6/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

(2) DESIGN OF FIXED BASE
1) Vertical weld:
(connect column with side plates)
calculate the effect of "M" on two opposite sides of the column = M/d
(one side is tension and the other is compression), then calculate the
effect of "N" = N/2 (the two sides are compression).
M N
C =
= .... t (comp .)
d
2
M N
T =
= .... t (tens.)
d
2
The vertical weld
resists 100% of
tension on the
column, while it
N
T
C
d
resists 60% of the
M
compression
on
the column, and
the other 40% will
be
transmitted
assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm
direct by bearing
then check
on the base.
T or 0.6C
Fweld =
= ... 0.2F u
2 x d x s
if it is unsafe or waste we can get new weld size
F
s new = weld x s old smin.
0.2F u

7/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

2) Horizontal weld:
(connect side plates with base plate)
assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm then check
2
2
Fweld = Fmax
1 or 2 + 3q1 = ... 0.2Fu x 1.1

where
0.6N M
F1 =
y1

A
Ix
F2 =

N M
+
y2
A Ix

point 2

point 1

x
y1

Q
, q1 =
A

y2

b
x

A = 2xLxs + 4xbxs
sL3
sb 3
L b
I x = 2x
+ 4x
+ 4 xsxb ( )2
12
12
2 2

d
L = 2-3 d

if it is unsafe or waste we can get new weld size

F weld
x s old smin.
s new =
0.2F u x1.1
3) Anchor bolts:
(connect base plate with R.C. column head to resist tension)
assume that fc = 50kg/cm2
( 70 kg/cm2 forC250)
N

take moment at "T" = zero

N x (L/2 7cm) + M(mt) x100
= C x (L 7cm a)
where "C = 0.5 x 3a x fc x B"

L = 2.5-3 d

L
N ( 7) + M x 100
2
3a
50

x
x (L 7 a ) xB = 0
2 1000
T
get "a" = cm
then take forces = zero
N+T=C
get "T" = t
get required diameter of anchor bolt by ..

L/2

7cm

Fc
N.A.

2a

a
3a

8/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

0.33F ub x 0.85 =

T
2
nx 0.7 x
4

anchor bolts

st.52
with Fy = 3.6t/cm2, Fu = 5.2t/cm2
.Fu = 5.2t/cm2
0.33Fu =
assume No. of anchor bolts 2,3,4,.. then get diameter ""
min. anchor bolts 2 19
4) Base plate thickness:

Fav

10cm

Fav

Fav

10cm

strip1

d
L = 2 -3 d

take strip 1cm through the base plate as shown

F
in the figure to calculate max. bending moment
F
strip2
in it, then calculate base plate thickness from
M plate
0.72F y =
(min. t = 2cm)
1 x t2 /6
using max. Mpl from the shown figure
where " , " is distribution factor according to the rectangularity of
the area
av

av

14cm

9/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

EXAMPLE-II
It is required to design the fixed base of IPE500 column subjected to
M=22mt , N=12t , Q=4t.
Solution:
1) Vertical weld:
22x100 12
C =

= 50t (comp .)
50
2
22x100 12
T =

= 38 t (tens.)
50
2

50cm
N=12t
T

M=22mt

assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm

38 or 0.6x 50 = 30
Fweld =
2 x 50 x 1
= 0.38t / cm 2 0.2x 3.6 = 0.72

safe but waste.. snew =

0.38
x 1 = 0.53 cm use 0.6 cm
0.72

2) Horizontal weld:
assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm
A = 2x130x1 + 4x40x1
= 420cm2
1x130 3
1x 40 3
I x = 2x
+ 4x
12
12
130 40 2
+ 4 x1x 40 x (

)
2
2
= 711500cm 4

b = 40

0.6 12 22x 100 130

x
+
= 0.218t / cm 2 < 0.2x 3.6
420
711500
2
q1
12 22x 100 130
2
F2 =
x
+
= 0.172t / cm < 0.2x 3.6
420 711500
2

F1 =

x
d = 50cm
L = (2.5-3)x50 = 130cm

4
= 0.01t / cm 2
420

Fweld = 0.2182 + 3x 0.012 = 0.218t / cm 2 0.72x 1.1

10/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

50

Design Of Column Bases

safe but waste
s new =

0.218
x 1 = 0.29cm take min . 0.4cm
0.72x 1.1

3) Anchor bolts:
assume that fc = 50kg/cm2
B = bfl + 2x10cm
+ 2x1cm(side plates)
= 20+2x10+2cm=42cm

N=12t

take moment at "T" = zero

130
12(
7) + 22 x 100
2
3a
50

x
x (130 7 a ) x 42 = 0
2 1000
2896387.45a+3.15a =0
get "a" = 115cm (false), 8cm (true)

L=130cm

taking 4 anchor bolts

( 0.33x 5.2) x 0.85 =

65

12t

take forces = zero

3x8
50
C =
x
x 42 = 25.2 t
2
1000
12+T=25.2t
T = 13.2t

50

M=22mt

22mt

7cm

0.05

T=13.2t

N.A.

16

a=8
24

13.2
4 x 0.7 x2 / 4

get = 2.02cm
take 4 22

NOTE..
if "T" is ve value.
so there is no tension, and it is indicating that the base plate
dimensions are over estimated, use min. anchor bolts 2 19

11/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

4) Base plate thickness:
Fav

Fav

M1

Fav

Fav

14cm

10cm

42cm

10cm

M1

Fav

M3

M2
from stress distribution under the base plate , Fav 25kg/cm2
25 10 2
M1 =
x
= 1.25cmt
1000
2
assuming that = 1.0 (most critical value)
25
( 42 20)2
1.25 = 0.26cmt
M2 =
x
1000
8
25 14 2
M3 =
x
= 2.45cmt
1000
2
2.45
0.72x 2.4 =
1 x t2 /6
get t = 2.91cm = 3.0cm

12/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

EXAMPLE-III
It is required to design the shown fixed base of IPE500 column
subjected to M=22mt , N=12t , Q=4t.
Solution:
1) Vertical weld:
22x100 12
C =

50
2
= 50t (comp .)
22x100 12
T =

50
2
= 38 t (tens.)

stiffener

base
plate

M
Q

assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm

38 or 0.6x 50 = 30
Fweld =
2 x 50 x 1

L = 2-3 d
elevation

= 0.38t / cm 0.72

base plate
horizontal weld

vertical
weld

safe but waste..

0.38
s new =
x 1 = 0.53cm
0.72
use 0.6cm
2) Horizontal weld:
assume weld size "s" = 1.0cm
A = 8x10x1 + 4x25x1
= 180cm2
Ashear = 4x25x1 = 100cm2
50 2
1x 253
I x = 8 x10 x1x ( ) + 4 x
2
12
100 25 2
+ 4 x1x 25x (

)
2
2
= 195833cm 4

d
L
plan

b = 25

10cm

s
x
d = 50cm
L = (2-3)x50 = 100cm
13/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design Of Column Bases

0.6 12 22x 100 100
x
+
= 0.6t / cm 2 < 0.72
180
195833
2
q1
12 22x 100 100
2
F2 =
x
+
= 0.5t / cm < 0.72
180 195833
2
F1 =

4
= 0.04t / cm 2
100

Fweld = 0.602 + 3x 0.042 = 0.60t / cm 2 0.72x 1.1

L=100cm

3) Anchor bolts:

50

12t

7cm

22mt

0.05

N.A.
assume that fc = 50kg/cm
C
B = bfl + 2x10cm
2a
= 20+2x10 = 40cm
3a
take moment at "T" = zero
100
3a
50
12(
7) + 22 x 100
x
x (100 7 a ) x 40 = 0
2
2 1000
2716279a+3a2=0
get "a" = 82cm (false), 11cm (true)
take forces = zero
3x11 50
C =
x
x 40 = 33t , 12+T=33t T = 21t
2
1000
taking 4 anchor bolts
21
( 0.33x 5.2) x 0.85 =
4 x 0.7 x2 / 4
get = 2.56cm ,
take 4 28

4) Base plate thickness:

two cantilevers with Lc = (B/2 = 20cm) or (L/2 d/2 = 25cm)
from stress distribution under the base plate , Fav 25kg/cm2
25
252
M max =
x
= 7.8cmt
1000
2
7 .8
0.72x 2.4 =
1 x t2 /6
get t = 5.2cm (very large value) , use stiffener between bolts to reduce
the thickness.

14/14 D.C.B.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

Bracing is used to carry the loads acting to the frames or trusses plane. Such
as wind load, braking force, etc.
As it is used to carry the wind load, so wind load will be Case A not B.

Wind Load Path:

Wind load Corrugated sheets End girts
1/2 base
End gable columns

1/2 Hz bracing VL bracing base

h2 = Clear height + H

h2

h1

h1 = Clear height + h

1) HL bracing:
R

Vertical
Bracing

W
w

Loads = Ww = (ce + ci )kq * (Hav/2) kg/m'

We divided /2 because half the load is transmitted from the end gable to the
foundation (base), while the other half transmitted to the horizontal bracing.
Where ce = 0.8, ci = 0.3
Hav =

h1 + h2
2

k =1,

q = 70 kg/m2
R = ww

B
2

2) VL bracing:

Used to carry the reaction of the Hz bracing system.

1/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

Design of horizontal and vertical bracing:
The horizontal and vertical bracing are subjected to Tension and compression
forces (because wind has no direction), so we have to design the members using
"angles" (single, back to back or star shape). Since force is the same but with
different sign , so we have to design as compression and check as tension.
The design of bracing angles, the case of load is considered "case A" because
the wind load is primary (main) load for the bracing.

Steps of design:
1- Calculating of forces and buckling lengths:
a) Hz bracing:
R

Bracing every 2a
lin = lout = l/2
F=

R
2 cos

Note that: F=

Bracing every 3a

Bracing every 4a

lin = lout = l/3

lin = lout = l/4

F=

R
2 cos

R
n cos

F=

R
2 cos

Where:
"n" is the number of members you cut
" the angle between member and direction of "R"

F
F

2/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

b) VL bracing: (Trusses with no crane)
1- V-shape:

3
R e
1
1
h
1
b 4 a 2
2
C

d
c

Sec 1-1

Sec 1-1

Sec 2-2

1
b

Sec 2-2

Note that: "C" is the clear height, "S" is the spacing and "h" is the distance between
upper and lower chord.
Calculation of F 1:
From summation of forces at joint a:

y=0

The forces in member 1 and 1/ are equal and opposite

For section 1-1:

x =0

R = 2 F1 cos

So F1=

R
2 cos 1

R = 2 F2 cos

So F2=

R
2 cos 2

Calculation of F 2:
For section 2-2:

x =0

Calculation of F 3:
From joint e:

F3 =

x =0

R = F1 cos

+ F3 =

R
cos
2 cos1

+ F3

R
2

Calculation of F 4:
From joint b:

F4 =

x =0

F2 cos

= F4

R
cos 2= F4
2 cos 2

R
2

3/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

Buckling lengths:
For l1

lin = l, lout = l.2 l

l=

S
( )2 + h2
2

For l2

lin = 0.5 l2, lout = 0.75 l2

l=

S 2 + C2

For l3

lin = lout = S

For l4

lin = S/2, lout = S

2- W-shape:

c 5

6
1
3 a

b
1

R
Sec 1-1

Sec 1-1
Sec 2-2

1
b

Sec 2-2

From sec 1: F1=

R
4 cos1

From sec 2: F2=

R
R
(as before)
and F3 =
2
2 cos 2

To calculate F4: From joint a:

F4 = 2F1 cos 1- F3 = 2

x =0

R
R
= zero
cos 12
4 cos1
R
cos
4 cos1

From joint b:

x =0

F5 = F1 cos 1=

From joint c:

x =0

F6 = 2F1 cos 1+ F5

F6 = 2

R
cos
4 cos1

R
4

R 3R
=
4
4

4/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

Buckling lengths:
For l1

lin = l, lout = l.2 l

l=

S
( )2 + h2
4

For l2

lin = 0.5 l2, lout = 0.75 l2

l=

S 2 + C2

For l3

lin = 0.25 S lout = S

For l4

lin = S/2,

lout = S

For l5

lin = S/2,

lout = S

For l6

lin = S/2,

lout = S

Note that:
Member 5 and 6 will have the same section, so we have to design them both
and use the bigger section.
Member 3 and 4 will have the same section, so we have to design them both
and use the bigger section.
Summary: Calculate the forces in the inclined members using method of
sections and in the horizontal member using method of joints.

2- Estimation of bracing member shape:

For Hl bracing: Design as Single angle (

For VL bracing:
For upper members l1 use single angle 90*9 if bigger use 2 angles back to back
For l2 use 2 angles back to back
For members with no intermediate joints as l3 in the first drawing, use star shape
as l/d is the guide.

5/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

3- Choice of section:
Since the forces are very small (sometimes, the bracing members designed as zero
members), so the guide will be

and l/d.

If the length of the member is smaller than 5m, so

will be guide

If the length of the member is larger than 5m, so use star shape as L/d is the guide.
So we can estimate the section using maximum

l
If single angle: 200 = out
0.2a
l
200 = out
0.38a

If star shape:

get a
get a

If 2 angles back to back:

l
200 = in
0.3a

l
200 = out
0.45a

get a

get a

(take bigger a)

For checks:
Design as Comp member and check as tension member
Steps:

1) Design as comp. member 200 (not 180) ECP 51

2) Check

F
Agross

Fc

3) Check

F
1.4 t/cm 2
Anet

4) Check

l
60
d

Don't check

300 as it is smaller than 200

Very Important Notes:

1 For cantilever there is no end gable system, so there is no wind load.
So the members of HL and VL bracing are designed as zero members.
(For zero members, check 2 and 3 are omitted).
2 Check L/d for X bracing members

L L2
=
< 60 .
D
a

3 The Connection is always bolted.

6/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

Other shapes and loads on vertical bracing:

1- VL bracing for frames with no crane:

For member 1:
R
F1=
2 cos 1

Lout = 0.75L

For member 2:
F2 =

R
2

Lin = 0.5L,

Lin = Lout = S

S
2- VL bracing for trusses with crane:
The braking force is

P
7

and distributed on 2 successive columns

B = 2P / 7 if there is one crane supported by this bracing

Member Lin

Lout

Force

R/2

S
L

1.2L

R
2 cos 1

0.5S

R/2

1.2L

R
2 cos 2

0.5S

(B+R)/2

0.5L

0.75L

(R + B )
2 cos 3

2
3
4
5

6
L

7/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Design of Bracing Members

3- VL bracing for frames with crane:

Member Lin

Lout

Force

R/2

1.2L

R
2 cos 1

0.5S

(B+R)/2

0.5L

0.75L

(R + B )
2 cos 2

R
B

2
3

4
L

4- VL bracing for intermediate columns supporting crane:

Note that: This bracing is not connected to upper horizontal bracing; this means it is
subjected to braking force only.
B = 2P / 7 (the column supports 2 cranes, so the total braking force is 2B

Internal

Member Lin

Lout

Force

2B/2

0.5L

0.75L

(2B )
2 cos 1

2B

2
L

8/8-D.B.M.
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
General Layout

vertical bracing
horizontal bracing

? = 30 - 60
.

Portal frame ( main system)

spacing
(4-8m)

purlins

end gable

4 - 8m

Used if
h > 6.0 m

1/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
1.5 - 2.0 m

purlin

10:1
L/10 - L/20
1.0 m

1.5 - 2.0
1.0 - 1.5
2.0 - 3.0

span = L

Main frame

corrugated steel
10:1

purlin
side girts
window

end girts

4.0-8.0 m

gate

end gable column

End Gable Section

2/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I

Design Of Portal Frame

Loaded area on each

Frame

h
S
L

1-Loads on portal frame:

1) Dead load :
O.W. of the steel structure which include ( purlins, rafters, bracings)
WS = (20 35) kg/m2 "depend on span L ".

Weight of steel cover

WC = (5 8) kg/m2 for single layer.
= (12 18) kg/m2 for double layer.

Wd.L. = ( (WC / cos ) + WS ) x S

2) Live load :
L.L. = 60 66.67 tan
= 200 300 tan

"for inaccessible roofs"

"for accessible roofs"

WL.L. = L.L. x S

3/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
3) Wind load :
Wwind = ( Ce x K x q ) x S
W

K= 1.0 for h 10 m
= 1.1 for h 20 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo
Pressure side
o Vertical surface " surface 1"
Ce = +0.8
W1 = 0.8 x 1.0 x 70 x S

Pressure

Suction

side

side

o Inclined Surface " surface 2"

Ce = depends on inclination of surface
For tan < 0.4
- Ce = -0.8
For tan > 0.8
- Ce = +0.8
For 0.8 < tan < 0.4
- Ce = we have 2 values
For slopes 5:1 to 20:1 tan
W2 = -0.8 x 1.0 x 70 x S

< 0.4 Ce = -0.8

Ce

Suction side
o Vertical surface " surface 3"
Ce = -0.5
W3 = -0.5 x 1.0 x 70 x S

+0.8

0.4

o Inclined Surface " surface 4"

Ce = -0.5
W4 = -0.5 x 1.0 x 70 x S

tan

0.8

-0.8

2-Straining actions in portal frames

We solve the frame as 2 hinged frame using computer program or by using virtual work
method.
"In case of using computer program take Icol = (2 3) Igirder"
* In case of neglecting Wind Loads we can calculate approximate value of B.M.
M-ve = WT x L2 / (13 15)
M +ve = (0.55 0.60) x M-ve
Ncol = WT x L / 2

M -ve
1

M -ve

M +ve

3
4

Case (A) D.L. + L.L.

4/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Wind effect
3
2
1

3
4

Case of wind
Neglected

For all sections 1, 2&3

Taking wind load will decrease the
moment
So neglect the wind effect

Case of wind
May be critical

For sections 1&2

Taking wind load will decrease the
moment
So neglect the wind effect
For sections 3&4
Taking wind load will increase the
moment
So we must study the effect of that
increase
MA = MD + ML
MB = MD + M L + M W

Case A
Case B

If (MB MA) / MA < 20% neglect

wind
Design on MA case A, else design on
MB case B

5/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Design of rafter

a
M 3
Mh

* We will divide the rafter in

3 sections , M2 max +ve
M3 max ve
Mh at end of haunch

M 2

M1
X

h
X

* The design of rafter is based

on the Mmax of M2 or Mh ,
we will use haunch to safeguard
section M3.
* The rafter is subjected to
both M , N
but we can neglect N as it is very small.

WT

Calculation of haunch length and zero moment point

x tan
Sec 5-5: End of the haunch
To get the position of sec 5-5 ( position of the end of the haunch )
If not given, we have to calculate the M-ve at any point on the rafter.
From the figure by taking a section at distance X from column
Mx = Q ( h + X tan

) + WT X2 / 2 Y x X

1 to get Xh put Mx = M 2
2 to get the point of Zero Moment beginning of the ve moment zone " Xo
put Mx = zero

L / 20

Xh

Q
Y

L /10

Mmax in the max of Mh and M2

1- Choice of Section:

M max
Fbcx
Sx
Assume fb = 1.536 t/cm2 " compact section "
M
and get the Sx required = max cm3
1.536
and from the tables we choose the appropriate IPE .
fb =

6/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
2- Check
1- Check for compact Section
2- Lumax = min of

20 b f / fy
1380 Af Cb / ( fy d )

" Cb = 1.3 "

Sec 2-2: Max +ve

Luact = a " at positive moment zone,compression is on upper flange purlins are
laterally supporting the upper flange "
Luact = a < Lumax so Fbcx = ( 1.4
if non compact
1.536 if compact sec ).
> Lumax so Fbcx = Fltb
Fbx = M2 / Sx < Fbcx
Sec 5-5: End of the haunch
Luact = Xo " at negative moment zone,compression is on lower flange "
Luact = Xo < Lumax so sec 5-5 is safe as sec 2-2
> Lu max so use knee bracing at every purlin to decrease Luact = a
and so Fbcx = ( 1.4 if non compact sec
1.536 if compact sec
Fltb if Luact = a > Lu max ).

L 80X80X8

Purlin
L 60X60X6
Y

PL 10MM

Sec 3-3: Max -ve

Ix = tw x (2h)3 / 12 + 2 ( bf x tf )( h tf / 2 )2
Sx = Ix / y = Ix / h
Fbcx = ( 1.4 if non compact
1.536 if compact sec ).
Fbx = M3 / Sx < Fbcx

X
h

tf
bf

7/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Design of column
Choose the critical section 1 " without wind " or 4 " with wind "
1-Choice of Section:

fb =

Mx
Fbcx
Sx

Assume fb = (0.8 to 1.2) t/cm2 and get the Sx required =

Mx
cm3
fb

and from the tables we choose the appropriate IPE .

2-Check
Finally get fca, Fc, fbcx, Fbcx and A1 and check

f ca f bcx
+
A1 1.00 as previously described
Fc Fbcx

in design of rolled columns.

8/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
End Gable Column
The end gable column is the supporting element of the end girts, its statical system is hinged
base and roller connection with the rafter as shown in figure, so there is no normal force transmitted
from the rafter to the end gable.

Design Procedure:
1- The acting loads:
a. Dead Load:
i. Own weight (40 60) kg/m.
ii. Weight of the steel sheets wc = (5-8) kg/m2 for single layer.
iii. Weight of the end girts wg = (10 20) kg/m.
b. Wind load:
i. In this case the wind load will be a main load so it will be a case A
ii. Wwind = ((Ce + Ci ) x K x q) x S1
Ce = 0.8 for pressure case, 0.5 for suction case
Ci = 0.3 for pressure case
K= 1.0 for h 10 m
= 1.1 for h 20 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo

2- The straining actions:

c. Wx = due to wind load only
Wx = Wwind

MX

WX h2
=
8

9/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
d. N = due to dead loads only
N = wc x (S1 x (h - hwall)) + o.w. x h + wg x ( number of girts ) x S1
Where
S1 = the span of end girts = spacing between end gables columns.
h = the end gable height.
3- Choice of Section:
M
f b = x Fbcx
Sx
Mx
cm3
1.2
And from the tables we choose the appropriate IPE.

Assume fb = 1.2 t/cm2 and get the Sx required =

4- Check
1- lbin = lby = the bigger of ( distance between end girts or height of wall ) .
2- lbout = lbx = h
3- Check for compact Section
4- Luact = distance between end girts or height of wall for pressure case.
= h "for case of suction (compression flange is the inner flange), we can use knee
bracing to reduce it."

20 b f
5- Calculate Lu max =

Fy
1380 A f
Fy d

Cb = 1.13

Cb

6- And finaly get fca ,Fc , fbcx , Fbcx and A1 and check

f ca f bcx
+
A1 1.00 as previously
Fc Fbcx

described in design of rolled columns.

10/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Example:
It is required for the shown industrial building to:42 m

24 m

a. Draw with a suitable scale a complete layout for the main system "2 hinged steel frame" of
clear height 8 m.
b. Calculate the loads on the frame for the diff. cases of loading.
c. Design the Col, Rafter.
d. Design the end gable column and draw its connection with the rafter.
e. Design and draw the connection between the rafter and the column
Use M24 grade (10.9) bolts, T = 22.23 ton Ps = 7.11 ton.
f. Design and draw the connection between the two rafters
Use M24 grade (10.9) bolts, T = 22.23 ton Ps = 7.11 ton.

11/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Solution:-

A ) The general layout.

6.0 m

6.0 m

42.0 m

2.0 m

4.0 m 4.0 m

6.0 m
24.0 m

Vertical Bracing

Plan

12/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
2.0 m

10:1

1.0 m

1.5 m

8.0 m

1.0 m
2.5 m

24.0 m

Elevation
@ axis 2 to 7
10:1

1.5 m

8.0 m

1.0 m
2.5 m

6.0 m
24.0 m

End Gable Section

@ axis 1

1.5 m

8.0 m

1.0 m
2.5 m

6.0 m
24.0 m

End Gable Section

@ axis 8
13/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
B Loads on frame:
tan

= 0.1

= 5.71o

1) Dead load :
WS = 25 kg/m2
WC = 5 kg/m2
Wd = ( (WC / cos ) + WS ) x S = ( (5 / cos 5.71) + 25 ) x 6 = 180 kg/m
2) Live load :
L.L. = 60 66.67 tan = 60 66.67 x 0.1 = 53.33 kg/m2
WL = L.L. x S = 53.33 x 6 = 320 kg/m
3) Wind load :
Wwind = ( Ce x K x q ) x S
W

K= 1.0 for h 10 m
= 1.1 for h 20 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo
Pressure side
o Vertical surface " surface 1"
Ce = +0.8
W1 = 0.8 x 1.0 x 70 x 6 = 340 kg/m

Pressure

Suction

side

side

o Inclined Surface " surface 2"

tan = 0.1 < 0.4 Ce = -0.8
W2 = -0.8 x 1.0 x 70 x 6 = -340 kg/m

Suction side
o Vertical surface " surface 3"
Ce = -0.5
W3 = -0.5 x 1.0 x 70 x 6 = - 200 kg/m
o Inclined Surface " surface 4"
Ce = -0.5
W4 = -0.5 x 1.0 x 70 x 6 = -200 kg/m

WT = Wd + WL = 0.32 + 0.18 = 0.5 t/m

14/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Original system
W2

WT

W
1

W
3

Pressure
side

Suction
side

W
4

Case (B) W.L.

Case (A) D.L. + L.L.

Modified system
W2

WT

W
3

W
4

W
1
4.32 ton
6 ton

Case (A) D.L. + L.L.

9 mt

6 ton

3.53 ton

23.7 mt

36 mt

Mo Total load

1.84 ton

Case (B) W.L.

0.64 mt

6.4 mt

Mo Wind load

9.2 mt
3.6 mt

6.12 mt

8 mt

8 mt

23.7 mt

0.64 mt
2.72 mt

M1

1 ton

6.4 mt
1.6 mt

Mo Wind load

15/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
From case A .( Dead + Live Only )
10

= 2 ( 36 x 12 / 2 x ( 8 + 2/3 x 1.2 ) + ( 2/3 x 9 x 12 ) x ( 8/2 + 9.2/2 )) = -5040

11

= 2 ( 8 x 8 / 2 x 2/3 x 8 + 8 x 12 x ( 8/2 + 9.2/2 ) + 1.2 x 12/2 x (8 + 2/3 x 1.2 )) = 2119.25

+ X1 x
X1 = 2.378
10

11

=0

From case B .( Wind Load)

10

11

= - 2/3 x 2.72 x 8 x 4 23.7 x 8/2 x 2/3 x 8

+ 2/3 x 6.12 x12 x 8.6 23.06 x 12/2 x 8.4 0.64 x 12 x 2 x 8.6
+ 2/3 x 3.6 x 12 x 8.6 5.75 x 12/2 x 8.4
+ 2/3 x 8 x 1.6 x 4 6.4 x 8/2 x 2/3 x 8 = -1581.4
= 2 ( 8 x 8 / 2 x 2/3 x 8 + 8 x 12 x ( 8/2 + 9.2/2 ) + 1.2 x 12/2 x (8 + 2/3 x 1.2 )) = 2119.25

10 + X1 x
X1 = 0.746

11

=0

Final Moment

6.22 mt
20mt

20 mt

3
2

13 mt

3
4

17.7 mt

0.432 mt

Case (A) D.L. + L.L.

Case of wind
neglected

16/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Design of rafter:
M2 = 13 mt

M3 = 20 mt

N = neglected

0.5

Calculation of haunch length and zero moment point

x tan

Sec 5-5: End of the haunch

Mx = Q ( h + X tan

) + WT X / 2 Y x X

Mx = 2.5 ( 8 + X x 0.1 ) + 0.5 X2 / 2 9 x X

20/8 = 2.5

= 0.25 X2 5.75 X + 20

1 to get Xh put Mx = M2
13 = 0.25 Xh2 5.75 Xh + 20
Xh = 1.29 take length of haunch = 1.5 m
2 to get the point of Zero Shear "beginning of the ve moment zone" Xo
Put Mx = zero
0 = 0.25 Xo2 5.75 Xo + 20
Xo = 4.27 m
24 / 20 = 1.2 m < Xh = 1.5 m < 24 / 10 = 2.4 m

so Mmax = M2 = Mh = 13 mt

Choice of sec:
Assume f = 1.536 t/cm2 Sx = 13 x 100 / 1.536 = 850 cm3
Choose I.P.E 360
Check:
Dw / tw = ( 36 4 x 1.27 ) / 0.8 = 38.6 < 82
C / tf = 8.5 / 1.27 = 6.7 < 10.9
Lumax = 20 bf /

Fy = 20 x 17 / 2.4 = 219

Sec 2-2: M+ve

Luact = a = 200 cm < Lumax = 219
Sec is compact
Fbcx = 1.536 t / cm2
Fbx = Mx / Sx = 1300 / 904 = 1.438 t / cm2 < Fbcx = 1.536 t / cm2 Safe
17/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Sec 5-5: End of the haunch
Y

Luact = Xo = 4.27 m > Lu max

so use knee bracing at each purlin Luact = 2 m < 2.19 m
and so Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2

safe as sec 2-2

36
X

Sec 3-3: Max -ve

Ix = tw x (2h)3 / 12 + 2 ( bf x tf )( h tf / 2 )2
Ix = 0.8 x (72)3 / 12 + 2 ( 17 x 1.27 )( 36 1.27 / 2 )2
= 78887 cm4
Sx = Ix / y = 78887 / 36 = 2191.6 cm3
Fbcx = 1.536 t/cm2

36
1.27
17

Fbx = M3 / Sx = 2000 / 2191.6 = 0.91 t/cm2 < Fbcx

18/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Design of column
Choice of sec 1 1 :
Mx = 20 mt

N = 6 ton

Assume f = 1.2 t/cm2 Sx = 20 x 100 / 1.2 = 1666.6 cm3

Choose I.P.E 500
Check:
Fca / Fc + A1 fbcx / Fbcx

1 case A

Fca = 6 / 116 = .052 t/cm2

fbcx = Mx / Sx = 2000 / 1930 = 1.036 t / cm2
Fc:
Lbin = K x 8
GA = 10 hinged base
GB = ( Ic / Lc ) / ( Ig / Lg ) = ( 48200 / 8 ) / ( 16270 / 24 ) = 8.8

K = 2.90

Lbin = 2.90 x 8 = 23.20 m, Lbout = 4.0 m

in =

Lbx / rx = 2330 / 20.4 = 113.7 < 180

Lby / ry = 400 / 4.31 = 92.8 < 180
max = 113.7 > 100

out =

Fc = 7500 /(113.7)2 = 0.58 t/cm2

Fca / Fc = .09
Fbcx :
1- Local buckling "compact and non-compact"
C = 10 cm , dw = 50 4 x 1.6 = 43.6
For flange C / tf = 10 / 1.6 = 6.25 < 10.9
For Web ,

compact

1
6
699 2.4
(
+ 1) =0.528 > 0.5 compare with
= 76.6
2 43.6 1.02 2.4
(13 1)

Dw / tw = 43.6 / 1.02 = 42.7 < 76.6 compact

Regarding local buckling section is compact
2- L.T.B.
Luact = 400 cm

>

Lumax = 20 bf /

Fy = 20 x 20 / 2.4 = 258.2

Section is non compact

19/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Column height is devided out plane in 2 parts by the hz member, critical one is sec 1 .
= Msmall / Mbig = - 10 / 20 = -.5
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05

+ .3

20

= 1.3

Fltb = 800 Af Cb / ( Lu d ) = 800 x 20 x 1.6 x 1.3 / ( 400 x 50 ) = 1.66 > 1.4

10

Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm

A1:
Fca / Fc = .09 < .15

A1 = 1.0

Applying interaction equation :

.09 + 1.0 x 1.036 / 1.4 = 0.83 < 1 "case A"

safe.

20/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
D ) End gable colum:
1- The acting loads:
h = 8 + 12 x 0.1 = 9.2 m
a. Dead Load:
i. Own weight 50 kg/m.
ii. Weight of the steel sheets wc = 6 kg/m2.
iii. Weight of the end girts wg = 20 kg/m.
b. Wind load:
i. In this case the wind load will be a main load so it will be a case A
ii. Wwind = ((Ce + Ci ) x K x q) x S1
Ce = 0.8, Ci = 0.3
K= 1.0 for h 10 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo

2- The straining actions:

a. Case of wind pressure
Wx = due to wind load only
Wx = Wwind = 1.1 x 1 x 70 x 6 = 0.462 t/m'

WX h2
= 0.462 x 9.22 / 8 = 4.88 mt
8
b. Case of wind suction
Wx = due to wind load only
Wx = Wwind = 0.5 x 1 x 70 x 6 = 0.21 t/m'
MX =

MX =

WX h2
= 0.21 x 9.22 / 8 = 2.22 mt
8

c. N = due to dead loads only

N = wc x (S1 x ( h hwall)) + o.w. x h + wg x ( number of girts ) x S1
N = (6 x (6 x 4.2) + 50 x 9.2 + 20 x ( 5 ) x 6)/1000 = 1.21 ton

Choice of sec:
From wind pressure case
Mx = 4.88 mt
N = 1.21 ton
Assume f = 1.2 t/cm2 Sx = 4.88 x 100 / 1.2 = 406 cm3
Choose I.P.E 270

21/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Check:
1- Wind pressure case:
Fca / Fc + A1 fbx / Fbcx

fca = 1.21 / 45.9 = .026 t/cm2

fbcx = Mx / Sx = 488 / 429 = 1.13 t / cm2
Fc:
Lbin = 2.5 m "wall height" , Lbout = 9.2 m
in = Lby / ry = 250 / 3.02 = 82.8 < 180
out = Lbx / rx = 920 / 11.2 = 82.14 < 180
max = 83 < 100
Fc = 1.4 6.5 x 10 -5 (83)2 = 0.95 t/cm2
Fca / Fc = .027
Fbcx :
1- Local buckling "compact and non-compact"
C = 6.4 cm , dw = 27 4 x 1.02 = 22.92
For flange C / tf = 6.4 / 1.02 = 6.27 < 10.9
For Web,

compact

699 2.4
1
1.21
= 78.33
(
+ 1) =0.51 > 0.5, compare with
(13 1)
2 22.92 0.66 2.4

d w / tw = 22.92 / 0.66 = 34.72 < 78.33 compact

Regarding local buckling section is compact

2- L.T.B.
Luact = 250 cm

>

Lumax = 20 bf /

Fy = 20 x 13.5 / 2.4 = 174.3

Section is non compact

Cb = 1.13
Fltb = 800 Af Cb / ( Lu d ) = 800 x 13.5 x 1.02 x 1.13 / ( 250 x 27 ) = 1.84 > 1.4
Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm2
A1:
Fca / Fc = .027 < .15

A1 = 1.0

22/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Applying interaction equation :
.027+ 1.0 x 1.13 / 1.4 = 0.84 < 1 "case A"

safe.

2- Wind suction case:

fbcx = Mx / Sx = 222 / 429 = 0.517 t / cm2

Fbcx :
Regarding local buckling section is compact as before
1- L.T.B.
Luact = 920 cm

>

Lumax = 20 bf /

Fy = 20 x 13.5 / 2.4 = 174.3 cm

Section is non compact ,Cb = 1.13

Fltb = 800 Af Cb / ( Lu d ) = 800 x 13.5 x 1.02 x 1.13 / ( 920 x 27 ) = 0.5 > 1.4
Try to reduce Luact by using knee bracing each side girt.
Luact = max of (wall height or distance between side girts) = 250
Fltb = 800 Af Cb / (Lu d) = 800 x 13.5 x 1.02 x 1.13 / ( 250 x 27 ) = 1.84 > 1.4
Fbcx = 1.4 t / cm2
A1:
Fca / Fc = .027 < .15

A1 = 1.0

Applying interaction equation :

.027 + 1.0 x 0.517 / 1.4 = 0.39 < 1 "case A"

safe.

23/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
E )connection between rafter and column:
Mact = 20 mt , Qact = 6 ton
PL. 10 MM

STEEL SHEET
RAIN GUTTER .7MM

IPE 360

PART OF IPE 360

17.0
1

1.27
4.0
8.0

2.0
11.27

f1

36.0
26.73

H = 2 + 36 + 36 + 2 = 76 cm
Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 763 / 12 = 621882.667 cm4
Y = H / 2 = 38 cm
X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2 = 2 + 1.27 + 4 + 4 = 11.27 cm
X2 = H / 2 X1 = 38 11.27 = 26.73 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 2000 x 38 / 621882.6 = 0.12 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 2000 x 26.73 / 621882.6 = 0.086 t/cm2

36.0

2.0

SEC 1-1

Check bending stress on bolts :

Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.12 + 0.08 ) /2 x ( 17 x 11.27 ) ) = 9.886 < 0.8 T = 17.84

safe

Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.08 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 26.73 ) ) = 9.76 < 0.8 T safe

Check shear stress on bolts :
Qact / n = 6 / 6 = 1 ton < Ps = 7.11 ton

fb

safe

Thickness of head plate:

As before
Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:
Properties of the weld :
Assume size of weld S = 8 mm for web
and S flange = 10 mm
Awvl = 4 x 28 x 0.8 = 89.6 cm2
Ix = 2 (17 x 1 x 36.52 + 2 x 6 x 1.0 x (36 1.27 0.5)2
+ 2 x 0.8 x 283 / 12 + 2 x 0.8 x 28 x 182)
= 108301.4 cm4
24/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
17.0
Checks:
At point 1q1 = 0 t/cm2
f1 = 2000 x ( 36 + 1 ) / 108301.4 = 0.69 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2

6.0

At point 2q2 = 6 / 89.6 = 0.067 t/cm2

f2 = 2000 x ( 18 + 28 / 2 ) / 108301.4 = 0.59 t/cm2
R1 = ( 0.592 + 3x0.0672 ) = 0.6 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2 x 1.1

28.0

F )connection between2 rafter:

Mact = 13 mt , Qact = 0

RIDGE CAP .7MM

L 80X80X8

C 140X65X4

IPE 360

IPE 360

1
17.0
2.0

1.27
4.0

H = 2 + 36 + 36 + 2 = 76 cm
36.0

Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 763 / 12 = 621882.667 cm4

Y = H / 2 = 38 cm
X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2 = 2 + 1.27 + 4 + 4 = 11.27 cm
X2 = H / 2 X1 = 38 11.27 = 26.73 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 1300 x 38 / 621882.6 = 0.079 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 1300 x 26.73 / 621882.6 = 0.056 t/cm2

26.73
36.0

f1

8.0
4.0
1.27

2.0

11.27

fb

SEC 1-1

Check bending stress on bolts :

Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.079 + 0.056 ) /2 x ( 17 x 11.27 ) ) = 6.46 < 0.8 T = 17.84

safe
25/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame I
Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.056 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 26.73 ) ) = 6.36 < 0.8 T safe
Check shear stress on bolts :
Qact / n = 0 / 6 = 0 ton < Ps = 7.11 ton

safe

Thickness of head plate:

As before

Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:

Properties of the weld :
Assume size of weld S = 6 mm

17.0

Ix = 2 ( 17 x 0.6 x 36.32 + 2 x 6 x 0.6 x ( 36 1.27 0.3 )2

+ 2 x 0.6 x 283 / 12 + 2 x 0.6 x 28 x 182 )
= 70213.472 cm4
6.0
Checks:
No shear so only point 1 is critical
At point 1q1 = 0 t/cm2
f1 = 1300 x ( 36 + 0.6 ) / 70213.472 = 0.67 t/cm2 < 0.72 t/cm2

28.0

26/26 P.F.I
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Side and End grits
Both side and end girts are used to mount the side or end cladding, the difference between
the two is that the side girts are supported on the main column and the end girts are supported on the
end gables column.

Design Procedure:
1- The acting loads:
Dead Load:
- Own weight (10 20) kg/m.
- Weight of the steel sheets wc = (5-8) kg/m2 for single layer.

Live Load :
-

For case of maintenance there is a concentrated load of 100 kg

Wind load:
- In this case the wind load will be a main load so it will be a case A
- Wwind = ( (Ce + Ci ) x K x q ) x a
Ce = 0.8 , Ci = 0.3
K= 1.0 for h 10 m
= 1.1 for h 20 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo

2- The straining actions:

Wx = due to wind load only
Wx = Wwind
MX =

WX S 2
W S
, QX = X
8
2

Wy = due to dead loads and live load

Wy = wc x a + o.w.
Py = 100 kg
W S 2 PY S
W S PY
MY = Y
+
, QY = Y
+
8
4
2
2
1/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Where S is:
The span of side girts = spacing between main frames columns.
The span of end girts = spacing between end gables columns.
And a is the spacing between side or end girts.
3- Choice of Section:
fb =

Mx My
+
Fbcx
Sx
Sy

As the channels are non-compact or slender sections so Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

Assume Sx = 7 Sy for hot rolled C sec. or Sx = 6 Sy for cold formed sec.
M x + (6or 7)M y
cm3
1.4
And from the tables we choose the appropriate channel.

By solving the first equation we get the Sx required =

4- Checks
1- Bending stress:
My
M
fb = x +
Fbcx = 1.4t / cm 2
Sx
Sy
2- Shear stress:
Q
q x = x 0.35Fy
A web
Qy
qy =
0.35Fy
A flanges
2- Deflection "due to live load only":
act =

P S 3
span
<
48E IY
300

N.B.:
In case of not satisfied we increase the channel section or use tie rod to reduce S in the Y
direction, and so we decrease My and the deflection.
MY with 1 tie = 1 / 4 MY without tie rod
MY with 2 tie = 1 / 9 MY without tie rod
For case of using cold formed section we must use tie rod, to safeguard the deflection
N.B.
We have to check another case of wind, if wind is suction, Ce = 0.5
Wx = Wwind = 0.5 x K x q x a
W S2
MX = X
And Luact = span
8
2/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Rafter Splices
-

What is the splice?

It is a connection joining 2 parts of the rafter together.

Why and where we put the splice?

The splice is put to divide the rafter in parts so the max part length is less than 12 m
to be able to transport it to site.
It is preferred to be as near as possible from the point of zero moment.

Design straining actions :

As the rafter section is subjected to M , N , Q so the splice will be subjected to the
same straining actions.

N is small and can be neglected

Q is the actual shear force at the position of the splice. Qact = Y -WT . X of splice
M is the max moment capacity of the section. Mmax = Sx x Fbcx "at splice section"

Splice

WT

x tan?
< 12 m

< 12 m

x of splice
h

L / 2 > 12 m
span = L

X
Y

3/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
2 head plate splice. " using Pretensioned bolts "

M max

Q act

fb

2
tf
X1 e
p

f1
h

H
I

Pretension bolts: as before page 9 to 16 E.C.2

Arrange bolts
As the connection is designed on max moment, so it must be symmetric.
By using pretensioned bolts the head plate is fully effective, so Ix = B H3 / 12, Y = H / 2
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 6 Mmax / B H2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix

X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2
X2 = H / 2 X 1

Check bolts :
" Always N is neglected for bolts as it decreases tension on bolts"
Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( fb + f1 ) /2 x ( B x X1 ) )
0.8 T
Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( f1 + 0 ) /2 x ( B x X2 ) )

0.8 T

Check shear stress on bolts :

Qact / n Ps n is the total number of bolts.

4/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:
Properties of the weld :

b f -2S

Awhz = ( bf 2S ) S x 2 + 4 x 0.4 x bf x S
Awvl = 2 x 0.8 x h x S
Awtot = Awhz + Awvl

0.4 b f

Ix = 2 ( S x (0.8h)3 / 12 ) + 2 ( b f 2S ) S x (( h + S ) / 2)2
+ 4 ( 0.4 bf x S ) x ( h / 2 S / 2 tf )2

0.8h

Checks:
At point 1q1 = 0
f1 = N / Awtot + Mmax x ( h /2 + S ) / Ix

0.72 t/cm2

At point 2q2 = Qact / Awvl

f2 = N / Awtot + Mmax x ( 0.8 h / 2 ) / Ix
R2 = ( f22 + 3q22 ) 0.72 t/cm2 x 1.1
N.B.: if N is neglected put N=0

5/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Example:
It is required for the previous example:

a. Design and draw the rafter splice at 4m from column

Use M24 grade (10.9) bolts.
b. Design Side girts as : 1 Hot rolled C section
2 Cold formed C section

Solution:
a. Rafter splice:
At splice sec:Qact = Y -WT . X of splice = 6 0.5 x 4 = 4 ton
Mmax = Sx x Fbcx = 1.536 x 904 = 1388 cmt
Splice Type I
17.0
X1

1.27
4.0
8.0

fb
f1

X2

36 40

H = 36 + 2 + 2 = 40 cm
Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 403 / 12 = 90666.6 cm4
Y = H / 2 = 20 cm
X1 = 2 + tf + e + P /2 = 2 + 1.27 + 4 + 4 = 11.27 cm
X2 = H / 2 X1 = 20 11.27 = 8.73 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 1388 x 20 / 90666.66 = 0.3 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 1388 x 8.73 / 90666.66 = 0.13 t/cm2

Q act

Check bending stress on bolts :

Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.3 + 0.13 ) /2 x ( 17 x 11.27 ) ) = 20.6 > 0.8 T = 17.84

unsafe

Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.13 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 8.73 ) ) = 4.82 < 0.8 T safe

Try to safeguard the first row by putting 4 bolts / row ,
but B / 2 = 17 / 2 = 8.5 cm < tw / 2 + 2 e + p = 0.4 + 2 x 4 + 8 = 16.4 we cant use 4 bolts / row.
Increase H and move second row of bolts up the flange
6/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
fb

4.0

H = 36 + 8 + 8 = 52 cm

8.0
4.0
1.2 7
4.0

Ix = B H3 / 12 = 17 x 523 / 12 = 199194.66 cm4

Y = H / 2 = 26 cm
X1 = tf / 2 + 2e = 1.27 / 2 + 2 x 4 = 8.63 cm
X2 = H / 2 X1 = 26 8.63 = 17.37 cm
fb = Mmax Y / Ix = 1388 x 26 / 199194.66 = 0.181 t/cm2
f1 = Mmax X2 / Ix = 1388 x 17.37 / 199194.66= 0.12 t/cm2

52.0

f1

36.0

8.0

S T . P L 1 0m m

Check bolts :
Text,b1,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.181 + 0.12 ) /2 x ( 17 x 8.63 ) ) = 11 < 0.8 T = 17.84

safe

Text,b2,M = 1 / 2 ( ( 0.12 + 0 ) /2 x ( 17 x 17.37 ) ) = 8.8 < 0.8 T safe

Check shear on bolts :
Qact / n = 4 / 8 = 0.5 ton < Ps = 7.11 ton

safe

Thickness of head plate:

We take a strip of width b/2 = 17/2 = 8.5cm, we calculate the
moment from this strip Mp = force in bolt x e = 11 x 4 = 44cmt

44
MP
t
t
( P ) =
( P ) = Fb = 0.72Fy t/cm2
3
3
h t
8 t P
2
2
( 1 P)
(
)
12
12
so tp = 4.4 cm very big
fb =

Check on weld between head plate and rafter section:

Properties of the weld:
Assume size of weld S = 8 mm for web
and S flange and stiff = 12 mm
Awhz = 8 x 0.4 x 17 x 1.2 = 65.28 cm2
Awvl = 2 x 0.8 x 36 x 0.8 + 0.8 x 8 x 4 x 1.2 = 76.8 cm2
Awtot = Awhz + Awvl = 142.08 cm2

0.8x8

0.8x36

Ix = 2 (0.8 x (0.8 x 36)3 / 12) + 4 (0.4 x 17 x 1.2) x ((36 + 1.2) / 2)2

+ 4 (0.4 x 17 x 1.2) x ( 36 / 2 1.2 / 2 1.27)2
+ 4 (1.2 x (0.8 x 8)3 / 12) + 4 (0.8 x 8 x 1.2) x (36 / 2 + 0.5 x 8)2
= 37942.7 cm4
Checks:
At point 1-

0.4x17

q1 = 4 / 76.8 = 0.052 t/cm2

f1 = 1388 x (18 + 8) / 37942.7 = 0.95 t/cm2
R1 = (0.952 + 3x0.0522) = 0.96 t/cm2 > 0.72 t/cm2 x 1.1 try to increase stiff length and recheck
7/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
b. Design of Side girts
1- As hot rolled C section
1- The acting loads:
Dead Load:
- Own weight 20 kg/m.
- Weight of the steel sheets wc = 6 kg/m2 .

Live Load :
-

Py = 100 kg

Wind load:
- Wwind = ( (Ce + Ci) x K x q ) x a
Ce = 0.8, Ci = 0.3
K= 1.0 for h 10 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo

2- The straining actions:

Wx = due to wind load only

Wx = Wwind = 1.1 x 1 x 70 x 1.5 = 115.5 kg /m = 0.115 t/m'

WX S 2
0.115 62
= 0.517 mt
=
8
8
W S
0.115 6
QX = X
=
= 0.345 t
2
2
MX =

Wy = due to dead loads and live load

Wy = wc x a + o.w. = 6 x 1.5 + 20 = 29 kg/m = 0.029 t/m'
Py = 100 kg = 0.1 t
W S 2 PY S 0.029 62 0.1 6
=
= 0.28 mt
MY = Y
+
+
8
4
8
4
W S Py
0.029 6 0.1
=
= 0.137 t
Qy = y
+
+
2
2
2
2

3- Choice of Section:

fb =

Mx My
+
Fbcx
Sx
Sy

As the channels are non compact sections so Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

Assume Sx = 7 Sy for hot rolled sec.

8/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
Sx required =

M x + 7M y
1.4

= (51.7 + 7 x 28) / 1.4 = 176.9 cm3

Choose C 200
4- Check
1- Bending stress:
Luact = zero as the compression flange is fully laterally supported by the corrugated sheets.
Section is non-compact as we are using channels
Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2
M
M
51.7 28
fb = x + y =
+
= 1.3 < Fbcx = 1.4t / cm 2
Sx
Sy
191 27
2- Shear stress:
Q
0.345
qx = x =
= 0.02 0.35Fy
A web 20 0.85
Qy
0.137
=
= 0.008 0.35Fy
qy =
A flanges 2 7.5 1.15

3- Deflection "due to live load only":

act =

0.1 6003
P S 3
span 600
=
= 1.44cm <
=
= 2cm
48E IY
48 2100 148
300 300

9/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
2- As cold formed C section
1- The acting loads:
Dead Load:
- Own weight 10 kg/m.
- Weight of the steel sheets wc = 6 kg/m2.

Live Load :
-

Py = 100 kg

Wind load:
- Wwind = (( (Ce + Ci) x K x q ) x a
Ce = 0.8, Ci = 0.3
K= 1.0 for h 10 m
q = 70 kg/m2 in Cairo

2- The straining actions:

We will use 2 tie rods
Wx = due to wind load only
Wx = Wwind = 1.1 x 1 x 70 x 1.5 = 115.5 kg /m = 0.115 t/m'

WX S 2
0.115 62
= 0.517 mt
=
8
8
W S
0.115 6
QX = X
=
= 0.345 t
2
2
MX =

Wy = due to dead loads and live load

Wy = wc x a + o.w. = 6 x 1.5 + 10 = 19 kg/m = 0.019 t/m'
Py = 100 kg = 0.1 t
As there is 2 tie rods S = 6/3 = 2.0 m
W S 2 PY S 0.019 22 0.1 2
MY = Y
+
=
+
= 0.0595 mt
8
4
8
4
W S Py
0.019 2 0.1
Qy = y
+
=
+
= 0.07 t
2
2
2
2
3- Choice of Section:

fb =

Mx My
+
Fbcx
Sx
Sy

As the channels are non compact sections so Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

Assume Sx = 6 Sy for cold formed sec.
M x + 6 M y 51.7 + 6 5.95
Sx required =
=
= 62.5 cm3
1.4
1.4
Choose C180x75x4
10/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II
4- Checks:a- Code limits for slender sections.
For web subjected to moment
h = H 2r 2 t = 180 2(6)-2(4) = 160 mm
h 160
=
= 40 < 200 Ok
t
4
For Unstiff. flange
b = B r t = 75 6 4 = 65 mm
b 65
=
= 16.25 < 40 Ok
t
4
Section satisfies code limits.
b- Determine the effective parts of the section.
1- Flange
Unstiffened flange subjected to compression

= 1 , K = 0.43

b = 65 mm

b t Fy
65 4 2.4
= 0.87
=
44 K
44 0.43
0.15 0.05 0.87 0.15 0.05 1
= P
=
= 0.885 < 1
P2
0.87 2

P =

be =

b = 0.885 x 65 = 57.53 mm

2- Web
Stiff. Web subjected to moment

= -1 , K = 23.9

h = 160 mm
b t Fy
160 4 2.4
P =
=
= 0.29
44 K
44
23.9

P 0.15 0.05 0.29 0.15 0.05 1

= 2.25 > 1
=
P2
0.292

The web is fully effective.

As the flange is not fully effective so we must calculate the new
properties of the section.
IX eff = IX table IX of the reduced part = 606.25 0.747x0.4 (9-0.2)2 = 583.11 cm4
IY eff = IY table IY of the reduced part = 67.2 (

0.40.7473
0.747 2
) ) = 59cm4
+ 0.40.747(7.5 1.9
12
2

11/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Portal Frame II

a- Check bending stress.

Luact = zero as the compression flange is fully laterally supported by
the corrugated sheets.
Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

51.7
5.95
MX
MY
y +
x =
9+
(7.5 1.9) =1.36 < 1.4 t/cm2
IX
IY
583.11
59
b- Check shear stress.
fbc =

Very small shear force, shear stress will be safe

Q
0.345
qx = x =
= 0.05 0.35Fy
A web 18 0.4
Qy
0.07
qy =
=
= 0.012 0.35Fy
A flanges 2 7.5 0.4 0.7 0.4
c- Check deflection. "due to live load only"
act =

0.1 2003
P S 3
span 200
=
= 0.13cm <
=
= 0.66cm
48E IY
48 2100 59
300 300

12/12-P.F.II
2007-2008

Drawing and remarks

The following frame is key elevation:

1/12

Drawing and remarks

Detail A:

2/12

Drawing and remarks

3/12

Drawing and remarks

Detail B:

4/12

Drawing and remarks

5/12

Drawing and remarks

Detail C:

6/12

Drawing and remarks

7/12

Drawing and remarks

General remarks:
1) For fixed base:
Take effect of horizontal shear on the vertical weld
Shear on weld is bigger of:
Q=

Y M
+
2
d

Y
2

0.6 ( +

or

M
)
d

On 2 welds from one side

Normal on weld
N=X
q=

Q
2 sh

on 4 welds
f=

N
4 sh

"h" is the height of side plate.

- Y+ M
2 d

Y+ M
2 d

h
x

8/12

Drawing and remarks

2) Hinged base:

Hinged base
Gusset plate connected to the web of the I-beam

9/12

Drawing and remarks

Hinged base

10/12

Drawing and remarks

Fixed base:

Fixed base
Gusset plate connected to the side plate

11/12

Drawing and remarks

Fixed base

12/12

Stairs

1/7-Stairs

Stairs
Design of step:

Checkered plate

Steps are made of checkered plate

5-7

6/8 as shown
Assume o.w. of step = 20 kg / m\
L.L = 300 500 kg / m2

b = 30 cm

F.C. may be used

20
+ (F.C. + L.L.) b
1000

Beam at 1/2 floor level

(4.50)

wa 2
Calculate M =
8

wa
Q=
2

W=

Check f, q,

L
L=a
300

Width of stairs is about 1 1.5 m

(6.00)

(3.00)

Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2 (lip is small, so neglect L.T.B.)

Slope is 1:2 in most cases.

Design of stair beam: (Usually used as channel)

26.5

assume o.w. = 25 kg/m\

w = ...... t/m'

weight of step, handrail, (all steel structure)

ws = 70 kg/m2/hz proj
L.L = 300 500 kg / m2

1
2

F.C. = .. if any
W=

25
+ (70 + F.C. + L.L.) (a/2)
1000

Draw M, Q, (neglect normal)

wL2
M=
8

Q=

M1

M2

wL
2

Lu act = zero

2/7-Stairs

Stairs
Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2
dmin of channel

t
h-22

Check f, q,

2
3

26.5

L70*7

Design of connection using butt weld:

hw= hC

hweld

hchannel
cos

31

Calculate Ix
Check

M
y = ..< 0.7 ft (allowable of good butt weld subjected to tension due
Ix

to moment or due to tension). Look ECP page

Design of beam at 1/2 floor height: (Usually IPE)

R = Reaction of stair beam

RR

Calculate M, Q

If channel is flushed & checkered plate is

welded, so Lu act = zero
If we use grating Lu act = a

Design of connection between channel & I beam:

Force = Rt Rss, Rb as before

3/7-Stairs

Stairs
Solved example:

Beam B
b

It is required a complete design of stairs

1.25

(4.50)

3.0

(steps, beam of stairs with its connection &

beam at 1/2 floor height)
kg/m2

(6.00)

1.25

Given that: L.L. = 400 kg/m2, F.C. =150

(3.00)
d

a
1.0

Solution:

1.25

1.25

1.0

0.5

Design of step:
Assume o.w. of step = 20 kg/m\
Take shape of step as Z section (assume b = 30cm) (checkered plate 6/8)
WDL = 20 + 150 * 0.3 = 65 kg/m\
WLL = 400 * 0.3 = 120 kg/m\
WT = 120 + 65 = 185 kg/m\
M = 0.185 *

1.25 2
= 0.036 mt = 3.6 cmt
8

Q = 0.185 * (1.25/2) = 0.11 t

30 * 0.6 3
Ix =
(neglected) + 2
12

Lip = 5cm
t = 0.6

4.4

30

0.6 * 4.4 3

+ 0.6 * 4.4 * 2.5 2 = 41.52 cm4

12

Checks:
1. f =

3.6 * 4.7
= 0.41 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
41.52

(Lip is small, so we can neglect L.T.B)

2. q =

0.11
= 0.02 t/cm2 <<< 0.84 t/cm2
2 * 5 * 0.6

5
120 * 1.25 4
125
3. L.L. =
*10 3 = 0.04 cm <
*
= 0.42 cm
384 2100 * 41.52
300

4/7-Stairs

Stairs
Design of stair beam:
Assume o.w. = 25 kg/m\
Weight of other steel structure is 70 kg/m\
WDL = 25 + (70 + 150) * (1.25 / 2)
= 162.5 kg/m\
WLL = 400 * (1.25 / 2) = 250 kg/m\
Wtotal = 250 + 162.5 = 412.5 kg/m\

w = 0.41 t/m'

0.41 * 5.5 2
M=
= 1.56 mt
8
1.56

Q = 0.41 * (5.5 / 2) = 1.13 t

Assume Fbcx = 1.4 t/cm2

1.13

1.41

Sx = 156 / 1.4 = 111 cm3

Choose channel 160
Checks:
Lu act = zero

c
tf

So No L.T.B.

6.5 0.75 1.05

= 4.48 < 10.9
1.05

dw
= 11.6 / 0.75 = 15.5 < 82
tw
Therefore, the section is not slender (simply symmetric channel)
1. f = 156 / 116 = 1.34 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
2. q =

1.13
= 0.09 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
16 * 0.75

5 0.25 * 5.5 4
3. L.L. =
*
*10 6 = 1.53 cm < 550/300 = 1.83cm
384 2100 * 925

5/7-Stairs

Stairs

94
.
t
9
h-2 =
2
5cm

Min channel:

h 2t
= 9.94 (From drawing)
2

t 1cm

h = 22 cm

30cm
0

Choose channel minimum 220

26.5

L70*7

Design of connection butt weld:

M connection = 1.13 * 1.25 = 1.41 mt
hweld =

= 13.25
2

22
= 22.6 cm
cos13.25

22.6

t=1.25

t=0.9

0.9 * 22.6 3
22.6 1.25 2
) = 2888.4 cm4
Ix =
+ 2 *1.25 * (8 0.9) * (

12
2
2
f=

141
22.6
*
= 0.55 t/cm2 < 0.7*1.4 = 0.98 t/cm2
2888.4
2

Design of connection between channel & beam at 1/2 floor beam:

R = 1.13 t (use only one angle)
Rss =

*1.6 2 * 0.25 * 4 = 2.01t

4

tmin is smaller of 0.7 or 0.9 (tw of channel)

Rb = (0.8 * 3.6)*1.6*0.7 = 3.22 t
n = 1.13 / 2.01 = 0.56 use 2 bolts min

Chequerd
plate

L70*7

6/7-Stairs

Stairs
Design of beam B (at mid floor level)
Rtotal stair beam = 1.13 t, O.W. = 50 kg/m'

1.13 1.13
0.05

RLL stair beam = 0.25 * 5.5 / 2 = 0.69 t

(To be used in check of deflection)

1.25

Mconc = 2.385 x 2.25 1.13 x 1.25 0.05 x

1.00

1.13

1.25
0.5

1.00

1.25 /2= 3.83 mt

Q = 0.03 x 5 / 2 + 1.13 x 4 / 2 = 2.385 mt
Assume Fbcx = 0.64 Fy = 1.54 t/cm2
Sx = 383/ 1.54 = 259 cm3

choose IPE 220

Checks:

c
tf

11 0.59 2 * 1.2
= 8.7 < 10.9
0.92

dw
= 21.2 / 0.59 =35.9 < 82
tw

Assume using checkered plate welded to upper flange of beam

So Lu act = zero

Fbcx = 0.64 Fy

1. f = 383 / 252 = 1.52 t/cm2 < 1.54 t/cm2

2. q =

2.38
= 0.18 t/cm2 < 0.84 t/cm2
22 * 0.59
0.69

0.69
1.25

0.69
1.25

3.51
0.69

1.725
0.54 0.56

3. deflection due to live load only " RLL stair beam "

M = 3.51 * 2.5 0.56 * (0.25/2) 0.54 * (0.5 + 1.25/3) 1.725 * (0.25 +

1.25/2) 0.69 * (0.25 + 1.25 + 1/3) = 5.43 m3t

L.L. =

5.43 * 10 6
= 0.93 cm < 550/300 = 1.67cm
2100 * 2770

7/7-Stairs